Documentos de Académico
Documentos de Profesional
Documentos de Cultura
MO-8911365028 REV.1 Manual de Instrucciones
MO-8911365028 REV.1 Manual de Instrucciones
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
Cliente: EISA
1 09.05.2014 SHM/RC
0 31.03.2014 SHM
Fecha Nombre Firma Fecha Nombre Firma
Revisión
Elaborado Controlado/Autorizado
No. del proyecto: M-5301612-04 Número del documento: 891 136 508
INDICE:
1 Introducción ....................................................... 5
1.1 Sobre este manual de instrucciones .................................. 5
1.2 Uso del manual de instrucciones ........................................ 6
1.3 Garantía y responsabilidad .................................................. 7
1.4 Nombre y dirección del fabricante ...................................... 7
1.5 Derecho de autor ................................................................... 7
1.6 Utilización conforme a su destino ....................................... 8
1.7 Informe de daños................................................................... 8
1.8 Transporte .............................................................................. 9
1.9 Almacenaje ............................................................................. 9
1.9.1 Control de suministro ........................................................... 9
1.9.2 Embalaje ............................................................................ 10
1.9.3 Almacenamiento ................................................................ 11
2 Seguridad ......................................................... 14
2.1 Indicaciones de seguridad ................................................. 15
2.2 Pictogramas ......................................................................... 16
2.3 Dispositivos de seguridad.................................................. 17
2.4 Indicaciones de seguridad principales ............................. 18
2.4.1 Responsabilidades del usuario ......................................... 18
2.4.2 Responsabilidades generales del personal ...................... 20
2.4.3 Trabajar con/en instalaciones eléctricas ........................... 21
2.4.4 Hidráulica, neumática ........................................................ 22
2.4.5 Elevación y transporte de componentes ........................... 22
2.4.6 Máquinas y componentes utilizables en diferentes lugares23
2.4.7 Gas, polvo, vapor, humo ................................................... 24
2.4.8 Ruido .................................................................................. 24
2.4.9 Materiales de producción y materiales auxiliares ............. 24
2.4.10 Equipos radioeléctricos...................................................... 25
2.4.11 Sistema de extinción a gas................................................ 25
6 Mantenimiento ................................................. 53
6.1 Indicaciones de seguridad ................................................. 53
6.2 Introducción ......................................................................... 54
6.3 Límites de funcionamiento ................................................. 55
6.4 Modo de operar .................................................................... 55
6.5 Grupo Hidráulico ................................................................. 55
6.6 Reposición y cambio de aceite .......................................... 56
6.7 Vigilancias ............................................................................ 56
6.8 Anomalías ............................................................................. 57
6.8.1 Daños en el rodete ............................................................ 57
6.8.2 Eje de la turbina y acoplamientos ..................................... 57
6.9 Programa de mantenimiento e inspección ...................... 58
6.10 Revisión ................................................................................ 59
6.10.1 Revisiones parciales .......................................................... 59
6.10.2 Revisiones totales .............................................................. 59
6.11 Controles tras una revisión y parada prolongada........... 59
Abreviaturas
Abreviatura Descripción
1 Introducción
Este manual de instrucciones es parte de la documentación del proyecto
para la máquina/instalación suministrada por ANDRITZ HYDRO. Está
adaptada particularmente a ésta y se refiere exclusivamente al alcance de
suministro determinado por el contrato.
El manual de instrucciones contiene informaciones importantes sobre el
manejo correcto, seguro y apropiado de la máquina/instalación. La obser-
vancia de estas instrucciones ayuda a evitar situaciones de peligro conoci-
das hasta ahora, a reducir al mínimo los gastos de reparación y parada y
a optimizar la disponibilidad y la vida de servicio de la instalación.
Sin embargo no puede entrar en detalles de todas las medidas de precau-
ción, normas de seguridad e instrucciones para el funcionamiento de ins-
talaciones hidroeléctricas. Por esta razón sólo contiene de forma general
las indicaciones más importantes que se tienen que observar parti-
cularmente con esta máquina/instalación y no puede sustituir la
experiencia, formación e instrucción del personal de mantenimiento.
Referencias
cruzadas
Referencia: Un párrafo marcado de tal manera contiene una referencia a una carpeta
de la documentación del proyecto.
Pictogramas Para todos los pictogramas utilizados en este manual véase el párrafo 2.2
de este manual de instrucciones.
1.8 Transporte
AVISO
El transporte de la mercancía al lugar de destino sólo se debe efectuar
por transportistas experimentados. La responsabilidad la tienen exclusiva-
mente los transportistas. ANDRITZ HYDRO sólo puede actuar
asesorando y controlando.
Según el estándar internacional, se colocarán símbolos y marcas espe-
ciales en el embalaje. Es importante observarlos al cargar, descargar y
trasladar.
Para levantar las cajas, jaulas y partes abiertas, éstas sólo se colgarán o
levantarán en los puntos marcados. Véase también el párrafo 2.4.5
Elevación y transporte de componentes en el capítulo Seguridad.
1.9 Almacenaje
AVISO
Las cajas sólo se pueden abrir según acuerdo previo con ANDRITZ
HYDRO.
Información
Durante la inspección hay que prestar atención a que embalajes
especiales y/o recubrimientos de protección no estén deteriorados.
1.9.2 Embalaje
Información
Los embalajes cerrados no se deben abrir en el camino o durante la
maniobra. Las autoridades de aduana y los transportistas tienen que ser
informados a tiempo de la llegada próxima de tales envíos. Con los adua-
neros se debería convenir la comprobación en el lugar de destino.
Abrir el embalaje El embalaje sólo se puede abrir según acuerdo previo con ANDRITZ
HYDRO.
Al abrir el embalaje hay que prestar atención a marcas como por ejemplo
“arriba” o “este lado arriba“ y a instrucciones de advertencia y seguridad
en cajas o embalajes.
Para evitar deterioros hay que abrir siempre con cuidado las cajas, jaulas
y embalajes:
1. Quitar todos los clavos y tornillos de la tapa o de las tablas cober-
toras y quitar la tapa o las tablas cobertoras.
2. Quitar todos los apoyos y traviesas, marcos internos y fijaciones
para poder desembalar las partes sin deterioro o riesgo.
3. No quitar los recubrimientos protectores al desembalar sino sólo
poco antes del montaje de las partes.
Información
Para eliminar los embalajes de modo adecuado para el medio ambiente
se tienen que observar las instrucciones correspondientes de eliminación.
Las hojas de polietileno se deberían quitar cuidadosamente para poder
utilizarlas más tarde para recubrir las piezas.
1.9.3 Almacenamiento
AVISO
Piezas almacenadas de modo incorrecto pueden sufrir incluso después de
poco tiempo daños a causa de exposiciones atmosféricas que exigen un
tratamiento posterior.
Es importante observar las indicaciones de los fabricantes sobre el alma-
cenamiento de los componentes.
(*) Selección y diseño de los símbolos de peligro según ADR, norma para
materiales peligrosos, etc.
AVISO
Para evitar corrosión ligera en las piezas de acero inoxidable, éstas se
tienen que almacenar siempre por separado de las piezas de acero al
carbono.
Siempre que sea posible se deben dejar las piezas en su embalaje
original.
Al almacenamiento hay que considerar siempre la carga máxima
admisible del suelo.
Hay que tener cuidado especial al apilar cajas de madera y jaulas.
Almacenaje al aire Las partes se tienen que apoyar de modo seguro a unos 15 – 20 cm
libre sobre el suelo en vigas de madera cubiertas de plástico.
Las partes se tienen que almacenar de tal modo que el agua pluvial
pueda desaguar adecuadamente (tal vez en posición oblicua).
Cuando se utilizan coberturas hay que proveer una buena aireación.
Coberturas de madera en bridas o similar tienen que ser quitadas
(para evitar la formación de herrumbre).
Debe ser posible el buen acceso a las partes almacenadas desde
todos los lados.
Cuando esté indicado, las partes se deben proteger contra agentes
mecánicos externos.
En almacenes Las partes se tienen que apoyar de modo seguro a unos 15 – 20 cm
sobre el suelo en vigas de madera cubiertas de plástico.
Es conveniente almacenar las partes más pequeñas y sobre todo a
granel en estanterías de almacenaje.
Hay que atenerse a las instrucciones de las autoridades de protección
contra incendios.
Hay que proveer una buena aireación y luz.
Hay que tener en cuenta que los embalajes no puedan ser destruidos
por insectos o roedores.
La vida útil de partes de goma puede ser deteriorada por muchos motivos
y por esta razón se debe garantizar un almacenamiento correcto. Piezas
de goma adecuadamente tratadas conservan sus propiedades durante
varios años sin alteraciones.
Los avisos siguientes aplican para el almacenamiento de partes de goma
técnicas y es imprescindible observarlas.
AVISO
Debido al efecto de ozono, radiación ultravioleta y temperaturas diferen-
tes, las partes de goma almacenadas de forma inadecuada sufren
después de poco tiempo daños que provocan su fractura frágil y que
imposibilitan su utilización ulterior.
2 Seguridad
El capítulo Seguridad comprende indicaciones generales de seguridad
que se tienen que considerar desde el principio al trabajar con la
máquina/instalación.
Además hay indicaciones adicionales de seguridad para diferentes acti-
vidades en los capítulos del manual de instrucciones. Éstas se resaltan
del texto por indicaciones especiales de advertencia.
Las indicaciones de seguridad para los componentes no fabricados por
ANDRITZ HYDRO estarán en las descripciones de los fabricantes de los
componentes y se deben respetar igualmente.
El incumplimiento de las indicaciones de seguridad puede conllevar
peligro para la vida y la salud de personas, daños ambientales y/o a daños
materiales.
ANDRITZ HYDRO presupone que el usuario asegura lo siguiente:
El usuario ha elaborado un amplio programa general de seguridad.
Cada persona que trabaja con o en las proximidades de la máqui-
na/instalación fue instruida en el trabajo con máquinas/instalaciones de
esta forma constructiva y el desarrollo de los procedimientos
correspondientes.
PELIGRO
Esta designación advierte contra un peligro inmediato para la vida
y la salud de personas.
El incumplimiento de estas indicaciones lleva a la muerte o a heridas
graves y a amplios daños materiales.
ADVERTENCIA
Esta designación advierte contra un peligro amenazador para la vida
y la salud de personas.
El incumplimiento de estas indicaciones puede llevar a la muerte o a
heridas graves y a amplios daños materiales.
ATENCIÓN
Esta designación advierte contra un peligro amenazador para la
salud de personas.
El incumplimiento de estas indicaciones puede llevar a heridas medias o
leves y a daños ambientales y materiales.
AVISO
Esta designación advierte contra una situación peligrosa.
El incumplimiento de estas indicaciones puede llevar a daños materiales.
Información
Esta designación comprende una información útil.
La consideración de esta información facilita y ayuda una ejecución
correcta y profesional de la actividad descrita.
2.2 Pictogramas
Prohibición
(Prohibition)
Advertencia
(Warning)
Obligación
(Mandatory)
Equipo de El equipo de protección personal se tiene que utilizar y llevar según las
protección general instrucciones correspondientes del país o del usuario de la planta.
El uso de zapatos de seguridad debería ser obligatorio en todo el terreno
de fábrica.
Instrucciones de Además del manual de instrucciones hay que observar y ordenar los
trabajo reglamentos vigentes nacionales y otros referente a la seguridad de
trabajo y la protección del medio ambiente.
2.4.8 Ruido
3 Descripción técnica
La central consta de 3 grupos pelton verticales de seis inyectores cada
uno. Cada grupo tiene una válvula de guarda del tipo mariposa biplana.
3.2.1 Turbina
3.2.1.2 Rodete
3.2.1.4 Inyectores
3.2.1.5 Deflector
3.2.1.7 Ejes
3.2.1.8 Materiales
ADVERTENCIA
Durante las maniobras de la válvula no se debe permanecer en las
cercanías de ésta
Se pueden ocasionar graves daños personales si se desobedece esta
advertencia
Solamente en caso de ser estrictamente necesario, el personal cualificado
se puede acercar a la válvula en funcionamiento
3.2.2.1 Descripción
Cuerpo
El cuerpo es de una pieza de construcción soldada con elementos de
chapa de acero y acero moldeado y va provisto de patas para su apoyo.
El asiento de estanqueidad es de acero inoxidable. Los soportes de los
gorrones de la lenteja van provistos de cojinetes autolubricados.
Lenteja
En construcción soldada de chapa de acero o fundido en acero moldeado.
El eje o semiejes de la válvula serán forjados en acero inoxidable. El eje
irá fijado a la lenteja por medio de pasadores de acero inoxidable
ampliamente dimensionados para que soporten el par máximo que se
pueda generar en la válvula.
Cojinetes
Están previstos para soportar los esfuerzos máximos y son
autolubricados. Llevan dispositivos de estanqueidad y no necesitan
engrase.
Servomotor
La apertura de la válvula se efectúa mediante un servomotor de simple
efecto accionado por el aceite a presión del grupo hidráulico de
regulación. Su apoyo es sobre un eje, lo que permite la oscilación de todo
el servomotor.
Lleva dispositivo de estrangulación regulable para regular la velocidad de
cierre.
By-pass
Con el fin de permitir el llenado de la turbina y poder abrir la válvula de
protección, se ha instalado una línea de by-pass que incluye una válvula
automática que permite el equilibrado de presiones a ambos lados, antes
de que el cuerpo giratorio inicie el movimiento.
Se trata de una válvula de DN150, con cierre por medio de un muelle y
apertura por aceite a presión del equipo de regulación a través de válvulas
de mando eléctricas.
Válvulas proporcionales
El mando de los servomotores de los inyectores 2170/1..6 está
encomendado directamente a las válvulas proporcionales (convertidor
electrohidráulico) Y2100/1..6.
a) En la apertura:
b) En el cierre:
a) En la apertura:
b) En el cierre:
Inyector de frenado:
Este inyector sirve para frenar el rodete mediante un contrachorro. En la
parada, se abre la válvula 3920 mediante la electroválvulas Y3921, dando
paso al agua hasta el inyector de frenado, manteniéndolo abierto hasta
bajar la velocidad al 50%..
AVISO
Tener en cuenta las holguras existentes entre las piezas fijas y
móviles de turbina y generador para no realizar levantamientos
superiores a las mismas. Las holguras existentes están indicadas en
los planos.
Antes de proceder a realizar el levantamiento del rotor se procederá a
colocar comparadores de medición en el eje, controlando de esta forma la
elevación máxima permisible.
La inobservancia de estas indicaciones puede llevar a daños materiales.
AVISO
Esta designación advierte contra una situación peligrosa.
El incumplimiento de estas indicaciones puede llevar a daños materiales.
3.2.8 Generador
PELIGRO
Riesgo eléctrico
Peligro de muerte
Se deben leer detenidamente las instrucciones de seguridad del
fabricante del alternador y seguir rigurosamente dichas instrucciones.
Fabricante: INDAR
Ver dossier adjunto
036
891104938 Junta del eje
042
891095188 Conjunto inyector
042
891098885 Accionamiento deflectores
050
891097224 Plataforma carcasa
140
891100007 Conjunto tobera de frenado
140
891107503 Válvula de aguja DN150 - Tobera de frenado
140
891107504 Válvula manual DN150 - Tobera de frenado
140
891107540 Conjunto tubería tobera de frenado
180
891110151 Prueba de presión repartidor. Detalles hormigonado
180
891099748 Martinete para pretensado
180
891110748 Dispositivo de centraje y alineación
600
MT-11094-PC 1-2- Válvula de mariposa DN1400 PN40
710
891096864 Tubería anular (3 hojas)
5 Funcionamiento
5.1 Esquemas de los Reguladores de Velocidad TC-1703 y
Tensión THYNE 1
φ
TH Y N E 1
J´ XCT-25
XCT-26
k´
φ
φ
φ
φ
C.H. MONTE LIRIO
GRUPO
LISTA DE APARATOS COMPROBADO
Glual:
Grupo Contener aceite de regulación y ser soporte de
1080 Depósito aceite regulación. Deposito especial C - 500 1 5
Hidráulico. aparatos.
Its.
GARMA:
Interruptor de nivel Grupo Indicar eléctricamente nivel aceite depósito 1080
S1081/1 Indicador de nivel 1 5
IMN43650 Ref. L-100mm Hidráulico. MUY BAJO - DISPARO NORMAL
PVC1
GARMA:
Interruptor de nivel Grupo Indicar eléctricamente nivel aceite depósito 1080
S1081/2 Indicador de nivel 1 5
IMN43650 Ref. Hidráulico. BAJO - ALARMA.
L-470mm PVC1
M.P.:
Indicador de nivel con
Grupo Indicar visualmente nivel de aceite en depósito
1090 Indicador de nivel termometro LV A30T 1 5
Hidráulico. 1080.
APM12S01
PISTER: Grupo
1091 Válvula manual 1 5 Aislar el acumulador 1088
Llave de paso BKH-G-1´´ Hidráulico.
M.P.:
Grupo Permitir llenado de aceite y ventilación del
1092 Tapón de llenado con filtro de aire Filtro de aire ( ITEM-1092 ) 1 5
Hidráulico. depósito 1080.
SCS100FP10A
WIKA:
1126 Manometro de Grupo Indicar visualmente presión aceite en circuito de
P1126 Manómetro con glicerina. 1 5
glicerina de B/F. 0-250 bar Hidráulico. regulación.
y Ø> 63
PARKER:
F1126/1-Indicar eléctricamente presión aceite
Presostato electrónico MUY BAJA (DISPARO y BLOQUEO BOMBAS).
Grupo
F1126/1/2 Presostato doble SCPSD-250-14-15 + 1 5
Hidráulico. F1126/2 –Indicar eléctricamente presión BAJA
Cable de conexión M12x1
(ALARMA - ARRANQUE BOMBA DE RESERVA)
acodado SCK-400-02-55
PARKER:
F1126/8- Mandar la electroválvula Y1002 para
Presostato electrónico mantener la presión del sistema NORMAL.
Grupo
F1126/8/9 Presostato doble SCPSD-250-14-15 + 1 5
Hidráulico. F1126/9 - Indicar eléctricamente presión aceite
Cable de conexión M12x1
MUY ALTA: DISPARO
acodado SCK-400-02-55
GLUAL: Grupo
2233 Diafragma regulable. 1 5 Regular velocidad de apertura del deflector.
En placa intermedia Hidráulico
PARKER:
Presión MUY BAJA y MUY ALTA tras válvula
Presostato electrónico Grupo
F3914/1/9 Presostato doble 1 5 reductora de circuito de frenado para ver posibles
SCPSD-100-14-15 Hidráulico.
fallos de ésta.
PARKER: Grupo
Y3915 Electroválvula. 1 5 Accionar eléctricamente los frenos.
D1VW020BNJW Hidráulico
PARKER:
Grupo Indicar eléctricamente presión en frenos
F3916 Presostato Presostato electrónico 1 5
Hidráulico (FRENOS APLICADOS/DESAPLICADOS)
SCPSD-100-14-15
PARKER: Grupo Accionar eléctricamente la válvula del Inyector de
Y3921 Electroválvula. 1 5
D1VW020BNJW Hidráulico frenado
Pn = 5 bar
Qn = 2000 l/min
Panel agua
1819/1 Filtro autolimpiante < 300 μ 1 5 Filtrar agua de refrigeración
refrigeración
VX150
SITE
J3H55
M1821 Accionamiento eléctrico Válvula 1821 Válvula 1821 1 5 Accionar la válvula motorizada 1821
TENSION 125V CC
J3H55 Detectar eléctricamente la válvula motorizada
S1821/1/2 Caja con finales de carrera. Válvula 1821 1 5
1821 en posición abierta/cerrada
1148121013 Panel agua
1830 Válvula manual 1 5 Aislar manómetro P1830
LEGRIS refrigeración
642PN2023
RANGO 0-25 BAR Panel agua Indicar visualmente presión existente en el
P1830 Manómetro 1 5
TENSION 24V DC refrigeración circuito de refrigeración.
IFM
IFM
1148122027
Aislar manualmente el circuito de agua de
Panel agua
2063 Válvula de bola manual. LEGRIS 1 5 refrigeración del intercambiador de calor con
refrigeración
aceite del grupo oleohidráulico.
KSB- ITUR:
M1860 Motor eléctrico trifásico. Foso turbina 1 5 Accionar bomba 1860. PC
KRTK 100-401/354UGH-S
KSB- ITUR:
Bombear el agua de refrigeración desde la salida
1861 Bomba de agua refrigeración KRTK 100-401/504UGH-S Foso turbina 1 5 PC
de la turbina.
KSB- ITUR:
M1861 Motor eléctrico trifásico. Foso turbina 1 5 Accionar bomba 1861. PC
KRTK 100-401/354UGH-S
DISIBEINT
DNCB 901 45K Detectar eléctricamente nivel BAJO de agua en
B1865/2 Detector de nivel Foso turbina 1 5 PC
Uaux 24 Vcc la salida de la turbina. ALARMA
TUBERÍA FORZADA
VÁLVULA DE BOLA
ROSCADA G 1/2" H-H Tubería Aislar manualmente manómetros P2017, B2017 y
2017 Válvula manual 1 5 PC
TIPO: KH-R 1/2"-NW13 Forzada F2017 para su sustitución o reparación.
REF.WALPRO 029296
RELECO
C7A20 DC24
K2017 Rele auxiliar Uaux 24 Vcc Relé auxiliar F2017
Base S7C
VÁLVULA DE BOLA
ROSCADA G 1/2" H-H Tubería Aislar manualmente manómetros P2018 y F2018
2018 Válvula manual 1 5 PC
TIPO: KH-R 1/2"-NW13 Forzada para su sustitución o reparación.
REF.WALPRO 029296
WIKA
Ф 63 Tubería Indicar visualmente la presión aguas abajo de la
P2018 Manómetro. 1 5 PC
Conexión G ¼” M Forzada válvula mariposa.
Escala 0 – 50 bar
Base S7C
Válvula manual. Tubería
2019/2 1 5 Vaciar la tubería forzada PC
(Suministrada e instalada por el cliente) Forzada
Servomotor
2025 Diafragma (incluido en servomotor 2012) 1 5 Regular velocidad de cierre válvula by pass.
2012
Diafragma (incluido en servomotor Servomotor.
2035 1 5 Regular velocidad de cierre válvula mariposa.
2060). 2070
TOBERA DE FRENADO
DN150 PN40 Tubería Aislar manualmente el circuito de agua de
3910 Válvula manual 1 5 PC
IMS forzada frenado
TURBINA
Inyectores / Permitir medir la presión en las cámaras de
1093 Tomas de presión MINIMESS. 14 70
Deflector apertura y cierre de Inyectores y deflector
Carrete válvula
2019/1 Válvula manual. 1 5 Vaciar anillo de distribución
de guarda
TEMPOSONIC MTS
RHM 200m D 60 1 A 11 Inyector
+ 201542
+ Conector: Carrera: Transmitir al regulador de turbina TC-1703 la
B2154/1../6 Transmisor de posición. 6 30
posición del inyector
STCO9131D Pando 150 mm
ALTERNADOR PC
Entrada agua
refrigeración Ajustar manualmente el caudal de agua de
2062 Válvula regulable 1 5
estator refrigeración en el estator del generador
generador
ARTECHE :
1000/1/1/1 10VA cl5p20
Transformadores de corriente de las In: 0 Out: 0 Medida de la corriente en las 3 fases del
CT1..3 Generador 3 15
fases U-V-W In: 1000A Out: 1A generador.
RA0-1U
RA3-43U HERAUS : 20
4
Sonda PT-100 SLOT 4330 Generador Medir temperatura del bobinado fase U
RA6-85U -20ºC +180ºC
RA9-127U
RA2-29V
HERAUS :
RA5-71V SLOT 4330 4 20
Sonda PT-100 -20ºC +180ºC Generador Medir temperatura del bobinado fase V
RA8-113V
RA11-155V
RA10-141W
R0FE01
HERAUS :
R0FE02 SLOT 4330 4 20
Sonda PT-100 -20ºC +180ºC Generador Medir temperatura del hierro
R0FE03
R0FE04
SEX01/02 NOTIFIER :
Sensor de incendio Generador 2 10 Detectar incendio en el generador Zona A
TMP 2 -40ºC +110ºC
SEX03/04 NOTIFIER :
Sensor de incendio Generador 2 10 Detectar incendio en el generador Zona B
TMP 2 -40ºC +110ºC
RC1AC01 CONATEC:
Sensor de temperatura
RC2AC01 Sonda PT-100 Generador 2 10 Medir temperatura del aire frío
Pt100 platino Din 3 hilos
-20ºC +180ºC
RC1AH01 CONATEC:
Sensor de temperatura
RC2AH01 Sonda PT-100 Pt100 platino Din 3 hilos Generador 2 10 Medir temperatura del aire caliente
-20ºC +180ºC
SFR01
SFR03 TELEMECANIQUE :
Final de carrera Frenos 4 20 Detectar frenos desaplicados/
SFR05 XCK-M102
SFR07
CIME: Grupo
5H Motor trifásico 1 5 Accionar bomba inyección
CV 5,5 -480-B35 inyección
HYDAC Grupo
11H Válvula manual de 3 vías, doble circuito 1 5 Seleccionar filtro de presión en servicio.
KHB3K-G3/8-1112 inyección
13.1H DUPLOMATIC Grupo Impedir retorno del aceite de inyección por los
Válvulas antiretorno 2 10
13.2H VD3W1 inyección filtros
Sistema de
6 Válvula reguladora FPSU-1/4” 1 5 Regular el caudal de aceite.
elevación
CV
CV
CV
CV
CPA
CPB
M1860
CPB
M1861
CPB
C.H. MONTE LIRIO
A JPC 11.05.2012 C E
CLIENTE
GENERADORA PANDO Y MONTE LIRIO
891.096.542
Valor Valor
Ref. Designación Unidad
teórico efectivo
GRUPO HIDRAULICO
Acumulador hidroneumático.
1088
Presión de hinchado (N2) Po 21 bar.
Resistencia de caldeo
Tensión 3x480 V ca.
R1181
Intensidad 1,4 A
Potencia 1 KW
Regulable
2014 Diafragma tiempo de apertura válvula by pass. l/min.
16
Regulable
2033 Diafragma tiempo de apertura válvula de guarda. l/min.
29
Regulable
s
2106/1..6 Diafragma tiempo de apertura de los inyectores. 60
l/min
Válvula antirretorno en paralelo xx
Regulable
s
2107/1..6 Diafragma tiempo de cierre de los inyectores 30
l/min
Válvula antirretorno en paralelo. xx
Regulable
2233 Diafragma tiempo de apertura deflector l/min
10
INYECTORES
Regulables
2104/1..6 Diafragmas HAWE (tiempo de cierre inyectores) s
30
Inyectores:
Tiempo de apertura 60
2170/1..6 s
Tiempo de cierre total 100 – 0% 30
DEFLECTOR
Diafragmas fijo de cierre de deflector <2 s
2204
(tiempo de cierre) 6 mm
Deflector:
Tiempo de apertura 15
2253 s
Tiempo de cierre total 100 – 0% <2
VALV. GUARDA
Válvula de guarda:
Tiempo de apertura 80 s
2060
Tiempo de cierre 180 s
180 s
2035 Diafragma tiempo de cierre válvula de guarda.
2,86 mm.
BYPPASS
Válvula by pass:
2012 Tiempo de apertura 10 seg.
Tiempo de cierre 10 seg.
10 s
2025 Diafragma tiempo de cierre válvula by pass.
2,5 mm
10 S
2025 Diafragma tiempo de cierre válvula by pass.
2,5 mm
Valor Valor
Ref. Designación Unidad
teórico efectivo
GENERADOR
1000/1-1-1 A
Trafo intensidad fase V2 – Relación
10 VA cl 5P20
CT2 Secundario 1
10 VA cl 5P20
Secundario 2
10 VA cl 5P20
1000/1-1-1 A
Trafo intensidad fase W2 – Relación
10 VA cl 5P20
CT3 Secundario 1
10 VA cl 5P20
Secundario 2
10 VA cl 5P20
RA0
Sonda Pt100 bobinado estator fase U
RA3
Alarma 130 ºC
RA6 Disparo 155
RA9
RA2
Sonda Pt100 bobinado estator fase V
RA5
Alarma 130 ºC
RA8 Disparo 155
RA11
RA1
Sonda Pt100 bobinado estator fase W
RA4
Alarma 130 ºC
RA7 Disparo 155
RA10
R0FE01
Sonda Pt100 hierro estator
R0FE02
Alarma 130 ºC
R0FE03 Disparo 155
R0FE04
SEX01/02
Sensor de incendio 107 ºC
SEX03/04
FSC1WC01
Caudalímetro refrigerante estator 1 750 l/min
FSC2WC01
FSC1WC02
Caudalímetro refrigerante estator 2 750 l/min
FSC2WC02
SC1FUG01
Detector fugas en refrigerantes estator
SC2FUG01
Detector de sobrevelocidad
Alarma
ES93R 544 rpm
Disparo
680
Máximo
816
Resistencia de calefacción
Tensión 3x480 V ca.
RCAL01
Intensidad 1,2 A
Potencia 1 kW
Resistencia de calefacción
Tensión 3x480 V ca.
RCAL02
Intensidad 1,2 A
Potencia 1 kW
Resistencia de calefacción
Tensión 3x480 V ca.
RCAL03
Intensidad 1,2 A
Potencia 1 kW
Resistencia de calefacción
Tensión 3x480 V ca.
RCAL04
Intensidad 1,2 A
Potencia 1 kW
PAS 0000
uni ºbAr
diS ACT
COMUNES Ana 4-20 mA
FROM 0
TO 150
RES No
Err No
SUN
dPP 000.0
PAS 0000
uni ºbAr
diS ACT
COMUNES Ana 4-20 mA
FROM 0
TO 150
RES No
Err No
SUN
dPP 000.0
F3914/9 SP1 10
rSP1 7,5
Cont noPn
Func Hys
dSP1 0
drS1 0
F3914/1 SP2 8
rSP2 6
Cont noPn
Func Hys
dSP1 0
drS1 0
PAS 0000
uni ºbAr
diS ACT
COMUNES Ana 4-20 mA
FROM 0
TO 20
RES No
Err No
SUN
dPP 000.0
Uni Bar
HI
LO
COMUNES dS1 1
dR1 1
dS2 1
dR2 1
P-n PnP
dAP 60
d1S D2
0 Orden de mando
00 Final de secuencia
X Comprobación de señalizaciones o condicionantes
1 Denominación de secuencia
B 2153/1 Referencia de aparatos
B D F
MODIFICACIONES
A JCP 19-12-11 C E
REF.
CC.HH. PANDO / 5 TURBINAS PELTON VERTICALES DIBUJADO JCP 27-10-11
MONTE LIRIO
SECUENCIAS DE ARRANQUE Y COMPROBADO
GRUPO
PARADA
200 APROBADO
CLIENTE Nº MÁQUINA
UTE PANDO Y MONTE LIRIO / EISA
891.096.543
K CONDICIONES INICIALES DE ARRANQUE
0 Conectar sincronizador
0 GRUPO EN CARGA
NOTA 3: Periódicamente y siempre que se detecte la señal de filtros de agua de refrigeración colmatados
F1815 abrir la válvula de descarga de lodos de agua de refrigeración M1821.
X Velocidad 0% 62K1+T
00 GRUPO PARADO
NOTA 5 – Se recomienda que las resistencias de caldeo se apaguen cuando los devanados alcancen 7 ºK
por encima de la temperatura ambiente. Disponen de termostato SOTER01, para su control en el interior
del generador
X Disparo excitación
0 Desconectar excitación
0 Desconectar excitación
VÁLVULA DE BY-PASS
B2012/1 VÁLVULA CERRADA SECUENCIAS
B2012/9 VÁLVULA ABIERTA SECUENCIAS
VÁLVULA DE GUARDA
F2018 PRESIONES EQUILIBRADAS SECUENCIAS
F2017 MEDIDA PRESIÓN TUBERÍA FORZADA NORMAL - CONDICIÓN
SECUENCIA ARRANQUE
BAJA - PARADA
K2017 PRESIÓN TUBERÍA FORZADA NORMAL - CONDICIÓN
SECUENCIA ARRANQUE
BAJA - PARADA
B2000/1 VÁLVULA DE GUARDA CERRADA SECUENCIAS
B2000/5 VÁLVULA DE GUARDA DESBLOQUEADA CONDICIÓN SECUENCIA DE
MECANICAMENTE ARRANQUE
B2000/9 VÁLVULA DE GUARDA ABIERTA SECUENCIAS
PERDIDA DE POSICIÓN ABIERTA – CIERRE PARADA MECÁNICA
INTEMPESTIVO
GENERADOR
S0TER01 TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE EN EL ESTATOR SECUENCIAS / CONTROL
RESISTENCIAS DE CALDEO
RA 0…11 SONDAS Pt100 BOBINADO ESTATOR MEDIDA Y LÓGICAS EN PLC
CONTROL
REGULADOR DE TENSIÓN
K83A DISPARO EXCITACIÓN PARADA ELECTRICA
K90A EXCITACIÓN CONECTADA SECUENCIAS
K90B EXCITACIÓN DESCONECTADA SECUENCIAS
K90C CANAL AUTOMÁTICO CONDICIÓN INICIAL
K90D CANAL MANUAL ALARMA
K90E EXCITACIÓN LISTA PARA ARRANQUE CONDICIÓN INICIAL
K90F REGULACIÓN VAR SECUENCIAS
K90G REGUALCIÓN COS PHI SECUENCIAS
K91A ALARMA EXCITACIÓN ALARMA
K91E DISPARO INTERRUPTOR GENERADOR PARADA ELECTRICA
75FA FALTA TENSIÓN AUXILIAR MANDO PARADA ELECTRICA
EXCITACIÓN
75FBG FALTA TENSIÓN AUXILIAR SEÑALIZACIÓN ALARMA
EXCITACIÓN
F80 MAGNETOTÉRMICO ALIMENTACIÓN PARADA ELECTRICA
EXCITACIÓN DISPARADO
A80-A11 LIMITACIÓN EXCITACIÓN ACTIVADA ALARMA
A80-A14 POTENCIA REACTIVA MÍNIMA SECUENCIAAS
A80-A15 REGULADOR DE TENSIÓN EN LOCAL ALARMA
REGULADOR DE TURBINA
9F1 MAGNETOTERMICO ALIMENTACIÓN 125 PARADA MECÁNICA
VCC, ABIERTO
9F4 MAGNETOTERMICO ALIMENTACIÓN 125 ALARMA
VCC ENTRADAS REGULADOR TURBINA
ABIERTO
9K4 FALLO FUENTE 1 ALIMENTACIÓN 24 VCC ALARMA
9K6 FALLO FUENTE 2 ALIMENTACIÓN 24 VCC ALARMA
9K4+9K6 FALLO FUENTES 1 Y 2 ALIMENTACIÓN 24 PARADA MECÁNICA
VCC
12F5 MAGNETOTERMICO ALIMENTACIÓN 120 ALARMA
VCA, ILUMINIACIÓN ARMARIO ABIERTO
12F8 MAGNETOTERMICO ALIMENTACIÓN 120 ALARMA
VCA CALEFACCIÓN ARMARIO, ABIERTO
20K3 FALLO WATCH DOG PARADA MECÁNICA
22K5 FALLO FUENTE BUS 1 PARADA MECÁNICA
50K5 FALLO FUENTE BUS 2 PARADA MECÁNICA
60K1 DISPARO GENERAL REGULADOR PARADA MECÁNICA
60K2 ALARMA GENERAL REGULADOR ALARMA
60K3 TC OK CONDICIONES INICIALES/
ALARMA
60K4 TC LISTO PARA ARRANQUE CONDICIONES INICIALES/
ALARMA
60K5 REGULADORES EN LOCAL ALARMA
60K6 REGULADORES EN REMOTO CONDICIONES INICIALES
61K1 REG.APERTURA CONECTADO SECUENCIAS
61K2 REG.POTENCIA CONECTADO SECUENCIAS
61K5 REG NIVEL CONECTADO SECUENCIAS
62K1 VELOCIDAD < 2% (GRUPO PARADO) SECUENCIAS
62K2 VELOCIDAD < 25% SECUENCIAS
62K3 VELOCIDAD >95% SECUENCIAS
62K4 VELOCIDAD >110% PARADA MECÁNICA
62K5 DEFLECTOR CERRADO SECUENCIAS
62K6 DEFLECTOR ABIERTO SECUENCIAS
62K7 CARGA MÍNIMA SECUENCIAS
62K8 INYECTORES CERRADOS SECUENCIAS
63K5 VELOCIDAD < 50% SECUENCIAS
POTENCIA
EQUIPO FUNCIÓN KW
REGULADORES DE TURBINA/TENSIÓN
TURBINA
GENERADOR
891.096.552
CC.HH.
PANDO/MONTELIRIO Página 1 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y MONTE
LIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
1 EQUIPOS PRINCIPALES
2 EQUIPOS AUXILIARES
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 2 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y MONTE
LIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 3 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y MONTE
LIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
3 DATOS DE HIDROMECÁNICA
COMENTARIOS: Todos los valores estarán referidos al punto de medición accesible (p.ej. posición de
distribuidor y no a ángulos φ.
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 4 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y MONTE
LIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 5 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y MONTE
LIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
5 PRUEBAS EN SECO
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 6 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y MONTE
LIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 7 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y MONTE
LIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 8 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y MONTE
LIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
5.6 TURBINA
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 9 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y MONTE
LIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 10 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y MONTE
LIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 11 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y MONTE
LIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 12 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y MONTE
LIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 13 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y MONTE
LIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 14 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y MONTE
LIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 15 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y MONTE
LIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 16 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y
MONTELIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
1. CONDICIONES PREVIAS
SÍ NO
Montaje mecánico y eléctrico terminado Satisfactorio
2. PUESTA EN SERVICIO
SÍ NO
Ajuste de la presión Po de vacío del acumulador. Satisfactorio
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 17 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y
MONTELIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
Parada automática bombas por grupo parado, bajo nivel y protecciones Satisfactorio
PROCEDIMIENTO:
Seguir el procedimiento específico para este sistema P EHS EM 047.
El arranque inicial de las bombas se hará en vacío, con la válvula de descarga a tanque abierta.
El ajuste de la presión de trabajo, en el caso de que no se haya realizado en fábrica, se realizará
partiendo del ajuste de presión en el mínimo, tornillos de regulación aflojados al máximo.
Se irá subiendo presión, hasta el valor de ajuste de la válvula de seguridad, reajustando la actuación de
la misma si es necesario.
Se reducirá la presión hasta ajustar el valor de presión máximo de la intermitencia (presostato, v de reg).
Se reducirá la presión hasta el valor de presión mínima de la intermitencia y se ajustará este valor
(presostato, válvula de regulación..)
Comprobar el ciclo completo carga/descarga de las bombas
ANDRITZ- Ejecutado por: CLIENTE Conforme:
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 18 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y
MONTELIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
POSICIÓN
% ABRIENDO CERRANDO
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 19 de 27
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y
MONTELIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
P
HORA COJINETE LA COJINETE LOA EQUIPO LUBRICACIÓN
(kW)
AXIAL1 AXIAL2 RADIAL AXIAL RADIAL ENTR. SALIDA DEPOS.
Tª
FINAL
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 20 de 27
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y
MONTELIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
CURVA DE CALENTAMIENTO
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 21 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y
MONTELIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
P
HORA DEVANADOS AIRE
(kW)
U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2. FRIO CALT.
Tª
FINAL
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 22 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y
MONTELIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
CURVA DE CALENTAMIENTO
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 23 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y
MONTELIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
DISPARO RECHAZO
25% 50% 75% 100% 25% 50%. 75% 100%.
Potencia (kW)
Apertura
distribuidor %
Sobrevelocidad
rpm/ %
Sobrepresión
bar/%
Tiempo de cierre
distribuidor (s)
Apertura
Tiempo
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 24 de 27
PROTOCOLO DE PUESTA EN SERVICIO
GENERADORA
CENTRAL CLIENTE: PANDO Y
MONTELIRIO
TIPO
PELTON FECHA:
MÁQUINA
Apertura distribuidor %
Potencia máxima
kW
generador
Limitador de apertura %
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 25 de 27
ACTA DE ENTREGA A EXPLOTACIÓN
CENTRAL:
CLIENTE:
Nº PEP:
TIPO DE TURBINA
POTENCIA NOMINAL (KW)
D……………………………… Firmado:……………………..
POR:……………………………..
D………………………………… Firmado:……………………..
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 26 de 27
LISTADO DE PENDIENTES
CLIENTE: FECHA:
891.096.552
CC.HH. PANDO /
MONTE LIRIO Página 27 de 27
C.H. MONTE LIRIO
6 Mantenimiento
Andritz Hydro S.L. dispone en su división Hidráulica de un departamento
para mantenimiento, conservación y revisión de turbinas.
Andritz Hydro S. L. ofrece los servicios de este equipo específicamente
organizado y equipado para que sus clientes puedan contratar en casos
concretos o sobre periodos anuales las operaciones de revisión y
mantenimiento que deseen.
Este servicio corresponde a la tendencia moderna de encargar a personal
especializado con dirección experta el mantenimiento y la conservación
programada de los equipos.
AVISO
Las turbinas pueden ponerse en funcionamiento una vez hayan sido
completamente montadas, siguiendo las instrucciones, y que los
aparatos relacionados con dichas turbinas funcionen perfectamente.
Para ello deben observarse estrictamente las correspondientes
instrucciones de servicio, mantenimiento y revisión.
Se toma siempre como referencia el estado de las turbinas cuando
fueron puestas en funcionamiento oficialmente.
PELIGRO
Todos los aparatos, así como los diafragmas, son ajustados de
forma definitiva en el momento de ponerlos en funcionamiento. Los
valores de ajuste y el diámetro de los diafragmas no pueden
modificarse sin previo consentimiento de Andritz Hydro
La modificación de estos ajustes puede causar daños irreversibles en la
instalación e incluso situaciones catastróficas que pongan en peligro la
vida de personas
Andritz declina toda responsabilidad por daños originados por la
inobservancia de las instrucciones de servicio y mantenimiento
ADVERTENCIAS
Para asegurar un funcionamiento lo más perfecto y seguro
posible, es fundamental que todas las piezas de la máquina,
con sus aparatos de control y medición, así como los
accesorios, se encuentren en perfecto estado de
funcionamiento. Los aparatos dañados o averiados en
funcionamiento deben ser inmediatamente sustituidos o
reparados adecuadamente y se debe asimismo probar su
funcionamiento.
6.2 Introducción
Sobrevelocidad
Las condiciones hidráulicas del salto que han servido a la definición del
perfil hidráulico deben ser respetadas. Los límites de funcionamiento
están indicados en la documentación de la oferta.
Para no someter a la turbina a un excesivo desgaste es conveniente no
trabajar con un caudal inferior a lo indicado en el cuadro de datos
técnicos. En cuanto al nivel aguas arriba, es decir salto, no tiene que
variar del valor nominal. Esta última circunstancia no vemos que pueda
producirse por causa natural, a no ser que suba de modo excesivo el nivel
del cauce aguas abajo.
ATENCIÓN
El tipo de aceite se ha escogido de acuerdo a las condiciones de
funcionamiento prescritas
Si se realiza cualquier cambio en el tipo de lubricante utilizado, debe ser
comunicado y justificado a Andritz
ADVERTENCIA
El aceite es muy contaminante para el medio ambiente
Se debe poner especial cuidado en la correcta recogida y tratamiento del
aceite usado o de las fugas que pudieran ocurrir
6.7 Vigilancias
6.8 Anomalías
Intervalo
Actividades de mantenimiento o Nota /
Semestral
2)
Trimestral
No.
10.000 h
Mensual
Bianual
Puntual (
5 años
Anual
inspección observación
1 Máquina (turbina+generador)
Comprobar Vibraciones X
Comprobar Ruidos X
Tornillería X
2 Instrumentos
instrumentos y conmutadores
Comprobación Ajustes X
3 Rodete
Inspección visual X
4 Acoplamientos
Revisión acoplamiento + pretensado X X(1)
5 Inyectores
Control de desgaste X
7 Grupo hidraúlico
Limpieza y comprobación de los Filtros X
8 Válvula Mariposa
Comprobación de fugas X
Tiempo de cierre X
(1)
Primera revisión tras 10.000 h, después cada 2 años
(2)
Sólo tras daños en el cojinete o en caso de funcionamiento inestable o ruidoso
6.10 Revisión
ATENCIÓN
Todos los trabajos de revisión se deben hacer observando
estrictamente las indicaciones y datos de los planos. En especial hay
que asegurar que todos los tornillos estén apretados y fijos.
En el caso de componentes con aceite o agua a presión se deben
seguir las normas de seguridad, de tal forma que se eviten
accidentes o daños.
Las revisiones totales pueden ser necesarias una vez transcurridos entre
10 y 15 años de servicio. Para determinar si tales revisiones son
necesarias, lo más importante es el estado general de las turbinas.
Recomendamos que el estado de las turbinas sea inspeccionado por
personal cualificado de Andritz, que decidirán si es preciso o
conveniente llevar a cabo una revisión total.
ATENCIÓN
Materiales peligrosos para el agua y el suelo como partes contaminadas
de aceite se tienen que almacenar en recintos seguros o en recipientes
colectores. Dado el caso hay que limpiar las partes de aceites, grasas y
otros ensuciamientos adherentes.
12
655
11
20 10
21 9
8
19 7
6
18 5
17 4
16 3
15 2
2815
23 1
22
2160
25
26
50 800 50
75 1150 75
1220 43 323 1300 310
1263 1933
24
MECANIZADO
PROYECTADO
AGUJEROS H11
DIBUJADO 07-03-2012 BULGARIA2 LONGITUDES j11 - H11 AFINADO 0.8 RECTIF 0.4
COMPROBADO ENTRE EJES + 0,25
-
COTAS EN MM
hidráulico P.N
ESCALAS ANULA AL PLANO N
1:20
( Esquema 29.003 ) ANULADO POR PLANO N
DISEÑADO EN CAD
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
REF.: 120050
CONTROL MODIFICACIONES
2
FABRICANTE FECHA NOMBRE PROYECTO TITULO PAGINA Hoja
Índice de páginas Columna X: una página creada automáticamente se ha modificado de forma manual F06_001
1 10
FABRICANTE FECHA NOMBRE PROYECTO TITULO PAGINA Hoja
CGH
800X400X135
K1126/8
X1 SEÑALES
2 12
FABRICANTE FECHA NOMBRE PROYECTO TITULO PAGINA Hoja
CGH
10.2
B1180/1/8
12.6
S1081/1 S1081/2 S1081/9 B1181 B1180/9 12.7
4x1 3 2 PE 4x1 3 2 PE 4x1 3 1 PE 4x0,34 BR WH YE 4x1 1 2 3 PE 7x1 1 2 4 6 PE
3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
NA NA NA NC NA NC NA NC NA
C C C C C C
NC NC NC
PE PE PE PE PE PE
CALEFACCIÓN CONECTAR
NIVEL MUY BAJO
TTRL-20-R1-500
TTRL-20-R1-500
PT-100 0-150ºC
TRL-20-R1-500
B1180/1/8
B1180/1/8
NIVEL ALTO
NIVEL BAJO
B1180/9
S1081/1
S1081/2
S1081/9
B1181
12.0
12.1
12.3
12.4
12.5
10 13
FABRICANTE FECHA NOMBRE PROYECTO TITULO PAGINA Hoja
CGH
10.2
A1
14
K1126/8
K1126/8 A2
13.4 11
G2R-2-SND(S) OMRON
WH
GN
GN
BR
BR
YE
YE
1 2 PE 1 3 PE 1 3 PE 1 2 PE
4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 3 2
NA NA NA
(-)
(-)
(+)
(+)
S1
S2
S1
S2
C C C
24VDC
24VDC
0V
0V
NC NC NC
PE
PE PE PE
S2-ARRANQUE/PARO BOMBA RESERVA
BOMBA 1 Ó 2 EN MARCHA
PRESION ACUMULADOR
PRESION ACUMULADOR
FILTRO DE RETORNO 1
FILTRO DE PRESION 1
FILTRO DE PRESION 2
MPF4003AG2A10HBEC
28P110QHBT1MG162
28P110QHBT1MG162
SCPSD-250-14-15
SCPSD-250-14-15
F1126/1/2
F1126/8/9
CONTROL
S1-MUY BAJO
S1-MUY ALTA
F1085/1
F1085/2
F1084/1
Y1002
13.3
13.0
13.1
12 14
FABRICANTE FECHA NOMBRE PROYECTO TITULO PAGINA Hoja
CGH
10.2
F3916 F3914/1/9
4x0,34 4x0,34
WH
WH
GN
GN
BR
BR
YE
YE
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4 1 2
S2
S1
S2
S1
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
24VDC
24VDC
0V
0V
PE PE PE PE PE
PRESOSTATO FRENOS
VALVULA DE GUARDA
PRESION FRENADO
S2-DESAPLICADOS
VALVULA BY-PASS
G41VW020B1NJW
SCPSD-100-14-15
SCPSD-100-14-15
D1VW020BNJW
D1VW020BNJW
D1VW020BNJW
S1-APLICADOS
D3W020BNJW
F3914/1/9
S2-MUY ALTA
S1-MUY BAJA
DEFLECTOR
Y2011
Y2230
Y2030
Y3915
Y3921
F3916
14.4
14.5
13 15
FABRICANTE FECHA NOMBRE PROYECTO TITULO PAGINA Hoja
CGH
10.2
YE WH YE WH YE WH
A B C D E F G A B C D E F G A B C D E F G
24VDC ( + )
IMPUT ( + )
24VDC ( + )
IMPUT ( + )
24VDC ( + )
IMPUT ( + )
0V VDC ( - )
(-)
0V VDC ( - )
(-)
0V VDC ( - )
(-)
GROUND POTENTIAL
GROUND POTENTIAL
GROUND POTENTIAL
IMPUT
IMPUT
IMPUT
0-10VAC
0-10VAC
0-10VAC
4-20mA
0-20mA
4-20mA
0-20mA
4-20mA
0-20mA
VALVULA PROPORCIONAL
VALVULA PROPORCIONAL
VALVULA PROPORCIONAL
D1FBE01CC0NS00
D1FBE01CC0NS00
D1FBE01CC0NS00
INYECTOR 1
INYECTOR 2
INYECTOR 3
Y2100/1
Y2100/2
Y2100/3
15.1
15.3
15.5
14 16
FABRICANTE FECHA NOMBRE PROYECTO TITULO PAGINA Hoja
REFERENCIA
FABRICANTE
X1
7x0,34
Y2100/4
24VDC ( + )
GLUAL HIDRAULICA
BR
120050
78
0V VDC ( - )
B
GN
79
Y2100/4
1
YE
C
16.1
D1FBE01CC0NS00
VALVULA PROPORCIONAL IMPUT ( + )
0-10VAC
D
GR
80
INYECTOR 4 4-20mA
DIBUJADO
0-20mA
IMPUT (-)
MODIFICADO
PK
81
COMPROBADO
F
WH
GROUND POTENTIAL
G
BL
82(PE)
2
23/05/2012
FECHA
SH
GORKA
7x0,34
Y2100/5
24VDC ( + )
A
BR
83
0V VDC ( - )
NOMBRE
B
GN
84
Y2100/5
3
YE
C
16.3
D1FBE01CC0NS00
VALVULA PROPORCIONAL IMPUT ( + )
0-10VAC
D
GR
85
INYECTOR 5 4-20mA
0-20mA IMPUT (-)
E
PK
86
F
WH
GROUND POTENTIAL
G
BL
87(PE)
4
SH
7x0,34
Y2100/6
24VDC ( + )
A
BR
88
0V VDC ( - )
B
GN
89
Y2100/6
5
YE
16.5
D1FBE01CC0NS00
PROYECTO
VALVULA PROPORCIONAL 0-10VAC IMPUT ( + )
D
GR
90
INYECTOR 6 4-20mA
0-20mA
IMPUT (-)
E
PK
91
F
WH
GROUND POTENTIAL
G
BL
SH
24VDC ( + )
A
BR
93
0V VDC ( - )
B
GN
94
Y2200
7
YE
16.7
D1FBE01CC0NS00
29003
DEFLECTOR 4-20mA
0-20mA
IMPUT (-)
E
PK
96
Hydraulic group
TITULO PAGINA
F
WH
GROUND POTENTIAL
G
BL
97
8
SH
98
9
Hoja
Hojas
16
16
17
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CGH
10.2
X1 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 PE 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124
1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4
1 3 2
NA
S2
S1
S2
S1
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
C
24VDC
24VDC
0V
0V
NC
PE
SONOCONTROL SC14/V6 4.20/1MHz
NITROGENO EN ACUMULADOR
DISPARO POR FALTA DE
ALARMA POR FALTA DE
FILTRO DE RETORNO 2
MPF4003AG2A10HBEC
B1088/1
B1088/2
F1084/2
17.1
17.2
16 100
FABRICANTE FECHA NOMBRE PROYECTO TITULO PAGINA Hoja
F13_004
PE
S1081/1
2
Nombre de cable
PE
B1180/1/8
PE
S1081/2
PE
S1081/9
WH
BR
YE
B1181
PE
PE
PE
PE
Conexión
1
Designación de destino
B1180/1/8
S1081/1
S1081/1
S1081/1
S1081/2
S1081/2
S1081/2
S1081/9
S1081/9
S1081/9
B1181
B1181
B1181
Regleta
Puente
X1
13(SH)
3 (PE)
6(PE)
9(PE)
PE
10
11
12
Borne
1
8
Conexión
Designación de destino
Plano de bornes
Nombre de cable
17 100.a
FABRICANTE FECHA NOMBRE PROYECTO TITULO PAGINA Hoja
REFERENCIA
FABRICANTE
Nombre de cable Nombre de cable
Regleta
Y1002
F1085/1
B1180/9
F1126/1/2
B1180/1/8
X1
GLUAL HIDRAULICA
120050
1
Borne
DIBUJADO
Conexión
Conexión
MODIFICADO
COMPROBADO
14 B1180/9 1 1
15 B1180/9 2 2
2
16 B1180/9 3 3
15/06/2012
FECHA
17(PE) B1180/9 PE PE
18 B1180/1/8 1 1
19
GORKA
20 B1180/1/8 2 2
NOMBRE
21 B1180/1/8 3 6
3
22 F1126/1/2 4 GN
23 F1126/1/2 1 BR
24 F1126/1/2 2 WH
25A F1126/1/2 3 YE
25B F1126/8/9 3 YE
4
26 F1126/8/9 1 BR
27 CONTROL
K1126/8 14 28 CONTROL
K1126/8 11 29 Y1002 1 1
K1126/8 A2 30 Y1002 2 2
5
31 F1126/8/9 4 GN
PROYECTO
K1126/8 A1 32 F1126/8/9 2 WH
33 F1085/1 1 1
34 F1085/1 3 3
35(PE) F1085/1 PE PE
29003
Terminal plane
TITULO PAGINA
8
9
Hoja
Hojas
16
100.b
100.a
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
F13_004
PE
F1085/2
3
Nombre de cable
PE
F1084/1
2
Y2011
2
Y2230
2
Y2030
2
PE
PE
Conexión
2
Designación de destino
F1085/2
F1085/2
F1085/2
F1084/1
F1084/1
F1084/1
Y2011
Y2011
Y2230
Y2230
Y2030
Y2030
Regleta
Puente
X1
38(PE)
41(PE)
44(PE)
47(PE)
50(PE)
36
37
39
40
42
43
45
46
48
49
Borne
Conexión
Designación de destino
Plano de bornes
Nombre de cable
100.a 100.c
FABRICANTE FECHA NOMBRE PROYECTO TITULO PAGINA Hoja
REFERENCIA
FABRICANTE
Nombre de cable Nombre de cable
Regleta Y3921
Y3915
Y2100/2
Y2100/1
F1126/1/2
X1
GLUAL HIDRAULICA
120050
1
Borne
DIBUJADO
Conexión
Conexión
MODIFICADO
COMPROBADO
51 Y3915 1 1
52 Y3915 2 2
2
53 F3916 1 BR
23/05/2012
FECHA
54 F3916 3 YE
55 F3916 2 WH
56 F3916 4 GN
GORKA
57 F3914/1/9 1 BR
NOMBRE
58 F3914/1/9 3 YE
3
59 F3914/1/9 2 WH
60 F3914/1/9 4 GN
61 Y3921 1 1
62 Y3921 2 2
63 Y2100/1 A BR
4
64 Y2100/1 B GN
65 Y2100/1 D GR
66 Y2100/1 E PK
67(PE) Y2100/1 G BL
68 Y2100/2 A BR
5
69 Y2100/2 B GN
PROYECTO
70 Y2100/2 D GR
71 Y2100/2 E PK
72(PE) Y2100/2 G BL
29003
Terminal plane
TITULO PAGINA
8
9
Hoja
Hojas
16
100.c
100.d
100.c
Plano de bornes F13_004
0
REFERENCIA
FABRICANTE
Nombre de cable Nombre de cable
Regleta
Y2200
Y2100/6
Y2100/5
Y2100/4
Y2100/3
X1
GLUAL HIDRAULICA
120050
1
Borne
DIBUJADO
Conexión
Conexión
MODIFICADO
COMPROBADO
73 Y2100/3 A BR
74 Y2100/3 B GN
2
75 Y2100/3 D GR
23/05/2012
FECHA
76 Y2100/3 E PK
77(PE) Y2100/3 G BL
78 Y2100/4 A BR
GORKA
79 Y2100/4 B GN
NOMBRE
80 Y2100/4 D GR
3
81 Y2100/4 E PK
82(PE) Y2100/4 G BL
83 Y2100/5 A BR
84 Y2100/5 B GN
85 Y2100/5 D GR
4
86 Y2100/5 E PK
87(PE) Y2100/5 G BL
88 Y2100/6 A BR
89 Y2100/6 B GN
90 Y2100/6 D GR
5
91 Y2100/6 E PK
PROYECTO
92(PE) Y2100/6 G BL
93 Y2200 A BR
94 Y2200 B GN
95 Y2200 D GR
96 Y2200 E PK
97 Y2200 G BL
29003
Terminal plane
TITULO PAGINA
8
9
Hoja
Hojas
16
100.d
100.e
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
F13_004
WH
GN
BR
YE
B1088/1
Nombre de cable
WH
GN
BR
YE
B1088/2
F1084/2
PE
Y1002
PE
Y3915
PE
PE
Conexión
2
Designación de destino
B1088/1
B1088/1
B1088/1
B1088/1
B1088/2
B1088/2
B1088/2
B1088/2
F1084/2
F1084/2
Y1002
Y3915
Regleta
Puente
X1
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
PE
PE
99
Borne
Conexión
Designación de destino
Plano de bornes
Nombre de cable
100.d 100.f
FABRICANTE FECHA NOMBRE PROYECTO TITULO PAGINA Hoja
F13_004
PE
Y3921
Nombre de cable
PE
F1084/2
PE
PE
Conexión
Designación de destino
F1084/2
Y3921
Regleta
Puente
X1
SH
SH
SH
SH
SH
SH
SH
SH
SH
SH
SH
PE
PE
Borne
Conexión
Designación de destino
Plano de bornes
Nombre de cable
100.e
FABRICANTE FECHA NOMBRE PROYECTO TITULO PAGINA Hoja
ENSAYOS ESPECIALES:
ESSAI SPÈECIAL:
SPECIAL TEST:
SONSTIGE VERSUCHE:
OBSERVACIONES: Los acumuladores se mandan sin carga de nitrogeno por peticion del cliente.
OBSERVATIONS:
REMARKS:
BEMERKUNGEN:
ENSAYOS ESPECIALES:
ESSAI SPÈECIAL:
SPECIAL TEST:
SONSTIGE VERSUCHE:
OBSERVACIONES: Los acumuladores se mandan sin carga de nitrogeno por peticion del cliente.
OBSERVATIONS:
REMARKS:
BEMERKUNGEN:
ENSAYOS ESPECIALES:
ESSAI SPÈECIAL:
SPECIAL TEST:
SONSTIGE VERSUCHE:
OBSERVACIONES: Los acumuladores se mandan sin carga de nitrogeno por peticion del cliente.
OBSERVATIONS:
REMARKS:
BEMERKUNGEN:
ENSAYOS ESPECIALES:
ESSAI SPÈECIAL:
SPECIAL TEST:
SONSTIGE VERSUCHE:
OBSERVACIONES: Los acumuladores se mandan sin carga de nitrogeno por peticion del cliente.
OBSERVATIONS:
REMARKS:
BEMERKUNGEN:
ENSAYOS ESPECIALES:
ESSAI SPÈECIAL:
SPECIAL TEST:
SONSTIGE VERSUCHE:
OBSERVACIONES: Los acumuladores se mandan sin carga de nitrogeno por peticion del cliente.
OBSERVATIONS:
REMARKS:
BEMERKUNGEN:
Cumple con los siguientes requisitos esenciales del anexo I de la Directiva 2006/42/EC relativa a máquinas:
Dicha cuasi-máquina, no deberá ser puesta en servicio mientras que la máquina final en la cual vaya a ser
incorporada no haya sido declarada conforme a lo dispuesto en la Directiva 2006/42/CE relativa a máquinas.
Azpeitia,
KOLDO OTAÑO
DIRECTOR DE CALIDAD
- Ingeniería y fabricación de equipos hidráulicos.
INSTRUCCIONES PARA:
Un montaje racional y una correcta instalación son factores esenciales para un buen
funcionamiento en el tiempo de un circuito oleohidráulico.
ESQUEMA OLEOHIDRÁULICO
Para la unión del equipo oleohidráulico, ante todo nos debemos de referir a un claro esquema,
representado según los simbolos internaciones CETOP. Este esquema, acordado en
colaboración con el especialista, en base a las particulares exigencias de la aplicación, deberá
dejarse a los encargados del mantenimiento a fin de que en el futuro resulte claro el
funcionamiento del equipo.
ADVERTENCIAS GENERALES
Es importante preveer:
- En fase de proyecto: Filtración continua del aceite, selección de esta según el tipo de circuito y
prestaciones requeridas. La filtración deberá ser del orden de 25 micras salvo en servoválvulas y
proporcionales.
- En fase de montaje: Es importante que las distintas fases se realicen en un ambiente limpio
eliminando cualquier posibilidad de impureza que pueda entrar en el circuito.
Todos los elementos se suministran siempre con la bocas de utilización cerradas con tapas de
protección que no se deben quitar hasta el momento de montaje. Es una buena norma introducir
un poco de aceite hidráulico en el momento de montaje, que proteje las partes internas hasta la
posterior utilización del equipo. Siempre es interesante el decapado y el lavado del equipo.
En los equipos oleohidráulicos se deben usar tubos de acero estirado en frio sin soldadura (DIN
2391/C) de acuerdo con las normas internacionales de unificación.
Los racores van en función de las caracteristicas del equipo y sobre todo de las presiones de
trabajo y de los diámetros de tubo.
Reglas generales
- Hasta DIN 40 racores en 3 piezas con anillo cortante (equipos no demasiado solicitados y en
ausencia de vibraciones).
- Hasta DIN 40 racores en 3 piezas con espiga de soldar y cierre cónico con junta tórica
(equipos sometidos a trabajos severos).
El diámetro del tubo de ser dimensionado en relación al caudal máximo de aceite que puede
resultar notablemente superior al caudal de la bomba procurando no superar las siquientes
velocidades limite:
Durante la colocación en obra los tubos deben de ser oportunamente amarrados por medio de
soportes; hoy se han adoptado universalmente a tal fin soportes de goma o plástico,
normalmente en material poliamídico o polipropilénico.
Durante la unión de los distintos elementos oleodinámicos asegurarse que los tubos y
elementos citados puedan desmontarse facilmente en casos de suciedad; preveer por tanto las
oportunas uniones que permiten desmontar cualquier tramo de unión. Los tubos no deben de
obstaculizar la accesibilidad a cualquier elemento, particularmente a los puntos donde existen
elementos de regulación o dispositivos de puesta a punto o control.
En el montaje de tubos flexibles evitar montar estos torsionados, o con radios muy pequeños;
los tubos flexibles deben de ser dimensionados para presiones dobles de las máximas de
trabajo con objeto de cubrir las inevitables puntas de presión.
Los drenajes de los motores hidráulicos o de los diversos elementos deben de ser llevados
directamente a depósito holgadamente dimensionados.
DEPOSITO DE ACEITE
El depósito de aceite debe ser dimensionado con relación a: - potencia instalada - caudal de
bomba - cantidad de calor generado durante el funcionamiento - tipo de equipo y servicio etc.
Como norma general se sugiere preveer una capacidad de aceite de 3 a 5 veces el caudal
(l/min.) de la bomba. Por ejemplo si la bomba da un caudal de 20 l./ min. , se sugiere un
depósito comprendido entre 60 y 100 lts.
Se sugiere esta norma por consideraciones de dispersión de calor y de circulación interna del
aceite en el circuito. En casos particulares es necesario limitar la dimensión del depósito por
cualquier motivo por lo que es oportuno colocar un intercambiador de calor.
La forma del depósito es normalmente paralepipédica aunque pueda serlo de cualquier manera
y frecuentemente es cilíndrica en equipos de maquinaria móvil y grandes equipos. Es
importante que el depósito este construído de tal manera que consienta una fácil accesibilidad
para la limpieza periódica del mismo.
El depósito debe estar cuidadosamente limpio y pintado internamente con una pintura
resistente al aceite caliente. Debe de ser hermético salvo la toma de aire para consentir el paso
de aire (diferencias de nivel de aceite) provisto de un filtro de aire que impida la entrada de
polvo o impurezas.
La tubería de retorno del aceite del circuito deberá ser prolongado dentro del depósito con el
extremo inmerso debajo del nivel mínimo para evitar la formación de espuma. Se debe de
asegurar que el aceite de retorno interfiera en la toma de aspiración de la bomba; se
recomienda distanciar los 2 extremos al máximo y no dirigir la salida del tubo de retorno hacia
la toma de aspiración.
En depósitos de cierta capacidad se usa un tabique interno separador entre las zonas de
retorno de aceite y la zona de aspiración de la bomba con objeto de frenar el movimiento del
líquido y conseguir cierta sedimentación, facilitando la decantación de posibles partículas
sólidas en suspensión y del posible agua presente.
Prever sobre el fondo una descarga en posición oportuna para la purga de agua o el vaciado
de aceite para el mantenimiento. Para facilitar el vaciado es conveniente que el fondo esté algo
elevado sobre el nivel del suelo e inclinado.
El depósito de aceite debera permitir el control de nivel y dar la indicación del nivel máximo y
mínimo.
El nivel máximo está en relación del aceite en el circuito y el nivel mínimo debe de garantizar la
imposibilidad de entrada del aire a través de la toma de aspiración de la bomba.
Entre las principales causas de desperfectos o paradas del equipo oleohidráulico se pueden
señalar: gripaje o rotura de órganos debido al ensuciamiento y envejecimiento del fluido que
transmite la potencia hidráulica con la consiguiente pérdida de todas las propiedades fisico-
químicas.
Es particularmente importante que el filtro resulte facilmente accesible para una periódica
limpieza que deberá ser oportunamente prescrita.
Es importante preveer los filtros con indicadores ópticos o electricos de ensuciamiento para
facilitar el control.
BOMBAS Y MOTORES
Ante todo, el acoplamiento entre el motor principal debe de ser efectuado mediante
acoplamiento elástico porque pocas bombas o motores admiten cargas radiales o axiales de
alguna entidad en el eje.
No desmontar la bomba por ningún motivo; la modificación del sentido de giro o de la posición
de las tomas, cuando sea posible, lo debe de efectuar el constructor, salvo expresa
autorización.
Algunos tipos de bombas y motores llevan en el cuerpo tomas para el drenaje de aceite de las
fugas internas de fluido que deben ser llevadas directamente a depósito.
VALVULAS Y DISTRIBUIDORES
Todas las bombas oleohidráulicas son volumétricas y deben de ser protegidos en linea de
presión por una válvula de seguridad tarada a una presión inferior a la máxima admisible por la
bomba.
Por norma, al menos una válvula de seguridad se debe de colocar siempre en cualquier circuito
oleohidráulico aunque eventualmente puede haber otras válvulas de control de presión,
dirección y flujo.
En todos los equipos se debe de preveer las oportunas tomas para los manómetros previstos
en posición adecuada, es decir no solo en la linea de presión de la bomba sino en aquellas
zonas de circuito en que puede ser interesante controlar la presión. En las tomas de
manómetro se debe de preveer una llave de exclusión de manómetro con objeto de anular el
manometro cuando no es necesario efectuar lecturas a efectos de prolongar la vida de este.
Es generalmente oportuno colocar válvulas de cierre para aislar válvulas, grupos de válvulas o
cilindros con objeto de facilitar las operaciones de puesta en marcha y mantenimiento del
equipo.
ACEITE HIDRÁULICO
La viscosidad del aceite debe ser elegida en base al tipo de bomba adoptado y a la
temperatura de regímen del equipo. Ante todo se deben de tener en cuenta las indicaciones
dadas por el fabricante de bombas y motores.
En el diagrama se dan las curvas medias viscosidad-temperatura para varios tipos de aceite
reunidos en 3 grupos de diversas viscosidades; en la tabla (adjuntado al final) se dan las siglas
correspondientes a distintas casas suministradoras.
En líneas generales se pueden considerar que la mayor parte de las bombas y motores
modernos funcionan en las mejores condiciones con aceite de viscosidad en torno a 4 ºE a la
temperatura de régimen.
Puesto que la temperatura media de régimen en los circuitos hidráulicos va en torno a los 45
ºC el aceite más normalmente utilizado corresponde a la curva B de la tabla, es decir con
viscosidad de 3,5 /4 ºE a 50ºC.
Naturalmente si partimos de la premisa de que la viscosidad debe ser del orden de 4ºE, si
estimamos que la temperatura de régimen va a ser superior a 50 ºC, deberemos elegir un
aceite con viscosidad según la curva C e inversamente si la temperatura de régimen es inferior
a la temperatura dicha deberemos elegir un aceite correspondiente a la curva A.
En la práctica pueden adoptar aceites más fluidos (1,5 / 2ºE a 50ºC) o más viscosos (8 / 10ºE a
50ºC) de aquellos considerados como norma de utilización general en base a otro tipo de
razones como puede ser la utilización de aceites más fluidos, para limitar las pérdidas de carga,
o más viscoso para altas presiones, para reducir fugas internas.
Se debe de tener en cuenta que la utilización de un aceite demasiado viscoso puede traer
dificultadas en el arranque a temperatura ambiente por cuanto la mayoría de las bombas
oleohidráulicas no funcionan con regularidad a la velocidad normal con viscosidad superiores a
40/50 ºE.
Todas esta indicaciones son solo orientativas pues pueden darse en algunas aplicaciones
factores especiales que requieran efectuar consultas tanto al suministrador de equipo o del
aceite. Ejemplos claros podrían ser de equipos que trabajen al aire libre sometidos a extremas
temperaturas que requieren aceites de especiales caracteristicas
El cobre genera una fuerte acción catalítica por lo cual siempre que es posible se debe de
eliminar tal metal.
La temperatura de funcionamiento por tanto debe de ser mantenida por norma entre 40 y 50 ºC
y esta bien que no supere los 60 ºC ; en cualquier caso es inadmisible que superen los 70 ºC
porque a estas temperaturas se puede iniciar el dañado de las juntas.
Se debe de tener en cuenta que un aceite nuevo suministrado por la sociedad petrolífera
contiene siempre un cierto número de partículas contaminantes que se deben a numerosas
manipulaciones del fluido durante las operaciones de transporte y embalaje.
Solo en casos particulares es posible hallar fluidos con un alto grado de limpieza por ejemplo
respondiendo a la especificación MIL-H-5606B.
Se recomienda el llenado de depósito utilizando un grupo portatil de filtraje con objeto de hacer
un llenado con fluido limpio.
El cambio de aceite se debe de efectuar por norma cada 2000 horas aunque es recomendable
someter el aceite a análisis para controlar la integridad de las propiedades químico-físicas,
siendo la duración antes indicada del todo orientativa y dependiente no solo de las
caracteristicas de equipo y del servicio sino de las condiciones clímaticas, filtración y
mantenimento.
El eventual rellenado de aceite debe de ser efectuado con aceite de la misma marca, debiendo
evitar mezclas que pueden dar lugar a posibles problemas.
Los aceites minerales presentan temperaturas de autocombustión muy bajas; por otra parte si
se incendiara propagan la llama ampliando la situación de peligro. Por tanto, donde una
pérdida de fluìdo puede crear una posibilidad de incendio se usan otros productos que
presentan mayor resistencia al fuego y que se denominan impropiamente “fluidos inflamables”.
Gran resistencias a la combustión con escasa propagación de la llama, buen poder lubrificante,
discretas caracteristicas antioxidación, limitado indice de viscosidad, elevado peso especifico,
incompatibilidad con gomas y pinturas, Entre las desventajas se señalan la toxicidad y el grado
de contaminación.
Por tanto para la utilización de este tipo de fluidos se deben de adoptar una serie de medidas
especiales como:
- Utilización de juntas y tubos flexibles construidas en elastómeros válidos (sobre todo Vitón,
tambien PTFE y butil con ciertos límites).
- Renuncia a la utilización de pinturas dentro del depósito y a todas las superficies que puedan
estar en contacto con el fluido.
- Filtración continua del equipo con especial cuidado debido a la mayor densidad del fluido.
Los fluidos a base de ésteres fosfóricos admiten temperaturas de trabajo elevadas teniendo
óptima resistencia al envejecimiento y no requiriendo mantenimiento especial aparte de
controlar el contenido de agua, que ya en pequeños porcentajes vuelve este fluido
particularmente agresivo.
Los fluidos a base de agua glicol se constituyen de mezcla de agua, en proporción de 40-50%,
glicol estilénico o propilénico y polietileno glicol.
En los equipos nuevos, a pesar de haber tomado las precauciones indicadas, no es posible
eliminar completamente las sustancias contaminantes. Por tanto, es necesario someter al
equipo nuevo a una operación preventiva de lavado.
Para evitar que el aceite contaminado dañe los componentes del equipo es necesario adoptar
algunos cuidados:
- Preveer en el conducto de retorno una bateria de filtros enroscada con poderes filtrantes
respectivamente de 125 micras y 25-10 micras con objeto de obtener una filtración inferior a la
de trabajo.
El lavado del equipo con las precauciones indicadas, puede ser realizado con la misma central.
El fluido de limpieza, debe ser aceite mineral de calidad y debe de ser compatible con las
juntas y con el fluido con el que posteriormente se va usar porque existe la posibilidad de que
no todo el fluido de lavado se pueda sacar del equipo.
Se recomienda una velocidad de fluido en la tuberia del orden de 5-6 m/seg. y realizado con
fluido caliente (40 ºC).
El control del grado de colmatación del cartucho del filtro nos indicará el grado de limpieza, el
tiempo de realización tambien nos lo definirá el mismo.
PUESTA EN MARCHA
- La bomba gira libremente a mano sin encontrar excesiva resistencia y el sentido de rotación
del motor coincide con el de la bomba.
- Llenar el cuerpo de la bomba con el fluido empleado en el circuito a traves del agujero de
drenaje y si esto no es posible por el de presión.
Durante la fase de llenado del equipo se debe de proceder al purgado del aire presente, fuente
de irregularidades de movimiento y desgastes acelerados.
Para facilitar tal operación se pueden colocar en la tubería de presión, válvulas de purga,
soltando los racores situados en las partes más altas de la instalación. La salida del aire la
señala la presencia de burbujas y cuando la salida de la vena liquida es continua y limpia, nos
dice que el aire se ha eliminado.
Después de purgar el aire, controlar el nivel de aceite del depósito y eventualmente añadir;
luego ir subiendo progresivamente la presión del equipo y proceder al tarado y puesta a punto
de las válvulas de regulación. Si es posible, efectuar esta operación a la temperatura de
regimen.
Cuando se usa aceite de una cierta viscosidad a la temperatura ambiente se puede dar que la
bomba encuentre dificultades de funcionamiento y ruido por lo que se recomienda precalentar
el aceite por cualquier sistema, por ejemplo una resistencia electrica, o reducir la velocidad de
rotación de la bomba o en pequeños equipos se puede calentar el aceite haciéndolos funcionar
por algún tiempo en cortocircuito a media presión antes de meter en trabajo el equipo.
Después de algunas horas de trabajo, volver a verificar el filtro, el nivel de aceite del depósito y
controlar la estanqueidad de racores.
El principio base que es común y que condiciona una buena gestión y sobre el que todos los
constructores reclaman con particular insistencia es la necesidad absoluta de controlar
continuamente la calidad y el estado del fluido que trasmite potencia y la ausencia de
impurezas en el circuito.
De hecho entre las principales causas de averías y paradas se puede señalar las debidas al
envejecimiento del fluido que pierde sus propiedades fisico-químicas. Es ahora ya acertado
decir que la causa principal de estos inconvenientes es debida a párticulas y micropárticulas
que circulando continuamente son motivo de desgaste. Estas micropartículas se dejan circular
en el sistema, actuando como una mezcla abrasiva, arañando las superficies con las que entra
en contacto y añadiendo contaminante; el daño será tanto por cada incremento de 10 ºC. La
presencia de elementos de degradación y sedimentos dan un aspecto turbio que nos indica el
estado del fluido.
Mayor en cuanto el equipo sea más sofisticado.
1. - Limpieza externa con frecuencia mensual. Permite una fácil localización de pérdidas y la
inmediata intervención.
2. - Control de filtro de aire. Con frecuencia mensual, con sustitución eventual del cartucho.
Debe de haber al menos una frecuencia semanal. Los filtros que se comercializan facilitan
mucho la operación al estar en mucho casos dotados de indicadores de colmatación.
3. - Control de los filtros de aceite. Como se ha indicado reviste la máxima importancia. Debe
de haber al menos una frecuencia semanal. Los filtros que se comercializan facilitan mucho la
operación al estar en mucho casos dotados de indicadores de colmatación.
4. - Llenado de aceite. Debe ser realizado cada vez que el nivel desciende al mínimo, aunque
en equipos muy grandes es complejo; El uso de indicadores electricos de nivel mínimo y de
parada de bomba facilita el trabajo del equipo de mantenimiento.
El rellenado del aceite se debe de realizar con igual aceite que el usado anteriormente que
debe de estar indicado claramente sobre el depósito. Les mezclas de aceites de marcas
diversas pueden dar lugar a inconvenientes y por tanto se deben de evitar.
Se debe de emplear aceite hidráulico de calidad, de acuerdo con las normas internacionales.
5. - Continuo control de la temperatura del aceite. La alteración del fluido con la temperatura es
un motivo de ensuciamiento y degradacion del equipo. La formación de productos de
degradación de los hidrocarburos es influenciada directamente por la temperatura,
manteniendose practicamente constante hasta los 60 ºC y redoblándose a partir de este punto
por cada incremento de 10 ºC. La presencia de elementos de degradación y sedimentos dan un
aspecto turbio que nos indica el estado del fluido.
6. - Sustitución del aceite. Dependiendo de las caracteristicas del equipo, aunque en primera
aproximación se puede decir que se debe efectuar cada 2000-3000 horas de trabajo. Esta
sustitución debe ir acompañado de una limpieza del depósito y eventualmente de una limpieza
del equipo.
Se recomienda usar llaves de paso de cierre y by-pass sobre el circuito de aceite con objeto de
intervenir sobre estos elementos sin parar el equipo.
8. - Control de precarga de los acumuladores. Verificar con frecuencia mensual utilizando los
elementos necesarios para control y carga que se encuentran en comercio.
Para todos los componentes en general, el deber del servicio de mantenimento es un continuo
examen del equipo y de su correspondencia a las necesidades funcionales de la máquina. A tal
fin se impone la necesidad del esquema, hojas técnicas de los elementos, descripición del
equipo, con objeto de tener el máximo conocimento de los elementos perteneciente al mismo.
Por otra parte es indispensable que a la puesta en marcha de un equipo haya una dotación
mínima de elementos de repuesto de primera necesidad que debe ser continuamente renovado
a medida que se vaya haciendo uso de algún componente.
En la siguiente página se incluye una tabla que puede ser útil par reconocer algun elemento
dañado.
INCONVENIENTES CAUSA PROBABLE MIRAR
CURVA A B C
Viscosidad
Engler a 50 ºC 2,5-3 3,5-4 4,5-5,5
ISO VG ref. 32 46 68
178 178
Gear Pumps/Motors
Series PGP/PGM 500
Express Delivery Program
Bulletin HY11-3293/UK
Note
This document and other information from Parker Hannifin
GmbH, its subsidiaries, sales offices and authorized
distributors provide product or system options for further
investigation by users having technical expertise. Before you
select or use any product or system it is important that you
analyse all aspects of your application and review the
information concerning the product or system in the current
product catalogue. Due to the variety of operating conditions
and applications for these products or systems, the user,
through his own analysis and testing, is solely responsible
for making the final selection of the products and systems
and assuring that all performance and safety requirements
of the application are met. The products are subject to
change by Parker Hannifin GmbH at any time without notice.
1)
PG 503 B 1 B 1
Gear Type Unit Dis- Rotation Shaft Flange Shaft Inlet Outlet No Rear Ports
Design place- Seal Side Ports (rear ports on request)
ment Option
Code Shaft
Dimensions
1)
PG 505 B 1 B 1
Gear Type Unit Dis- Rotation Shaft Flange Shaft Inlet Outlet No Rear Ports
Design place- Seal Side Ports (rear ports on request)
ment Option
Code Shaft
2) 9T, 16/32DP, 32L, SAE "A"
A1
spline
2) Ø12.7, 3.2key, no thread, 38L,
J1
parallel
Ø15.88, 4.0key, no thread,
K1 3)
32L, SAE "A", parallel
Bold letters =
Ø14.25, 5.5L, 3.0key, M10x1,
Express delivery
within 5 work days
Q2 4)
taper 1:8
2) 1) Code of drain line for PGM505 only.
Only used with flange H1, H2.
3) Only used with flange H2. 2 Options:
4) Only used with flange D2. G4 = 1/4-19 BSP rear drain
B1 = no drain, product type must be “B“ or “C“.
Dimensions
0040 4.0 37.2 43.8 76.4 J7 20.0 40.0 M6 J5 15.0 35.0 M6 500 4000 275 331 9111 039 331 9112 061
0060 6.0 39.8 49.1 81.7 J7 20.0 40.0 M6 J5 15.0 35.0 M6 500 3600 275 331 9111 040 331 9112 077
0080 8.0 42.5 54.5 87.1 J7 20.0 40.0 M6 J5 15.0 35.0 M6 500 3000 275 331 9111 041 331 9112 078
0100 10.0 45.2 59.8 92.4 J7 20.0 40.0 M6 J5 15.0 35.0 M6 500 2800 250 331 9111 087 331 9112 033
0120 12.0 47.9 65.2 97.8 J7 20.0 40.0 M6 J5 15.0 35.0 M6 500 2400 220 331 9111 246 331 9112 135
Dimensions
1)
PG 511 B 1 B 1
Gear Type Unit Dis- Rotation Shaft Flange Shaft Inlet Outlet No Rear Ports
Design place- Seal Side Ports (rear ports on request)
ment Option
Code Type
P Pump Code Port Options (Pumps)
M Motor E5E3 3/4 - 14 BSP thread/
1/2 - 14 BSP thread
only from 4ccm to 11ccm
Unit Code Shaft Seal
Code E6E5 1-11 BSP thread/
Pump Motor X No seal 3/4-14 BSP thread
Standard motor N NBR only from 14ccm to 23ccm
A Single unit
w/o checks E7E5 1 1/4-11 BSP thread/
Single 3/4-14 BSP thread
M distributor — only from 27ccm to 33ccm
unit
J7J5 20mm-Ø40mm-M6 square flange
B Multiple unit Standard motor 15mm-Ø35mm-M6 square flange
w. two checks only from 4ccm to 11ccm
Standard motor J9J8 26mm-Ø55mm-M8 square flange
C — w. one anti- 18mm-Ø55mm-M8 square flange
cavitation check only from 14ccm to 33ccm
(ACC) L1L1 13mm-Ø30mm-M6 diamond flange
13mm-Ø30mm-M6 diamond flange
Displacement only from 4ccm to 8ccm
Code ccm L2L1 19mm-Ø40mm-M8 diamond flange
0040 4.0 13mm-Ø30mm-M6 diamond flange
0060 6.0 only from 10ccm to 16ccm
0080 8.0 L2L2 19mm-Ø40mm-M8 diamond flange
0100 10.0 19mm-Ø40mm-M8 diamond flange
0110 11.0 only from 19ccm to 33ccm
0140 14.0
Code Port Options (Motors)
0160 16.0
0190 19.0 E3E3 1/2 - 14 BSP thread/
0230 23.0 1/2 - 14 BSP thread
0270 27.0 only from 4ccm to 11ccm
0310 31.0 E5E5 3/4 - 14 BSP thread/
0330 33.0 3/4 - 14 BSP thread
only from 14ccm to 33ccm
Code Rotation J5J5 15mm-Ø35mm-M6 square flange
C Clockwise 15mm-Ø35mm-M6 square flange
Counter- only from 4ccm to 16ccm
A clockwise J7J7 20mm-Ø40mm-M6 square flange
B Bi-directional 20mm-Ø40mm-M6 square flange
only from 19ccm to 33ccm
Code Shaft Example: L2 = inlet port
2)
L1 = outlet port
A1 9T, 16/32DP, 32L, SAE "A" spline
C1 3) 11T, 16/32DP, 38.2L, SAE 19-4 spline Code Flange
F1 4) 9T, B17x14, 23L, DIN 5482 spline 6)
D3 71.4x96.0 - Ø36.47 rectangular
2)
Ø15.88, 4.0key, no thread, 32L,
K1 D4 7) 72.0x100.0 - Ø80 rectangular
SAE "A", parallel
H2 6) 106.4 - Ø82.55 SAE "A"
2)
Ø19.05, 4.8key, no thread, 32L,
L6 2bolt flange
SAE 19-1, parallel Bold letters =
S1 4)
Ø17.0, 7.7L, 3.0key, M12x1.5, taper 1:5 H3 146.1 - Ø101.06 SAE "B"
Express delivery 2bolt flange
Ø16.65, 12.0L, 3.2key, M12x1.5,
S2 5)
taper 1:8
within 5 work days Q2 60.0x60.0 - Ø50.0 w. seal O',
thrubolt flange
5)
Ø16.65, 12.0L, 4.0key, M12x1.5,
S4 Q4 60.0x60.0 - Ø50.0 w. seal O',
taper 1:8
2) 1)
thrubolt flange
Only used with flange H2. Code of drain line for PGM511 only.
3) Only used with flange H2, H3. 2 Options: 6) Only used with ports L*L*.
4) Only used with flange D4, Q2, Q4. G4 = 1/4-19 BSP rear drain 7) Only used with ports J*J*.
5) Only used with flange D3. B1 = no drain, product type must be
Bulletin HY11-3293/ UK.PM7.0 CM
“B“ or “C“.
Dimensions
Dimensions
Dimensions
1)
PG 517 B 1 B 1
Gear Type Unit Dis- Rotation Shaft Flange Shaft Inlet Outlet No Rear Ports
Design place- Seal Side Ports (rear ports on request)
ment Option
Dimensions
Dimensions
511 A 0110 X L2 L1 B1 B1
1)
further B possible for triple units
This coding system can be used for all pumps series 500.
Hydraulics Group
Sales Offices
Europe International
Austria Italy Australia
Wiener Neustadt Corsico (MI) Castle Hill
Tel: +43 (0)2622 23501 Tel: +39 02 45 19 21 Tel: +61 (0)2-9634 7777
Fax: +43 (0)2622 66212 Fax: +39 02 4 47 93 40 Fax: +61 (0)2-9899 6184
Parker Hannifin is the world’s premier supplier of motion and control systems
and solutions, with sales and manufacturing facilities throughout the world. For
product information and details of your nearest Parker sales office, visit us at
www.parker.com or call free on 00800 2727 5374.
Product Description
Pilot-operated, balanced-piston relief cartridges are normally closed pressure regulating valves. When the pressure at the
inlet (port 1) reaches the valve setting, the valve starts to open to tank (port 2), throttling flow to regulate the pressure.
These valves are accurate, have low pressure rise vs. flow, they are smooth and quiet, and are moderately fast.
Download
Technical Features
All 2-port relief cartridges (except pilot reliefs) are physically and Back pressure on the tank port (port 2) is directly additive to the valve
functionally interchangeable (same flow path, same cavity for a given setting at a 1:1 ratio.
frame size).
Will accept maximum pressure at port 2; suitable for use in cross port Corrosion resistant cartridge valves are intended for use in corrosive
relief circuits. If used in cross port relief circuits, consider spool leakage. environments and are identified by the model code suffix /AP (see
Option Selection below). External parts are made from stainless steel
with titanium or brass components, where applicable. Internal parts are
made from carbon steel leaded alloy, the same as standard valves. For
further details, please see the Materials of Construction page.
Main stage orifice is protected by a 150 micron stainless steel screen. Incorporates the Sun floating style construction to minimize the
possibility of internal parts binding due to excessive installation torque
and/or cavity/cartridge machining variations.
Not suitable for use in load holding applications due to spool leakage.
Technical Data
U.S. Units Metric Units
Cavity T-3A
Capacity 50 gpm 200 L/min.
Factory Pressure Settings Established at 4 gpm 15 L/min.
Maximum Operating Pressure 5000 psi 350 bar
Maximum Valve Leakage at 110 SUS (24 cSt) 3 in³/min.@1000 psi 50 cc/min.@70 bar
Response Time - Typical 10 ms
Series (from Cavity) Series 2
Adjustment - Number of Clockwise Turns to Increase Setting 5
Valve Hex Size 1 1/8 in. 28,6 mm
Valve Installation Torque 45 - 50 lbf ft 60 - 70 Nm
Adjustment Screw Internal Hex Size 5/32 in. 4 mm
Adjustment Locknut/Cap Hex Size 9/16 in. 15 mm
Adjustment Nut Torque 80 - 90 lbf in. 9 - 10 Nm
Seal Kits - Cartridge Buna: 990-203-007
Seal Kits - Cartridge Viton: 990-203-006
Model Weight 0.57 lb. 0.26 kg.
RPGC-LAN
Material/Coating
Control Adjustment Range Seal Material
Modifier
L Standard Screw Adjustment A 100 - 3000 psi (7 - 210 bar), N Buna-N /AP Stainless Steel,
1000 psi (70 bar) Standard Passivated
Setting
Control:L
Related Models
RPGC8
Related Documents (opens in new window):
Explanation of Sun cartridge control options - US units.
Explanation of Sun cartridge control options - metric units.
Two-piece, floating cartridge construction.
BK3/SK3-Standardkugelhähne sind an der abgesperrten Seite nur dann dicht, wenn der Druck auf der abgesperrten Seite
gleich null ist oder wenn der Druck in den miteinander verbundenen Leitungen größer ist als in der abgesperrten Seite.
Der mittlere Anschluß ist nicht absperrbar!
Auf Wunsch ist eine allseits Druckbeaufschlagung (PN1=PN2) möglich. Hierfür bei Bestellung A angeben.
The sealing function of BK3/SK3-standard valves is only given when the pressure standing on the closed port is zero or if the
pressure between the connected ports is higher than the pressure on the closed port.
No shut-off position for third port possible!
To apply pressure from all ports (PN1=PN2), a special variant is required. Add A to the order code.
L-Bohrung 0°-90° L-Bohrung, pos. Überdeckung 0°-90°-180° T-Bohrung 0°-90° T-Bohrung 0°-90°-180°
L-bore L-bore, positive overlap T-bore T-bore
Best-Nr./order-code: L Best-Nr./order-code: P Best-Nr./order-code: T Best-Nr./order-code: T180°
DN G** L NPT L X
mm Zoll für/for für/for für/for
Zoll NPT NPT
DN Ermeto L X Ermeto L X
mm L für/for für/for S für/for für/for
Ermeto L Ermeto L Ermeto S Ermeto S
02 NPT-Innengewinde 4 5 1
/8-27NPT – BK3 1/8 NPT 04 4423 BK3 1/8 NPT 04 4445
ANSI B 2.1 6 6 1/ -18NPT – BK3 1/4 NPT 06 4423 BK3 1/4 NPT 06 4445
4
NPT female thread 10 9 3/ -18NPT – BK3 3/8 NPT 10 4423 BK3 3/8 NPT 10 4445
8
ANSI B 2.1 13 11,5 1/ -14NPT – BK3 1/2 NPT 13 4423 BK3 1/2 NPT 13 4445
2
3
20 18 /4-14NPT – BK3 3/4 NPT 20 4423 BK3 3/4 NPT 20 4445
25 22 1 -11,5 NPT – BK3 1 NPT 25 4423 BK3 1 NPT 25 4445
32 22 11/4-11,5 NPT – BK3 11/4 NPT 25 4423 BK3 11/4 NPT 25 4445
40 22 11/2-11,5 NPT – BK3 11/2 NPT 25 4423 BK3 11/2 NPT 25 4445
32 30 11/4-11,5 NPT – BK3 11/4 NPT 32 4423 BK3 11/4 NPT 32 4445
40 35 11/2-11,5 NPT – BK3 11/2 NPT 32 4423 BK3 11/2 NPT 40 4445
50 44 2 -11,5 NPT – BK3 2 NPT 50 4423 BK3 2 NPT 50 4445
MPF MPF series filters are designed for return lines, and
are installed semi-immersed in a reservoir.
Continued Research & Development on both the fil-
ter bodies and the filter elements has resulted in a
MPF filters within this range are suitable for flow
rates up to 750 l/min.
INDICATOR ELECTRICAL
OPTIONS
VISUAL
COMBINED
SCREW-WASHER
New
COVER
absolute filter elements
independently tested REMOVAL HANDLE
in the following Institutes:
FULLY RESPONSIVE
BYPASS VALVE
PRESSURE ALUMINIUM
DIE CAST
È
FILTER ELEMENT
LENGTH OPTIONS
TANK FLANGE
O-RING
HIGH EFFICIENCY
ELEMENT WITH HIGH
DIRT HOLDING CAPACITY
NYLON BOWL
È
CAPTIVE
OPTIONAL O-RING SEAL
EXTENSION
UNI EN ISO 9001
N° 037/98
TUBE
Filter element:
A Series
Inorganic microfibre MP Filter elements - Conform to the following
ISO standards
External support media ISO 2941 - Verification of collapse/burst resistance.
ISO 2942 - Verification of fabrication integrity and determination
of the first bubble point.
ISO 2943 - Verification of material compatibility with fluids.
ISO 3723 - Method for end load test.
ISO 3724 - Verification of flow fatigue characteristics.
Inner support
External wire mesh tube
ISO 3968 - Evaluation of pressure drop versus flow characteristics.
Internal wire mesh ISO 4572 - Multi-pass method for evaluating filtration performance.
Microfibre filtration media
Internal support media
Element material
Absolute filtration
A Series Contamination retention
Inorganic microfibre with acrilic support as per ISO 4572: Multi-pass test.
Filtering area Type MF 030-1 100-1 100-2 100-3 180-1 180-2 400-1 400-2 400-3 750-1
Filter elements A03/A06 335 630 1000 1730 4300 7500 4740 6930 8760 11400
H - ∆P 10 bar A10/A25 335 630 1000 1730 4300 7500 4740 6930 8760 11400
Values in cm2
Element material
Nominal filtration P Series M Series
Resin - impregnated paper Square wire mesh (filtration degree is defined
in microns by the maximum diameter of a
sphere corresponding to the mesh size)
Type MF 030-1 100-1 100-2 100-3 180-1 180-2 400-1 400-2 400-3 750-1
Filtering area P10/P25 410 1020 1660 1900 4000 8000 4480 6550 8280 13450
Filter elements M25 290 460 730 1250 2000 4500 2410 3520 4450 7250
N - ∆P 3 bar M60 290 460 730 1250 2000 4500 2000 3000 3840 6250
M90 290 460 730 1250 2000 4500 2000 3000 3840 5500
Values in cm2
3
MP Filtri - Specification
Filter body:
Materials
Head Seals
Pressure die cast aluminium A Series: Nitrile (Buna-N)
V Series: Viton
Cover
MPF 030-100 Nylon Bypass valve
MPF 180-750 Aluminium Nylon
Bowl Indicator
Nylon - Steel (MPF 180-2/184-2 only) Brass
Working
temperature From -25 to +110°C
For temperatures outside this range, please
consult our Sales Network Organization
Pressure filter
body Maximum working pressure up to 3 bar Fatigue test: a filter body subjected to
Test pressure: 5 bar pressure impulses from 0 to 3 bar will
Minimum burst pressure: 10 bar withstand 1.000.000 cycles
Collapse pressure
filter elements N Series 3 bar
H Series 10 bar
Bypass valve
Calibration pressure Bypass valve, differential opening pressure: B: 1.75 bar ± 10%
Compatibility
with fluids Filter head and bowls Filter elements
compatible for use with: As per ISO 2943; suitable for mineral oils
• mineral oils (types HH-HL-HM-HR-HV-HG as per ISO 6743/4)
(types HH-HL-HM-HR-HV-HG as per ISO 6743/4) synthetic fluids (A and M series only)
• water-based emulsions (types HS-HFDR-HFDS-HFDU as per ISO 6743/4)
(types HFAE-HFAS as per ISO 6743/4)
• synthetic fluids For water-based emulsions (types HFAE-HFAS
(types HS-HFDR-HFDS-HFDU as per ISO 6743/4) as per ISO 6743/4) and fluids other than
• water-glycol those mentioned, please consult our Sales
(types HFC as per ISO 6743/4) Network Organization.
Ask for anodized version
Seals
A Series water - glycol
Nitrile (Buna-N) compatible with mineral oils (types HFC as per ISO 6743/4)
(types HH-HL-HM-HR-HV-HG as per ISO 6743/4)
water - based emulsions V Series
Viton compatible with synthetic fluids
(types HFAE-HFAS as per ISO 6743/4) (types HS-HFDR-HFDS-HFDU as per ISO 6743/4)
Types of indicators
Description:
MPF series filters are fitted with
indicators switching at a pressure of 1.3 bar ± 10%
Visual indicator
V1 Series (botton connection) Colour coded pressure gauge
VR Series (rear connection) (MPF 184, only) scale 0÷6 bar
Electrical indicator
ER Series: Operational information:
Pressure switch with N.O. contacts Max voltage: 48 Vac 50÷60 Hz
EC Series: Max current: 0.5 A resistive, 0.2 A inductive.
Pressure switch with N.C. contacts
4
Selection
& installation information
51
V1 ER - EC MPF SERIES 030 SIZE
31
56
ø 40
Pg7 MPF 030 Filter Flow rate Bowl Port size
Weight
8
l/min
22
assembly length kg
A/F.24 BSP/NPT/SAE
*
56
**
43
ø66
26
90
ø25 A25 35
7
Ø 60 0,40 ø6
P10 33
INDICATOR PORT
0,30 1/2” No. 2 Holes M6 ** Flow rates with 30 mm /s fluid viscosity
2
ø7
** Weight including filter element
∆p bar
0,20
Thread Type A
connections
ø90
G4 1/2” NPT
0,00
R10 G7 SAE 8 - 3/4” - 16 UNF
0 25 50 75 100 125
Flow rate l/min
67.5 ø 40 l/min
Pg7 assembly length kg
BSP/NPT/SAE
A/F.24 * **
56
43
A03 28
75
26
A/F.14
28
A25 75
3/4”
H
9 P10 55
ø8
A03 35
24
A25 170 1”
A
5
Selection
& installation information
Please refer to individual pressure drop cur ves to obtain filter assembly pressure drop information
The following filter sizing recommendations are based using a mineral oil fluid at 30 mm 2/s (cSt) with a maximum total filter assembly
(housing and filter element) pressure drop of 30% of the filter condition indicator (0.4 bar)
96
31
ø 40
Pg7
MPF 180 Filter Flow rate Bowl
l/min Port size Length Weight
kg
89
H
35
A/F.24 * **
56
43
26
A03 100
A/F.14
ø129 1/8” BSP 1/8” BSP A06 120
ø 30
A10 150 1 1 1/4” 231 2,2
H
A25 300
P10 190
32
A03 210
ø40.5
Holes on the tank A06 270
ø110
No. 3 Holes M10 A10 320 2 1 1/4” 450 3,6
120° A25 360
30
°
120
15 °
R9.5
120°
ø10.7
Thread Type A
INDICATOR PORT connections G1 1 1/4” BSP
G4 1 1/4” NPT
G7 SAE 20 - 1 5/8” - 12 UN
INDICATOR
PORT 86 86 ER - EC MPF SERIES 184 SIZE
250
56
43
A/F.24
Pg 7
MPF 184 Filter Flow rate Bowl
l/min Port size Length Weight
kg
103
1/8” BSP
**
11
43
ø 30
A/F.14 27
H
P10 190
IN IN
1/8” BSP
A03 210
A06 270
32
59
ø 40 34 ø1
ø 40.5 No. 4 Holes M10
A10 320 2 1 1/4” 449 3,9
ø110 A25 360
P10 345
90°
C Dual port option availables - See ordering information
45° Flange port option availables - See ordering information
Port “1” Port “2”
** Flow rates with 30 mm2/s fluid viscosity
** Weight including filter element
B
A
A
D
ø159
connections G1 1 1/4” BSP 1/8” BSP
G2 2 Ports 1 1/4” BSP 1/8” BSP
MPF 180 & 184 G4 1 1/4” NPT 1/8” NPT
Housing pressure drop curve G5 2 Ports 1 1/4” NPT 1/8” NPT
0,40 G7 SAE 20 - 1 5/8” - 12 UN 1/8” NPT
G8 2 Ports SAE 20 - 1 5/8” - 12 UN 1/8” NPT
0,30
Flange connections
∆p bar
1 1/4”
0,20 Type A B C D E
F1 1 1/2” SAE 3000 PSI/M 69,85 35,71 M12 1/8” BSP
0,10 F2 1 1/2” SAE 3000 PSI/UNC 69,85 35,71 1/2” UNC 1/8” NPT
* F3 2 Ports 1 1/2” SAE 3000 PSI/M 69,85 35,71 M12 1/8” BSP
0,00 F4 2 Ports 1 1/2” SAE 3000 PSI/UNC 69,85 35,71 1/2” UNC 1/8” NPT
0 75 150 225 300 375
Flow rate l/min
6
Selection
& installation information
Please refer to individual pressure drop cur ves to obtain filter assembly pressure drop information
The following filter sizing recommendations are based using a mineral oil fluid at 30 mm 2/s (cSt) with a maximum total filter assembly
(housing and filter element) pressure drop of 30% of the filter condition indicator (0.4 bar)
ø 40
Filter Flow rate Bowl Weight
Pg7
l/min Port size kg
assembly length BSP/NPT/SAE
A/F.24 *
56
**
98.5
43
26
30°
A IN 1 1/2”
P10 280
44
0
ø 22 A03 170
C
øB
A06 200 1 1/2”
D
146 B
No. 4 Holes M10
A10 260 2 3,5
ø220
4 holes ø11.5 Housing pressure drop curves A25 450
2”
R10 1 1/4” 1 1/2” P10 320
0,40
30°
A03 220
0,30 2” A06 270
A
90°
0,20
A25 500
**
43
26
14
A
IN
P10 440
0
ø 22
430
B
No. 4 Holes M10
connections G1 2” BSP
ø64 0,40
G4 2” NPT
INDICATOR PORT ø220 0,30 2” G7 SAE 32 - 2 1/2” - 12 UN
4 holes ø11.5
∆p bar
General
Pressure drop versus flow rate curve information for both housing and filter elements is in accordance with ISO 3968
Housing pressure drop - The housing pressure drop is proportional to the fluid density
Filter element pressure drop - Filter element pressure drop is proportional to kinematic viscosity therefore always check the
fluid operating temperature and fluid type to obtain the working viscosity according to the following formula:
Selection :
•Housing pressure drop - MPF 180 - 184 with 160 l/min ∆p = 0.06 bar (see curve on page 6)
•Filter element pressure drop (brochure viscosity) - MF 180.1.A25HB with 160 l/min ∆p = 0.13 bar (see curve on page 9)
•Filter element pressure drop (working viscosity) - With 68 mm /s (cSt) ∆p1 = 0.13 x ( 68/30 ) = 0.30 bar
2
•Filter assembly pressure drop ∆p Total = ∆p Housing + ∆p1 Filter element = 0.06 + 0,30 = 0,36 bar* { Acceptable pressure drop value,
as per our recommendations
∆p bar
2,0 2,0
1,0 1,0
0,0 0,0
0 15 30 45 60 75 90 0 25 50 75 100 125 150
Flow rate l/min Flow rate l/min
3,0 3,0
∆p bar
∆p bar
2,0 2,0
1,0 1,0
0,0 0,0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Flow rate l/min Flow rate l/min
8
MF 030 - 1 P...N
1,00
Filter elements - N - ∆P 3bar 0,75
P10
∆p bar
The curves were obtained using a mineral oil with a kinematic viscosity of 30 mm2/s (cSt). 0,50
The ∆p varies proportionally to the fluid kinematic viscosity. For the metal mesh filter elements
0,25 P25
curves (M series), please consult our
Sales and Network Organization 0,00
0 15 30 45 60 75 90
Flow rate l/min
MF 100 - 1 P...N MF 100 - 2 P...N MF 100 - 3 P...N
1,00 1,00 1,00
P10
0,75 0,75 0,75
P10
∆p bar
∆p bar
∆p bar
∆p bar
∆p bar
P10
0,50 0,50 0,50
P10
0,25 P25 0,25 0,25 P25
P25
0,00 0,00 0,00
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 0 75 150 225 300 375 450 0 75 150 225 300 375 450
Flow rate l/min Flow rate l/min Flow rate l/min
MF 400 - 2 P...N MF 400 - 3 P...N MF 750 - 1 P...N
1,00 1,00 1,00
∆p bar
∆p bar
P10
0,50 0,50 0,50
MF 030 - 1 A...H
Filter elements - H - ∆P 10bar 1,00
A03 A06 A10 A25
0,75
The curves were obtained using a mineral oil with a kinematic viscosity of 30 mm2 /s (cSt).
The ∆p varies proportionally to the fluid kinematic viscosity. 0,50
0,25
0,00
0 15 30 45 60 75 90
Flow rate l/min
MF 100 - 1 A...H MF 100 - 2 A...H MF 100 - 3 A...H
1,00 1,00 1,00
A03 A06 A10 A03 A06 A10 A03 A06
A25 A10
0,75 0,75 0,75
∆p bar
∆p bar
∆p bar
∆p bar
∆p bar
0,00
* 0,00
A25
0,00
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 0 75 150 225 300 375 450 0 75 150 225 300 375 450
Flow rate l/min Flow rate l/min Flow rate l/min
∆p bar
∆p bar
Extension tube:
Ordering code and length
CODE LENGTH
XX “H” in mm.
NOTES:
10 100
– When extension tube is ordered, indicator must
11 110 be ordered separately
12 120 – Extension tube lengths have variable sizes
… … multiple of 10 mm.
99 990
Example: length H = 300 mm. Visual indicator.
Filter code: MPF 100 1 - AG1 A10HB/30 – Indicator code: V1
Ordering code:
(See page 11) T5
Example: MPF 030 1 A H1 A10 HB/T5
MPF 750 1 A K1 A10 HB/T5
Applications
Example of application
10
Or dering infor mation
MPF
Bowl lengths
MPF 030 = 1
MPF 100 = 1,2,3
MPF 180-184 = 1,2
MPF 400 = 1,2,3 Bypass valve
MPF 750 = 1
B Bypass 1.75 bar
Seals
A Nitrile (Buna-N)
V Viton
G1 1/2” BSP 1/2” BSP 1 1/4” BSP 1 1/4” BSP 1 1/4” BSP 2” BSP
2 Ports
G2 – 3/4” BSP – 1 1/2” BSP –
1 1/4” BSP
G3 – 1” BSP – – 2” BSP –
Collapse pressure series
G4 1/2” NPT 1/2” NPT 1 1/4” NPT 1 1/4” NPT 1 1/4” NPT 2” NPT
N 3 bar (P/M series)
2 Ports H 10 bar (A series, only)
G5 – 3/4” NPT – 1 1/2” NPT –
1 1/4” NPT
G6 – 1” NPT – – 2” NPT –
2 Ports
G8 – SAE 12 –
SAE 20
SAE 24 – Filter elements N series
P10
P25 Resin-impregnated paper Bx ≥ 2
G9 – SAE 16 – – SAE 32 –
MF
Replacement element
11
Head Quarter :
MP FILTRI S.p.A. Italy
Via Matteotti, 2
20060 Pessano con Bornago (Milano) Italy
Tel. ++39.02/95703.1
Fax ++39.02/95741497-95740188
email: sales@mpfiltri.com
http://www.mpfiltri.com
GREAT BRITAIN
MP FILTRI U.K. Ltd.
Bour ton Industrial Park
Bour ton on the Water
Gloucestershire GL54 2HQ UK
Phone: 01451-822522
Fax: 01451-822282
email: sales@mpfiltri.co.uk
http://www.mpfiltri.co.uk
GERMANY
MP FILTRI D GmbH
Am Wasser turm 5
D-66265 Heusweiler/Holz
Phone: 06806/85022-0
Fax: 06806/85022-18
email: mpfiltrink@aol.com
FRANCE
MP FILTRI FRANCE
B.P. 325
01603 Trevoux Cedex
Tel: 04.74.08.84.78
Telefax: 04.74.08.80.45
email: mpfiltrifrance@wanadoo.fr
USA
MP FILTRI USA Inc.
2055 Quaker Pointe Drive
Quaker town, PA 18951
Phone: 215-529-1300
Fax: 215-529-1902
email: mpusasales@aol.com
http://www.mpfiltriusa.com
CANADA
MP FILTRI CANADA Inc.
210 Jacob Keffer Parkway Concord,
Ontario Canada L4K 4W3
Phone: 905-303-1369
Fax: 905-303-7256
email: mail@mpfiltricanada.com
http://www.mpfiltricanada.com
High Pressure Filters
18/28/38P Series
MAX 700 I/min - 414 bar
18/28/38P Series
Features & Benefits
Typical Applications
Injection moulding
Die casting
Servo controls
Machine tools
Mobile equipment
Model
A B C D E F G H J K L M N P
(A/F)
198 M8 x 1.25
18P-1 (7.79) 32 26 75 24 98 40 20 80 40 55 110 x12
293 (1.26) (1.02) (2.95) (0.94) (3.86) (1.57) (0.79) (3.15) (1.57) (2.16) (4.33) deep
18P-2 (11.53)
228 M10 x 1.5
28P-1 (8.97) 40 29 93 24 100 120 55 27.5 90 45 62 124 x11
337 (1.57) (1.14) (3.66) (0.94) (3.94) (4.72) (2.16) (1.07) (3.54) (1.77) (2.44) (4.88) deep
28P-2 (13.26)
329 M10 x 1.5
38P-1 (12.95) 44 35 128 36 160 50 25 120 60 81 162 x12
448 (1.73) (1.38) (5.04) (1.42) (6.30) (1.97) (0.98) (4.72) (2.36) (3.19) (6.38) deep
38P-2 (17.64)
A Length 1 A Length 1
Torque
Torque 80-95 Nm
A Length 1 A Length 2 A Length 2
Torque 35-40 Nm (60-70 ft/lbs)
22-27Nm (25-30 ft/lbs)
(15-20 ft/lbs)
A Length 2
D
D
D Hex. E
Hex. E
Hex. E Bowl removal
Bowl removal F Bowl removal
F F
G mm
G H G (inches)
H H
J
J J
5
8
0
R3
R3
R3
18/28/38P Series
Flange Face Details
ØG
Thread E metric
F SAE
B
A
C
D
Model A B C D E F G
mm (inches)
11.9 23.8 25.4 50.8 19.0
18P (3/4”) M10 x 1.5-6H x 18 Deep 3
/8-16 UNC-2B x 18 deep
(0.47) (0.94) (1.00) (2.0) (0.75)
14 27.8 28.0 57.1 25.4
28P (1”) M12 x 1.75-6H x 20 Deep 7
/16-14 UNC-2B x 20 deep
(0.55) (1.09) (1.10) (2.25) (1.0)
15.7 31.7 33.0 66.7 31.8
38P (11/4”) M14 x 2-6H x 20 Deep 1 2 / -13 UNC-2B x 20 deep
(0.62) (1.25) (1.30) (2.62) (1.25)
With 3.5 bar bypass the recommended initial pressure drop is max 1.2 bar.
With 7.0 bar bypass the recommended initial pressure drop is max 2.3 bar.
If the medium used has a viscosity different from 30 cSt, pressure drop over the filter can be estimated as follows:
The total p = housing ph + (element pe x working viscosity/30).
0 5 11 16 21 26 32 37 42 0 5 11 16 21 26 32 37 42
3.5 3.5
3.0 43.5 3.0 43.5
02Q
2.5 2.5
02Q
∆p (PSID)
∆p (PSID)
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
2.0 29.0 2.0 29.0
05Q
1.5 1.5
10Q 05Q
1.0 14.5 1.0 14.5
20Q 10Q
0.5 0.5
20Q
0.0 0 0.0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Flow (l/min) Flow (l/min)
18P-1 Empty Housing and High Collapse 18P-2 High Collapse Elements
Flow (US GPM) Flow (US GPM)
0 5 11 16 21 26 32 37 42 0 5 11 16 21 26 32 37 42
3.5 3.5
∆p (PSID)
10Q
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
0 13 26 39 53 66 79 0 13 26 39 53 66 79
2.5 2.5
05Q
∆p (PSID)
∆p (PSID)
02Q
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
0.0 0 0.0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 0 50 100 150 200 250 300
Flow (l/min) Flow (l/min)
28P-1 Empty Housing and High Collapse 28P-2 High Collapse Elements
Flow (US GPM) Flow (US GPM)
0 13 26 39 53 66 79 0 13 26 39 53 66 79
∆p (PSID)
20QH
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
1.5 1.5
0.0 0 0.0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 0 50 100 150 200 250 300
Flow (l/min) Flow (l/min)
18/28/38P Series
Pressure Drop Curves (cont.)
∆p (PSID)
∆p (PSID)
02Q
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
2.0 29.0 2.0 29.0
1.5 1.5
10Q 05Q
1.0 14.5 1.0 14.5
20Q 10Q
0.5 0.5
20Q
0.0 0 0.0 0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Flow (l/min) Flow (l/min)
38P-1 Empty Housing and High Collapse 38P-2 High Collapse Elements
Flow (US GPM) Flow (US GPM)
∆p (PSID)
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
1.5 1.5
0.0 0 0.0 0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Flow (l/min) Flow (l/min)
Element Service
Ordering Information
18/28/38P Series
Ordering Information (cont.)
Product configurator
Box 1 Box 2 Box 3 Box 4 Box 5 Box 6 Box 7 Box 8
38P 1 10Q B M3 M G20 1
Box 2 Box 3
Filter type Degree of filtration
Length Code Element media Glass fibre
Length 1 1 Media code
Length 2 2 Microglass III element 02Q 05Q 10Q 20Q
High collapse element 02QH 05QH 10QH 20QH
Box 7 Box 8
Filter connection Options
Ports Code Options Code
18P: Thread G 3/4 G12 Standard 1
Thread SAE 12 S12 No bypass 2
Thread M27, ISO 6149 M27
SAE flange 3/4" 6000-M H12
SAE flange 3/4" 6000 F12
28P: Thread G 1 G16
Thread SAE 16 S16
Thread M33, ISO 6149 M33
SAE flange 1" 6000-M H16
SAE flange 1" 6000 F16
38P: Thread G 1 1/4 G20 Nominal flow (I/min) at viscosity 30 cSt
Thread G 1 1/2 G24 Filter model 02Q 05Q 10Q 20Q
Thread SAE 20 S20 18P-1 35 60 80 100
Thread SAE 24 S24 18P-2 70 110 130 150
Thread M42, ISO 6149 M42 28P-1 80 100 120 150
Thread M48, ISO 6149 M48 28P-2 140 200 250 300
SAE flange 1 1/4" 6000-M H20 38P-1 140 220 340 420
SAE flange 1 1/4" 6000 F20 38P-2 320 440 560 700
Degree of filtration
Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 16889) / particle size µm [c] Code
ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)=10 ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)=100 ßx(c)=200 ßx(c)=1000
% efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) Disposable High collapse
50.0% 90.0% 98.7% 99.0% 99.5% 99.9% Microglass III element
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 4.5 02Q 02QH
N/A N/A 4.5 5 6 7 05Q 05QH
N/A 6 8.5 9 10 12 10Q 10QH
6 11 17 18 20 22 20Q 20QH
Note 1: Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a ‘standard’ product selection.
Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability.
Gehäusemaße, gültig für alle Kombinationen/Body dimensions valid for all combinations
DN PN L1 B H H1 H2 H4 M SW
mm bar mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
4 500 36 26 43,5 32 8 13 M5 9
6 500 36 26 43,5 32 8 13 M5 9
8 500 36 26 43,5 32 8 13 M5 9
10 500 43 32 49 38 8 16 M5 9
13 500 48 35 51 40 12 17,5 M5 9
16 500 48 38 62 46 12 19 M6 12
20 400 62 49 73 57 12 24,5 M6 14
25 350 66 60 76 60 12 26,5 M6 14
* Die max. zul. PN bitte den Angaben der Rohrverschraubungshersteller entnehmen. / For PN max. see data from the compression fitting manufacturer.
Andere Anschlußarten auf Anfrage. / Other connections on request.
Alle Kugelhähne in DIN-Baulänge lieferbar. / All ball valves also available in DIN-size.
Maßänderungen vorbehalten. / Measurements subject to alteration.
Bestellnummern - Werkstoffkombinationen / Identification numbers - combination of material
02 NPT-Innengewinde 4 5 1/ -27
8 NPT – BKH 1/8 NPT 04 1113 BKH 1/8 NPT 04 1145
ANSI B 2.1 6 6 1/ -18NPT – BKH 1/4 NPT 06 1113 BKH 1/4 NPT 06 1145
4
NPT female thread 10 10 3/ -18NPT – BKH 3/8 NPT 10 1113 BKH 3/8 NPT 10 1145
8
1
ANSI B 2.1 13 13 /2-14NPT – BKH 1/2 NPT 13 1113 BKH 1/2 NPT 13 1145
20 20 3/ -14NPT – BKH 3/4 NPT 20 1113 BKH 3/4 NPT 20 1145
4
25 24 1 -11,5 NPT – BKH 1 NPT 25 1113 BKH 1 NPT 25 1145
32 24 11/4-11,5 NPT – BKH 11/4 NPT 25 1113 BKH 11/4 NPT 25 1145
40 24 11/2-11,5 NPT – BKH 11/2 NPT 25 1113 BKH 11/2 NPT 25 1145
31 UN/UNF-Einschraubgewinde 6 6 7/ -20
16 UNF-2B – BKH 1/4 SAE-port 06 1113 BKH 1/4 SAE-port 06 1145
9
SAE J514Gewinde 10 10 /16-18 UNF-2B – BKH 3/8 SAE-port 10 1113 BKH 3/8 SAE-port 10 1145
ANSI B 1.1 13 13 3/ -16 UNF-2B – BKH 1/2 SAE-port 13 1113 BKH 1/2 SAE-port 13 1145
4
UN/UNF female thread 16 15 7/ -14 UNF-2B – BKH 5/8 SAE-port 16 1113 BKH 5/8 SAE-port 16 1145
8
SAE J514 20 20 1 1/ -12 UN-2B – BKH 3/4 SAE-port 20 1113 BKH 3/4 SAE-port 20 1145
16
Thread ANSI B 1.1 25 24 1 5/ -12 UN-2B – BKH 1 SAE-port 25 1113 BKH 1 SAE-port 25 1145
16
32 24 1 5/ -12 UN-2B – BKH 11/4 SAE-port 25 1113 BKH 11/4 SAE-port 25 1145
8
40 24 1 7/ -12 UN-2B – BKH 11/2 SAE-port 25 1113 BKH 11/2 SAE-port 25 1145
8
LV... LC...
The level indicators series is available for LC... series sight plugs allow visibility of the fluid
both static and mobile applications; the construction contained in the reservoirs, showing the level and also
materials used make it possible to guarantee service with any changes in transparency and emulsion. These indicators
wide temperature variations and compatibility with all are available in three configurations, with transparent
hydraulic fluids. Series LV... level indicators are available with plastic body and with black body, and an aluminum body
fixing centre distance from 76 to 1000 mm. version.
Fixing to reservoirs with unthreaded holes or reduced
thickness can be achieved using series LCC/T equipped with
expansion kit.
3c
3b
Dimensions
7
Reservoir LVA......S LVA......T
holes
5
19
B
4
A
H
A
LVA (Materials)
1 - Cover: Anodised aluminium
19
Ø0
2 - Screws: Phosphated steel Ch. 6
38 (mm) 23.5
3 - Seals: NBR
FPM
4 - Lens: Amorphous transparent Weight
polyamide Size A H (kg)
5 - Nameplate: Painted aluminium
6 - Terminal cap: Nylon LVA10 76 114 0.13
LVA20 127 165 0.18
7 - Nuts: Galvanised steel LVA30 254 292 0.23
B C C
Type
(Pxx - Sxx version) (Rxx version)
Quantity per pack
Number of Parts LVA......M10 M10 10.5 M10
LVA 10 LVA......M12 M12 12.5 M12
LVA......U38 3/8” UNC 10 3/8” UNC
LVA......U12 1/2” UNC 13.5 1/2” UNC
LVA 20
TAM10P01
Ordering information
1 2 3 4 5
LVA
Example: LVA 20 T A M10 S01
1 - Size 4 - Connection
P10 550
SCS 050 A03 515
A10 530
P10 550
SCS 070 A03 515
A10 530
SCS XXX C SCS XXX F
P10 1415
SCS 100 A03 1300
A10 1330
Dimensions
Ø D2 Ø D2
Gasket Ø 42x32x2 Gasket Ø 42x32x2
Ø D3 (60Sh) (60Sh)
(for SCS 100) (for SCS 100)
Riser with
Filter 2 3 4 5 6 7
element
SCS
Example: SCS 050 F G1 A10 A P01
Riser 2 3 4 6 7
only
SCS
Example: SCS 050 F G1 A P01
1 2 5 6 7
Filter
element
Example: CS 050 A10 A P01
F Flange riser
4 - Threaded connection
G 3/4” for SCS 050/070
G1 G 1 1/4” for SCS 100/150
38
THERMAL
TRANSFER
Öl/Wasser-Wärmetauscher
Für den industriellen Einsatz
Serie
Oil/water heat exchangers EKM
For industrial use
Echangeur thermique huile/eau
A usage industriel
Die Schnittperspektive zeigt Mantel mit dicken La perspective de coupe montre un manteau
Stahlwänden und Hochleistungs-Kühlungskam- aux parois d’acier épaisses, et une chambre à
mer mit Kupfernickelrohr und Aluminiumrippen. refroidissement haute performance avec tuyau
de cuivre et nervures aluminium.
Produktbeschreibung / Product description / Discription du produit
Die EKM-Serie ist eine konsequente Wei- The EKM series is a logical further develop- La série EKM est la poursuite logique du
terentwicklung eines Rohrbündel-Wärme- ment of a tube-bank heat exchanger for a développement d’un échangeur thermique
tauschers für weite Anwendungsgebiete in wide range of industrial applications. à faisceau tubulaire pour des domaines
der Industrie. Durch die zusätzliche Kühl- This range is particularly effective due to d’application multiples dans l’industrie.
fläche ist diese Baureihe äußerst effektiv, the additional cooling area, and offers a Grâce à une surface de refroidissement
mit einer Wärmeleistung bis zu 230 kW. heat exchange performance of 230 kW. supplémentaire, cette série est extrême-
Dies wird durch Aluminiumlamellen, die This is produced by aluminium fins, which ment efficace, avec une puissance calorifi-
über das Rohrbündel geschoben werden are pushed over the bank of tubes with que de jusqu’à 230 kW. Ceci peut être réa-
und metallisch verbunden sind, realisiert. metal-to-metal contact. The EKM range of lisé par l’intermédiaire de lamelles d’alumi-
Die EKM-Wärmetauscher haben eine Kühl- heat exchangers has a cooling surface of nium glissées sur le faisceau tubulaire et
fläche von 0,43 m2 bis 18,41 m2. from 0.43 m2 to 18.41 m2. reliées de manière métallique. Les échan-
Die Serie EKM setzt sich aus 20 Grund- The EKM series is constructed of 20 basic geurs thermiques EKM ont une surface de
einheiten zusammen, die jeweils in eine units, and is available as single, double and refroidissement de 0,43 m 2 à 18,41 m 2.
Einfach-, Zweifach- und Vierfach-Ausführ- four pass versions. La série EKM se compose de 20 unités de
ung unterteilt sind. base, subdivisées, respectivement, en ver-
sion simple, double et 4 voies.
Aluminiumrippen und Kupfernickelroh- Aluminium fins and copper tubes Les nervures aluminium et le tube de
re (Standard) sorgen für maximalen ensure maximum levels of heat cuivre assurent un échange thermique
Wärmeaustausch exchange maximal
Große Ölanschlüsse für minimalen Large-bore oil connections for mini- Raccordements huile de grande
Strömungswiderstand mum flow resistance dimension, pour une résistance mini-
Wärmeabfuhr bis 230 kW Heat dissipation up to 230 kW male au courant
Öl-Durchflußmengen bis zu 330 l/min Oil flow rates of up to 330 l/min Dissipation de chaleur jusqu’à 230 kW
Abnehmbare Endkappen für einfache Removable end caps for easy clea- Débit d’huile jusqu’à 330 l/mn.
Reinigung der Rohre ning of the tubes Caches d’extrémité amovibles, pour
Flansche ermöglichen Drehung des Flanges allow the heat exchanger to un nettoyage aisé des tuyaux
Wärmetauschers um 90° be turned through 90° Des brides permettent une rotation à
Wahlweise mit internem Umgehungs- Optionally available with internal 90° de l’échangeur thermique
rückschlagventil (Patentiert) bypass check valve (patented) Au choix avec clapet antiretour de
Hochwertige Materialien High-quality materials dérivation (breveté)
Max. Druck: Öl 35 bar / Wasser 16 bar Max. pressure: oil 35 bar / water 10 bar Matériaux haute qualité
Vollständiges Zubehörprogramm lie- Full range of accessories available Pression max: huile 35 bar / eau 10 bar
ferbar Delivery ex-stock Programme d’accessoires complet
Lieferung ab Lager disponible
Livraison à partir du magasin de stocks
Option Option
Seewasserfähige Ausführung Sea water version Option
Version de l’eau de mer
Endplatten / End plates / Plaques finales: Stahl / Steel / Acier Stahl* / Steel* / Acier*
Endkappen / End caps / Caches: Grauguß / Cast iron / Fonte grise Grauguß* / Cast iron* / Fonte grise*
Dichtungen / Gaskets / Garnitures d’étanchéité Nitrilkautschuk, Zellulosefasern / Nitril rubber, cellulose fibre / Caoutchouc nitré, fibres de cellulose
* Mit einem speziellen chem. Nickel-Beschichtungsverfahren / Nickel coating treatment / Traité avec un procédure de nickel
Berechnungsbeispiel / Example calculation / Example de calcul
Bei abweichenden Ölaus-, bzw. Wasser- For different oil outlet temperatures, water En cas de divergence au niveau de la tem-
eintrittstemperaturen und Viskositäten, ist inlet temperatures and viscosities, the fol- pérature de sortie de l’huile ou de la tempé-
nach den folgenden Berechnungsbeispie- lowing calculation must be made: rature d’entrée de l’eau et de divergence au
len zu verfahren: niveau de la viscosité, procéder comme le
montrent les exemples de calcul suivants:
1. Der Viskositätskorrekturfaktor errechnet 1. The viscosity correction factor is calcula- 1. Le facteur de viscosité est calculé
sich wie folgt: ted as follows: comme suit:
Temperaturdifferenz ∆T (°C) = Temperature difference ∆T (°C) = Différence de température ∆T (°C) =
AW (kW) x 34,1 AW (kW) x 34,1 AW (kW) x 34,1
= 7,2 = 7,2 = 7,2
Q (l/mn) Q (l/mn) Q (l/mn)
daraus folgt: mittl. Öltemp. (°C) = Average oil temp. therefore (°C) = Il en résulte: temp. moy. huile =
t Öl aus + ∆t + t Öl aus t oil out + ∆t + t oil out t huile sor. + ∆t + t huile sor.
= 49°C = 49°C = 49°C
2 2 2
2. Aus Öl-Herstellerdiagramm ISO 68: 2. From oil manufacturer’s data for ISO 68: 2. D’après le diagramme du fabricant de
Viskosität bei 49°C = 38 cSt Viscosity at 49°C = 38 cSt l’huile ISO 68: Viscosité à 49°C = 38 cSt
3. Aus Viskositätskorrekturtabelle „A“: 3. From viscosity correction table „A“: 3. D’après le tableau de correction de la
38 cSt = 1,11 38 cSt = 1,11 viscosité „A“: 38 cSt = 1,11
Aus Leistungsdiagramm Öl/Wasser 2:1 From oil/water 2:1 performance diagram at Il résulte du diagramme de performance
bei einem Ölstrom von 80 l/min und an oil flow of 80 l/min and 23.6 kW, we huile/eau 2:1, à un débit d’huile de 80 l/mn
23,6 kW ergibt sich: thus arrive at: et 23,6 kW:
Kühler Nr. 31 = EKM - 714 - T - CN Cooler n° 31 = EKM - 714 - T - CN Refroidisseur n° 31 = EKM - 714- T - CN
Viskositäts Korrekturkurve Faktor A Die dargestellten Leistungskurven basie- Les courbes de performance représentées
Viscosity correction factor A
Courbe de correction de la viscosité Facteur A ren auf einer Wassereintrittstemperatur sont basées sur une température d’entrée
von 25°C und einer Ölaustrittstemperatur de l’eau de 25°C et sur une température
Korrekturfaktor / Correction factor / Facteur de correction
2,0
1,9 2
1,8
von 50°C, sowie einer Ölviskosität von de sortie de l’huile de 50°C, ainsi que sur
1,7
1,6
20,6 cSt. une viscosité de l’huile de 20,6 cSt.
1,5 Für abweichende Viskositäten kann aus En cas de viscosité divergente, le facteu
1,4 1
1,3
untenstehender Kurve der Korrekturfaktor de correction „A“ peut être déterminé à
1,2
1,1
„A“ abgelesen werden. l’aide de la courbe ci-dessous.
1,0
0,9
0,8
The performance data shown is based on
0,7
0,6
a water inlet temperature of 25°C and an
0,5 oil outlet temperature of 50°C, together
0,4
0,3
with an oil viscosity of 20.6 cSt.
0,2
0,1
For different viscosities, the correction
1 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
factor „A“ can be read off from the perfor-
2 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
cSt
mance curve below.
Kennlinien / Performance Data / Courbes caractéristiques
200
150 40
39
Kühlleistung kW / Cooling performance kW / Puissance de refroidissement en kW
100
90 38
80
37
70
36
60
50 35
40
30
25
siehe Rechenbeispiel 34 30
20 see example calculation
voie example de calcul
33 29
15
32
10 31
9
8
6 28
5 27
4
26
25
3
2,5 24
23
2
22
1,5
21
Die Kennlinien in diesem Diagramm sind vom Durchfluß begrenzt und können in Abstimmung mit dem Hersteller überschritten werden.
The performance Data shown in the diagram are limited by the flow rate, and may be exceeded after consultation with the manufacturer.
Les courbes caractéristiques de ce diagramme sont limitées par le débit et peuvent être dépassées après accord avec le fabricant.
2 EKM-508-O 12 EKM-718-O
Kühlleistung kW / Cooling performance kW / Puissance de refroidissement en kW
19
150
3 EKM-510-O 13 EKM-724-O
18
4 EKM-512-O 14 EKM-736-O
100 17
90
14
16 5 EKM-514-O 15 EKM-1012-O
80
70
6 EKM-518-O 16 EKM-1014-O
60 15
50
13 7 EKM-524-O 17 EKM-1018-O
12
40 8 EKM-536-O 18 EKM-1024-O
11
9 EKM-708-O 19 EKM-1036-O
30
25 10 10 EKM-712-O 20 EKM-1048-O
20 9
15
8
7
10
9
8
6
7
41 47 EKM-1012-F
200 EKM-708-F
Kühlleistung kW / Cooling performance kW / Puissance de refroidissement en kW
42 48 EKM-1014-F
EKM-712-F
150
43 49 EKM-1018-F
52 EKM-714-F
51 50
100 44 EKM-718-F EKM-1024-F
90
50 45 51 EKM-1036-F
80 EKM-724-F
70 49
46 52 EKM-1048-F
60 EKM-736-F
48
50
40 47
30
25
20
46
42
15
45
44
10 43
9
8
B - Gekühltes Medium
EKM-700&1000 EKM-500 G D E - Cooled Medium
S G - Médium refroidi
R
Q C - Kühlwasser „Ein“
C F D - Cooling water inlet
A - Eau de refroidissement On
T T M T
D - Kühlwasser „Aus“
- Cooling water outlet
L C
L - Eau de refroidissement Off
I I B H B
mm / BSPP C E Q R U G L I mm / BSPP C E Q R U G L I
EKM-505-O 187 66 - G 3/4“ - 83 63,5 89 EKM-714-O 435 103 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ - 103 76 127
EKM-508-O 263 82 - G 3/4“ - 83 63,5 89 EKM-718-O 537 103 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ - 103 76 127
EKM-510-O 314 82 - G 3/4“ - 83 63,5 89 EKM-724-O 689 103 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ - 103 76 127
EKM-512-O 365 82 - G 3/4“ - 83 63,5 89 EKM-736-O 994 103 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ - 103 76 127
EKM-514-O 416 82 - G 3/4“ - 83 63,5 89 EKM-1012-O 389 116 G 1/4“ G 1 1/2“ - 116 102 165
EKM-518-O 517 82 - G 3/4“ - 83 63,5 89 EKM-1014-O 440 116 G 1/4“ G 1 1/2“ - 116 102 165
EKM-524-O 670 82 - G 3/4“ - 83 63,5 89 EKM-1018-O 541 116 G 1/4“ G 1 1/2“ - 116 102 165
EKM-536-O 975 82 - G 3/4“ - 83 63,5 89 EKM-1024-O 694 116 G 1/4“ G 1 1/2“ - 116 102 165
EKM-708-O 283 103 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ - 103 76 127 EKM-1036-O 999 116 G 1/4“ G 1 1/2“ - 116 102 165
EKM-712-O 385 103 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ - 103 76 127 EKM-1048-O 1303 116 G 1/4“ G 1 1/2“ - 116 102 165
mm / BSPP C E Q R U G L I mm / BSPP C E Q R U G L I
EKM-505-T 187 66 - G 3/8“ 28 85 63,5 89 EKM-714-T 411 91 - G 1“ 41 95 76 127
EKM-508-T 265 83 - G 3/8“ 28 85 63,5 89 EKM-718-T 513 91 - G 1“ 41 95 76 127
EKM-510-T 314 83 - G 3/8“ 28 85 63,5 89 EKM-724-T 665 91 - G 1“ 41 95 76 127
EKM-512-T 365 83 - G 3/8“ 28 85 63,5 89 EKM-736-T 995 91 - G 1“ 41 95 76 127
EKM-514-T 416 83 - G 3/8“ 28 85 63,5 89 EKM-1012-T 369 113 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ 60 110 102 165
EKM-518-T 517 83 - G 3/8“ 28 85 63,5 89 EKM-1014-T 420 113 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ 60 110 102 165
EKM-524-T 672 83 - G 3/8“ 28 85 63,5 89 EKM-1018-T 522 113 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ 60 110 102 165
EKM-536-T 976 83 - G 3/8“ 28 85 63,5 89 EKM-1024-T 674 113 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ 60 110 102 165
EKM-708-T 258 91 - G 1“ 41 95 76 127 EKM-1036-T 979 113 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ 60 110 102 165
EKM-712-T 360 91 - G 1“ 41 95 76 127 EKM-1048-T 1284 113 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ 60 110 102 165
4 Weg Typ: „F“ / 4 pass type „F“ / 4 voies type „F“
A - Zu kühlendes Medium
Y - Medium to be cooled
B A
- Médium à refroidir
X
B - Gekühltes Medium
R G - Cooled Medium
U D E - Médium refroidi
C - Kühlwasser „Ein“
W - Cooling water inlet
Q A M
- Eau de refroidissement On
T D - Kühlwasser „Aus“
C - Cooling water outlet
- Eau de refroidissement Off
L C
I
mm / BSPP C E Q R U G L I W mm / BSPP C E Q R U G L I W
EKM-708-F 262 107 G 1/4“ G 1/2“ 44 95 75 127 18 EKM-1012-F 363 112 G 1/4“ G 3/4“ 64 110 101 165 18
EKM-712-F 364 107 G 1/4“ G 1/2“ 44 95 75 127 18 EKM-1014-F 413 112 G 1/4“ G 3/4“ 64 110 101 165 18
EKM-714-F 415 107 G 1/4“ G 1/2“ 44 95 75 127 18 EKM-1018-F 515 112 G 1/4“ G 3/4“ 64 110 101 165 18
EKM-718-F 516 107 G 1/4“ G 1/2“ 44 95 75 127 18 EKM-1024-F 667 112 G 1/4“ G 3/4“ 64 110 101 165 18
EKM-724-F 669 107 G 1/4“ G 1/2“ 44 95 75 127 18 EKM-1036-F 972 112 G 1/4“ G 3/4“ 64 110 101 165 18
EKM-736-F 974 107 G 1/4“ G 1/2“ 44 95 75 127 18 EKM-1048-F 1277 112 G 1/4“ G 3/4“ 64 110 101 165 18
EKM-1012 128 20 157 92 392 ∅ 11 x 25 G 11/2“ 102 42,9 77,7 4,38 15,40
EKM-1014 128 20 207 92 443 ∅ 11 x 25 G 11/2“ 102 42,9 77,7 5,17 16,90
EKM-1018 128 20 309 92 544 ∅ 11 x 25 G 11/2“ 102 42,9 77,7 6,73 19,80
EKM-1024 128 20 461 92 697 ∅ 11 x 25 G 11/2“ 102 42,9 77,7 9,06 21,80
EKM-1036 128 20 766 92 1002 ∅ 11 x 25 G 11/2“ 102 42,9 77,7 13,74 30,50
EKM-1048 128 20 1071 92 1306 ∅ 11 x 25 G 11/2“ 102 42,9 77,7 18,41 39,80
EKM - 1014 - O - R - CN - 01
Anschlußtyp Serie
Connection type
CN = Kupfer/Nickel / Copper/nickel / Cuivre/nickel
Type de raccordement
SW = Seewasser / Seawater / eau de mer
NPT = -
SAE = S
BSPF = M Bypass-Ventil / Bypass valve / Soupape by-pass
SAE Flansch / SAE flange = FM
Kühlwasserführung
Cooling water connection system
Raccordement eau de refroidissement
Baugröße O = 1- Weg / 1-pass / 1-voie
Unit size T = 2- Weg / 2-pass / 2-voies
Taille F = 4- Weg, nur Serie 700 und 1000
4-pass, 700 and 1000 series only
4-voies, seulement serié 700 et 1000
Achtung: Unsachgemäßer Einbau kann Caution: Incorrect installation can lead to Attention: Un montage erroné peut en-
zur Beschädigung des Kühlers führen. damage to the cooler. traîner un endommagement du refroidis-
seur.
EKM - 500 75 45 22 -
* Schweiz, Italien, Frankreich * Werden von Deutschland bearbeitet / Treated from Germany / Traités par l’Allemagne
Especificaciones técnicas
Modelo AVTA
Indice Página
Introducción ................................................................................................................................. 3
Datos técnicos ............................................................................................................................. 3
Instalación .................................................................................................................................. 12
Instalación del sensor ................................................................................................................ 12
Repuestos y accesorios ............................................................................................................ 13
Tamaño ...................................................................................................................................... 14
Diagramas ................................................................................................................................. 15
Modelo AVTA
Cuerpo de la válvula con orificio, cono de cierre y Elemento termostático sellado herméticamente
elementos sellantes. con sensor, fuelle y carga.
Modelo AVTA
Aplicación AVTA
para fluido neutros
Las válvulas para agua refrigerante AVTA con
funcionamiento independiente se utilizan
asiduamente para regular la temperatura de
un gran número de diferentes máquinas e
instalaciones donde se requiera refrigeración.
AVTA siempre se abre para admitir caudal a la
temperatura ascendente del sensor. La válvula
se puede instalar bien en la línea del caudal
del agua de refrigeración o en la de retorno.
Aplicaciones comunes:
• Máquinas de moldeo por inyección
• Compresores
• Bombas de vacío
• Máquinas de limpieza en seco
• Planta de destilación
• Máquinas de impresión
• Sistemas hidráulicos
• Rodillos/molinos
AVTA con conexión NPT, póngase en
contacto con Danfoss para la hoja de datos
norteamericana.
A: Carga de adsorción
B: Carga de masa
C: Carga universal
Modelo AVTA
Pedidos: La carga está constituida de carbón activo y • Se puede instalar en cualquier posición en
AVTA con carga de CO2 que se adsorbe a la temperatura lo que se refiere a orientación y temperatura
adsorción descendente del sensor y produce cambios • Soporta hasta una temperatura de sensor
de presión en el elemento. de +130°C
• Dimensiones reducidas del sensor - ∅ 9,5
Características especiales × 160 mm
• Amplio rango de regulación • Máx. presión del sensor 25 bar
Rango de Longitud
Conexión regulación Valor kv tubo capilar Modelo Código 1)
(m3/h a ∆p = 1 bar)
[m]
G 3/8 1,4 AVTA 10 003N1144
G 1/2 1,9 AVTA 15 003N0107
+10 → +80°C 2,3
G 3/4 3,4 AVTA 20 003N0108
G1 5,5 AVTA 25 003N0109
1)
El código incluye la válvula completa junto con la empaquetadura del tubo capilar.
Sensores de inmersión, véase “Repuestos y accesorios”, en la página 13.
Modelo AVTA
Características especiales
• Dimensiones reducidas del sensor - ∅ 9,5
× 190 mm
• Constante de tiempo corta
• El sensor debe estar más caliente que la
válvula durante su instalación
• Máx. presión del sensor 25 bar
Rango de regulación 0 → +30°C
Máx. temperatura del sensor +57°C
Valor kv Longitud del tubo capilar 1)
Conexión Modelo Código
(m3/h a ∆p = 1 bar) [m]
G 1/2 1,9 AVTA 15 003N0042
2
G 3/4 3,4 AVTA 20 003N0043
1)
El código incluye la válvula completa junto con la empaquetadura del tubo capilar.
Dimensiones y pesos
AVTA
Modelo H1 H2 L L1 a b Peso
Modelo AVTA
Modelo AVTA
Modelo AVTA
Dimensiones
AVTA DZR
Modelo H1 H2 L1 L2 L3 b
(estándar) Con. roscada Con. soldadura ISO 228/1
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
AVTA 15 217 133 75 141 149 G 3/4 A
AVTA 20 217 133 80 152 164 G1A
AVTA 25 227 138 83 167 167 G 11/4 A
Modelo AVTA
Aplicación AVTA SS
para fluidos agresivos
Un cuerpo de la válvula de acero inoxidable
significa que la válvula se puede utilizar con
fluidos agresivos en aplicaciones del sector
naval y de industria química.
Estadio de presión PN 16; máx. +130°C
Para fluidos extremadamente agresivos, se
puede suministrar una válvula de titanio
(póngase en contacto con Danfoss).
Las válvulas AVTA SS disponen de una carga
de adsorción como estándar.
AVTA SS también está disponible con carga
de masa o carga universal (póngase en
contacto con Danfoss).
Modelo AVTA
Dimensiones
AVTA SS
Modelo H1 H2 L a
[mm] [mm] [mm] ISO 228/1
AVTA 15 240 133 72 G½
AVTA 20 240 133 90 G 3/4
AVTA 25 250 138 95 G1
Modelo AVTA
Tubo capilar
Instale el tubo capilar sin que aparezcan
ángulos agudos. Alivie el tubo capilar en la
parte final. Es importante realizar el alivio
donde pueda darse vibración.
Nota
Cuando se utiliza AVTA, el sensor debe poder
reaccionar a las variaciones de temperatura
del agua refrigerante al comienzo del sistema.
Conviene utilizar una línea de desvío con una
válvula de cierre para asegurar que el caudal
llegue al sensor durante el arranque.
Instalación del sensor Si se instala un sensor de inmersión, se Instale siempre una válvula AVTA con un
recomienda el uso de compuestos sensor pequeño (∅ 9.5 × 190 mm) en la línea
termoconductivos. Esto reducirá el tiempo de del caudal donde el líquido regulado es más
reacción. Ver “Repuestos y accesorios”, frio (“sensor más caliente”).
página 13.
Carga de adsorción Carga de masa Carga universal
Modelo AVTA
Accesorios
Descripción Descripción Código
Latón para sensor ∅ 18 G 3/4 003N0050
Sensor de inmersión
máx. presión 25 bar Latón para sensor 003N0051
∅ 18 mm 3/4 - 14 NPT
L = 220 mm
18/8 acero1) para sensor ∅ 18 G 3/4 003N0192
Sensor de inmersión Latón para sensor ∅ 9,5 G /2 1 017-4367
máx. presión 25 bar
L = 182 mm 18/8 acero1) para sensor ∅ 9,5 G 1/2 003N0196
Modelo AVTA
Ejemplo
Seleccionar una válvula de agua de
refrigeración para regular la temperatura de
una bomba de vacío.
Datos proporcionados:
- Refrigeración necesaria con carga
completa 10 kW.
- Temperatura del aceite para ser mantenida Fig. 4
constante a +45°C
- p1 agua de refrigeración = 3 bar
- p3 de salida = 0 bar can que una válvula con carga de adsorción
- t1 temperatura de agua de refrigeración = es la elección correcta.
+20°C El rango de tempertura +10 → +80°C está en
- t2 temperatura de salida = +30°C orden.
Modelo AVTA
Tamaño
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Calentamiento o refrigeración con agua. Relación entre la cantidad de agua y la caída de presión en la válvula.
Ejemplo: Salida de refrigeración necesaria 10 Ejemplo: Caudal de 0,85 m³/h con una caída de presión de 1,5 bar.
kW, con ∆t = 10 °C. El valor kv se convierte en 0,7 m³/h.
Caudal necesario 0,85 m³/h.
bar
Caída de presión en la
válvula
Fig. 3
El nomograma muestra los
rangos kv de la válvula. Los
valores kv siempre se indi-
can en m³/h para el caudal
de agua con una caída de
presión Dp de 1 bar. La
válvula se debe seleccionar m3/h
Capacidad con la válvula completamente
de manera que el valor kv
abierta
esté en medio del rango de
regulación.
Ejemplo: AVTA 10 y 15 son Fig. 4
las más adecuadas para un Cantidad de caudal de la válvula en posición
valor kv de 0,7. completamente abierta, como función de la caída
de presión Dp.
Modelo AVTA
Features
• Three types of metering needle design can be selected
when ordering FM2 and FM3 valves to achieve the
throttle characteristics required to suit the applica-
tion.
• Large bypass check valves allow high flow at low pres- 7
sure drop.
• Sizes:
NG06 / CETOP 3 FM2
NG10 / CETOP 5 FM3
NG16 / CETOP 7 FM4
NG25 / CETOP 8 FM6
Technical data
Series FM2 FM3 FM4 FM6
Size NG06 NG10 NG16 NG25
Mounting pattern NFPA D03 NFPA D05 NFPA D07 NFPA D08
CETOP 03 CETOP 05 CETOP07 CETOP 08
Max. operating pressure [bar] 350 350 350 210
Max. flow 53 LPM 76 LPM 200 LPM 341 LPM
Opening pressure [bar] 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Meter-in throttle • • • —
Meter-out throttle • • • •
Mounting position unrestricted unrestricted unrestricted unrestricted
Ambient temperature [°C] max. +50 max. +50 max. +50 max. +50
Fluid temperature [°C] max. +70 max. +70 max. +70 max. +70
Weight [kg] 1.3 2.4 5.4 7.9
FM_UK.INDD RH_21.11.07
FM DD V
Code Needle
Standard
omit
conical
Fine,
cylindrical
D
Hollow bored
with V notch
A two-stage needle provides fine adjustment in the lower flow range with 3 adjustment rotations. After 3 more rotations,
the valve is completely open.
7 Design "D"
A cylindrical needle with a V notch allows the fine adjustment over the entire setting range.
FM 4 DD V HT
FM 6 DD K V
FM_UK.INDD RH_21.11.07
7
FM3 standard needle FM3D needle with V notch
FM_UK.INDD RH_21.11.07
FM_UK.INDD RH_21.11.07
FM2
Meter-in
Valve side
Manifold side
Meter-in or meter-out
A functional change is achieved by ro-
tating the mounting position of the valve
180° about the longitudinal axis (A-B).
Meter-out
FM_UK.INDD RH_21.11.07
FM3
Meter-in
Meter-in or meter-out
Meter-out
FM_UK.INDD RH_21.11.07
FM4
Meter-in Meter-out
FM_UK.INDD RH_21.11.07
FM6
Meter-out
Adjustment: knob
FM_UK.INDD RH_21.11.07
Features
• The valve bodies of the Parker Manapak valve series
CM are made of steel.
• Eight options for the arrangement of the check valve
in the body offer a multitude of uses for hydraulic
switching.
• The function can be changed by turning the valve.
• CM2 - NG06 (CETOP3)
CM3 - NG10 (CETOP5)
Technical data
Series CM2 CM3
7
Mounting pattern ISO 4401-03-02-0-94 ISO 4401-05-04-0-94
Max. operating pressure [bar] 350 350
Max. flow [l/min] 53 76
Opening pressure [bar] 0.3 0.3
Mounting position unrestricted unrestricted
Ambient temperature [°C] max. +50 max. +50
Fluid temperature [°C] max. +70 max. +70
Weight [kg] 0.9 1.7
CM_UK.INDD RH_10.03.08
CM V
Schematics
The valve side is shown at the top of the symbols, the manifold side with channel designation is shown on the bottom.
CM_UK.INDD RH_10.03.08
CM2
Bottom view* (manifold side)
*O-Ring plate is
not shown!
This view shows
the TT model.
Front side
Top view 7
CM_UK.INDD RH_10.03.08
CM_UK.INDD RH_10.03.08
CM3
Bottom view* (manifold side)
*O-Ring plate is
not shown!
This view shows
the AA model.
Front side
Top view
CM_UK.INDD RH_10.03.08
CM_UK.INDD RH_10.03.08
Funtion
These valves are "normally open" devices that allow fluid
to flow trough the controlled port during their non-actu- Example PP
ated or "at rest" condition. When downstream pressure
exceeds the value set by the spring force, the control
piston moves off its seat, closing off the flow path and thus
reducing the fluid passing through from the main system.
The cushioned piston modulates to maintain the preset
pressure in this branch of the hydraulic circuit. If, due to ex-
ternal forces, the pressure continues to rise in this branch
circuit, the piston will keep moving against the spring force
allowing fluid to be drained to the tank, thereby limiting
maximum pressure to the valve's setting.
Features Schematics
• PRDM Manapak sandwich valves may be selected to PRDM*AA
reduce pressure in the 'P', 'A' or 'B' port.
• The direct operated, cushioned piston design results in
fast response, low leakage and minimal hysteresis. 7
• Up to 5 pressure adjustment ranges are available with
max. pressure settings of:
bar 25, 70, 160, 210, 350 for PRDM2,
PRDM*BB
bar 19, 50, 100, 150, 210 for PRDM3.
• Adjustment modes:
- Slotted head with lock nut
- Key lock
- Turning knob
• PRDM2 - NG06 (CETOP 3)
PRDM*PP
PRDM3 - NG10 (CETOP 5)
Technical data
Gauge port option C
Series PRDM2 PRDM3
Port size NG06 NG10
Mounting pattern ISO 4401
Max. operating pressure
P, A, B [bar] 350 315
T [bar] 50 50
Weight [kg] 1.3 2.6
Viscosity range [cSt][mm²/s] 12...230
Filtration ISO 4406 (1999) 18/16/13
Max. leakage P - A: 5ml/min
PRDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
PRD M V
Code Connection
PP P Code Adjustment
Slotted head
AA A
S screw with
BB B lock nut
L Key lock
Pressure range 1) K Turning knob2)
2)
NG06 only
Code PRDM2 Code PRDM3
02 1.5 to 25 bar 01 1.5 to 19 bar
06 up to 64 bar 05 up to 50 bar
16 up to 160 bar 10 up to 100 bar
21 up to 210 bar 15 up to 150 bar
35 up to 350 bar 21 up to 210 bar
1)
For optimum performance it is recommended to
use the appropriate pressure stage, e.g. for 150
PRDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
PRDM2 02
PRDM2 06
PRDM2 16/21
PRDM2 35
PRDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
PRDM3 01
PRDM3 05
PRDM3 10
PRDM3 15
PRDM3 21
PRDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
PRDM2
PRDM3
PRDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
PRDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
Function
PT... pressure is relieved from P to T at the adjusted
value.
TT... pressure is relieved from T' to T at the adjusted
pressure. RDM2 Example PT
Features
• The direct operated, cushioned piston design results in
fast response, low leakage and minimal hysteresis.
• Up to 5 pressure adjustment ranges are available with
max. pressure settings of: RDM2
bar 25, 64, 160, 210, 350 for RDM2,
bar 19, 50, 100, 150, 210 for RDM3. Schematics
• Adjustment modes: RDM*PT
- Slotted head with lock nut
- Key lock 7
- Turning knob
• RDM2 - NG06 (CETOP3)
RDM3 - NG10 (CETOP5)
RDM*TT
RDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
Ordering code
RD M V
7
Performance curves
RDM2 02 RDM2 06
RDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
RDM3 01 RDM3 05
RDM3 10 RDM3 15
7
RDM3 21
RDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
RDM2
7 RDM3
RDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
Delivery address:Mackenrodtstraße 14, JUMO House 885 Fox Chase, Suite 103
36039 Fulda, Germany Temple Bank, Riverway Coatesville PA 19320, USA
Postal address: 36035 Fulda, Germany Harlow, Essex CM 20 2TT, UK Phone: 610-380-8002
Phone: +49 661 6003-0 Phone: +44 1279 635533 1-800-554-JUMO
Fax: +49 661 6003-607 Fax: +44 1279 635262 Fax: 610-380-8009
e-mail: mail@jumo.net e-mail: sales@jumo.co.uk e-mail: info@JumoUSA.com
Internet: www.jumo.net Internet: www.jumo.co.uk Internet: www.JumoUSA.com
Technical data
Terminal head Form B DIN 43 729, aluminium die-casting, M 20x1.5; IP54,
ambient temperature -40 to +100°C
Form BUZ, aluminium die-casting, M 20x1.5; IP65, ambient temperature -40 to +100°C
Form BUZH, aluminium die-casting, M 20x1.5; IP65, ambient temperature -40 to +100°C
Form BBK, plastic, M 20x1.5; IP54, ambient temperature -30 to +130°C
Caution: reduced ambient temperature when using transmitters,
Data Sheets 70.7030 (95.6530) and 70.7010 (95.6550)
Extension tube stainless steel 1.4571, length 130mm (150mm for Type 902002/50.../51...)
Process connection thread, stainless steel 1.4571
pocket, stainless steel 1.4571 or steel 1.7335
Protection tube stainless steel 1.4571, 9mm, 11mm and 12mm dia.
Measuring insert replaceable, Pt100 temperature sensor EN 60 751, Cl. B, 2-wire circuit
(not replaceable on Type 902002/25)
Response times t0.9 approx. 50sec, in water 0.2 m/sec, 9mm dia.
Transmitter analog transmitter, output 4 - 20mA, Data Sheet 70.7030 (95.6530)
analog transmitter, output 0 - 10V, Data Sheet 70.7030 (95.6530)
programmable transmitter, output 4 - 20mA/20 - 4mA, Data Sheet 70.7010 (95.6550)
Accessories pocket, Data Sheet 90.9721
01.05/00311468
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG JUMO Instrument Co. Ltd. JUMO PROCESS CONTROL INC.
Delivery address:Mackenrodtstraße 14, JUMO House 885 Fox Chase, Suite 103
36039 Fulda, Germany Temple Bank, Riverway Coatesville PA 19320, USA
Postal address: 36035 Fulda, Germany Harlow, Essex CM 20 2TT, UK Phone: 610-380-8002
Phone: +49 661 6003-0 Phone: +44 1279 635533 1-800-554-JUMO
Fax: +49 661 6003-607 Fax: +44 1279 635262 Fax: 610-380-8009
e-mail: mail@jumo.net e-mail: sales@jumo.co.uk e-mail: info@JumoUSA.com
Internet: www.jumo.net Internet: www.jumo.co.uk Internet: www.JumoUSA.com
Dimensions
01.05/00311468
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG JUMO Instrument Co. Ltd. JUMO PROCESS CONTROL INC.
Delivery address:Mackenrodtstraße 14, JUMO House 885 Fox Chase, Suite 103
36039 Fulda, Germany Temple Bank, Riverway Coatesville PA 19320, USA
Postal address: 36035 Fulda, Germany Harlow, Essex CM 20 2TT, UK Phone: 610-380-8002
Phone: +49 661 6003-0 Phone: +44 1279 635533 1-800-554-JUMO
Fax: +49 661 6003-607 Fax: +44 1279 635262 Fax: 610-380-8009
e-mail: mail@jumo.net e-mail: sales@jumo.co.uk e-mail: info@JumoUSA.com
Internet: www.jumo.net Internet: www.jumo.co.uk Internet: www.JumoUSA.com
Dimensions
Terminal head Form BUZ Terminal head Form BUZH Terminal head Form BBK
extra code 320 extra code 321 extra code 322
01.05/00311468
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG JUMO Instrument Co. Ltd. JUMO PROCESS CONTROL INC.
Delivery address:Mackenrodtstraße 14, JUMO House 885 Fox Chase, Suite 103
36039 Fulda, Germany Temple Bank, Riverway Coatesville PA 19320, USA
Postal address: 36035 Fulda, Germany Harlow, Essex CM 20 2TT, UK Phone: 610-380-8002
Phone: +49 661 6003-0 Phone: +44 1279 635533 1-800-554-JUMO
Fax: +49 661 6003-607 Fax: +44 1279 635262 Fax: 610-380-8009
e-mail: mail@jumo.net e-mail: sales@jumo.co.uk e-mail: info@JumoUSA.com
Internet: www.jumo.net Internet: www.jumo.co.uk Internet: www.JumoUSA.com
01.05/00311468
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG JUMO Instrument Co. Ltd. JUMO PROCESS CONTROL INC.
Delivery address:Mackenrodtstraße 14, JUMO House 885 Fox Chase, Suite 103
36039 Fulda, Germany Temple Bank, Riverway Coatesville PA 19320, USA
Postal address: 36035 Fulda, Germany Harlow, Essex CM 20 2TT, UK Phone: 610-380-8002
Phone: +49 661 6003-0 Phone: +44 1279 635533 1-800-554-JUMO
Fax: +49 661 6003-607 Fax: +44 1279 635262 Fax: 610-380-8009
e-mail: mail@jumo.net e-mail: sales@jumo.co.uk e-mail: info@JumoUSA.com
Internet: www.jumo.net Internet: www.jumo.co.uk Internet: www.JumoUSA.com
01.05/00311468
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG JUMO Instrument Co. Ltd. JUMO PROCESS CONTROL INC.
Delivery address:Mackenrodtstraße 14, JUMO House 885 Fox Chase, Suite 103
36039 Fulda, Germany Temple Bank, Riverway Coatesville PA 19320, USA
Postal address: 36035 Fulda, Germany Harlow, Essex CM 20 2TT, UK Phone: 610-380-8002
Phone: +49 661 6003-0 Phone: +44 1279 635533 1-800-554-JUMO
Fax: +49 661 6003-607 Fax: +44 1279 635262 Fax: 610-380-8009
e-mail: mail@jumo.net e-mail: sales@jumo.co.uk e-mail: info@JumoUSA.com
Internet: www.jumo.net Internet: www.jumo.co.uk Internet: www.JumoUSA.com
01.05/00311468
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG JUMO Instrument Co. Ltd. JUMO PROCESS CONTROL INC.
Delivery address:Mackenrodtstraße 14, JUMO House 885 Fox Chase, Suite 103
36039 Fulda, Germany Temple Bank, Riverway Coatesville PA 19320, USA
Postal address: 36035 Fulda, Germany Harlow, Essex CM 20 2TT, UK Phone: 610-380-8002
Phone: +49 661 6003-0 Phone: +44 1279 635533 1-800-554-JUMO
Fax: +49 661 6003-607 Fax: +44 1279 635262 Fax: 610-380-8009
e-mail: mail@jumo.net e-mail: sales@jumo.co.uk e-mail: info@JumoUSA.com
Internet: www.jumo.net Internet: www.jumo.co.uk Internet: www.JumoUSA.com
Stock versions
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Sales No.
- - - - - - /
902002/10 - 402 - 1003 - 1 - 9 - 160 - 104 / 000 90/00055562
902002/10 - 402 - 1003 - 1 - 9 - 250 - 104 / 000 90/00055563
902002/10 - 402 - 1003 - 1 - 9 - 400 - 104 / 000 90/00055564
902002/10 - 402 - 2003 - 1 - 9 - 160 - 104 / 000 90/00055565
902002/10 - 402 - 2003 - 1 - 9 - 250 - 104 / 000 90/00055566
902002/10 - 402 - 2003 - 1 - 9 - 400 - 104 / 000 90/00055567
902002/10 - 402 - 1001 - 1 - 9 - 160 - 104 / 330 (0 to 100°C) 90/00054616
902002/10 - 402 - 1001 - 1 - 9 - 160 - 104 / 330 (0 to 200°C) 90/00087522
902002/10 - 402 - 1001 - 1 - 9 - 250 - 104 / 330 (0 to 100°C) 90/00054617
902002/10 - 402 - 1001 - 1 - 9 - 250 - 104 / 330 (0 to 200°C) 90/00087527
902002/10 - 402 - 1001 - 1 - 9 - 400 - 104 / 331 (0 to 100°C) 90/00335111
902002/25 - 402 - 1003 - 1 - 7 - 100 - 104 / 330 (0 to 100°C) 90/00081832
902002/25 - 402 - 1003 - 1 - 7 - 100 - 104 / 331 (0 to 100°C) 90/00342414
01.05/00311468
1.1 SCP Mini pressure sensors Technical data
SCP Mini 004 006 010 016 025 040 060 100 160 250 400 600
pressure range *
0...4 0...6 0...10 0...16 0...25 0...40 0...60 0...100 0...160 0...250 0...400 0...600
PN (bar)
overload pressure
2 times
Pmax (bar)
burst pressure
3- times 2,5-times
PBurst (bar)
Accuracy
characteristic curve deviation ± 0,5 % FS
start point setting
General
response time 1 ms
long-term stability < 0,1 % FS/a
weight ca. 80 g
load reversals ! 20 Mio.
9 Catalogue 4083-2/UK
1.1 SCP Mini pressure sensors Dimensional drawings and Order codes
M12x1
SW34
hex.34
90 max.
49 max.
Ø22 Ø22
SW22 SW22
hex.22 hex.22
12
12
ED-seal ED-seal
G1/4A G1/4A
Ø19 Ø19
10 Catalogue 4083-2/UK
Catalogue HY11-3500/UK Electronic Pressure Switch
Characteristics Series SCPSD
• Compact
• Rugged
• Reliable
• Easy operation
• Long-term stability
• Excellent interference resistance
• Metal housing
• High protection class
• Many variants
• Rotatable
• Analogue output
• Password
• MPa, bar, psi
12
Intelligent settings which are not possible with a mechani- conditions.
cal switch can be achieved with these convenient switch
With its directionally settable housing, the display can
functions. Several switches can be replaced by a single
always be read very easily.
controller.
Universal
The analogue output is individually settable
Many versions are available to suit a wide variety of
• 0/4…20 mA switchable
applications.
• Settable initial pressure
• Settable final pressure
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
Easy to operate
• 3 large keys
• Display of units
Rugged
• Metal housing
Programming module
• Watertight
• Can be set with
• High interference resistance
ControllerWIN
• Vibration resistant software
• Shockproof
12
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
12
1)
other sealing materials (FPM, EPDM etc.) on request
overload protection yes 2)
Does not apply to DIN EN 175301-803 form A (formerly DIN43650)
current consumption < 100 mA version
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
SCPSD-xxx-04-x7 SCPSD-xxx-14-x5
2 switching outputs; 2 switching outputs;
M12x1; 4-pole 1 analogue output;
M12x1; 5-pole
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
High and low pressure High pressure (from 60 bar) Low pressure (up to 16 bar)
DMS/ceramic DMS Ceramic
12
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
SCPSD-100-04-27
Pressure range
004; 010; 016; 060; 100; 160, 400; 600 bar
Pressure range 100 bar
2 switching outputs
G1/4 BSPP internal thread
1 switching output; without analogue output M12 plug-in connector
DIN EN 175301-803 form A
SCPSD - xxx - 04 - x 6
(formerly DIN 43650) plug-in connector
SCPSD-60-14-27
2 switching outputs; without analogue output SCPSD - xxx - 04 - x 7 Pressure range 60 bar
M12x1 plug-in connector; 4-pole
1 switching output
1 analogue output
1 switching output; with analogue output SCPSD - xxx - 14 - x 7 G1/4 BSPP internal thread
M12x1 plug-in connector; 4-pole M12 plug-in connector
Accessories
PC programming kit SCSD-PRG-KIT
Fixing clamp SCSD-S27
Reducing adaptor M22x1,5 SCA-1/4-M22x1.5-ED
Reducing adaptor G1/2 BSPP SCA-1/4-ED-1/2-ED
Damping adaptor SCA-1/X-EDX-1/X-D
Flange adaptor for mechanical pressure switch SCAF-1/4-40
Cable length in m
02 2 m
05 5 m
10 10 m
12 Plug-in connector
45 M12 cable socket; straight
55 M12 cable socket; 90° angled
56 DIN EN 175301-803 form A plug connector
(formerly DIN 43650)
Separate plugs
M12 cable socket; straight SCK-145
M12 cable socket; 90° angled SCK-155
DIN EN 175301-803 Form A plug connector
SCK-006
(formerly DIN 43650)
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
• Compact
• Rugged
• Reliable
• Easy operation
• Long-term stability
• Excellent interference resistance
• Metal housing
• High protection class
• Many variants
• Rotatable
• Analogue output
• Password
• MPa, bar, psi
12
Intelligent settings which are not possible with a mechani- conditions.
cal switch can be achieved with these convenient switch
With its directionally settable housing, the display can
functions. Several switches can be replaced by a single
always be read very easily.
controller.
Universal
The analogue output is individually settable
Many versions are available to suit a wide variety of
• 0/4…20 mA switchable
applications.
• Settable initial pressure
• Settable final pressure
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
Easy to operate
• 3 large keys
• Display of units
Rugged
• Metal housing
Programming module
• Watertight
• Can be set with
• High interference resistance
ControllerWIN
• Vibration resistant software
• Shockproof
12
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
12
1)
other sealing materials (FPM, EPDM etc.) on request
overload protection yes 2)
Does not apply to DIN EN 175301-803 form A (formerly DIN43650)
current consumption < 100 mA version
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
SCPSD-xxx-04-x7 SCPSD-xxx-14-x5
2 switching outputs; 2 switching outputs;
M12x1; 4-pole 1 analogue output;
M12x1; 5-pole
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
High and low pressure High pressure (from 60 bar) Low pressure (up to 16 bar)
DMS/ceramic DMS Ceramic
12
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
SCPSD-100-04-27
Pressure range
004; 010; 016; 060; 100; 160, 400; 600 bar
Pressure range 100 bar
2 switching outputs
G1/4 BSPP internal thread
1 switching output; without analogue output M12 plug-in connector
DIN EN 175301-803 form A
SCPSD - xxx - 04 - x 6
(formerly DIN 43650) plug-in connector
SCPSD-60-14-27
2 switching outputs; without analogue output SCPSD - xxx - 04 - x 7 Pressure range 60 bar
M12x1 plug-in connector; 4-pole
1 switching output
1 analogue output
1 switching output; with analogue output SCPSD - xxx - 14 - x 7 G1/4 BSPP internal thread
M12x1 plug-in connector; 4-pole M12 plug-in connector
Accessories
PC programming kit SCSD-PRG-KIT
Fixing clamp SCSD-S27
Reducing adaptor M22x1,5 SCA-1/4-M22x1.5-ED
Reducing adaptor G1/2 BSPP SCA-1/4-ED-1/2-ED
Damping adaptor SCA-1/X-EDX-1/X-D
Flange adaptor for mechanical pressure switch SCAF-1/4-40
Cable length in m
02 2 m
05 5 m
10 10 m
12 Plug-in connector
45 M12 cable socket; straight
55 M12 cable socket; 90° angled
56 DIN EN 175301-803 form A plug connector
(formerly DIN 43650)
Separate plugs
M12 cable socket; straight SCK-145
M12 cable socket; 90° angled SCK-155
DIN EN 175301-803 Form A plug connector
SCK-006
(formerly DIN 43650)
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
A£›A
P£›P T F
DH
F
DH S
G
45
G
D
EA D
EA
HD
P
M
A
HD
AC
DA
AC
DA
N
P
P
E
H
A
HA
K
C B CA AA E
A
BB
AB
L
LA
LC
LC
B35 LD
AD
P£›P
F
T DH
G S
45
D
EA
M
P
HD
AC
DA
P
H
HA
E
K
B CA AA
LA
BB
A
C
AB
L
LC
B14
LD
A£›A
F
DH
G
T
D S
45
M
EA
HD
A
P
AC
DA
N
LC 2004
Dimensions - Dimensiones B14
AC AD D DH E F G KK L M N P S T M N P S T
DH 63 130 111 11 M4x12 23 4 8.5 1xM20x1.5 217 75 60 90 M5 2.5 100 80 120 M6 2.5
DH 71 145 118 14 M5x12 30 5 11 1xM20x1.5 245 85 70 105 M6 2.5 115 95 140 M8 3
DH 80 175 134 19 M6x16 40 6 15.5 1xM25x1.5 287 100 80 120 M6 3 130 110 160 M8 3.5
DH 90S 195 140 24 M8x19 50 8 20 1xM25x1.5 315 115 95 140 M8 3 130 110 160 M8 3.5
DH 90L 195 140 24 M8x19 50 8 20 1xM25x1.5 340 115 95 140 M8 3 130 110 160 M8 3.5
DH 100L 215 160 28 M10x22 60 8 24 1xM32x1.5 385 130 110 160 M8 3.5 165 130 200 M10 3.5
DH 112M 240 178 28 M10x22 60 8 24 2xM32x1.5 400 130 110 160 M8 3.5 165 130 200 M10 3.5
DH 32S 275 206 38 M12x28 80 10 33 2xM32x1.5 483 165 130 200 M10 3.5 215 180 250 M12 4
Italiana di Comunicazione
DH 132M 275 206 38 M12x28 80 10 33 2xM32x1.5 510 165 130 200 M10 3.5 215 180 250 M12 4
AC Three-Phase Induction Motors 230/400 V - 50 Hz 400/690 V - 50 Hz
Type Rated output Rated speed IN Efficiency Power factor Direct-on-line Moment Noise Weight B3 Type Rated output Rated speed IN Efficiency Power factor Direct-on-line Moment Noise Weight B3
AC Three-Phase Induction Motors. Tipo Potencia Velocidad Rendimiento Factor Conexión directa of inertia level Peso B3 Tipo Potencia Velocidad Rendimiento Factor Conexión directa of inertia level Peso B3
Low Voltage Squirrel Cage Motors IP55 with aluminium frame. asignada asignada de potencia Par Nivel asignada asignada de potencia Par Nivel
de inercia de ruido de inercia de ruido
Nominal electrical supply according to IEC 60038 - 400V +/-10% - 50 Hz. 230 V 400 V 400 V 690 V
kW min-1 (AMPS) (AMPS) Class 100% 75% 50% 100% 75% 50% lS/lN TS/TN TU/TN TB/TN (J)kgm2 Lw dB(A) kg kW min-1 (AMPS) (AMPS) Class 100% 75% 50% 100% 75% 50% lS/lN TS/TN TU/TN TB/TN (J)kgm2 Lw dB(A) kg
Class F insulation to EN 60034-1. Thermal class B. FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL
Metric cable entry. 3000 min-1 (2 poles - 2 polos) Aluminum frame - Carcasa de aluminio 3000 min-1 (2 poles - 2 polos) Aluminum frame - Carcasa de aluminio
TEFC construction; surface cooling. DH 63 A2 0.18 2720 0.87 0.5 - 65 64 60 0.8 0.73 0.66 5.5 0.61 2.2 2.2 0.0003 61 4.8 DH 63 A2 0.18 2720 0.5 0.29 - 65 64 60 0.8 0.73 0.66 0.61 5.5 2.2 2.2 0.0003 61 4.8
DH 63 B2 0.25 2720 1.14 0.66 - 68 68.5 66 0.81 0.74 0.67 5.5 0.96 2.2 2.2 0.0004 61 5.1 DH 63 B2 0.25 2720 0.66 0.38 - 68 68.5 66 0.81 0.74 0.67 0.96 5.5 2.2 2.2 0.0004 61 5.1
The motors conform to degree of protection IP55 to IEC 60034-5. DH 71 A2 0.37 2740 1.63 0.94 - 70 71 68.5 0.81 0.75 0.66 6.1 1.26 2.2 2.2 0.0005 64 6 DH 71 A2 0.37 2740 0.94 0.54 - 70 71 68.5 0.81 0.75 0.66 1.26 6.1 2.2 2.2 0.0005 64 6
DH 71 B2 0.55 2740 2.3 1.33 - 73 73 69.5 0.82 0.76 0.69 6.1 1.88 2.2 2.3 0.0006 64 6.5 DH 71 B2 0.55 2740 1.33 0.77 - 73 73 69.5 0.82 0.76 0.69 1.88 6.1 2.2 2.3 0.0006 64 6.5
DH 80 A2 0.75 2840 2.99 1.73 - 75 75.7 72.3 0.83 0.78 0.67 6.1 2.54 2.2 2.3 0.0008 67 8.7 DH 80 A2 0.75 2840 1.73 1 - 75 75.7 72.3 0.83 0.78 0.67 2.54 6.1 2.2 2.3 0.0008 67 8.7
The standard design is suitable for indoor and protected outdoor DH 80 B2 1.1 2840 4.21 2.42 Eff 2 78 80 78.2 0.84 0.82 0.72 7,0 3.72 2.2 2.3 0.0009 67 9.5 DH 80 B2 1.1 2840 2.42 1.4 Eff 2 78 80 78.2 0.84 0.82 0.72 3.72 7,0 2.2 2.3 0.0009 67 9.5
installation. DH 90S A2 1.5 2840 5.57 3.2 Eff 2 80.4 80.2 77.3 0.84 0.8 0.7 7,0 5.04 2.2 2.3 0.0012 72 11.8 DH 90S A2 1.5 2840 3.2 1.85 Eff 2 80.4 80.2 77.3 0.84 0.8 0.7 5.04 7,0 2.2 2.3 0.0012 72 11.8
DH 90L B2 2.2 2840 7.92 4.55 Eff 2 82 82.7 81.6 0.85 0.84 0.74 7,0 7.4 2.2 2.3 0.0014 72 13.5 DH 90L B2 2.2 2840 4.55 2.67 Eff 2 82 82.7 81.6 0.85 0.84 0.74 7.4 7,0 2.2 2.3 0.0014 72 13.5
Climate Group MODERATE (-20° to +40° C). DH 100L A2 3 2860 10.2 5.89 Eff 2 83.5 83.4 81.3 0.88 0.85 0.76 7.5 9.95 2.2 2.3 0.0029 76 21 DH 100L A2 3 2860 5.89 3.41 Eff 2 83.5 83.4 81.3 0.88 0.85 0.76 9.95 7.5 2.2 2.3 0.0029 76 21
DH 112M A2 4 2880 13.3 7.65 Eff 2 85.7 85.5 83.5 0.88 0.85 0.76 7.5 13.22 2.2 2.3 0.0055 77 28 DH 112M A2 4 2880 7.65 4.43 Eff 2 85.7 85.5 83.5 0.88 0.85 0.76 13.227.5 2.2 2.3 0.0055 77 28
DH 132S A2 5.5 2900 18.3 10.4 Eff 2 86.9 84.5 81.5 0.88 0.88 0.82 7.5 18.11 2.2 2.3 0.0109 80 39 DH 132S A2 5.5 2900 10.4 6.01 Eff 2 86.9 84.5 81.5 0.88 0.88 0.82 18.117.5 2.2 2.3 0.0109 80 39
Multi-mount up to 132 frame. The location of the terminal box in DH 132S B2 7.5 2900 24.3 14 Eff 2 88 86.9 85.3 0.88 0.89 0.84 7.5 24.7 2.2 2.3 0.0126 80 44.5 DH 132S B2 7.5 2900 14 8.1 Eff 2 88 86.9 85.3 0.88 0.89 0.84 24.7 7.5 2.2 2.3 0.0126 80 44.5
standard design is on top.
1500 min-1 (4 poles - 4 polos) Aluminum frame - Carcasa de aluminio 1500 min-1 (4 poles - 4 polos) Aluminum frame - Carcasa de aluminio
Motores Trifásicos de Inducción DH 63 A4 0.12 1310 0.73 0.42 - 57 58.2 54 0.72 0.63 0.57 4.4 0.84 2.1 2.2 0.0005 52 4.8 DH 63 A4 0.12 1310 0.42 0.24 - 57 58.2 54 0.72 0.63 0.57 0.84 4.4 2.1 2.2 0.0005 52 4.8
DH 63 B4 0.18 1310 1.02 0.59 - 60 60.9 55.5 0.73 0.65 0.57 4.4 1.26 2.1 2.2 0.0006 52 5.1 DH 63 B4 0.18 1310 0.59 0.34 - 60 60.9 55.5 0.73 0.65 0.57 1.26 4.4 2.1 2.2 0.0006 52 5.1
DH 71 A4 0.25 1330 1.3 0.75 - 65 65.4 60 0.74 0.65 0.58 5.2 1.73 2.1 2.2 0.0008 55 6 DH 71 A4 0.25 1330 0.75 0.43 - 65 65.4 60 0.74 0.65 0.58 1.73 5.2 2.1 2.2 0.0008 55 6
Motores trifásicos de inducción. DH 71 B4 0.37 1330 1.84 1.06 - 67 71 68.4 0.75 0.65 0.52 5.2 2.54 2.1 2.2 0.0013 55 6.3 DH 71 B4 0.37 1330 1.06 0.61 - 67 71 68.4 0.75 0.65 0.52 2.54 5.2 2.1 2.2 0.0013 55 6.3
Motores de baja tension con rotor de jaula IP55, carcasa de aluminio. DH 80 A4 0.55 1390 2.58 1.49 - 71 72.6 69 0.75 0.66 0.55 5.2 3.78 2.4 2.3 0.0018 58 9.4 DH 80 A4 0.55 1390 1.49 0.86 - 71 72.6 69 0.75 0.66 0.55 3.78 5.2 2.4 2.3 0.0018 58 9.4
DH 80 B4 0.75 1390 3.32 1.92 - 73 74.2 70 0.76 0.65 0.54 6,0 5.15 2.4 2.3 0.0021 58 10.8 DH 80 B4 0.75 1390 1.92 1.11 - 73 74.2 70 0.76 0.65 0.54 5.15 6,0 2.4 2.3 0.0021 58 10.8
Tensión de Red según IEC 60038 para 400V +/-10% 50 Hz. DH 90S A4 1.1 1390 4.65 2.67 Eff 2 77 77.8 75 0.77 0.7 0.57 6,0 7.5 2.3 2.3 0.0023 61 12 DH 90S A4 1.1 1390 2.67 1.55 Eff 2 77 77.8 75 0.77 0.7 0.57 7.5 6,0 2.3 2.3 0.0023 61 12
DH 90L B4 1.5 1390 5.93 3.41 Eff 2 80.3 78.1 76.7 0.79 0.75 0.64 6,0 10.23 2.3 2.3 0.0027 61 13.8 DH 90L B4 1.5 1390 3.41 1.97 Eff 2 80.3 78.1 76.7 0.79 0.75 0.64 10.23 6,0 2.3 2.3 0.0027 61 13.8
DH 100L A4 2.2 1410 8.33 4.79 Eff 2 81.8 83 81.1 0.81 0.76 0.65 7,0 14.8 2.3 2.3 0.0054 64 20.8 DH 100L A4 2.2 1410 4.79 2.77 Eff 2 81.8 83 81.1 0.81 0.76 0.65 14.8 7,0 2.3 2.3 0.0054 64 20.8
Aislamiento Clase F según IEC 60034-1, Calentamiento B. DH 100L B4 3 1410 11 6.33 Eff 2 83.4 83.2 81.6 0.82 0.78 0.66 7,0 20.18 2.3 2.3 0.0067 64 23.5 DH 100L B4 3 1410 6.33 3.67 Eff 2 83.4 83.2 81.6 0.82 0.78 0.66 20.18 7,0 2.3 2.3 0.0067 64 23.5
DH 112M A4 4 1435 14.4 8.29 Eff 2 84.9 84.8 82.7 0.82 0.76 0.64 7,0 26.53 2.3 2.3 0.0095 65 29.5 DH 112M A4 4 1435 8.29 4.8 Eff 2 84.9 84.8 82.7 0.82 0.76 0.64 26.53 7,0 2.3 2.3 0.0095 65 29.5
Entrada de cables métrica. DH 132S A4 5.5 1440 19.2 11 Eff 2 86.5 86.8 85.6 0.83 0.81 0.71 7,0 36.48 2.3 2.3 0.0214 71 41 DH 132S A4 5.5 1440 11 6.41 Eff 2 86.5 86.8 85.6 0.83 0.81 0.71 36.48 7,0 2.3 2.3 0.0214 71 41
DH 132M B4 7.5 1440 25.5 14.7 Eff2 87.8 88.2 87.2 0.84 0.83 0.74 7,0 49.74 2.3 2.3 0.0296 71 47.5 DH 132M B4 7.5 1440 14.7 8.5 Eff2 87.8 88.2 87.2 0.84 0.83 0.74 49.74 7,0 2.3 2.3 0.0296 71 47.5
Construcción cerrada con ventilación propia; ventilación superficial.
750 min-1 (8 poles - 8 polos) Aluminum frame - Carcasa de aluminio 750 min-1 (8 poles - 8 polos) Aluminum frame - Carcasa de aluminio
DH 80 A8 0.18 645 1.45 0.84 51 51 45 0.61 0.52 0.42 2.49 3.3 1.8 1.9 0.0025 52 8.9 DH 80 A8 0.18 645 0.84 0.48 51 51 43 0.61 0.52 0.42 2.49 3.3 1.8 1.9 0.0025 52 8.9
DH 80 B8 0.25 645 1.89 1.09 54 54 49 0.61 0.52 0.41 3.46 3.3 1.8 1.9 0.003 52 10.4 DH 80 B8 0.25 645 1.09 0.63 54 54 44 0.61 0.53 0.42 3.46 3.3 1.8 1.9 0.003 52 10.4
DH 90S A8 0.37 670 2.46 1.42 62 62 57 0.61 0.52 0.41 5.12 4 1.8 1.9 0.0051 56 12.1 DH 90S A8 0.37 670 1.42 0.82 62 62 57 0.61 0.52 0.41 5.12 4 1.8 1.9 0.0051 56 12.1
DH 90L B8 0.55 670 3.57 2.06 63 64 60 0.61 0.53 0.42 7.61 4 1.8 2 0.0065 56 13.7 DH 90L B8 0.55 670 2.06 1.19 63 63 58 0.61 0.53 0.41 7.61 4 1.8 2 0.0065 56 13.7
DH 100L A8 0.75 680 3.93 2.27 71 71 66 0.67 0.57 0.44 10.23 4 1.8 2 0.009 59 23 DH 100L A8 0.75 680 2.27 1.31 71 70 65 0.67 0.58 0.45 10.23 4 1.8 2 0.009 59 23
DH 100L B8 1.1 680 5.56 3.21 73 73 71 0.69 0.62 0.48 15 5 1.8 2 0.011 59 25.1 DH 100L B8 1.1 680 3.21 1.85 73 73 70 0.69 0.61 0.47 15 5 1.8 2 0.011 59 25.1
DH 112M B8 1.5 690 7.41 4.28 75 76 74 0.69 0.61 0.48 20.46 5 1.8 2 0.0245 61 28.2 DH 112M B8 1.5 690 4.28 2.47 75 76 73 0.69 0.59 0.46 20.46 5 1.8 2 0.0245 61 28.2
DH 132S A8 2.2 705 9.9 5.7 78 78 75 0.71 0.63 0.5 29.59 6 1.8 2 0.0314 64 40.3 DH 132S A8 2.2 705 5.7 3.3 78 78 73 0.71 0.62 0.48 29.59 6 1.8 2 0.0314 64 40.3
DH 132M B8 3 705 13.04 7.53 79 80 78 0.73 0.65 0.52 40.35 6 1.8 2 0.0395 64 45 DH 132M B8 3 705 7.53 4.35 79 80 78 0.73 0.66 0.53 40.35 6 1.8 2 0.0395 64 45
Catalogue HY11-3500/UK Directional Control Valve
Characteristics Series D3W (Parker), 4D02 (Denison)
Technical data
General
Design Directional spool valve
Actuation Solenoid
Size DIN NG10 / CETOP 05 / NFPA D05
Mounting interface DIN 24340 A10 / ISO 4401 / CETOP RP 121-H / NFPA D05
Mounting position unrestricted, preferably horizontal
Ambient temperature [°C] -25...+50
Weight [kg] 4.8 (1 solenoid), 6.3 (2 solenoids)
Hydraulic
Max. operating pressure [bar] P, A B: 350; T: 210 (DC), 105 (AC), 210 (AC Code “H“)
Fluid Hydraulic oil in accordance with DIN 51524 / 51525
Fluid temperature [°C] -25 ... +70
Viscosity permitted [cSt] / [mm²/s] 2.8...400
Viscosity recommended [cSt] / [mm²/s] 30...80
Filtration ISO 4406 (1999); 18/16/13 (meet NAS 1638: 7)
Flow max. [l/min] 150 (DC); 115 (AC)
Leakage at 50 bar [ml/min] Up to 20 per flow path, depending on spool
Static / Dynamic
Step response see table response time
Electrical characteristics
Duty ratio 100% ED; CAUTION: coil temperature up to 150 °C possible
Max. switching frequency [1/h] 10000
Protection class IP 65 in accordance with EN 60529 (plugged and mounted)
Code K J U G Y T
110V at 50Hz/ 230V at 50Hz/
Supply voltage / ripple [V] 12 V = 24 V = 98 V = 205 V =
120V at 60Hz 240V at 60Hz
Tolerance supply voltage [%] ±10 ±10 ±10 ±10 ±5 ±5
Current consumption hold [A] 3 1.5 0.37 0.18 0.8 / 0.72 0.4 / 0.36
Current consumption in rush [A] 3 1.5 0.37 0.18 3.41 / 3.31 1.75 / 1.7
Power consumption hold [W] 36 36 36 36 88 / 86 88 / 86
Power consumption in rush [W] 36 36 36 36 375 / 397 385 / 408
Solenoid connection Connector as per EN 175301-803, solenoid identification as per ISO 9461.
Wiring min. [mm²] 3 x 1.5 recommended
Wiring length max. [m] 50 recommended
With electrical connections the protective conductor (PE W) must be connected according to the relevant regulations.
D3W stand_UK.INDD CM_21.01.2008.1
D 3 W
Directional Size Wet pin Spool Spool Seals
control DIN NG10 solenoid type position
valve CETOP 05
2
NFPA D05
3 3 position spools
Code all 3 position spools
4 3 positions.
5 C Spring offset in position “0“.
Operated in position “a“ or “b“.
6 Standard Spool type 8 and 9
7
2 positions.
8 1) E
Operated in Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
9 1) position “a“. position “b“.
10 2)
2 positions.
11 F
Spring offset in Spring offset in Operated in position “0“.
12 position “b“. position “a“.
14
2 positions.
K
15 Operated in Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
21 2)
2 positions.
M
22 2) Spring offset in Spring offset in Operated in position “0“.
position “a“. position “b“.
31 2)
32 2)
2 position spools
81 2) Code Spool position
A B 2 positions.
82 2)
B a b Spring offset in position “b“.
102 2) P T Operated in position “a“.
2 positions.
D Operated in position “a“ or “b“.
2 position spools No centre or offset position.
Code Spool type
a b 2 positions.
H Spring offset in position “a“.
20 Operated in position “b“.
26
30
101 2)
1)
Consider specific spool
position.
2)
Only available for DC voltage.
W
Solenoid Connector Solenoid Shift Design
voltage as per option response series
EN 175301-803, (not required
for ordering)
2
without plug
(Please order plug
separately)
4D02 – – – C
Directional Body Control Spool Spool End cap Design
control type position series
valve size
2
DIN NG10
CETOP 05
NFPA D05
46
55
56
2 position spools
Code Spool type
a b
11
12
51
–
Seals Solenoid Options
voltage
2
Code Seals
1 NBR
5 FPM
Code Options
Solenoid connector as per
omit EN 175301-803 without plug.
With manual override
Soft shift with orifice in body
G3
(for DC and body D only)
32 Without manual override
The flow curve diagram shows the flow versus pressure operating position and flow direction the relevant curve
drop curves for all spool types. For each spool type, number is given in the table below.
2
1 03 4 3 4 3 – – – – – –
2 01 4 1 4 1 3 3 1 1 5 1
3 10 4 3 5 2 – – 4 – – –
4 08 4 2 4 2 – – 3 3 – 5
5 – 4 3 5 3 5 – – – – –
6 46 4 3 4 3 6 6 – – – 6
7 – 5 1 4 3 – 4 – 2 6 –
10 – 4 – 4 – – – – – – –
11 02 4 3 4 3 – – 8 8 – –
12 – 4 3 4 3 7 7 7 7 8 8
14 – 4 3 5 1 4 – 2 – 6 –
15 09 5 2 4 3 – – – 4 – –
16 – 5 3 4 3 – 5 – – – –
20 51 4 3 4 3 – – – – – –
26 12 4 – 4 – – – – – – –
30 11 4 2 4 2 – – – – – –
P->B A->T P->A B->T P->A P->B A->T B->T P->T A->B
8 – 4 3 4 3 – – – – 6 –
9 07 4 4 4 4 – – – – 6 –
Position „b“ Position „a“
P->A P->B A->B P->B A->T
21 55 5 4 6 3 3
P->A B->T P->A P->B A->B
22 56 3 3 4 5 6
The diagram below specifies the shift limits for valves anced flow conditions. The shift limits can be considerably
with DC and AC solenoids. Valves with spool position lower at unbalanced flow conditions. To avoid flow rates
“F” or “M” can only be operated up to 70% of the limits. beyond the shift limits, a plug-in orifice can be inserted
The specifications apply to a viscosity 35mm2/s and bal- in the P-port.
Shift limits, DC voltage *
2
Acceleration for different orifice sizes (archived against a valve without soft shift)
Orifice in anchor *
* Note: For 4D02 the orifice is located in the Z-channel of the valve body.
For even softer shifting, the proportional spools 81, 82, 101 and 102 can be used.
C, D -style
C, D -style
Surface finish
The space necessary to remove the plug per EN 175301-803, design type AF is at least 15 mm.
The torque for the screw M3 of the plug has to be 0.5 to 0.6 Nm.
D3W stand_UK.INDD CM_21.01.2008.1
A B
Technical data
General
Design Directional spool valve
Actuation Solenoid
Nominal size DIN NG06 / CETOP 03 / NFPA D03
Mounting interface DIN 24340 A6 / ISO 4401 / CETOP RP 121-H / NFPA D03
Mounting position unrestricted, preferably horizontal
Ambient temperature [°C] -25...+50
Weight [kg] 1.5 (1 solenoid), 2.1 (2 solenoids)
Hydraulic
Max. operating pressure [bar] P, A B: 350; T: 210 (DC), T: 140 (AC)
Fluid Hydraulic oil in accordance with DIN 51524 / 51525
Fluid temperature [°C] -25 ... +70
Viscosity permitted [cSt] / [mm²/s] 2.8...400
Viscosity recommended [cSt] / [mm²/s] 30...80
Filtration ISO 4406 (1999); 18/16/13 (meet NAS 1638: 7)
Flow max. [l/min] 80
Leakage at 50 bar [ml/min] Up to 10 per flow path, depending on spool
Static / Dynamic
Step response see table response time
Electrical characteristics
Duty ratio 100% ED; CAUTION: coil temperature up to 150 °C possible
Max. switching frequency [1/h] 15000
Protection class IP 65 in accordance with EN 60529 (plugged and mounted)
Code K J U G Y T
Supply voltage [V] 110V at 50Hz/ 230V at 50Hz/
12 V = 24 V = 98 V = 205 V =
120V at 60Hz 240V at 60Hz
Tolerance supply voltage [%] ±10 ±10 ±10 ±10 ±5 ±5
Current consumption hold [A] 2.58 1.29 0.32 0.15 0.6 / 0.55 0.3 / 0.27
Current consumption in rush [A] 2.58 1.29 0.32 0.15 2.5 / 2.4 1.25 / 1.2
Power consumption hold 31 W 31 W 31 W 31 W 70 / 70 VA 70 / 70 VA
Power consumption in rush 31 W 31 W 31 W 31 W 280 / 290 VA 280 / 290 VA
Solenoid connection Connector as per EN 175301-803, solenoid identification as per ISO 9461 (code W).
Wiring min. [mm²] 3 x 1.5 recommended
Wiring length max. [m] 50 recommended
With electrical connections the protective conductor (PE W) must be connected according to the relevant regulations.
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1
D 1 V W
Directional Size 3-chamber Wet pin Spool Spool Seals
control DIN NG06 valve armature type position
valve CETOP 03 solenoid,
2
NFPA D03 threaded
in tube
3 position spools
Code Spool type
a 0 b Code Seals
001 N NBR
002 V FPM
003
3 position spools
004
Code Spool position
005 3 positions.
006 C Spring offset in position “0“.
Operated in position “a“ or “b“.
007 Spool type 008,009,
Standard
008 1) 204, 205
009 1)
2 positions.
010 E
Operated in Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
011 position “a“. position “b“.
014
2 positions.
015 F
Spring offset in Spring offset in Operated in position “0“.
016 position “b“. position “a“.
021
2 positions.
022 K
Operated in Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
031 position “b“. position “a“.
032
034 2 positions.
M
Spring offset in Spring offset in Operated in position “0“.
035
position “a“. position “b“.
061
081 2 position spools
082 Code Spool position
Standard Spool type 083
102
A B 2 positions.
204 1) B a b Spring offset in position “b“.
P T Operated in position “a“.
205 1)
2 positions.
D Operated in position “a“ or “b“.
2 position spools No centre or offset position.
Code Spool type A B 2 positions.
a b
H a b Spring offset in position “a“.
020 P T Operated in position “b“.
026
030
083 1)
101
208
1)
Consider specific spool
position.
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1
W
Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Design
voltage connector as per option series
EN 175301-803, (not required
2
without plug for ordering)
(other connectors
are available for
D1MW Series)
Code Voltage
K 12V =
J 24V =
U 2)
98V =
G 2) 205V =
110V 50Hz /
Y 120V 60Hz
230V 50Hz /
T 240V 60Hz
2)
Rectifier needed for DC solenoid
when used with AC input.
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1
4D01 – 3 – – C –
Directional Body Control Spool Spool End cap Design Seals Solenoid Options
control valve 3-chamber type position series voltage
size DIN NG06 design
2
CETOP 03
09 Code Seals
10 1 NBR
13 5 FPM
14
Code End cap
46
01 for control 1
55
02 for controls 2 and 7
56
64 3 position spools
65 Code Spool position
AR 3 positions.
03
Spring centered to “0“.
OT
2 positions.
OX 05 Spring centered to “0“.
Energized to “b“.
2 positions.
2 position spools 06 Spring centered to “0“.
Code Spool type
Energized to “a“.
a b
11
2 position spools
12
Code Spool position
51 A B 2 positions.
01 a b Spring offset to “b“.
52 P T Energized to “a“.
71 2 positions.
02 Spring offset to “a“.
81 1) The Denison model code is avail- Energized to “b“.
able for existing applications. For
81 2) 2 positions detent.
new applications we advise to
09 Operated in “a“ or “b“.
1)
Spool position code 01 refer to Parker model code.
No centre or spring offset position.
2)
Spool position code 02
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1 Further spool types and voltages on request.
Flow curve
14 13 10 9 8
24
Pressure drop [bar]
7
20 6
16
5
4
2
11 3
12 2
1
12
8
0
0 20 40 60 80
Flow [l/min]
Viscosity 40 cSt at 50°C.
The diagram below specifies the shift limits for valves with conditions. The shift limits can be considerably lower at
DC solenoids. Valves with spool position “F” or “M” can unbalanced flow conditions. To avoid flow rates beyond
only be operated up to 70% of the limits. The specifica- the shift limits, a plug-in orifice can be inserted in the
tions apply to a viscosity of 40mm2/s and balanced flow P-port.
011
Parker Denison
300
081 020, 030
003, 004, 015
250 001 03
082
021, 022
200
002 01
150
007, 008,
100 003 10
009, 014
50
004 08
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
005 13
Flow [l/min]
350 006 46
Pressure [bar]
001,002, 006
300
005, 016 007 –
250
010
200 008 –
026
150
009 07
100
50 010 BN
0 011 02
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Flow [l/min]
014 –
Valve with standard AC solenoid
350 015 09
Pressure [bar]
011
300 016 14
081 020, 030
003, 004, 015
250
082
021, 022 020 51
200
150 021 55
007, 008,
100
009, 014 022 56
50
0 026 12
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Flow [l/min] 030 11
350
Pressure [bar]
100 204 64
50 205 65
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
208 52
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1 Flow [l/min]
003, 015
005, 016
300 009
2
021, 022 006
250
001
200
008, 081, 020
011
002, 007, 010, 082
150 014, 026
004
100
50
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Flow [l/min]
Step response times were obtained under the following conditions: υ = 40 mm2/s at 50°C with the valve operating at nominal pressure and flow.
Published response times are nominal and may vary with spool, flow, pressure and temperature.
Acceleration for orifice size 0.75, code “S3” (archived against a valve without soft shift)
A B
For even softer shifting, the proportional spools 081, 082, 101 and 102
can be used.
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1
Ø9.5 Ø9.5
93
93
2
69
69
22
22
Ø5.5 Ø5.5
91.4 134.6
162 46 162 46
C, D / 03, 09 -style
Ø9.5
93
69
22
Ø5.5
91.4
226 46
Ø9.5 Ø9.5
93.5
93.5
69.5
69.5
22
22
Ø5.5 Ø5.5
127 127
152 46 152 46
C, D / 03, 09 -style
Ø9.5
93.5
69.5
22
Ø5.5
84
211 46
Surface finish
The space necessary to remove the plug per EN 175301-803, design type AF is at least 15 mm.
The torque for the screw M3 of the plug has to be 0.5 to 0.6 Nm.
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1
Technical data
General
Design Directional spool valve
Actuation Solenoid
Size DIN NG10 / CETOP 05 / NFPA D05
Mounting interface DIN 24340 A10 / ISO 4401 / CETOP RP 121-H / NFPA D05
Mounting position unrestricted, preferably horizontal
Ambient temperature [°C] -25...+50
Weight [kg] 4.8 (1 solenoid), 6.3 (2 solenoids)
Hydraulic
Max. operating pressure [bar] P, A B: 350; T: 210 (DC), 105 (AC), 210 (AC Code “H“)
Fluid Hydraulic oil in accordance with DIN 51524 / 51525
Fluid temperature [°C] -25 ... +70
Viscosity permitted [cSt] / [mm²/s] 2.8...400
Viscosity recommended [cSt] / [mm²/s] 30...80
Filtration ISO 4406 (1999); 18/16/13 (meet NAS 1638: 7)
Flow max. [l/min] 150 (DC); 115 (AC)
Leakage at 50 bar [ml/min] Up to 20 per flow path, depending on spool
Static / Dynamic
Step response see table response time
Electrical characteristics
Duty ratio 100% ED; CAUTION: coil temperature up to 150 °C possible
Max. switching frequency [1/h] 10000
Protection class IP 65 in accordance with EN 60529 (plugged and mounted)
Code K J U G Y T
110V at 50Hz/ 230V at 50Hz/
Supply voltage / ripple [V] 12 V = 24 V = 98 V = 205 V =
120V at 60Hz 240V at 60Hz
Tolerance supply voltage [%] ±10 ±10 ±10 ±10 ±5 ±5
Current consumption hold [A] 3 1.5 0.37 0.18 0.8 / 0.72 0.4 / 0.36
Current consumption in rush [A] 3 1.5 0.37 0.18 3.41 / 3.31 1.75 / 1.7
Power consumption hold [W] 36 36 36 36 88 / 86 88 / 86
Power consumption in rush [W] 36 36 36 36 375 / 397 385 / 408
Solenoid connection Connector as per EN 175301-803, solenoid identification as per ISO 9461.
Wiring min. [mm²] 3 x 1.5 recommended
Wiring length max. [m] 50 recommended
With electrical connections the protective conductor (PE W) must be connected according to the relevant regulations.
D3W stand_UK.INDD CM_21.01.2008.1
D 3 W
Directional Size Wet pin Spool Spool Seals
control DIN NG10 solenoid type position
valve CETOP 05
2
NFPA D05
3 3 position spools
Code all 3 position spools
4 3 positions.
5 C Spring offset in position “0“.
Operated in position “a“ or “b“.
6 Standard Spool type 8 and 9
7
2 positions.
8 1) E
Operated in Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
9 1) position “a“. position “b“.
10 2)
2 positions.
11 F
Spring offset in Spring offset in Operated in position “0“.
12 position “b“. position “a“.
14
2 positions.
K
15 Operated in Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
21 2)
2 positions.
M
22 2) Spring offset in Spring offset in Operated in position “0“.
position “a“. position “b“.
31 2)
32 2)
2 position spools
81 2) Code Spool position
A B 2 positions.
82 2)
B a b Spring offset in position “b“.
102 2) P T Operated in position “a“.
2 positions.
D Operated in position “a“ or “b“.
2 position spools No centre or offset position.
Code Spool type
a b 2 positions.
H Spring offset in position “a“.
20 Operated in position “b“.
26
30
101 2)
1)
Consider specific spool
position.
2)
Only available for DC voltage.
W
Solenoid Connector Solenoid Shift Design
voltage as per option response series
EN 175301-803, (not required
for ordering)
2
without plug
(Please order plug
separately)
4D02 – – – C
Directional Body Control Spool Spool End cap Design
control type position series
valve size
2
DIN NG10
CETOP 05
NFPA D05
46
55
56
2 position spools
Code Spool type
a b
11
12
51
–
Seals Solenoid Options
voltage
2
Code Seals
1 NBR
5 FPM
Code Options
Solenoid connector as per
omit EN 175301-803 without plug.
With manual override
Soft shift with orifice in body
G3
(for DC and body D only)
32 Without manual override
The flow curve diagram shows the flow versus pressure operating position and flow direction the relevant curve
drop curves for all spool types. For each spool type, number is given in the table below.
2
1 03 4 3 4 3 – – – – – –
2 01 4 1 4 1 3 3 1 1 5 1
3 10 4 3 5 2 – – 4 – – –
4 08 4 2 4 2 – – 3 3 – 5
5 – 4 3 5 3 5 – – – – –
6 46 4 3 4 3 6 6 – – – 6
7 – 5 1 4 3 – 4 – 2 6 –
10 – 4 – 4 – – – – – – –
11 02 4 3 4 3 – – 8 8 – –
12 – 4 3 4 3 7 7 7 7 8 8
14 – 4 3 5 1 4 – 2 – 6 –
15 09 5 2 4 3 – – – 4 – –
16 – 5 3 4 3 – 5 – – – –
20 51 4 3 4 3 – – – – – –
26 12 4 – 4 – – – – – – –
30 11 4 2 4 2 – – – – – –
P->B A->T P->A B->T P->A P->B A->T B->T P->T A->B
8 – 4 3 4 3 – – – – 6 –
9 07 4 4 4 4 – – – – 6 –
Position „b“ Position „a“
P->A P->B A->B P->B A->T
21 55 5 4 6 3 3
P->A B->T P->A P->B A->B
22 56 3 3 4 5 6
The diagram below specifies the shift limits for valves anced flow conditions. The shift limits can be considerably
with DC and AC solenoids. Valves with spool position lower at unbalanced flow conditions. To avoid flow rates
“F” or “M” can only be operated up to 70% of the limits. beyond the shift limits, a plug-in orifice can be inserted
The specifications apply to a viscosity 35mm2/s and bal- in the P-port.
Shift limits, DC voltage *
2
Acceleration for different orifice sizes (archived against a valve without soft shift)
Orifice in anchor *
* Note: For 4D02 the orifice is located in the Z-channel of the valve body.
For even softer shifting, the proportional spools 81, 82, 101 and 102 can be used.
C, D -style
C, D -style
Surface finish
The space necessary to remove the plug per EN 175301-803, design type AF is at least 15 mm.
The torque for the screw M3 of the plug has to be 0.5 to 0.6 Nm.
D3W stand_UK.INDD CM_21.01.2008.1
Technical features
• Real servovalve dynamics
(-3dB/350Hz at ±5% input signal)
• No flow limit up to 350 bar pressure drop
through the valve
• Max. tank pressure 350 bar
(with external drain port y)
• High flow
• Defined spool positioning in case of
power supply breakdown
• Onboard electronics
D1FP
T A P B T
D1FP_UK.INDD CM_28.01.08.1
D 1 F P 9 0
Directional Size Proportional VCD Spool Spool Y-port Seals Command- Acces- Spool/ Design
control DIN NG06 control type position (plugged) 4) signal sories sleeve series
valve CETOP03 on power design
NFPA D03 down 1)
E02M 40
E02H 25 B 2)
E02F 12
E02C 6
E02B 3
QB = QA /2 C 3)
B32M 40 / 20
1)
On power down the spool moves in a defined position. This cannot
be guaranteed in case of single flow path on the control edge A – T
resp. B – T with pressure drops above 120 bar or contamination in
the hydraulic fluid.
2)
approx. 10% opening, only zero lapped spools and underlap spools
3)
only for overlapped spools
4)
needs to be removed at tank pressure >35 bar
D1FP_UK.INDD CM_28.01.08.1
General
Design Direct operated proportional DC valve
Actuation VCD® actuator
Size NG06/CETOP03/NFPA D03
Mounting interface DIN 24340 / ISO 4401 / CETOP RP121 / NFPA
Mounting position unrestricted
Ambient temperature [°C] -20...+50
Weight [kg] 4.5
Vibration resistance [g] 25 acc. DIN IEC68, part 2-6
Hydraulic
3
Max. operating pressure [bar] Ports P, A, B 350
[bar] Port T max. 35, port Y max. 35 1)
Fluid Hydraulic oil as per DIN 51524...535, other on request
Fluid temperature [°C] -20...+60
Viscosity
permitted [cSt] / [mm2/s] 20...380
recommended [cSt] / [mm2/s] 30...80
Filtration ISO 4406 (1999) 18/16/13 (acc. NAS 1638: 7)
Nominal flow at ∆p=35bar
per control edge 2) [l/min] 3 / 6 / 12 / 25 / 40
Flow maximum [l/min] 90 (at ∆p=350bar over two control edges)
Leakage at 100 bar [ml/min] <400 (zero lapped spool); <50 (over lapped spool)
Static / Dynamic
Step response at 100% step 3) [ms] <3.5
Frequency response
(±5% signal) 3) [Hz] 350 (amplitude ratio -3dB), 350 (phase lag -90°)
Hysteresis [%] <0.05
Sensitivity [%] <0.03
Temperature drift [%/°K] <0.025
Electrical characteristics
Duty ratio [%] 100
Protection class IP65 in accordance with EN 60529 (plugged and mounted)
Supply voltage/ripple [V] DC 22 ... 30, ripple <5% eff., surge free
Current consumption max. [A] 3.5
Switch-on current typical [A] 22 for 0.2 ms
Input signal
Voltage [V] 10...0...-10, ripple <0.01% eff., surge free, 0...+10V P->A
Impedance [kOhm] 100
Current [mA] 20...0...-20, ripple <0.01% eff., surge free, 0...+20mA P->A
Impedance [Ohm] 250
Current [mA] 4...12...20, ripple <0.01% eff., surge free, 12...20mA P->A
<3.6 mA = disable, <3.8 mA = according to NAMUR NE43
Impedance [Ohm] 250
Differential input max.
Code 0 [V]30 for terminal D and E against PE (terminal G)
Code 5 [V]30 for terminal 4 and 5 against PE (terminal W )
Enable signal (only code 5) [V]5...30, Ri = 9 kOhm
Diagnostic signal [V]+10...0...-10 / +Ub, rated max. 5mA
Pre-fusing [A]4.0 medium lag
EMC EN 50081-2 / EN50082-2
Electrical connection Code 0 6 + PE acc. EN 175201-804
Code 5 11 + PE acc. EN 175201-804
Wiring min.
Code 0 [mm²] 7x1.0 (AWG 18) overall braid shield
Code 5 [mm²] 12x1.0 (AWG 18) overall braid shield
Wiring lenght max. [m] 50
1)
For applications with pT>35 bar the Y-port has to be connected and the plug in the Y-port has to be removed.
√
2)
Flow rate for different ∆p per control edge: Qx = QNom. · ∆px
∆pNom.
3)
Measured with load (100 bar pressure drop/two control edges)
D1FP_UK.INDD CM_28.01.08.1
A-T B-T
50%
Flow
0%
-100% 0% Command signal 100%
A-T P-A
50%
Flow P-B B-T
0%
-100% 0% Command signal 100%
D1FP_UK.INDD CM_28.01.08.1
Block diagrams
Code 0 Code 5
6 + PE 11 + PE
Dimensions
R
147
251
A B
51
48
Y
T
35 216
Surface finish
4x M5x30 7.6 Nm
BK375
DIN 912 12.9 ±15%
D1FP_UK.INDD CM_28.01.08.1
D1FP_UK.INDD CM_28.01.08.1
4D02V D41VW
D81VW D111VW
D81VW
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
D 1 W
Directional Series Pilot Style Electrically Spool Spool
control NG 06 operated type position
valve
2 positions.
3 position spools E 2)
Spring offset in position “0“.
Code Spool type Operated in Operated in
a 0 b position “a“. position “b“.
001 2)
2 positions.
002 2) F 2)
Operated in position “0“.
Spring offset in Spring offset in
003 3) position “b“. position “a“.
004 3)
2 positions.
005 3) K 2)
Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
Operated in
006 3) position “b“. position “a“.
007 3)
2 positions.
0091)2) M 2)
Operated in position “0“.
Spring offset in Spring offset in
011 3) position “a“. position “b“.
014 3)
2 positions, detent.
R 3)
015 3) No centre in No centre in Operated in position “0“ or “b“.
offset position. offset position.
016 3)
2 positions, detent.
021 3) S 3) No centre in Operated in position “0“ or “a“.
No centre in
offset position. No centre in offset position.
022 3) offset position.
W
Pilot oil Seals Solenoid Connector Solenoid Acces- Design
supply and voltage as per options sories series
drain options EN 175301-803, (not required
2
without plug for ordering)
(Please order plug
separately.
Code Voltage
K 12V =
J 24V =
U 8) 98V =
G 8) 205V =
110V 50Hz /
Y 120V 60Hz
230V 50Hz /
T 240V 60Hz
8)
For AC voltage use plug with
rectifier.
Please order rectifier plug
separately.
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
4D – –
Directional Size Body Control Spool Spool End cap
control valve type position
3 position spools
Code Body Code Spool position
V for 4D02 3 positions.
03
Spring centered to “0“.
3 for 4D03/06
2 positions.
05 Spring centered to “0“.
Code Control Energized to “b“.
A 1 solenoid 2 positions.
06 Spring centered to “0“.
B 2 solenoids Energized to “a“.
2 solenoids
C and 2 pos. detent
2 position spools
pilot valve
Code Spool position
A B 2 positions.
3 position spools 01 a b Spring offset to “b“.
Code Spool type P T Energized to “a“.
a 0 b
2 positions.
01 02 Spring offset to “a“.
Energized to “b“.
02
2 positions detent.
03 04 Operated in “a“ or “b“.
No centre or spring offset position.
07
08
09
10
13
14
46
55
56
2 position spools
Code Spool type
a b
11
51
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
2
Code Inlet Outlet Code Pilot accessories
1 Internal Internal 1.0 mm orifice
10 *
(Standard for 4D02V)
2 Internal External
1.5 mm orifice
3 External Internal 15 *
(Standard for 4D03/06)
4 External External * in P port of pilot valve
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
D 1 W
Directional Series Pilot Style Electrically Spool Spool
2 control
valve
NG 06 operated type position
004 3) 2 positions.
K
Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
Operated in
007 5) position “b“. position “a“.
0091)4)
011 5) 2 positions.
M
Operated in position “0“.
Spring offset in Spring offset in
014 5) position “a“. position “b“.
015 3)
2 position spools
2 position spools Code Spool position
Code Spool type Spring offset in position “b“.
a b B
Operated in position “a“.
020 2)
Spring offset in position “a“.
030 5) H
Operated in position “b“.
1)
Consider specific spool
position.
2)
All sizes (D31, D41, D81,
D91, D111) available
3)
Only D31, D41, D81, D91
available
4)
Only D41, D81, D91, D111
available
5)
Only D41, D81, D91
available
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
W
Pilot oil Seals Solenoid Connector Solenoid Acces- Design
supply and
drain options
voltage as per
EN 175301-803,
options sories series
(not required
for ordering)
2
without plug
(Please order plug
separately.
Code Voltage
K 12V =
J 24V =
U 8)
98V =
G 8)
205V =
8)
For AC voltage use plug with
rectifier.
Please order rectifier plug
separately.
Attention
The adjustment of the position control is factory set and sealed. Replacement and repairs can only be un-
dertaken by the manufacturer.
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
General
Design Directional spool valve
Actuation Solenoid
Series Parker /Denison D31 / (4D02V) D41 / 4D03 D81/91 / 4D06 D111 / –
Size NG10 NG16 NG25 NG32
2
Weight (1/ 2 solenoids) [kg] 6.0 / 6.6 (7.6 / 8.1) 9.7 / 10.3 17.9 / 18.6 67.4 / 68.0
Mounting interface DIN 24340 A10 DIN 24340 A16 DIN 24340 A25 DIN 24340 A32
ISO 4401 ISO 4401 ISO 4401 ISO 4401
NFPA D05 NFPA D07 NFPA D08 NFPA D10
CETOP RP 121-H
Mounting position unrestricted, preferably horizontal
Ambient temperature [°C] -25...+50 (without inductive position control)
[°C] 0...+50 (with inductive position control)
Hydraulic
Max. operating pressure [bar] Pilot drain internal: P, A B, X: 350; T, Y: 105 (4D02V: P, A, B, X: 315; T, Y: 140)
Pilot drain external: P, A B, T, X: 350; Y: 105 (4D02V: P, A, B, T, X: 315; Y:140)
Fluid Hydraulic oil in accordance with DIN 51524 / 51525
Fluid temperature [°C] -25 ... +70
Viscosity permitted [cSt] / [mm²/s] 2.8...400
Viscosity recommended [cSt] / [mm²/s] 30...80
Filtration ISO 4406 (1999); 18/16/13 (meet NAS 1638: 7)
Flow max. [l/min] 150 / (170) 300 700 2000
Leakage at 350 bar (per flow path) [ml/min] up to 100* / (72...422*) up to 200* up to 800* up to 5000*
*depending on spool
Opening pressure integral check valve [bar] n.a. see p/Q diagram see p/Q diagram n.a.
Minimum pilot supply pressure [bar] 5 / (7) 5
Static / Dynamic
Step response at 95% [ms] Energized / De-energized
DC solenoids Pilot pressure 50 bar 60 / 40 (50/60) 95 / 65 150 / 170 470 / 390
100 bar 55 / 40 (50/60) 75 / 65 110 / 170 320 / 390
250 bar 55 / 40 (50/50) 60 / 65 90 / 170 210 / 390
350 bar 55 / 40 (50/50) 60 / 65 85 / 170 200 / 390
AC solenoids Pilot pressure 50 bar 40 / 30 (30/50) 75 / 55 130 / 155 450 / 375
100 bar 35 / 30 (30/50) 65 / 55 90 / 155 300 / 375
250 bar 35 / 30 (30/50) 40 / 55 70 / 155 190 / 375
350 bar 35 / 30 (30/50) 40 / 55 65 / 155 180 / 375
Electrical characteristics
Duty ratio 100% ED; CAUTION: coil temperature up to 150 °C possible
Protection class IP 65 in accordance with EN 60529 (plugged and mounted)
Code K J U G Y T
Supply voltage / ripple [V] 12 V = 24 V = 98 V = 205 V = 110V at 50Hz/ 230V at 50Hz/
120V at 60Hz 240V at 60Hz
Tolerance supply voltage [%] ±10 ±10 ±10 ±10 ±5 ±5
Current consumption hold [A] 2.5 1.25 0.31 0.15 0.58 / 0.49 0.31 / 0.26
Current consumption in rush [A] 2.5 1.25 0.31 0.15 2.1 / 2.0 1.05 / 1.0
Power consumption hold [W] 30 30 30 30 64 / 59 VA 68 / 62 VA
Power consumption in rush [W] 30 30 30 30 231 / 240 VA 231 / 240 VA
Solenoid connection Connector as per EN 175301-803, solenoid identification as per ISO 9461.
Wiring min. [mm²] 3 x 1.5 recommended
Wiring length max. [m] 50 recommended
With electrical connections the protective conductor (PE W) must be connected according to the relevant regulations.
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
Definitions
Start position monitored: End position monitored:
The valve is de-energized. The inductive switch gives a The inductive switch gives a signal before the end position
signal at the moment (below 15% spool stroke) when the is reached. (above 85% spool stroke).
spool leaves the spring offset position.
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
The flow curve diagram shows the flow versus pressure for each spool type, operating position and flow direction
drop curves for all spool types. The relevant curve number is given in the table below.
4D02V
Spool Curve number
Code P-A P-B P-T A-T B-T
01 3 3 7 4 3
02 3 3 – 2 4
03 3 3 – 2 5
07 4 6 6 4 10
08 2 3 – 4 4
09 2 2 – 1 4
10 2 3 – 4 4
11 5 3 – 2 5
13 2 4 – 1 4
14 4 3 – 2 4
46 8 9 – 7 9
51 6 4 – 3 6
55 – 7 – 8 –
56 4 – – 9 –
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
Series
4D02V PV TV 3 Slip-in orifice
in pilot p-port open, closed
A B
1 M6 DIN906 Pilot oil
Inlet Outlet 1 2 3 a 0 b
Y
(drawn offset)
Series
D41VW
Series
D81/91VW
Series
D111VW
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
D31DW
226
Monitor
switch
195
175
B A
Ø11
83
1cm
mc1
01M
M10
30 A B Stroke
12 Ø6.8 adjustment
70 33.5 87.5 110
72 93 138.5
186
Surface finish
4D02V
Surface finish
The space necessary to remove the plug per EN 175301-803, design type AF is at least 15 mm.
The torque for the screw M3 of the plug has to be 0.5 to 0.6 Nm.
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
D41VW/4D03
2 B A
Monitor switch
Stroke
220 adjustment
136
1cm
mc1
01M
M10
A B
11 Ø11
92 63 165
94 101 275
Surface finish
4x M10x60
63 Nm ±15% NBR: SK-D41DW-N-91
BK320 2x M6x55
13.2 Nm ±15% FPM: SK-D41DW-V-91
DIN 912 12.9
D81VW/4D06, D91VW
B A
Monitor switch
Stroke
adjustment
223
57
A B
12 Ø13.5
116 76 230
118 117 340
Surface finish
The space necessary to remove the plug per EN 175301-803, design type AF is at least 15 mm.
The torque for the screw M3 of the plug has to be 0.5 to 0.6 Nm.
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
D111VW
B A
2
Monitor switch
347
59
A B
20 Ø22
198 90 319
200 429
Surface finish
The space necessary to remove the plug as per EN 175301-803, design type AF is at least 15 mm.
The torque for the screw M3 of the plug has to be 0.5 to 0.6 Nm.
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
2
1
765
P:\2012\CT120204-ANDRITZ HYDRO\PLANOS\AC2012014-M.idw
3100
OF4830/OT4212
REVISION
C Apr.: Domingo
Empresa
Nº de plano/CAD:
VISTA DE CONJUNTO Registrada
AC2012014-M.idw Hoja : 1 de : 1 ER-0492/1998
Datos técnicos: Tolerancias generales según ISO 2768. (ISO 2768-m)
Ultima revisión: Fecha de aprobación:
28/02/2012
DECLARACION "CE" DE CONFORMIDAD
La empresa:
Neuwalme, S.L.
c/ Fragosiño, 32-34, 36214 Vigo
Tfno: 986 494 922- Fax: 986 494 921.
Declara bajo la presente que:
El equipo:
Tipo: PANEL DE FILTRADO DE AGUA
ha sido fabricado por Neuwalme, S.L. de acuerdo con las siguientes Directivas:
• La inobservancia de las medidas contempladas en los manuales entregados por Neuwalme, S.L.
• Los daños ocasionados por un mantenimiento y reparación realizado por personal no autorizado por
Neuwalme, S.L.
• La incorporación del equipo a una instalación que no haya sido declarada conforme a las disposiciones de
las Directivas.
NEUWALME, S.L.
INDICE GENERAL
APARTADO CONTENIDO
1 PLANOS.
3 INFORMACION TECNICA.
C. H. PANDO Y
MONTELIRIO
EQ120204-01 Domingo
20/02/12
13/02/12 B
EQ120204-01 Domingo
20/02/12
13/02/12 B
EQ120204-01 Domingo
20/02/12
13/02/12 B
EQ120204-01 Domingo
20/02/12
13/02/12 B
EQ120204-01 Domingo
20/02/12
13/02/12 B
EQ120204-01 Domingo
22/02/12
13/02/12 B
NEUWALME, S.L.
Contenido
1 PROTOCOLO ..................................................................................................................... 2
2 INTRODUCION.................................................................................................................. 2
2.1 ADVERTENCIAS GENERALES. .............................................................................. 2
2.2 FUNCIÓN DE LOS FILTROS..................................................................................... 3
2.3 MANOMETROS .......................................................................................................... 3
2.4 TUBOS Y RACORES. ................................................................................................. 3
3 DESCRIPCIÓN DEL EQUIPO........................................................................................... 4
3.1 CONEXIÓNES CON EL PANEL DE FILTRADO..................................................... 4
3.2 FUNCIONALIDAD DE LAS LINEAS ....................................................................... 5
3.3 CARACTERISTICAS TÉCNICAS ............................................................................. 5
4 COMPONENTES DEL PANEL HIDRAULICO. .............................................................. 6
5 INSTALACION DEL PANEL HIDRAULICO. ................................................................. 6
5.1 MONTAJE DE TUBERIAS ......................................................................................... 6
5.2 INSTALACION ELECTRICA..................................................................................... 7
6 LIMPIEZA. .......................................................................................................................... 7
7 LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS. ...................................................................................... 7
7.1 RUIDO EXCESIVO. .................................................................................................... 7
8 MANTENIMIENTO. .......................................................................................................... 8
8.1 REVISION Y REGISTRO. .......................................................................................... 8
8.2 MANTENIMIENTO PERIODICO. ............................................................................. 8
8.3 LIMPIEZA EXTERNA. ............................................................................................... 8
8.4 CONTROL DE FILTROS. ........................................................................................... 9
8.5 SEGURIDAD. .............................................................................................................. 9
9 ESQUEMA HIDRAULICO. ............................................................................................... 9
1
NEUWALME, S.L.
1 PROTOCOLO
Le recomendamos lea atentamente este manual del usuario antes de poner en marcha el panel
hidráulico.
El criterio de NEUWALME con relación a la fabricación de este panel hidráulico puede
resumirse en una sola palabra CALIDAD. Desde la recepción del pedido del cliente hasta el
montaje final del panel y su comprobación, la CALIDAD ha sido estrictamente controlada en todos
los pasos intermedios.
ATENCION. Es necesario que siga atentamente estas indicaciones para evitar daños físicos.
PRECAUCION. Es necesario que siga atentamente estas indicaciones para preservar su
equipo.
NOTAS: contienen información valiosa y consejos útiles sobre el funcionamiento del panel
hidráulico.
El equipo formado por Panel de filtrado para central hidroeléctrico Pando y Montelirio, son
considerados como una máquina, aplicando la definición de máquina hecha en el artículo 2, de la
directiva comunitaria 2006/42/CE.
Por lo tanto el equipo, así como todos los componentes, cumplen las siguientes directivas
comunitarias, para llevar la declaración de conformidad CE:
• Directiva de Baja Tensión 2006/95/CE.
• Directiva de Máquinas 2006/42/CE.
• Directiva de compatibilidad electromagnética 2004/108/CE, 92/31/CE.
2 INTRODUCION
Una de las principales causas de desperfectos o paradas del equipo hidráulico se debe a la
rotura de elementos, debido a la acumulación de suciedad.
La causa principal de todos estos inconvenientes se debe a la presencia de partículas o
partículas que circulando continuamente en el fluido constituyen un motivo de desgaste. Si estas
partículas se dejan circular por el sistema, actuando como una mezcla abrasiva, arañando las
superficies con las que entra en contacto.
El daño causado es mayor en los equipos más sofisticados.
El filtro es el elemento que detiene estas partículas, para garantizar la máxima eficacia y
duración del equipo. La elección del tipo de filtro y el número de ellos está en función del tipo de
circuito y del equipo que se debe proteger.
Respecto a la disposición dentro del circuito se consideran las siguientes:
Es importante que el filtro resulte accesible para su limpieza periódica. Es recomendable
instalar filtros con indicadores de suciedad ópticos o eléctricos para conocer rápidamente el estado
de los mismos.
2.3 MANOMETROS
En todos los equipos se deben incluir tomas para los manómetros en la posición adecuada, no
solo en la línea de presión. En las tomas de manómetro se debe montar una llave de aislamiento con
objeto de anular el manómetro cuando no es necesario efectuar lecturas, para prolongar la vida de
este o para su sustitución.
En los equipos hidráulico se utilizan tubos de acero inox 316 L estirado en frio sin soldadura.
Los racores los hemos dimensionado según las características del equipo, sobre todo en
función de las presiones de trabajo y de los diámetros de las tuberías.
Reglas generales:
3
NEUWALME, S.L.
.- Hasta DN 40, racores en tres piezas con anillo cortante (equipos con poca carga de trabajo
y en ausencia de vibraciones).
.- Hasta DN 40, racores en tres piezas con espiga de soldar y cierre cónico con junta tórica
(equipos sometidos a trabajos severos).
.- Hasta DN 40, racores en dos piezas con tubo conformado ovalillo y cierre con junta tórica
(equipos sometidos a trabajos severos).
.- Hasta DN 40, racores en tres piezas con tubo abocardado felura y cierre con junta tórica
(equipos sometidos a trabajos severos).
.- superiores a DN 40 con bridas Sae o Cetop.
Durante la colocación en obra, los tubos deben de ser amarrados por medio de abrazaderas o
soportes, hoy en día se han adoptado universalmente, a tal fin, abrazaderas de goma o plástico,
normalmente en material poliamidico o polipropilénico.
El panel de filtrado, para central hidroeléctrico Pando y Montelirio, ha sido diseñado con las
siguientes características técnicas.
Panel de circulación de agua que se intercala en la instalación de una central hidráulica, cuyo
caudal máximo en la línea general es de 2000 litros/minuto.
Todos los componentes del panel van montados sobre un soporte fabricado, en acero al
carbono con imprimación y pintado, que da rigidez al equipo, la altura de trabajo en el panel se ha
diseñado para ser adecuada ergonómicamente.
Los elementos del circuito, van sujetos al soporte, con abrazaderas para evitar trasmisión de
vibraciones y golpes de ariete al soporte.
Según el esquema EQ120204-01, se va a explicar la funcionalidad del panel hidráulico.
La conexión principal y por donde se recoge el agua que va a ser filtrada, se hace en la
conexión nº 5, para dicha conexión se dispone de una brida DN125 PN16.
A continuación se va a realizar una descripción de cada línea del circuito de agua.
El agua pasa por el sistema de filtrado, con filtro ciclón de descarga automática (1819/1) o
filtro simple (1819/2) para utilizar cualquiera de ellos se ha colocado un sistema de válvulas de bola
(1817/1, 1817/2, 1816/1, 1816/2) que permite utilizar uno u otro según sea necesario. Lleva en
paralelo un presostato de detección de colmatación en el filtro (F1815), para detección de la
obturación en alguno de los dos filtros.
A la salida del sistema de filtraje se han instalado dos líneas, a continuación se explica la
función de cada una:
• Línea de refrigeración de grupo hidráulico, en esta línea el agua se utiliza para la
refrigeración del aceite del grupo hidráulico (salida 2). Para aislar esta línea se hace a
través de la válvula de bola (2063).
• Línea de descarga, esta línea se utiliza para la salida del agua filtrada.
Los manuales de los diferentes componentes de este panel, están adjuntos ha este documento.
Para evitar posibles problemas, en las diferentes líneas y saber la presión de trabajo en cada
momento de la línea, se han colocado en los puntos más significativos del circuito, presostato y
manómetros (cuyo rango de trabajo es de 0-25bar) aislados de la línea, si esto fuese necesario, por la
válvula de bola (1830)
El caudal máximo para el que fue diseñado, el panel hidráulico es de 2000 litros/min.
Presión de ensayo 10 bares.
Presión nominal del equipo 5 bares.
Tamaño de malla en filtrado < 300 μ (micras).
El equipo está fabricado en AISI-316L, en las partes metálicas que pueden estar en contacto
con el agua, las demás están realizadas en acero al carbono pintado para construcción.
5
NEUWALME, S.L.
4 COMPONENTES DEL PANEL HIDRAULICO.
NOTA: Asegúrese si precisa izar el panel hidráulico, de que los cables no presionan la
tubería. Nunca levante el panel por la tubería o por cualquier otro elemento. Levantar el panel sólo
por las zonas habilitadas para ello (cáncamos u ojales para elevación)
El emplazamiento del panel hidráulico debe quedar con buen acceso para mantenimiento
cuando todo el equipo y la tubería estén definitivamente instalados, para comprobación y
mantenimiento.
Mantenga su panel hidráulico limpio y en ambiente ventilado. En ambientes enrarecidos
donde pueda estar expuesta a pulverizaciones refrigerantes, suciedad o calor radiado, puede que
precise de alguna protección especial.
La tubería que conecte el panel a los actuadores de la maquina deberá ser instalada por
personal cualificado para el montaje de tubería. Los tubos y accesorios deben estar adecuadamente
sujetos por abrazaderas de montaje.
La tubería debe ser corta y directa, evitando recodos y curvas innecesarias.
La longitud y el tamaño de la tubería y sus conexiones deben estar de acuerdo con el
esquema hidráulico. El uso de Ø inferiores o superiores puede ocasionar importantes pérdidas de
carga que afectaran negativamente al buen funcionamiento del sistema.
6
NEUWALME, S.L.
Es muy importante que la tubería instalada este limpia, y completamente libre de partículas y
rebarbas.
NOTA: No saque los tapones del panel hidráulico hasta que este apunto de conexionar la
tubería para mantener limpio el sistema.
6 LIMPIEZA.
7 LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS.
El aire, algunas veces, está atrapado en los filtros cuando se conecta el panel.
De no tomar las precauciones precisas en la puesta en servicio, los filtros pueden sufrir una
alta contaminación, sáquelos, límpielos y asegúrese de volver a colocarlos correctamente.
7
NEUWALME, S.L.
8 MANTENIMIENTO.
Con el tiempo, las inspecciones rutinarias no son suficientes, las condiciones de trabajo
varían, una revisión completa del equipo seria económicamente recomendable. En este caso, es
aconsejable realizar una exhaustiva limpieza de todo el equipo.
NOTA: Antes de llevar a cabo una revisión general, sería prudente que contactase con
NEUWALME, para adquirir los repuestos y recambios de su panel hidráulico, ya que de este modo
podemos garantizarle el suministro de los componentes adecuados.
Al volver a montar el sistema, procure seguir todas las instrucciones y tomar las precauciones
necesarias para mantener el interior de su equipo perfectamente limpio.
Con frecuencia mensual. Permite una fácil localización de pérdidas de fluido y la inmediata
intervención.
8
NEUWALME, S.L.
8.4 CONTROL DE FILTROS.
Como ya hemos indicado reviste la máxima importancia. Deben efectuarse con una
frecuencia al menos semanal. Los filtros que se comercializan facilitan mucho la operación al estar
en muchos casos dotados de indicadores de colmatación.
En instalaciones más importantes se utilizan filtros con indicadores eléctricos de colmatación
que indican directamente la anomalía al dispositivo de mando, permitiendo aprovechar la señal
eléctrica para el bloqueo de la instalación, alarma, etc.
8.5 SEGURIDAD.
9 ESQUEMA HIDRAULICO.
9
NEUWALME, S.L.
F Déclare en tant que fabricant et fournisseur, et sous Notre seule responsabilité que le produit:
MODELO
NUMERO DE SERIE
DECLARACION/STATEMENT/DECLARATION
E Este equipo no deberá ser puesto en servicio hasta que la maquina en la que va a incorporarse haya
sido declarada en conformidad con las disposiciones de las directivas arriba indicadas
GB This equipment must not be put into service until the machinery into which it is going to be
incorporated has been declared in conformity with the above directive.
F Cette groupe ne pourra être mise en service que lors que la machine á laquelle elle doit éter incorporée
aura été déclarée conforme aux dispositions de la directive sus-mentionnée.
10
NEUWALME, S.L.
Neuwalme, S.L. posee una solida reputación por sus avanzados diseños y por la
Fiabilidad de sus productos, fabricados con rigurosos controles y materiales de
Primera Calidad. Sin embargo, para ofrecerle una total seguridad en el caso de que
Aparezcan fallos, usted como usuario de productos NEUWALME dispone de una garantía de 12 meses,
válida para el producto que acaba de adquirir.
Su producto NEUWALME esta garantizado contra cualquier defecto de fabricación o de
componentes originales.
La garantía NEUWALME cubre:
El suministro de los componentes defectuosos por otros nuevos originales.
La garantía NEUWALME no cubre:
La mano de obra.
Defectos originados por manipulaciones indebidas.
Defectos causados por puesta en marcha realizada por personal no autorizado.
Defectos causados por uso incorrecto del producto, o conservación inadecuada.
Defectos ocasionados por modificaciones del producto realizadas por personal no autorizado.
Defectos originados por desgaste natural.
La pérdida de fluidos vehiculados y los daños que estos originen.
La utilización de fluidos hidráulicos o lubricantes no recomendados.
NEUWALME tiene suscrita una póliza de seguros, Responsabilidad civil incluida, cuyas clausulas están a su
disposición en nuestras oficinas.
Periodo de garantía.
La garantía es válida por un periodo de 12 meses a partir de la fecha de compra e incluye el producto
citado y todas las partes y componentes siempre que sean productos originales cuyo listado figura en el esquema
(neumático, hidráulico, eléctrico).
Que debe hacer si aparecen fallos
Solicite la asistencia técnica de nuestros servicios
Presente la tarjeta de garantía a nuestros servicios técnicos.
Tarjeta de garantía.
PRODUCTO:
NUMERO:
CLIENTE:
NUMERO DE PEDIDO
VALIDO HASTA
11
NEUWALME, S.L.
ART. 2525
VALVULA ESFERA PASO TOTAL 2 PIEZAS BRIDAS DIN PN -16 2525 04 1/2’’ 2,300
MONTAJE DIRECTO DE ACTUADORES S/ISO 5211. 2525 05 3/4’’ 2,900
CUERPO: HIERRO FUNDIDO GGG-40. 2525 06 1’’ 4,000
ESFERA Y EJE: AISI 304.
ASIENTOS: PTFE + 15% FV. TORICA EJE: VITÓN. 2525 07 1 1/4’’ 5,000
PRESION MAX.: 16 Kg/cm2 TEMP. -30ºC + 180ºC. 2525 08 1 1/2’’ 7,000
MANDO MANUAL POR PALANCA CON SISTEMA DE BLOQUEO.
L: S/DIN 3202 F-4. 2525 09 2’’ 9,400
2525 10 2 1/2’’ 13,000
2 PCS. FULL BORE BALL VALVE FLANGES DIN PN - 16
DIRECT MOUNTING FOR ACTUATORS S/ISO 5211. 2525 11 3” 17,200
BODY: CAST IRON GGG-40. BALL AND STEM: AISI 304. 2525 12 4” 22,600
SEATS: PTFE + 15% GF. STEM O’RING: VITON.
MAX. PRESSURE: 16 kg/cm2 TEMP. -30ºC + 180ºC.
MANUALLY OPERATED BY HANDLE WITH LOCKING SYSTEM..
L: S/DIN 3202 F-4.
Med. DN D L M A ISO 5211
1/2” 15 95 115 130 80 F03/F04
3/4” 20 105 120 130 80 F03/F04
1” 25 115 125 170 90 F04/F05
1 1/4” 32 140 130 170 102 F04/F05
1 1/2” 40 150 140 220 110 F05/F07
2” 50 165 150 220 120 F05/F07
2 1/2” 65 185 170 284 140 F07/F10
3” 80 200 180 284 150 F07/F10
4” 100 220 190 360 180 F07/F10
ART. 2528
BRIDAS DIN PN -40 <DN -50 2528 04 1/2’’ 2,200
BRIDAS DIN PN -16 >DN -50 2528 05 3/4’’ 3,050
VALVULA ESFERA PASO TOTAL 2 PIEZAS DISEÑO 2528 06 1’’ 3,750
“FIRE SAFE” MONTAJE DIRECTO DE ACTUADORES S/ISO 5211
CUERPO: INOX. CF8M (316) MICROFUSION. 2528 07 1 1/4’’ 5,750
ASIENTOS Y JUNTAS: PTFE +15% FV TORICA EJE: VITON. 2528 08 1 1/2’’ 7,000
DISPOSITIVO ANTIESTÁTICO.
PRESION MAX.: 40/16 Kgs/cm2 SEGÚN MEDIDA. 2528 09 2’’ 9,500
TEMP.: -30ºC + 180ºC. MANDO MANUAL POR PALANCA. 2528 10 2 1/2’’ 14,750
LONG: S/DIN 3202 F-4 DN 15 DN 100
F-5 DN 125 DN 200 2528 11 3” 18,850
2528 12 4” 26,250
FLANGES DIN PN -40 ≤DN -50
2528 13 5’’ 43,650
FLANGES DIN PN -16 >DN -50 2528 14 6’’ 60,850
2 PCS. FULL BORE BALL VALVE FIRE-SAFE DESIGN DIRECT 2528 16 8’’ 106,700
MOUNTING FOR ACTUATORS ISO 5211
BODY: STAINLESS STEEL. CF8M (316) INVESTMENT CASTING.
SEATS: PTFE + 15% GF STEM O’RING: VITON. Medida ISO PN Dimensiones / Dimensions
mm
ANTIESTATIC DEVICE. Size 5211
MAX. PRESSURE: 40/16 kg/cm2 DEPENDING ON SIZE. A H L M
TEMP.: -30ºC + 180ºC. MANUALLY OPERATED BY HANDLE. 1/2” F-04 40 95 85 115 170
L: DIN 3202 F-4 DN 15 DN 100 3/4” F-04/F-05 40 105 85 120 170
F-5 DN 125 DN 200 1” F-04/F-05 40 116 95 125 170
1 1/4” F-05/F-07 40 140 106 130 170
1 1/2” F-05/F-07 40 150 110 140 200
2” F-05/F-07 40 165 118 150 200
2 1/2” F-07/F-10 16 185 170 170 380
3” F-07/F-10 16 200 170 180 380
4” F-07/F-10 16 220 170 190 380
5” F-10/F-12 16 250 200 325 450
POS) 2 6” F-10/F-12 16 285 250 350 550
8” F-12 16 340 300 400 550
REF. 337 NEUWALME 252813
REF. ANDRITZ 1806/1, 1816/2, 1817/1, 1817/2
24
TECHNICAL SHEET
VORTEX
Centrifugal separating filter AISI 304 - AISI 316
VORTEX is a centrifugal separating filter with a stainless steel body and a manual drain at the bottom. It is particularly indicated to
treat water containing sands and/or suspended solids of a specific gravity superior to the water (P 1). The filter is able to remove
until 99% of sands and/or suspended solids with dimensions bigger than 75 µm and until the 65% with dimensions bigger than 50
µm. It has been designed to prevent at its best, the drain losses but maintaining the best separating efficiency. VORTEX works
continuously, it does not contain filtrating elements or parts in movements, it can be inspected and can be provided of an
automatic drain.
General informations
Materials Connections Application limits
Body AISI 304 - 316 DN Type
Filtration field 1.000÷50 µm
Cover AISI 304 - 316 ¾"
Cone Plastic 1" PN 10 bar
BSP ANSI 150 - NPT
Deflector AISI 304 1" ½ T < + 60°C
Male threaded
Gasket Epdm 2"
3"
100 ISO PN 16/10
150 Flanged
Technical informations
In/Out Drain Qmin* Qmax* Weight Dimensions [mm]
Model
[in-mm] [in-mm] 3
[m /h] 3
[m /h] [kg] A B C D E X
VX ¾" ¾" ½" 2 4 9 180 525 155 110 30 220
VX 150 150 2" 95 190 105 590 2150 335 400 80 300
VX 150P 150 2" 180 300 130 630 2300 505 405 125 300
Included elements
Included elements
Description Ø [mm-in] n° L
Body support - Ø88.9 - AISI304 88,9 VX ¾"
Body support - Ø114.3 - AISI304 114,3 VX 1"
Body supporto - Ø139.7 - AISI304 139,7 VX 1" ½
Body support - Ø168.3 - AISI304 168,3 VX 2"
Body support - Ø219 - AISI304 219 1 VX 3"
Body support - Ø273 - AISI304 273 VX 100
Med DN PN H L
2” 50 16 126 200
2 1/2” 65 16 145 240
3” 80 16 173 260
4” 100 16 186 300
5” 125 16 225 350
6” 150 16 287 400
R
65
65
ART. 2461
FILTRO - Y BRIDAS DIN PN - 16 2461 04 1/2’’ 1,950 135,92
CONSTRUCCION: AISI 316. 2461 05 3/4’’ 2,750 146,37
JUNTAS: PTFE CONEXION: BRIDAS DIN PN-16. 2461 06 1’’ 3,700 178,25
PRESION DE TRABAJO: 16 Kgs/cm2.
TEMP. : -30ºC +240ºC. 2461 07 1 1/4’’ 5,900 268,93
TAMIZ: AISI 316 CHAPA PERFORADA (VER d1). 2461 08 1 1/2’’ 6,400 282,37
FLANGED “Y” STRAINER PN-16 2461 09 2’’ 8,900 367,54
CONSTR. AISI 316. 2461 10 2 1/2’’ 12,950 528,95
SEATS: PTFE ENDS: FLANGES DIN PN-16.
WORKING PRESSURE: 16 kg/cm2. 2461 11 3’’ 18,150 654,40
TEMPERATURE: -30ºC + 240ºC. 2461 12 4’’ 24,300 1156,43
SIEVE: AISI 316 PERFORATED PLATE (SEE D1). 2461 13 5’’ 38,350 1459,77
2461 14 6’’ 61,300 1975,47
d1
DN A D L
1
2461 16 8’’ 115,000 3510,36
15 75 95 130
20 90 105 150 1
25 100 115 160 1
32 115 140 180 1
40 130 150 200 1
50 150 165 230 1
65 190 185 290 2
80 200 200 310 2
100 230 220 350 2
POS) 4 125 280 250 400 2
150 300 285 480 2
REF. 337 NEUWALME 246113 200 400 340 605 2
Presostato diferencial,
tipo MBC 5080 y MBC 5180
Homologaciones EN 60947-4-1
EN 60947-5-1
CCC, China Compulsory Certificate
Especificaciones eléctricas
Conmutador SPDT
AC15 0,5 A, 250 V
Carga del contacto
DC13 12 W, 125 V
Condiciones de trabajo
Temperatura Funcionamiento !"#a 85°C
Transporte $"#a 85°C
Protección IP 65, IEC 529
Estabilidad frente Sinusoidal 4g, 25Hz - 100 Hz IEC 68-2-6
a las vibraciones
Resistencia a los impactos Impacto 50g / 6 ms IEC 68-2-27
Caída libre IEC 68-2-32
Especificaciones mecánicas
Conexión de presión Estándar G1/4 hembra (ISO 228/1) o brida
Opcional Véase especificaciones, página 4
Conexión eléctrica Conector DIN 43650, Pg9, Pg11 o Pg 13.5
Material de las partes en contacto Carcasa AIMgSi1 anodizado
con el medio Diafragma NBR
Junta tórica NBR
Conector (versión brida) Latón niquelado
Junta tórica (versión brida) NBR
Material de la caja Carcasa AIMgSi1 anodizado
Accesorio del enchufe Poliamida con fibra de vidrio PA
6.6
Peso 0,5 kg
Conexión eléctrica
2 IC.PD.P10.K1.05 - 520B2370
POS) 5
REF. 20 NEUWALME MBC508020311VB04
REF. ANDRITZ F1815
Especificación técnica Presostato diferencial, tipo MBC 5080 y MBC 5180
1)
Versión preferente
Diferencial mecánico, véase datos técnicos en Con los tipos MBC 5080/5180 ajustados a 5,0
página 2. bar de diferencial y una presión de sistema de 0
bar, con una presión de sistema de 30 bar dará
Las versiones MBC estándar están ajustadas al una alarma a 34,2 bar aprox. El diferencial ha
rango de diferencial mínimo de 0,3 bar. disminuido 0,8 bar.
La variación de la presión del sistema no afectará Nuestra experiencia indica que los MBC
al ajuste del diferencial. 5080/5180 se utilizan a menudo con un ajuste
Si el diferencial se ajusta a un valor elevado, diferencial cerca del mínimo, siendo el diferencial
siendo la presión del sistema 0 bar, se producirá independiente de la presión del sistema.
un leve cambio en el punto de ajuste. Si se requiere un gran diferencial, recomendamos
Ejemplo: ajustar el diferencial a la presión de sistema que
sería normal para la aplicación.
Pedidos de modelos a
medida
MBC 5080 -
MBC 5180 -
Rango de ajuste
0,3 - 5 bar ............... 2 0
Otros ....................... x x Conexión de presión
C B 0 4 ........................................ G 1/4 hembra
Tipo D B 0 4 ........................................ G 1/4 hembra con conexión brida
Diafragma NBR ............................ 3 x x x x ........................................ Otros
Otros ............................................... x
Microinterruptor
0,5 A, 250 V(a.c. 15) Conexión eléctrica
12 W, 125 V (c.c. 13) ................................. 1 0 .............................................................................. Sin enchufe (DIN 43650 A)
Otros ............................................................ x 1 .............................................................................. Conector Pg 11 (DIN 43650 A)
2 .............................................................................. Conector Pg 13.5 (DIN 43650 A)
3 .............................................................................. Conector Pg 9 (DIN 43650 A)
x .............................................................................. Otros
IC.PD.P10.K1.05 - 520B2370 3
ACTUADOR ELÉCTRICO MULTIVOLTAJE
POS) 6
J3 L55 – J3 H55 REF. 621 NEUWALME J3H55V202709125DO
REF. ANDRITZ 1821
ESPECIFICACIONES
SPECIFICATIONS
Mod. J3-L55 Mod. J3-H55
VOLTAJE (V) 12 - 24 VAC / VDC -0 / +5% 85 - 240 VAC / VDC
VOLTAGE (V) 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
TIEMPO MANIOBRA EN VACIÓ (s / 90º) + / - 10% 16 seg 14 seg
OPERATION TIME (s / 90º) NO LOAD + / - 10% 16 sec 14 sec
PAR MANIOBRA EN OPERACIÓN (Nm) 55 Nm 55 Nm
MAXIMUM OPERATIONAL TORQUE (lb/in) 486 lb/in 486 lb/in
PAR MÁXIMO ARRANQUE (Nm) 60 Nm 60 Nm
MAXIMUM TORQUE BREAK (lb/in) 560 lb/in 530 lb/in
TIEMPO BAJO TENSIÓN (%)
75 75
DUTY RATING (%)
PROTECCIÓN IEC 60529
IP-65 IP-65
IP RATING IEC 60529
ÁNGULO MANIOBRA (º)
90º - 180º - 270º 90º - 180º - 270º
WORKING ANGLE (º)
TEMPERATURA ºC -20º + 70º C -20º + 70º C
TEMPERATURE ºF -4º + 158º F -4º + 158º F
INTERRUPTOR FINAL CARRERA
4 SPDT micro 4 SPDT micro
LIMIT SWITCH
RESISTENCIA CALEFACTORA (W)
4 4
HEATER (W)
12 VAC 2980 mA - 35,76 W 110 VAC 240 mA – 26,4 W
CONSUMO A PAR MÁXIMO + / - 5% 12 VDC 3080 mA - 36,97 W 110 VDC 260 mA – 28,6 W
CONSUMPTION AT MAXIMUM TORQUE + / - 5% 24 VAC 1200 mA - 28,8 W 220 VAC 110 mA – 24,2 W
24 VDC 1400 mA - 33,6 W 220 VDC 130 mA – 28,6 W
CONECTORES DIN 43650 DIN 43650
PLUGS ISO 4400 & C192 ISO 4400 & C192
PESO (Kg.)
2 2
WEIGHT (Kg.)
mm / inch
Cuerpo y Tapa: Poliamida anticorrosivo
Enclosure: Anticorrosive Polyamide
Levas internas: Poliamida y fibra de vidrio
Internal cams: Glass filled Polyamide
Ejes principales externos : Acero Inoxidable
Main external shaft: Stainless Steel
Engranajes: Acero y Poliamida
Gears: Steel and Polyamide
Indicador de Posición: Poliamida + Fibra de vidrio
Position indicator : Glass filled Polyamide
Tornillería exterior : Acero Inoxidable
Fastening: Stainless Steel
ANCLAJE – INTERFACE
5 J3 5
stainless steel ball valves
Stainless steel series ball valves are designed for use with pressure and temperature resistance of
corrosive fluids and in aggressive environments. Full bore, stainless steel series ball valves 4832
pressure
they are suited to higher pressure and high temperature
70
applications. Therefore they can be used for a wide range of PN64
60
industrial applications.
50
2 versions:
PN 40
40
- "3-piece" construction: allows the valve to be disassembled
30 example : at 100°C
in situ, to facilitate maintenance. PN 25
20 PN 64 becomes 48 bar
- one piece construction PN 40 becomes 30 bar
10
PN 42 becomes 17 bar
● constituent materials : temp For temperatures between 150°
-20° 0°+20°25°50° 100° 150° 200° °C and 200°, please consult us
- body, ball, ports, stem : stainless steel 316 L
- handle, lock washer, stop pin : stainless steel 304 L
- nuts, gland seal : stainless steel 303 L
POS) 7
- screw: stainless steel 305 L
- ball seal, stem seal, anti-friction washer : PTFE
REF. 11 NEUWALME 48122013
- "O" ring : FKM REF. ANDRITZ 1830
R21
POS) 8
REF. 642 NEUWALME PN2023
REF. ANDRITZ P/F-1830
Sensores de presión
PN2023
Detector de presión combinado
PN20
2 salidas
OUT1 = salida de commutación
OUT2 = salida de commutación o
salida analógica
1: Display alfanumérico de 4 dígitos
Display alfanumérico de 4 dígitos 2: LEDs (unidad de indicación / estado de conmutación)
3: Botón de programación
Rango de medición Made in Germany
-1...25 bar
-14,5...362,5 PSI
-0,1...2,5 MPa
Aplicación Tipo de presión: presión relativa
Fluidos líquidos y gaseosos
Alimentación DC PNP/NPN
Función de salida 2 x normalmente abierto / cerrado programable o 1 x normalmente abierto /
cerrado programable + 1 x analógica (4...20 mA / 0...10 V; fondo de escala
programable 1:4)
Tensión de alimentación [V] 20...30 DC ¹)
Corriente de salida [mA] 2 x 250
Protección contra cortocircuitos pulsada
Protección contra inversiones de
polaridad sí
Resistente a sobrecargas sí
Perro guardián integrado sí
Caída de tensión [V] <2
Consumo [mA] < 65
Salida analógica 4...20 mA / 0...10 V
Carga para salida analógica [Ω] 4...20 mA: máx. (Ub - 10 V) x 50 / 0...10 V: mín. 2000
Resistencia a la presión 100 bar 1450 PSI 10 MPa
Presión de rotura mín. 350 bar 5075 PSI 35 MPa
Margen de ajuste
Punto de consigna alto, SP -0,80...25,00 bar -11,5...362,5 PSI -0,08...2,50 MPa
Punto de consigna bajo, rP -0,90...24,90 bar -13,0...361,0 PSI -0,09...2,49 MPa
Punto inicial analógico, ASP -1,00...10,00 bar -14,5...145,0 PSI -0,10...1,00 MPa
Punto final analógico AEP 5,25...25,00 bar 76,0...362,5 PSI 0,53...2,50 MPa
en intervalos de 0,05 bar 0,5 PSI 0,01 MPa
Configuración de fábrica SP1 = 6,25 bar; rP1 = 5,75 bar
SP2 = 18,75 bar; rP2 = 18,25 bar
ASP = 0,00 bar; AEP = 25,00 bar
ifm electronic gmbh • Friedrichstraße 1 • 45128 Essen — Nos reservamos el derecho de modificar características técnicas sin previo aviso. — ES — PN2023 — 15.08.2005
PN2023
Posibilidades de programación histéresis / ventana; normalmente abierto / normalmente cerrado; lógica de
conmutación; salida corriente / tensión; amortiguamiento; calibración de los valores
visualizados; display giratorio / se puede desactivar; unidad de indicación
Precisión / diferencias
(en % del margen)
Turn down 1:1
Exactitud del punto de conmutación < ± 0,5
Exactitud señal analógica *) < ± 0,25 (BFSL) / < ± 0,5 (LS)
Linealidad < ± 0,5
Histéresis < ± 0,1
Repetibilidad **) < ± 0,1
Estabilidad a largo plazo ***) < ± 0,1
Coeficientes de temperatura (CT) en
el rango de temperatura 0...80° C (en
% del margen por cada 10 K)
CT más alto del punto cero < ± 0,1
CT más alto del margen < ± 0,2
Retardo a la disponibilidad [s] 0,2
Tiempo de respuesta mínimo de la
salida de conmutación [ms] 3
Amortiguamiento para la salida de
conmutación (dAP) [s] 0...4
Frecuencia de conmutación [Hz] ≤ 170
Tiempo de respuesta de la salida
analógica [ms] 3
Amortiguamiento para la salida
analógica (dAA) [s] 0 - 0,1 - 0,5 - 2
Temperatura ambiente [°C] -25...80
Temperatura del fluido [°C] -25...80
Temperatura de almacenamiento [°C] -40...100
Grado/clase de protección IP 65, III
Resistencia de aislamiento [MΩ] > 100 (500 V DC)
Resistencia a los choques DIN IEC 68-2-27:50 g (11 ms)
Resistencia a las vibraciones DIN IEC 68-2-6:20 g (10...2000 Hz)
Ciclos de conmutación mín. 100 millones
CEM EN 61000-4-2 ESD: 4 kV CD / 8 kV AD
EN 61000-4-3 HF radiado: 10 V/m
EN 61000-4-4 Burst: 2 kV
EN 61000-4-5 Surge: 0,5/1 kV
EN 61000-4-6 HF guiado: 10 V
MTTF [años] 131
Materiales de la carcasa inox (1.4301 / 304); inox (1.4404 / 316L); PC (Makrolon); PBT (Pocan); PEI; FPM
(Viton); EPDM/X (Santoprene); PTFE
Materiales en contacto con el fluido inox (1.4305 / 303); céramica; FPM (Viton)
Indicador Unidad indicadora 3 x LED verde
Estado de conmutación 2 x LED amarillo
Indicación de funcionamiento Display alfanumérico de 4 dígitos
Valores de medición Display alfanumérico de 4 dígitos
Conexionado Conector M12; contactos dorados
Peso [kg] 0,288
Notas ¹) según EN50178, SELV, PELV
*) BFSL = Best Fit Straight Line (configuración del valor mínimo) / LS
= configuración del valor límite
**) con variaciones de temperatura < 10 K
***) en % del margen por año
ifm electronic gmbh • Friedrichstraße 1 • 45128 Essen — Nos reservamos el derecho de modificar características técnicas sin previo aviso. — ES — PN2023 — 15.08.2005
PN2023
Conexionado
ifm electronic gmbh • Friedrichstraße 1 • 45128 Essen — Nos reservamos el derecho de modificar características técnicas sin previo aviso. — ES — PN2023 — 15.08.2005
Instrucciones de uso
Sensor de presión combinado
PN20xx
ES
06 / 2007
704027 / 00
Índice de contenidos
1 Advertencia preliminar�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������3
1.1 Símbolos utilizados����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������3
2 Indicaciones de seguridad�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������3
3 Utilización correcta����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������4
4 Función����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5
4.1 Función de conmutación�������������������������������������������������������������������������������5
4.2 Función analógica ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������6
5 Montaje����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������7
6 Conexión eléctrica�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������8
7 Elementos de manejo y visualización������������������������������������������������������������������9
8 Menú������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������10
8.1 Estructura del menú������������������������������������������������������������������������������������10
8.2 Explicación del menú����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11
9 Parametrización�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������12
9.1 Proceso general de parametrización�����������������������������������������������������������12
9.2 Fijar las señales de salida���������������������������������������������������������������������������14
9.2.1 Fijar la función de salida���������������������������������������������������������������������14
9.2.2 Fijar los límites de conmutación���������������������������������������������������������14
9.2.3 Graduar el valor analógico�����������������������������������������������������������������14
9.3 Configuraciones de usuario (opcional) �������������������������������������������������������15
9.3.1 Fijar la unidad de medida para la presión del sistema�����������������������15
9.3.2 Ajustes de la pantalla��������������������������������������������������������������������������15
9.3.3 Calibración del punto cero������������������������������������������������������������������15
9.3.4 Fijar el tiempo de retardo para las salidas de conmutación���������������15
9.3.5 Fijar la lógica de conmutación para las salidas de conmutación��������16
9.3.6 Fijar el amortiguamiento para las salidas de conmutación�����������������16
9.3.7 Fijar el amortiguamiento para la salida analógica������������������������������16
9.4 Funciones de asistencia������������������������������������������������������������������������������16
9.4.1 Lectura de los valores mínimos/máximos de la presión del sistema��16
10 Funcionamiento�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������17
10.1 Lectura de la configuración de los parámetros������������������������������������������17
10.2 Indicación de errores���������������������������������������������������������������������������������17
2
11 Dibujo a escala������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������18
12 Datos técnicos�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������19
12.1 Rangos de configuración���������������������������������������������������������������������������21
13 Configuración de fábrica����������������������������������������������������������������������������������23
1 Advertencia preliminar ES
1.1 Símbolos utilizados
► Requerimiento de operación
> Reacción, resultado
[…] Referencia a teclas, botones o indicadores
→ Referencia cruzada
Nota importante: el incumplimiento de estas indicaciones puede acarrear
funcionamientos erróneos o averías.
2 Indicaciones de seguridad
• Lea este documento antes de poner en marcha el equipo. Asegúrese de que el
producto es apto para su aplicación sin ningún tipo de restricciones.
• El incumplimiento de las indicaciones de utilización o de los datos técnicos
puede provocar daños personales y/o materiales.
• Compruebe en todas las aplicaciones la compatibilidad de los materiales del
producto (→ Capítulo 12 Datos técnicos) con los fluidos de presión que se van
a medir.
• Utilización en fluidos gaseosos con presiones > 25 bar solamente previa
solicitud a ifm.
3
3 Utilización correcta
El equipo supervisa la presión del sistema de máquinas e instalaciones.
Campo de aplicación
Tipo de presión: presión relativa
Sobrepresión
Referencia Rango de medición Presión de rotura
admitida
bar PSI bar PSI bar PSI
PN2020 0...400 0...5 800 600 8 700 1 000 14 500
PN2021 0...250 0...3 630 400 5 800 850 12 300
PN2022 0...100 0...1 450 300 4 350 650 9 400
PN2023 -1...25 -14,5...362,5 100 1 450 350 5 075
PN2024 -1...10 -14,5...145 75 1088 150 2 175
PN2026 -0,13...2,50 -1,45...36,25 20 290 50 725
PN2060 0...600 0...8 700 800 11 600 1 200 17 400
mbar PSI bar PSI bar PSI
PN2009 -1 000...1 000 -14,5...14,5 20 290 50 725
PN2027 -50...1 000 -0,74...14,5 10 145 30 450
PN2069 -500...500 -7,25...7,25 10 145 30 450
mbar inH2O bar inH2O bar inH2O
PN2028 -12,5...250,0 -5,0...100,4 10 4 000 30 12 000
MPa = bar ÷ 10 / kPa = bar × 100
Mediante medidas adecuadas se deben evitar las sobrepresiones estáti-
cas y dinámicas que superen el valor de sobrepresión indicado.
No se debe sobrepasar la presión de rotura indicada.
Incluso el hecho de sobrepasar momentáneamente la presión de rotura
puede causar la destrucción del equipo. ATENCIÓN: ¡riesgo de lesiones!
Utilización en fluidos gaseosos con presiones > 25 bar solamente previa
solicitud a ifm.
4
4 Función
• El equipo muestra la presión actual del sistema en una pantalla.
• Genera 2 señales de salida en función de los parámetros.
OUT1 • Señal de conmutación para el valor límite de la presión del sistema.
• Señal de conmutación para el valor límite de la presión del sistema.
OUT2
• Señal analógica para la presión del sistema (4...20 mA o 0...10V).
1 2
5
4.2 Función analógica
• [OU2] determina si el rango de medición configurado se visualiza con
4...20 mA ([OU2] = [I]) o con 0...10 V ([OU2] = [U]).
• El punto inicial analógico [ASP] determina el valor de medición en el cual la
señal del salida tiene 4 mA o 0 V.
• El punto final analógico [AEP] determina el valor de medición en el cual la
señal de salida tiene 20 mA o 10 V.
Diferencia mínima entre [ASP] y [AEP] = 25 % del margen de medición.
Salida de tensión de 0...10 V
Configuración de fábrica Rango de medición graduado
6
Salida de corriente de 4...20 mA
Configuración de fábrica Rango de medición graduado
5 Montaje
Antes de montar y desmontar el equipo: asegurarse de que en la instala-
ción no esté aplicada la presión.
►► Colocar el equipo en una conexión de proceso G¼.
►► Apretar fuertemente.
7
6 Conexión eléctrica
El equipo sólo puede ser instalado por técnicos electricistas.
Se deben cumplir los reglamentos tanto nacionales como internacionales
para el establecimiento de instalaciones electrotécnicas.
Suministro de tensión según EN50178, MBTS y MBTP.
►► Desconectar la tensión de alimentación.
►► Conectar el equipo de la siguiente manera:
2 x conmutación positiva 2 x conmutación negativa
1 BN 1 BN
L+ L+
2 WH 2 WH
4 BK 4 BK
2: OUT2 3 BU 2: OUT2 3 BU
4: OUT1 L 4: OUT1 L
1 x conmutación positiva / 1 x analógica 1 x conmutación negativa /1 x analógica
1 BN 1 BN
L+ L+
2 WH 2 WH
4 BK 4 BK
2: OUT2 3 BU 2: OUT2 3 BU
4: OUT1 L 4: OUT1 L
8
7 Elementos de manejo y visualización
De 1 a 8: LED indicadores
-- LED 1 a LED 6 = presión del sistema en la unidad de medida indicada en la etiqueta.
-- En los equipos con 3 unidades de medida configurables, los LED 4 a 6 no se utilizan.
-- En los equipos con 4 unidades de medida configurables, los LED 5 y 6 no se utilizan. ES
-- LED 7, LED 8 = estado de conmutación de la salida correspondiente.
9: Pantalla alfanumérica de 4 dígitos
-- Indicación de la presión actual del sistema
-- Indicación de los parámetros y de los valores de los parámetros
10: Botón Set
-- Configuración de los valores de los parámetros (de forma continua si se mantiene pulsa-
do el botón; uno por uno si se presiona el botón una sola vez).
11: Botón Mode/Enter
-- Selección de los parámetros y confirmación de los valores de los parámetros.
9
8 Menú
8.1 Estructura del menú
10
8.2 Explicación del menú
SP1/rP1 Valor límite superior/inferior de la presión del sistema con el cual OUT1
conmuta.
SP2/rP2 Valor límite superior/inferior de la presión del sistema con el cual OUT2
conmuta.
OU1 Función de salida para OUT1:
• Señal de conmutación para los valores límites de presión: función de
histéresis [H ..] o función de ventana [F ..], respectivamente normalmente
abierto [. no] o normalmente cerrado [. nc].
OU2 Función de salida para OUT2:
• Señal de conmutación para los valores límites de presión: función de
histéresis [H ..] o función de ventana [F ..], respectivamente normalmente
abierto [. no] o normalmente cerrado [. nc].
• Señal analógica para la presión actual del sistema: 4...20 mA [I] o
0...10 V [U].
ES
ASP Punto inicial analógico para la presión del sistema: valor de medición con el
cual se emite 4 mA / 0 V.
AEP Punto final analógico para la presión del sistema: valor de medición con el
cual se emite 20 mA / 10 V.
EF Funciones avanzadas / acceso al nivel de menú 2.
HI Memoria de los valores máximos para la presión del sistema.
LO Memoria de los valores mínimos para la presión del sistema.
COF Calibración del punto cero
CAr Restablecimiento de la calibración del punto cero.
dS1/dS2 Retardo de conmutación para OUT1 / OUT2.
dr1/dr2 Retardo de desconmutación para OUT1 / OUT2.
P-n Lógica de conmutación de las salidas: pnp / npn.
dAP Amortiguamiento para las salidas de conmutación.
dAA Amortiguamiento para la salida analógica.
diS Frecuencia de actualización y orientación de la pantalla.
Uni Unidad de medida estándar para la presión del sistema.
11
9 Parametrización
Durante el proceso de parametrización el sensor permanece en el modo ope-
rativo. Sigue llevando a cabo sus funciones de supervisión con los parámetros
existentes hasta que la parametrización haya concluido.
9.1 Proceso general de parametrización
Cada configuración de parámetros requiere seguir 3 pasos:
1 Seleccionar el parámetro
►► Presionar [Mode/Enter] hasta que
aparezca el parámetro deseado.
12
• Cambio del nivel de menú 1 al nivel de menú 2:
►► Presionar [Mode/Enter] hasta que
aparezca [EF] en la pantalla.
• Bloquear / Desbloquear
El equipo se puede bloquear electrónicamente para evitar un ajuste erróneo no ES
intencionado.
►► Asegurarse de que el equipo se en-
cuentra en el modo operativo normal.
►► Presionar [Mode/Enter] + [Set]
durante 10 s.
>> [Loc] aparece en la pantalla.
• Timeout:
Si durante la configuración de un parámetro no se pulsa ningún botón durante 15 s,
el equipo retorna al modo operativo sin que se produzca ninguna modificación de los
valores.
13
9.2 Fijar las señales de salida
9.2.1 Fijar la función de salida
►► Seleccionar [OU1] y configurar la función:
[Hno] = función de histéresis/normalmente abierto,
[Hnc] = función de histéresis/normalmente cerrado,
[Fno] = función de ventana/normalmente abierto,
[Fnc] = función de ventana/normalmente cerrado.
►► Seleccionar [OU2] y configurar la función:
[Hno] = función de histéresis/normalmente abierto,
[Hnc] = función de histéresis/normalmente cerrado,
[Fno] = función de ventana/normalmente abierto,
[Fnc] = función de ventana/normalmente cerrado,
[I] = señal de corriente proporcional a la presión de 4…20 mA,
[U] = señal de tensión proporcional a la presión de 0...10 V.
14
9.3 Configuraciones de usuario (opcional)
9.3.1 Fijar la unidad de medida para la presión del sistema
►► Seleccionar [Uni] y fijar la unidad de medida:
[bAr], [mbAr]
[MPA], [kPA]
[PSI]
[IH2O] (solo PN2009, PN2027, PN2028, PN2069)
[inHG] (solo PN2009)
[mmWS] (solo PN2028)
15
9.3.5 Fijar la lógica de conmutación para las salidas de conmutación
►► Seleccionar [P-n] y configurar [PnP] o [nPn].
16
10 Funcionamiento
Una vez conectada la tensión de alimentación, el equipo se encuentra en el modo
Run (= modo operativo normal). Ejecuta las funciones de evaluación y medición y
emite señales de salida correspondientes a los parámetros configurados.
Indicadores de funcionamiento → Capítulo 7 Elementos de manejo y visualiza-
ción.
10.1 Lectura de la configuración de los parámetros
►► Presionar brevemente [Mode/Enter]: se puede acceder a los parámetros uno
por uno.
►► Presionar brevemente [Set]: el valor actual del parámetro parpadea en la pan-
talla durante 15 s. Tras otros 15 s, el equipo retorna al modo Run.
10.2 Indicación de errores
[OL] Sobrepresión (valor por encima del rango de medición) ES
[UL] Presión negativa (valor por debajo del rango de medición)
[SC1] Cortocircuito en OUT1*
[SC2] Cortocircuito en OUT2*
[SC] Cortocircuito en ambas salidas*
*La salida correspondiente sigue desconectada mientras dure el cortocircuito.
Estos avisos también se indican cuando la pantalla está apagada.
17
11 Dibujo a escala
Dimensiones en mm
1)
= dimensiones para PN2060
1: Pantalla; 2: LEDs; 3: Botón de programación
18
12 Datos técnicos
Tensión de alimentación [V]...............................................................................20...32 DC 1)
Consumo de corriente [mA]............................................................................................ < 65
Corriente máxima por cada salida de conmutación [mA]................................................ 250
Protección contra cortocircuitos; protección contra inversiones de polaridad /
sobrecargas, perro guardián integrado
Caída de tensión [V] ........................................................................................................ < 2
Retardo a la disponibilidad [s] ......................................................................................... 0,2
Tiempo de respuesta mín. de las salidas de conmutación [ms] ......................................... 3
Frecuencia de conmutación [Hz] .........................................................................170...0,125
Salida analógica ................................................................................. 4...20 mA / 0 ... 10 V
Carga máx. para la salida de corriente [Ω] ..................................................... (Ub - 10) x 50
Carga mín. para la salida de tensión [Ω] ...................................................................... 2000
Tiempo mín. de subida para la salida analógica [ms] ........................................................ 3
Precisión / variaciones (en % del margen)2)
- Precisión del punto de conmutación........................................................................ < ± 0,5 ES
- Exactitud de la señal analógica............................................ < ± 0,25 (BFSL) / < ± 0,5 (LS)
- Histéresis..................................................................................................................... < 0,1
- Repetibilidad (en caso de variaciones de temperatura < 10K) ............................... < ± 0,1
- Estabilidad a largo plazo (en % del margen por año).............................................. < ± 0,1
Coeficientes de temperatura (CT) en el
rango de temperatura compensado de 0 ... 80°C (en % del margen por cada 10 K)
- CT más alto del punto cero ................................................................................... < ± 0,2
- CT más alto del margen ........................................................................................ < ± 0,2
19
Materiales en contacto con el fluido ................inox (1.4305 / 303); cerámica; FPM (Viton);
Materiales de la carcasa ......................................inox (1.4301 / 304); inox (1.4404 / 316L);
PBTP (Pocan); PEI; FPM (Viton); EPDM/X (Santoprene)
además PTFE para PN2009, PN2023, PN2024, PN2026, PN2027, PN2028, PN2069
Grado de protección
- PN2020, PN2021, PN2022, PN2060.......................................................................... IP 67
- PN2009, PN2023, PN2024, PN2026, PN2027, PN2028, PN2069............................. IP 65
Clase de protección ........................................................................................................... III
Resistencia de aislamiento [MΩ]............................................................... > 100 (500 V DC)
Resistencia a choques [g] ...................................................... 50 (DIN / IEC 68-2-27, 11ms)
Resistencia a vibraciones [g] ....................................... 20 (DIN / IEC 68-2-6, 10 - 2000 Hz)
Ciclos de conmutación mín....................................100 millones (50 millones para PN2060)
Temperatura ambiente [°C] ................................................................................. -25 ... +80
Temperatura de almacenamiento [°C]................................................................ -40 ... +100
Temperatura del fluido [°C].................................................................................... -25 ... +80
EMV EN 61000-4-2 Descargas electrostáticas: .......................................................4 / 8 KV
EN 61000-4-3 Campos electromagnéticos de alta frecuencia radiados: 10 V/m
EN 61000-4-4 Transitorios eléctricos rápidos en ráfagas:2 KV
EN 61000-4-5 Impulsos de alta energía u ondas de choque:0,5 / 1 KV
EN 61000-4-6 Campos electromagnéticos de alta frecuencia conducidos: 10 V
1)
según EN50178, MBTS, MBTP
Todos los datos se refieren a Turn down de 2:1
2)
BFSL = Best Fit Straight Line (configuración del valor mínimo) / LS = configuración del
valor límite
20
12.1 Rangos de configuración
SP1 / SP2 rP1 / rP2 ASP AEP
ΔP
mín máx mín máx mín máx mín máx
mbar -988 1000 -996 992 -996 -200 -496 1000 4
PSI -14,3 14,5 -14,4 14,4 -14,4 -2,9 -7,3 14,5 0,1
PN2009
kPa -98,8 100 -99,6 99,2 -99,6 -20,0 -49,6 100,0 0,4
inH2O -397 401 -4009 398 -399 -80 -1989 402 1
inHg -29,1 29,5 -29,4 29,3 -29,4 -5,9 -14,6 29,5 0,1
bar 4 400 2 398 0 160 100 400 1
PN2021 PN2020
PSI -11,5 362,5 -13,0 361,0 -14,5 145,0 76,0 362,5 0,5
MPa -0,08 2,50 -0,09 2,49 -0,10 1,00 0,53 2,50 0,01
bar -0,88 10,00 -0,94 9,94 -1,00 3,40 1,50 10,00 0,02
PN2024
PSI -12,8 145,0 -13,6 144,2 -14,6 49,4 21,8 145,0 0,2
kPa -88 1000 -94 994 -100 340 150 1000 2
bar -0,11 2,50 -0,12 2,49 -0,13 1,00 0,50 2,50 0,01
PN2026
PSI -1,50 36,25 -1,65 36,10 -1,80 14,50 7,25 36,25 0,05
kPa -10,5 250,0 -11,5 249,0 -12,5 100,0 50,0 250,0 0,5
ΔP = incremento
21
SP1 / SP2 rP1 / rP2 ASP AEP
ΔP
mín máx mín máx mín máx mín máx
mbar -46 1000 -50 996 -50 400 250 1000 2
PN2027
PSI -0,68 14,50 -0,74 14,44 -0,74 5,80 3,64 14,50 0,02
kPa -4,6 100,0 -5,0 99,6 -5,0 40,0 25,0 100,0 0,2
inH2O -18,5 401,5 -20,0 400,0 -20,0 160,5 100,5 401,5 0,5
mbar -10,5 250,0 -11,5 249,0 -12,5 100,0 50,0 250,0 0,5
PN2028
PSI -7,19 7,25 -7,25 7,19 -7,25 -1,45 -3,63 7,25 0,01
kPa -49,6 50,0 -50,0 49,6 -50,0 -10,0 -25,0 50,0 0,1
inH2O -199 201 -201 199 -201 -40 -101 201 1
ΔP = incremento
22
13 Configuración de fábrica
Configuración de Configuración del
fábrica usuario
SP1 25 % MEW*
rP1 23 % MEW*
OU1 Hno
OU2 I
SP2 75 % MEW*
rP2 73 % MEW*
ASP 0
PN2009: -996 mbar ES
PN2069: -500 mbar
AEP 100 % MEW*
COF 0
dS1 0,0
dr1 0,0
dS2 0,0
dr2 0,0
P-n PnP
dAP 0,06
dAA 0,10
diS d2
Uni bAr / mbAr
* Está configurado el valor porcentual indicado del valor final del rango de medición
(MEW) del correspondiente sensor en bar / mbar (para los PN20x9 el valor porcentual
del margen de medición).
MEW = valor límite del rango de medición
23
stainless steel ball valves
Stainless steel series ball valves are designed for use with pressure and temperature resistance of
corrosive fluids and in aggressive environments. Full bore, stainless steel series ball valves 4832
pressure
they are suited to higher pressure and high temperature
70
applications. Therefore they can be used for a wide range of PN64
60
industrial applications.
50
2 versions:
PN 40
40
- "3-piece" construction: allows the valve to be disassembled
30 example : at 100°C
in situ, to facilitate maintenance. PN 25
20 PN 64 becomes 48 bar
- one piece construction PN 40 becomes 30 bar
10
PN 42 becomes 17 bar
● constituent materials : temp For temperatures between 150°
-20° 0°+20°25°50° 100° 150° 200° °C and 200°, please consult us
- body, ball, ports, stem : stainless steel 316 L
- handle, lock washer, stop pin : stainless steel 304 L
- nuts, gland seal : stainless steel 303 L
POS) 9
- screw: stainless steel 305 L
- ball seal, stem seal, anti-friction washer : PTFE
REF. 11 NEUWALME 48122027
- "O" ring : FKM REF. ANDRITZ 2063
R21
The International Certification Board
UNI EN ISO 9001:2008
Certified Company
Certification No. 017/09
VORTEX
INOX / Stainless Steel Centrifugal Separators
POS.1819/1
www.satifiltri.com
2 FILTERING PROCESS
The water supply connection (2) has been
designed to speed up the main flow at the
inlet of the filter itself, in order to favour a
descending water vortex inside the
housing (1).
3 The progressive acceleration, within the
special internal cone (3), creates the
centrifugal force needed for the best
separation of undesired solids.
The filtered water re-emerges centrally
through the “OUT” connection, while
separates solids drop in the tank
underneath the deflector (4)and are
4 drained outside (5).
NORME - STANDARDS
5 Costruzione in conformità alle Manufactured in compliance with
direttive 97/23/CE e 98/37/CE. 97/23/CE and 98/37/CE directives.
VX 100 54 238 105 462 100 1” 470 1860 315 300 80 250 85
VX 150 95 418 190 836 150 2” 590 2150 335 400 80 300 105
VX 150P 180 792 300 1320 150 2” 630 2300 505 405 125 300 130
EFFICIENZA DI SEPARAZIONE A
SEPARATION EFFICIENCY D
99 %
OUT
IN
65 %
Vista dall’alto
(Efficiency %)
Top View
B
10.0
MATERIALI - MATERIALS
Carcassa esterna AISI 304 / 316
Filter housing
Cono acceleratore Plastic
Accelerator cone
Deflettore AISI 304 / 316
Deflector
0.1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 100 200 400 600 1.000 (m³/h) Guarnizioni Epdm
8 20 30 60 80 200 300 600 2.000 3.000 6.000 (US gpm) Seals
10 100 1.000
®
SATI S.r.l.
Headquarter:
via M. Galli, 114
47522 Cesena (FC)
ITALY
Tel.: +39.0547.660307
Fax: +39.0547.660338
E-mail: info@satifiltri.com
Website: www.satifiltri.com
Distributed by:
Compact Excitation
Operation and Maintenance Manual
Excitation
Identification OMM THYNE1.110
Version.Revision 1.10
Table of Contents
1. Introduction ........................................................................................................... 7
1.1. Using this manual ........................................................................................................................7
1.1.1. Safety notes .........................................................................................................................8
1.1.2. Pictograms ...........................................................................................................................9
1.2. Where to keep this manual..........................................................................................................9
1.3. Warranty and liability .................................................................................................................10
1.4. Name and address of manufacturer..........................................................................................10
1.5. Copyright ...................................................................................................................................11
1.6. Intended Use .............................................................................................................................11
1.7. Transport or delivery..................................................................................................................11
1.8. Storage ......................................................................................................................................13
1.9. Abbreviations used ....................................................................................................................13
1.10. Safety ........................................................................................................................................14
1.10.1. General protective equipment ...........................................................................................15
1.10.2. Safety equipment...............................................................................................................16
1.11. Obligations of the user ..............................................................................................................17
1.12. Duties of the personnel .............................................................................................................18
4. Commissioning .................................................................................................103
4.1. Preparation fro commissioning ............................................................................................... 103
4.2. Commissioning wizard............................................................................................................ 103
4.2.1. Language selection......................................................................................................... 103
4.2.2. Starting the wizard .......................................................................................................... 104
4.2.3. Password input................................................................................................................ 104
4.2.4. Measuring principle......................................................................................................... 104
4.2.5. Machine and plant data................................................................................................... 105
4.2.6. Control options ................................................................................................................ 105
4.2.7. Local control.................................................................................................................... 106
4.3. Signal test ............................................................................................................................... 107
4.3.1. Digital inputs on THYNE1 ............................................................................................... 107
4.3.2. Analog inputs on THYNE1 .............................................................................................. 108
4.3.3. Analog outputs on THYNE1............................................................................................ 108
4.3.4. Transformer inputs on THYNE1...................................................................................... 109
4.3.5. Signals via bus (IEC 60870-5-104 or Modbus)............................................................... 109
4.4. Tests with generator in no-load operation .............................................................................. 110
4.4.1. Field current controller .................................................................................................... 111
4.4.2. Voltage controller in no-load operation ........................................................................... 113
4.4.3. Acceleration .................................................................................................................... 116
Table of Figures
1. Introduction
This equipment manual is part of the product documentation for the compact excitation THYNE1 from
ANDRITZ HYDRO GmbH. It has been specially adapted to the THYNE1 and refers solely to product
status of the THYNE1 at the date of issue of this equipment manual.
This equipment manual contains important information for correct, secure and intended operation of the
THYNE1. Control technology and protective system are primarily responsible for correct and safe
operation of generator and plant. Protective system and control system must be designed in such a
way, that any imaginable malfunction of the THYNE1 is reliably detected. Generator and plant must be
switched off by the protective system or the control system also in case of a malfunction of the
THYNE1, before any damage can be caused to generator or plant.
Compliance with the instructions in this equipment manual helps to a avoid currently known hazardous
incidents during operation of the THYNE1 and thus to optimize the availability and the service life
expectancy of the plant.
However, this equipment manual cannot deal with all precautionary measures, safety regulations and
instructions for operation of compact excitations. It therefore only contains a compact version of the
most import notes to be followed in particular when working with THYNE1, but cannot replace the expert
knowledge, training and instruction of the operating personnel.
This equipment manual solely addresses the owner or user of the THYNE1 and all personnel involved
in operation and upkeep (maintenance, inspection and repair) or entrusted with the integration of the
THYNE1 into the plant.
We generally recommend that all personnel entrusted with the design, integration, assembly,
commissioning, operation, troubleshooting or maintenance of the THYNE1 should thoroughly read this
equipment manual (all chapters), remember the most important contents to be able to find and read
information in certain chapters again whenever required.
Personnel entrusted with operation, troubleshooting and maintenance or other activities on the THYNE1
or on the machine/plant in particular must read the chapters on operation, troubleshooting and
maintenance before work is started and strictly follow the instructions given in these chapters. This
applies especially for personnel who is only occasionally involved (e.g. for maintenance or repair work
on machine/plant).
Personnel entrusted with the integration, assembly or commissioning of the THYNE1 must read the
corresponding chapters in this equipment manual before work is started and strictly follow the
instructions given in these chapters.
Due to existing national and international regulations the user is obliged to hand out all regulations
concerning industrial safety, health protection and protection of the environment in written form to all
personnel involved in the integration, assembly, commissioning, operation, troubleshooting or
maintenance of the THYNE1. Such instructions can also concern e.g. the handling of hazardous
substances or the provision/wearing of personal protective equipment. The user of the THYNE1 is
responsible for strict compliance with these instructions.
Beyond that, the user must create instructions concerning the organization of work (switching actions,
isolation, commissioning, trials, etc.), work sequences, consideration of operational peculiarities and
entrusted personnel, and to convey these to the personnel in an appropriate form. This also includes
instructions on supervising and reporting obligations.
In the chapter "Safety" all information is important and of relevance for safety. Information in this chapter
is therefore not marked with special danger symbols. The warning notes in the individual chapters of
this operation manual are identified by a pictogram, a signal word and a signalling colour, as follows.
WARNING or CAUTION
Warns of an imminent danger for the health of persons or of material damage.
Disregarding these notes can lead to personal injuries (injury, death), to material
damage, environmental damage and/or undesired or dangerous situations/operating
conditions.
When checking make sure that the special packaging has not been damaged or
dented/ripped open and therefore unserviceable.
NOTE
This marking warns against material damage.
Disregarding this note can lead to material damage on the THYNE1 or the
machine/plant.
INFORMATION
This marking contains useful information.
1.1.2. Pictograms
The following prohibition and warning notes of relevance for the THYNE1 and/or used in this equipment
manual are listed, in addition to the previously mentioned signs for warning, caution, note and
information.
The machine/plant may have additional prohibition, warning and mandatory signs, which obviously also
must be observed. The following operating instructions described their meaning.
Prohibition sign
Warning sign
At least two equipment manuals must be at hand at the installation location of the THYME1 at any time.
The Personnel must be informed about the storage location of the equipment manuals. Apart from this,
several persons should be provided with a copy (electronic or paper).
ANDRITZ HYDR excludes warranty and liability claims for deficiencies or damage which can be traced
back to one or several of the following causes:
Non-compliance with safety notes, recommendations, instructions and/or other information in the
equipment manual.
Changes to the machine/plant after commissioning, without considering possible effects on the
THYME1.
ANDRITZ Hydro will only assume liability for damage to the THYNE1. Liability for damage to other
equipment or plant components, for indirect and/or consequential damage, such as loss of production,
lost profit, loss on interest etc. is excluded. Details concerning liability can be found in the paragraphs
"Warranty" or "Liability for damage" in the order confirmation from ANDRITZ Hydro GmbH for the
corresponding order.
Wienerbergstraße 41
1120 Vienna
Austria
www.andritz.com
Please send information and proposals (including possible suggestions concerning the realization of this
manual) to this e-mail address.
1.5. Copyright
This instruction manual is the intellectual property of ANDRITZ Hydro and is protected by copyright law.
Reproduction of this instruction manual and disclosure to third parties, even in parts, is only permitted if
approved by ANDRITZ Hydro beforehand Violations oblige to compensation and may have penal
consequences. Technical details are subject to change and may differ from the information in the
instruction manual.
THYNE1 is a fully digital compact excitation with controller section, closed-loop control section and
power section. It can be used for the excitation of medium-sized synchronous generators with a.c. or
d.c. exciters as well as for synchronous generators (without exciter).
The THYNE1 or the machine must only be used in accordance with the specifications as per type key,
technical data, equipment manual, etc. Any operation beyond the power limits or in contrast to the
intended operational regulations is assumed unintended and can lead to damage, for which ANDRITZ
HYDRO will not assume liability.
Intended use also includes observance of this equipment manual and compliance with the maintenance
instructions (including the periodic Trip Test).
Unobjectionable and safe operation of the THYNE1 or the machine requires proper transportation,
storage, installation and assembly as well as conscientious operation and upkeep.
NOTE
The THYNE1 must only be transported to its destination by experienced haulage
companies. Safe transportation is the sole responsibility of the haulage companies.
The original packaging should be inspected for visible damage directly after arrival at
the destination, preferably while the representative of the haulage company is still
present.
When checking make sure that the special packaging has not been damaged or
dented/ripped open and therefore unserviceable.
Check the completeness of the delivery against the packing list. Report any missing parts immediately
via your purchasing department to the haulage company and inform ANDRITZ Hydro accordingly.
In case of obvious transport damages (damaged boxes, etc.) please proceed as follows:
Open damaged boxes so far that damage to components can be verified and documented.
Report damages immediately via your purchasing department to the haulage company and inform
ANDRITZ Hydro accordingly.
Subsequently pack the damaged components properly and store them in a dry place.
When opening the packaging pay attention to the markings "Top" (↑) and the warning and safety
notes on the packaging. Always open packages carefully to avoid any damage.
INFORMATION
Closed packages must never be opened en route or during handling,. Should
customs authorities open any closed packages, the haulage companies must restore
the packaging material to almost ex-factory condition, before continuing
transportation.
1.8. Storage
NOTE
An incorrectly stored THYNE1 can suffer damage or may even become
unserviceable because of weather influences, after only a short storage period.
The THYNE1 must be stored in its original packaging. After the goods inwards
inspection this packaging must be restored in ex-factory like condition for storage.
Storage class 5 applies for storing the THYNE1 for longer than six months.
The following points apply in addition or as change to storage class 4:
- climatized rooms
- temperature +5 to max. +40 °C
- rel. humidity 10 to max. 75 %
Abbreviations used
S Apparent power
P Active power
Q Reactive power
U Voltage
I Current
Ug Generator voltage
Ig Generator current
If Field current
fg Generator frequency
1.10. Safety
The chapter "Safety" contains general safety notes which must generally be observed when working on
the THYNE1 or the machine/plant. Additional general safety notes for individual activities can be found
in the chapters of the equipment manual. These are highlighted in the text by special warning notes.
WARNING or CAUTION
Disregarding the safety notes can cause danger for the life and health of persons,
environmental damage and/or material damage.
The listed safety notes refer to the THYNE1. Safety notes for components not manufactured by
ANDRITZ HYDRO can be found in the component descriptions of the suppliers, these must also be
followed.
ANDRITZ Hydro assumes that the user will ensure the following:
Each person who will work on the THYNE1 or on the machine/plant or in the vicinity of the THYNE1 or
the machine/plant has been trained for work on the THYNE1 or the machine/plant of this design and
the methods proceeding therein.
It must generally be noted that the personal protective equipment as specified in the country-specific
regulations or the regulations of the plant operator must be used for any work (also measurements) on a
live THYNE1.
CAUTION
Project planning, integration, installation, assembly, commissioning and operation of
this product must only be performed by
Andritz Hydro expressly does not assume liability for any damage caused by
operating errors, faulty design, incorrect plant integration, incorrect configuration or
assembly of our products.
Internal equipment modifications must only be carried out in the manufacturing plant.
Software updates are exceptional events and must only be performed by expert
personnel, which has been specially entrusted with this work by
ANDRITZ HYDRO GmbH/Department EXC
.
When commissioning the product one must strictly follow the locally valid safety
regulations, alongside the product instructions.
(*) Definition: Specially trained personnel describes persons who, among other, (at
least)
- can be described as professional electrician (electro-technical education),
- are familiar with the installation, assembly, commissioning and operation of the
unit THYNE1 and the plant, into which it is to be integrated,
- are familiar with the working principle of generators and exciter systems,
- are able to perform switching actions in accordance with the standards of safety
technology and have the authority to switch on and off, to isolate, to ground and
to mark in particular.
- have been trained in the care and use of safety equipment according to the
standards of safety technology
- have been trained in First Aid.
CAUTION
Insulation and high voltage testers must not be used, except for dielectric
testing of power circuits against ground Improper use of such equipment can
damage installed electronic components.
The overall plant must be equipped with EMERGENCY STOP buttons for reliable shutting down of the
plant or individual plant components. These EMERGENCY STOP button must be taken into
consideration when integrating the THYNE1 into the plant, so that actuation of these buttons reliably
switches off the supply voltages to the power section of the THYNE1 and fault tripping is applied to input
15 of the THYNE1.
Operation of the EMERGENCY STOP buttons should not cause any dangerous operating states for
machine/plant (circuit breaker intertripping, etc. Furthermore, access to all safety equipment must be
ensured at any time. Here two examples for EMERGENCY STOP button designs:
CAUTION
Both the THYNE1 and the plant will most likely still be live after operating an
EMERGENCY STOP button!
In accordance with the time constants currents will also flow in the field circuit for a
short time.
One of the safety facilities of the plant is the protective system (machine protection, electrical
protection). The THYNE1 must be integrated into the protective system or the plant in such a way, that if
the output A09 drops off or when the watchdog contact of the THYNE1 responds the plant is reliably
shut down, equivalent to the operation of an EMERGENCY STOP button.
The limiters of the THYNE1 must be adapted to the protective system in such a way, that the limiters of
the THYNE1 will respond before the operating point of the machine comes close to the characteristic
curves for triggering the generator set in the protective system. The characteristic curves set by the
protective system in the operating diagram for triggering the generator must be set in such a way, that
the generator/machine or plant can be reliably be shut down without being damaged at any operating
point.
CAUTION
With incorrectly set limiters of the THYNE1 it may happen that the machine is shut
down by the protective system (trip of machine).
With characteristic curves incorrectly set by the protective system it may happen that
generator/machine or plant suffer extreme damage.
The user of the THYNE1 or the machine/plant is responsible for the intended use of the THYNE1 or the
machine/plant. See paragraph 1.6 Intended Use.
In addition to this equipment manual you must also follow and assign any national legal and other
regulations concerning occupational safety, health protection and environmental protection!
The THYNE1 or the machine/plant must only be operated and serviced by qualified, reliable and
authorized persons. Personnel qualified for operation of the THYNE1 includes persons, who, due to
their education, experience, instruction and training are familiar with the characteristics of the THYNE1,
with the operation of the THYNE1 and with the operation of the system into which the THYNE1 has
been integrated.
Qualified personnel must have knowledge about the applicable standards and regulations, accident
prevention instructions and operating conditions of the plant and must have been entrusted to executed
the necessary activities by the person responsible for the safety of the plant. Qualified personnel must
thereby be able to recognize and avoid possible dangers.
The user must make sure that only instructed personnel performs work on the THYNE1 or the
machine/plant.
Personnel undergoing vocation training, participating on training courses or under instruction must only
work on the THYNE1 or the machine/plant under strict supervision of a qualified person. Always
remember the legal minimum age.
Work on the THYNE1 or the machine/plant must only be carried out by a skilled electrician or instructed
persons under the guidance and supervision of a skilled electrician.
The user is obliged to instruct any new operating and maintenance personnel to the same extent and
with the same diligence in the operation and upkeep of the THYNE1 or the machine/plant, under due
consideration of all safety notes.
Persons involved in designing, plant integration, transport, assembly, commissioning, operation and
upkeep of the THYNE1 must have read and understood this equipment manual and the safety notes in
particular, before they start their work.
Safety notes for components not manufactured by ANDRITZ HYDRO can be found in the component
descriptions of the suppliers, these must also be followed.
the assignment of the person(s) responsible for operation of the THYNE1 or the machine (machine
operator(s))
determining the behaviour in case of malfunctions (measures, necessary inspections before resuming
operation, documentation of the fault, etc.)
to check whether safety instructions are complied with as specified in the equipment manual
In order to avoid personal injury and material damage the following safety notes apply for all persons
who operate the THYNE1 or work on the THYNE1 or the plant/machine.
The safety notes in this equipment manual and on the machine must be observed.
In case of safety relevant malfunctions on THYNE1, both THYNE1 and the machine/plant must be
shut down and secured immediately. The malfunction(s) must be reported and rectified immediately.
The THYNE1 must be kept in clean condition. Tools and other objects must not be stored on the
THYNE1. The air guidance must not be obstructed.
The personnel must be informed about the function of the THYNE1 or the plant and all protecting and
monitoring equipment before operation or work is started.
After maintenance work and tests the original state must be re-established.
For normal operation the operating mode of the THYNE1 must be remotely switched to AUTOMATIC,
to make sure that the THYNE1 or the machine can be correctly shut down in case of danger.
THYNE1 is a digital compact excitation unit with max. 25 A output current for
synchronous machines of for synchronous generators with exciter.
Special features
Power section designed as IGBT 1 with two-quadrant operation and field suppressor
25 A rated output current at 45 °C (40A peak withstand current), short-circuit proof power outputs
Soft-Start function
Voltage regulator with excitation limiters and supplementary controllers (automatic operation)
Automatic tracking and possibility to switch between voltage and field current controller (manually or
automatically in case of a voltage regulator fault)
1
Insulated-Gate Bipolar Transistor. Properties: good forward power performance, high reverse blocking voltage, ruggedness,
almost wattless triggering; also a certain ruggedness towards short-circuits, because the IGBT limits the load current.
THYNE1 is an integrated and compact solution when excitation and voltage control for small and
medium-size synchronous generators with a.c. or d.c. exciters is required.
It is not only suitable for new plants, but, due to the ease of installation of this unit, also for the
upgrading of existing plants, whereby these can be upgraded within extremely short downtimes.
Local operation, danger message and visualization via colour touchpanel give the operating personnel
the possibility to operate the excitation locally, to read process values and to perform quick and precise
diagnosis and troubleshooting in case of malfunction.
THYNE1 – as blackbox with interfaces – is an exciter facility, which can be easily integrated in the
planning stage. Due to its small dimensions it can also be easily installed in a cabinet. Well accessible
terminal strips ease the installation of the unit. It has a modern design, a touchpanel for clear display
and operation and with its external adaptability and upgradeability as well as further options it can be
optimally adapted to the requirements of customer and plant.
Alternative
Station Supply
Voltage Current
Sensing Sensing
3~
GEN
Battery
Excitation
Transformer, (Power Supply
1- or 3-phase or Field Flashing)
Field
Field
Power
Power
Supply
7-ch, 1Msp/s ADC 24-60VDC//
Supply 110-250VAC/VDC
Power Supply
32 Bit Floating
Point DSP for
IGBT
Switch Control
Regulation THYNE1
with
Current Limiter
Defluxing 16 Bit Micro
Resistor for Control &
(int.) Communication
The field and rotor sizes can be operated in the following areas:
The exciter output is tapped in triple-phase or single-phase mode from the generator terminals in the
shunt via an excitation current transformer and fed into the THYNE1 via a supply contactor. The
THYNE1 compact excitation system rectifies the voltage and feeds it into the field. The supply contactor
may be of latched or unlatched design.
When using a high-voltage transformer as field-circuit transformer the voltage is first transformed to the
voltage level of the auxiliary network and subsequently adapted to the field data of the exciter by a
matching transformer. This provides the possibility for an independent test power supply.
The high-voltage winding of the field-circuit transformer is preferably cast in casting resin, the low-
voltage winding is soaked in moulding resin.
For the controller power supply of the THYNE1 the unit must be connected to a secure source (AC or DC).
Test power
Prüfanspeisung
supply
(falls gefordert)
(if required)
Erreger-
Field-circuit Actual
Istwert-
transformator
transformer value
erfassung
acquisition
Changeover
Machine arrangement
Maschinenanordnung
Umschaltungfor für test
power supply
Prüfanspeisung
(if required)
(falls gefordert)
DC exciter
GS-Erregermaschine
Anpassungs-
Matching transformer
=
transformator
(if test power supply)
(falls Prüfanspeisung)
ACAC
power
Anspeise-
supply
schütz
contactor AC exciter ine
WS-Erregermasch
THYNE1 Gen
Gen
DC DC
power
supply
Anspeise-
contactor
schütz
Anlagenbatterie
Plant für
battery for start-up
Anfahrerregung
excitation oder
or redundant
resupply
dundante Versorgung
/ current forcing/
Stromstützung
GSecured
esicherte
controller power
Reglerversorgung
supply
When supplying the excitation in the generator shunt the excitation will loose its supply voltage and the
synchronous machine will de-excite in case of generator short-line faults. If the delivery of a high
sustained short-circuit current from the generator is required, current forcing can be accomplished by
the plant battery. The THYNE1 is equipped with dedicated terminals for connecting the battery. To avoid
continuous loading of the battery in normal operation, the battery voltage should be lower than the AC
supply voltage.
INFORMATION
Please make sure that the battery circuit of the AC power supply is not electrically
isolated.
The self-excitation during start-up of a synchronous generator with power supply for the excitation in the
generator shunt circuit is only secured by additional measures, because the remanent voltage is not
high enough for the build-up of excitation, i.e. not enough energy is available. Only with small
generators the remanent voltage is sufficient for self-excitation.
The energy required for the start-up excitation is supplied by the plant battery and fed via the battery
terminals on the THYNE1 When the excitation is switched on the AC power supply contactor is closed
first. If not enough AC voltage is available, the start-up contactor is switched in, until the threshold value
for shunt circuit operation is reached. The THYNE1 controls to the adjusted setpoint.
In case of external excitation or power supply from a permanent field generator a start-up excitation is
not required.
The excitation power is received in triple-phase or single-phase from the auxiliary network through a
matching transformer, which adapts the supply voltage to a voltage that corresponds with the field data,
and is then fed into the THYNE1 through a power supply contactor (see Fig. 3 Power circuit externally
excited). The THYNE1 rectifies the voltage and feeds it into the field. The supply contactor may be of
latched or unlatched design.
For the controller power supply of the THYNE1 the unit must be connected to a secure source (AC or
DC).
Fremdanspeisung
External power supply
(from(vom EB Netz)
auxiliary network)
Actual
Istwert-
value
erfassung
acquisition
Machine arrangement
Maschinenanordnung
Anpassung
Matching s-
transformator
transformer
DC exciter
GS-Erregermaschine
AC AC
power
supply
Anspeise-
schütz
contactor
=
AC exciter ine
WS-Erregermasch
THYNE1 Gen
Gen
DC DC
power
supply
Anspeise-
contactor
schütz
Anlagenbatterie
Plant battery forfür
redundante
redundantVersorgung
supply
(falls gefordert)
(if required)
Gesicherte
Secured controller
Reglerversorgung
power supply
The exciter output is supplied by a permanent magnet generator revolving on the same shaft, possible
adapted to the field data by a matching transformer and fed into the THYNE1 through a power supply
contactor. The THYNE1 compact excitation system rectifies the voltage in a controlled manner and
feeds it into the field. (see Fig. 4 Power circuit with permanent field generator). This power supply
variant is independent from network influences and thus delivers the full excitation power also in case of
a generator terminals fault. In order to be able to conduct (current controller) tests even wit the
generator stopped, and as emergency supply in case of a PMG-defect, a test power supply from the
auxiliary network may be provided. In this case a transformer for electrical isolation and adaptation of
the supply voltage to a voltage in compliance with the field data must be provided.
For the controller power supply of the THYNE1 the unit must be connected to a secure source (AC or
DC).
TestPrüf-
power
Ansupply
speisung
Actual
Istwert-
value
erfassung
acquisition
Anpassungs-
Matching
transformator
transformer
Machine arrangement
Maschinenanordnung
DC exciter
GS-Erregermaschine
Changeover
Umschaltung for
für
test power supply
Prüf-Anspeisung
=
AC exciter ne
WS-Erregermaschi
THYNE1 Gen
Gen
Anspeise-
Power supply
schütz
contactor
Anpassungs-
Matching
transformator
transformer
PMG
Gesicherte
Secured controller
Reglerversorgung
power supply
During pre-commissioning and for later testing one should provide the possibility of external excitation,
i.e. a PMG-independent excitation supply must be available. Independent external power supply from
the auxiliary network may be provided for testing purposes. The excitation is thereby switched over to
the auxiliary network via a matching transformer and a mode selector (cam switch). The field current
can be operated in manual operation (field current controller) from 0 to rated current.
The power supply can also be taken from the plant battery, instead of the external power supply from
the auxiliary network. With respect to the current the rating of this supply must match the rated current
of excitation.
For simple applications and small generators, low-voltage generators in particular, where no plant
battery is available, the voltage supply for the controller electronics of the THYNE1 can also be tapped
from the power supply. In this case one must make sure that the controller supply voltage is adapted by
means of a matching transformer (see Fig. 5 Power circuit for compact plants).
For such applications the power supply contactor may be omitted, because the field suppressor in the
THYNE1 reliably de-excites the generator The disadvantage in comparison to a permanent supply from
the battery lies in the fact, that all records and danger messages will be lost in de-energized state.
With this method the shunt circuit is built up with the help of the generator remanence. For this purpose
one must select the equipment option Remanence run-up in the type key.
Erreger-
Field-circuit Actual
Istwert-
transformator
transformer value
erfassung
acquisition
Machine arrangement
Maschinenanordnung
DC exciter
GS-Erregermaschine
=
THYNE1 AC exciter
WS-Erregermaschine
Gen
Anpassungs-
Matching
transformatorfor
transformer für
Spannungs-
voltage supply
versorgung
The excitation power is directly tapped at the output of the DC exciter and fed into the THYNE1 through
a power supply contactor (see Fig. 6 Power circuit with power supply from exciter). One must make sure
that the output voltage of the DC exciter with a suitable peak factor is sufficient for the field supply. The
THYNE1 compact excitation system supplies the field with the controlled voltage. The supply contactor
may be of latched or unlatched design.
The reliable build-up of excitation in most cases requires a start-up excitation (AC or DC supply). For
the controller power supply of the THYNE1 the unit must be connected to a secure source (AC or DC).
Actual
Istwert-
value
erfassung
acquisition
Anfahrerregu
Start-up ng
von derfrom
excitation
Anlagenbatterie
plant battery Machine arrangement
Maschinenanordnung
Power supply
Anspeise-
contactor
schütz 1 1 DC exciter
GS-Erregermaschine
=
Gen
Gen
THYNE1
Anspeise-
Power supply
schütz 2 2
contactor
Secured controller
Gesicherte
Rpower supply
eglerversorgung
There are 6 input terminals available for the power supply. These terminals can be used to connect
single-phase or a triple-phase supply voltage and/or a station battery. A combination of power supplies
(e.g. AC power supply and battery) is also possible, whereby one must take care that all input voltages
have potential connection via the internal rectifier bridge. An external matching transformer in the AC
power supply can be used for galvanic isolation of these voltage systems.
All supply voltages fed into the THYNE1 are rectified by a rectifier bridge and a IGBT, which serves as
master switch. Highly capacitive capacitors are installed upstream of the master switch to protect the
input side against overvoltages.
The negative voltage for two-quadrant operation is achieved by triggering the IGBTs accordingly. With
commutation on the de-excitation circuit the field voltage is reversed. Both positive and negative field
voltages are thereby possible (two-quadrant operation), which results in high control rates.
All power semiconductors are mounted on master heat sink. This heat sink is designed for natural
cooling. The THYNE1 therefore does not require a fan. When choosing the installation location for the
THYNE1 one must only ensure sufficient cooling air supply from underneath.
The power section is provided with IGBT-elements These semiconductor components are increasingly
used in power electronics, because they unite advantages of the bipolar transistor (good forward power
performance, high reverse blocking voltage, ruggedness) and the advantages of a field-effect transistor
(almost wattless triggering) in a single component. Another advantage is its ruggedness against short-
circuits, because the IGBT limits the load current.
The micro-processor controlled digital voltage regulator is the heart of the excitation facility. Besides the
voltage regulation it also contains the underlying field current control as well as the necessary limiting
and supplementary controllers. The output of the voltage regulator controls the IGBTs through pulse
width modulation.
Control algorithms are calculated in two different processes. Program and data are saved in dedicated
FLASH memories.
The following excitation limiters and supplementary devices are all installed in the THYNE1
installed.
Stator current limitation with inverse overcurrent dependent delay time for capacitive and inductive
generator operation
Soft-Start facility (acceleration of the generator voltage along a defined rising edge – without
overshoot)
Apart from that the THYNE1 offers the following optional functions:
Extensive hard and software monitoring features are integrated in the system to ensure the highest
possible safety level during operation.
Self-monitoring of processors
For the control, monitoring and alarm indication, which are integrated in the micro-processor system
as part of the software, the following functions are provided:
Digital control for correct build-up of excitation and de-excitation, including actuation of all necessary
contactors
The voltage regulators work with two closed loops. The first closed loop (for voltage regulation) with
PID-structure and internal integrator feedback guides the underlying second closed loop (for field
current control) with PI-action. This two-stage design results in high regulating dynamics and high
stability in all operating modes and all load levels.
The current measuring values are electrically isolated via interposing transformers and conditioned by
DSP (Digital Signal Processor) for further processing.
The voltage regulator is a PID-controller and works in accordance with the following formula:
1 sKDU
FUREG(s) = VPU ( 1 + + )
sTNU 1 + sTDU
FUREG(s) Transfer function of the voltage regulator
VPU Proportional gain
KDU Differential gain
TDU Differential attenuation
TN Integral action time
In automatic operation the voltage regulation with underlying field current control is active. The
generator voltage UGK is regulated to the adjustable setpoint UGSW. In this operating mode droop and
limiting functions may additionally become effective.
V501 UGK Actual generator voltage value Is normalized to value 1.00 with V813 at rated
voltage
V11 UGSW Setpoint for controlling the generator voltage (automatic operation)
Control parameters:
The voltage control loop consists of a PID-controller. The PI-action can be set with two parameters.
V902 TNU Integral action time of voltage regulator (normalization: 1.0000 = 1 sec)
The next two parameters determine the action of the differential component:
In systems with exciter it is in most cases better to activate the D-component. With excitations for
synchronous machines without exciter this component should be switched off by setting the parameter
V871 KDU to the value 0.0.
The following parameters determine the top and bottom limits of the adjustable voltage setpoint:
V828 SWPU Positive setpoint limit U-regulator (normalization: 1.0000 = 1.00 p. u.)
V829 SWNU Negative setpoint limit U-regulator (normalization: 1.0000 = 1.00 p. u.)
During the start of excitation the setpoint is set to an adjustable value (starting position) The generator
voltage is therefore regulated to a defined start value after each start of excitation.
V827 SWAU Setpoint starting position of voltage regulator (normalization: 1.0000 = 1.00
p. u.)
For manual operation the field current is controlled via the (internal) closed loop in accordance with the
specified setpoint. The potentiometer for the current controller is also a software component and
therefore maintenance free.
In order to increase the availability this operating mode is free of limitations, only the field current
setpoint is set to an adjustable maximum value ("Setpoint field current controller upper range value").
The field current controller is a PI-controller and works in accordance with the following formula:
PI-current controller:
1
FIREG(s) = VPI( 1 + )
sTNI
FIREG(s) Transfer function of the current controller
VPI Proportional gain
TN Integral action time
In manual operation the internal closed loop (field current control) is used for regulating the field current
IPIW to the adjustable setpoint IPSW. In order to increase the availability this operating mode is free of
limitations.
V500 IFIW Field current measuring value (is normalized to value 1.00 with V805 at rated
field current)
V10 IFSW Setpoint for controlling the field current (manual operation)
Control parameters
The current control loop consists of a PI-controller. The PI-action can be set with two parameters.
V900 TNI Integral action time of current controller (normalization: 1.0000 = 1 sec)
V900 = 0 switches off the integrator component
In systems with exciter it may be of advantage to activate the integrator component. With excitations
for synchronous machines without exciter the integral action time should generally be switched off by
setting the parameter V900 TNI to the value 0.0.
The following parameters determine the top and bottom limits of the adjustable field current setpoint:
V825 SWPI Positive setpoint limit current controller (normalization: 1.0000 = 1.00 p. u.)
V826 SWNI Negative setpoint limit current controller (normalization: 1.0000 = 1.00 p. u.)
During the start of excitation the setpoint is set to an adjustable value (starting position) The field current
is thereby regulated to a defined start value after each start of excitation in manual mode.
V824 SWAI Setpoint starting position of current controller (normalization: 1.0000 = 1.00
p. u.)
Bumpless changeover from voltage controller (automatic operation) to field current controller (manual
operation) is possible during operation and can take place manually or automatically. Automatic
switchover takes place in case of faults in the voltage controller component (e.g. failure of the actual
generator voltage value).
The changeover from field to voltage controller operation can only be made manually. A servo controller
permanently compensates the other operating mode, ensuring a balanced state at any time. If the
generator voltage in manual operation is outside the control range of automatic operation, the
changeover is blocked.
In mains operation or parallel operation of several synchronous machines the problem of reactive-power
allocation arises. If two or more machines work in voltage control operation without sufficient reactance
(e.g. generator transformer) on a busbar, each synchronous machine will try to maintain its voltage at a
constant level, irrespective of its reactive-power generation, whereby no stable operating point is
reached. The VAr droop with negative sign (declining characteristic curve) serves the purpose of solving
this problem. It provides an additional setpoint, which reduces the generator voltage setpoint in
dependence on the reactive current.
A VAr droop with positive sign (rising characteristic curve) can be used for the compensation of network
reactances, e.g. to reduce the reactance of a generator transformer.
An active power droop is additionally available. It can be used for the compensation of active current
dependent effects (e.g. ohmic voltage drops).
Calculated values
V504 IBIW Calculated value of the reactive generator current. (Normalization: 1.0000 =
rated current of the synchronous machine)
positive sign = overexcited, negative sign = underexcited
V505 IWIW Calculated value of the active generator current. (Normalization: 1.0000 = rated
current of the synchronous machine)
positive sign = regenerative, negative sign = motive
Setting values
The actual active current value V505 IWIW (for active power droop) and the actual reactive current
value V504 IBIW (for VAr droop) of the synchronous machine are used to calculate the droop. The
composite signal (V23 STAT, droop signal V23) from active power and VAr droop is added to the
voltage setpoint UGSW.
The reactive power or the power factor of the synchronous machine can be regulated by means of the
superimposed reactive load controller. This controller affects the setpoint of the voltage controller. This
makes sure that the voltage control remains effective and transient load fluctuations can be corrected
without obstruction.
The cos-Phi (= power factor) control works internally with the tan Phi to make sure that stable
controlling is still possible when coming close to cos Phi = 1. For this reason the setpoint for the cos-Phi
controller must also be specified as tan Phi.
SWPQ BHQ
SWPC
QSW
+ - BTQ
SWNQ
SWNC
FQRF
Qist UGSW
+ +
Qist Actual value if the reactive load (reactive power or tan Phi)
QSW Setpoint for reactive load
UGSW Setpoint for generator voltage
BHQ Command high, reactive load control
BTQ Command low, reactive load control
sK PQRF
FQRF (s) =
1 + sTIQRF
In accordance with the selected reactive load control the specified setpoint is either reactive power (Q)
or tan Phi. The sign preceding the setpoint can either be positive or negative, whereby a positive sign
stands for inductive, a negative sign for capacitive operation. Limitation of the setpoint is accomplished
by a excitation limiter, the limits of which are changed over as required for the operating mode.
The reactive load controller is designed as three-step controller and, depending on the system
deviation, emits either the control commands BHQ (higher), BTQ (lower) or no command at all. The
control commands affect the voltage setpoint UGSW and thus change the reactive load of the
synchronous machine.
The differentiated voltage setpoint is fed back to the actual value to stabilize the transient behaviour.
The two different reactive load control modes require the corresponding actual values:
Q = U GK ⋅ I BIW
I BIW
tan ϕ =
I WIW
V501 UGK Measuring value of the generator voltage. (is normalized to value 1.00 with
V813 at rated voltage)
V504 IBIW Calculated value of the reactive generator current (normalization: 1.0000 =
rated current, positive sign = overexcited, negative sign = underexcited)
V505 IWIW Calculated value of the active generator current (normalization: 1.0000 = rated
current, positive sign = regenerative, negative sign = motive)
V65 PBIW Calculated value of the reactive power (normalized to the value 1.00 at rated
apparent power)
V459 CPHIIW Calculated value of cos Phi (1.00 at 45°), only for the display
The feedback of the voltage setpoint consists of a differential element, the behaviour of which can be
adjusted with the following parameters.
V957 TIQRF Differential attenuation reactive load controller feedback (normalization: 1.0000
= 1 sec)
The following parameters determine the top and bottom limits of the adjustable reactive power setpoint:
V834 SWPQ Positive setpoint limit VAr-control, normalization: ±1.0000 = ±1.00 p. u. (1.00
p. u. reactive power = rated apparent power)
If the corresponding configuration parameter (I1010) has been set, the setpoint will be set to an
adjustable value (starting position) when the VAr controller is activated. In mains operation the reactive
power of the synchronous machine is therefore regulated to a defined value.
Setpoint limits and start setpoint power factor control (tan Phi)
The following parameters determine the top and bottom limits of the adjustable reactive power setpoint:
V835 SWPC Positive setpoint limit power factor control, normalization: ±1.0000 = ±45° load
angle (setpoint = tan Phi)
V837 SWNC Negative setpoint limit power factor control, normalization: ±1.0000 = ±45° load
angle
If the corresponding configuration parameter (I1010) has been set, the setpoint will be set to an
adjustable value (starting position) when the VAr controller is activated. In mains operation the reactive
power of the synchronous machine is therefore regulated to a defined value.
V839 SWAC Start setpoint power factor control, normalization: ±1.0000 = ±45° load angle
The synchronous machine should be capable of being loaded up to its rated data in continuous
operation without exceeding the permissible limiting values. The thermal limits of the stator and rotor
windings as well as the stability limit in the underexcited range constitute the limits of the operating
range.
Polradwinkel
Angular Begrenzer
displacement limiter P (pu)
Statorstrom Begrenzer
Stator current limiter
1
Feldstrom
Field currentMaximum
maximum Begrenzer
limiter
verzögert
delayed
0.5
Betriebsbereich
Operating range
Q (pu)
-1 -0.5 0.5 1
Feldstrom
Field currentMinimum
minimum Begrenzer
limiter
The bold lines in the power diagram represent the response curves of the limiters.
These together with other limiting functions are contained in the voltage controller and make sure that
the synchronous machine and a possibly connected generator transformer remain within their permitted
operative ranges during operation. With this tripping of the electrical protection can be avoided, in order
to enhance operational reliability. All functions are individually connectible.
The following limiting features with the following general functions can be used (activated)
Reduces the field current and prevents continuous exceeding of the thermally permissible maximum
field current.
1
FRMaxU ( s ) = KPMaxU +
sTIMaxU
FRMaxU(s) Transfer function of the excitation limiter for maximum field current
KPMaxU Proportional gain
TIMaxU Integration time
The output variable of the excitation limiter engages directly with the output variable of the voltage
controller and thus has direct influence on the field current setpoint.
If the actual value exceeds the maximum permissible field current, the excitation limiter becomes active
without delay and causes a reduction of the field current.
V500 IFIW Field current measuring value (is normalized to value 1.00 with V805 at rated
field current)
The action point of the limitation is set with the following parameters:
V821 IFMAXU Maximum field current limitation for undelayed limitation (normalization: 1.0000
= 1.00 p. u. = 100 %)
V861 IFMAX0U Maximum field current limitation for undelayed limitation, if generator current <
5 % (no-load operation), (normalization: 1.0000 = 1.00 p. u. = 100 %)
Control parameters
The PI-action of the excitation limiter is set with the following variables:
V904 TIMAXU Integration time maximum field current limitation undelayed (normalization:
1.0000 = 1 sec)
This limiter engages with an overcurrent dependent time delay and limits the field current to the
thermally permissible continuous current.
The actual field current value IPIW is fed with hysteresis to the comparator through a time-delay
element. If the time-delayed actual field current value exceeds the current limit IPMAXV, the comparator
will respond and the limiting integrator will run in negative direction. The negative output variable of the
integrator causes a reduction of the voltage setpoint.
If the undelayed actual field current value falls below the current limit IPMAXV, the integrator will stop
and the output variable of the excitation limiter is frozen.
If the actual value drops below the limiting value IPMAXV-IPZONE, the comparator will respond and the
limiting integrator is controlled back towards zero, i.e. the limiting effect is withdrawn.
1
F(s) =
1+sTVIPB
The response time tan of the comparator after an abrupt actual value change is determined as
follows:
I P2 − I PMAXV
t an = −TVIPB ln
I P2 − I P1
The following shows two overload incidents as example for the calculation of the response time of the
comparator. The actual field current value is thereby abruptly changed from different lower range values
(base loads) to the same upper range value. The temporal course of this comparator output signal
corresponds with an exponential function:
1.6 1.6
1.4 1.4
1.2 1.2
1 1
Ip [p.u.]
Ip [p.u.]
0.8 0.8
0.6 0.6
0.4 0.4
0.2 0.2
0 0
1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
t/T1 t/T1
from IP1 = 0.2 p. u. to IP2 = 1.4 p. u. from IP1 = 0.8 p. u. to IP2 = 1.4 p. u.
IPMAXV = 1.1 p. u. IPMAXV = 1.1 p. u.
tan/T1 = 1.3863 tan/T1 = 0.6931
V500 IFIW Field current measuring value (is normalized to value 1.00 with V805 at rated
field current)
V842 IFMAXV Maximum field current limit value (normalization: 1.0000 = 1.00 p. u. = 100 %)
V862 IFMAX0V Maximum field current limit value, if generator current < 5 % (no-load operation)
(normalization: 1.0000 = 1.00 p. u. = 100 %)
V952 TVIPB Delay time constant field current limitation (normalization: 1.0000 = 1 sec)
1
FRMin( s ) = KPMin +
sTIMin
FRMin(s) Transfer function of the excitation limiter for minimum field current
KPMin Proportional gain
TIMin Integration time
The output variable of the excitation limiter engages directly with the output variable of the voltage
controller and thus has direct influence on the field current setpoint.
If the actual field current value drops below the permissible minimum field current limit value IPMIN, the
excitation limiter becomes active without delay and causes an increase of the field current. The
minimum field current limiter is only active in main operation (the generator current must be higher than
5 % of the rated generator current).
V500 IPIW Field current measuring value (is normalized to value 1.00 with V805 at rated
field current)
The action point of the limitation is set with the parameter below:
V820 IPMIN Minimum field current limit value (normalization: 1.0000 = 1.00 p. u. = 100 %)
Control parameters
The PI-action of the excitation limiter is set with the following variables:
V903 TIMIN Integration time minimum field current limitation, normalization: 1.0000 = 1 sec
This limiter engages with an overcurrent dependent time delay and limits the generator current to the
thermally permissible limit. Depending on the operating status of the synchronous machine (over or
underexcited) the limiter has an excitation reducing or excitation increasing effect.
The actual generator current value IGIW is fed with hysteresis to a comparator through a time-delay
element.
If the time-delayed actual generator current value exceeds the current limit IGMAX, the comparator will
respond and a limiting integrator is enabled. The integration direction of the limiter depends on the
operating status of the synchronous machine (over or underexcited).
The two parameters IBGWP (positive enable limit reactive current) and IBGWN (negative enable limit)
determine the line of action of the generator current limitation for inductive and capacitive operation and,
at the same time, determine the dead zone in purely resistive load operation. Inside this dead zone the
generator current limitation remains ineffective.
If the actual generator current value falls below the current limit IGMAX, the integrator will stop and the
output variable of the excitation limiter is frozen.
If the actual generator current value is lower than the limit value IGMAX-IGZONE and the output
variable of the excitation limiter is higher than zero, the integrator is controlled back towards zero, i.e.
the limiting effect is withdrawn.
1
F(s) =
1+sTVIGB
The response time tan of the comparator after an abrupt actual value change is determined as follows:
I G2 − I GMAX
t an = −TVIGB ln
I G2 − I G1
V503 IGIW Generator current measuring value (is normalized to value 1.00 with V817 at
rated current)
V504 IBIW Calculated value of the reactive generator current (normalization: 1.0000 =
rated current, positive sign = overexcited, negative sign = underexcited)
V841 IGMAX Maximum generator current value (limitation value) (normalization: 1.0000 =
1.00 p. u. = 100 %)
V951 TVIGB Delay time constant generator current limitation (normalization: 1.0000 = 1 sec)
A load-angle limitation is used for limiting the underexcitation. It is effective without delay and prevents
the exceeding of a maximum electric angular displacement, which could endanger the stability of the
machine.
1
FRPI ( s ) = K PUEB + PI-component
sTIUEB
sKDUEB
FRDT 1 ( s ) = DT1-component
1 + sTDUEB
⎛ DESWD ⎞ ⎛ DESW ⎞
ZUEB( s ) = ⎜ − DEIW ( s )⎟ ⋅ ( FRDT 1 ( s ) + 1) + ⎜ − DEIW ( s )⎟ ⋅ FRPI ( s )
⎝ s ⎠ ⎝ s ⎠
The underexcitation limitation is realized via a PI-DT1 controller The DT1 component, which delivers a
differential signal in case of high dynamic setpoint/actual value deviations, ensures rapid action in case
of quick load-angle changes, even with small P-component.
V38 DEIW Calculated value of the outer angular displacement (normalization: 1.0000 =
100°el)
This value only shows the real angular displacement if the real plant values are set under V818 Xq and
V819 XN. If V818 Xq has been set to a different value (to achieve another desired characteristic curve
of the limiter), V38 will show a fictitious angular displacement.
The action point of the limitation is set with the following parameters:
V823 DESW Stationary angular displacement limiting value (normalization: 1.0000 = 100°el)
Control parameters
The performance of the excitation limiter is set with the following variables:
Machine data
In order to be able to set a desired characteristic curve for the underexcitation limiter, V818 Xq
must be calculated as follows:
V818 Xq = -S/Q1
Q1 … Base point of the characteristic curve for the underexcitation limiter [MVAr], at
rated generator voltage
υ… Angle of underexcitation limiter characteristic curve [°el]
S… Rated apparent power of generator [MVA]
P… Active power axis in diagram
Q… Reactive power axis in digram
This limiter limits the generator voltage to a maximum or minimum value that depends on the frequency
of the synchronous machine. A frequency dependent auxiliary signal for voltage control is additionally
available. All functions are individually connectible.
1
FRMin(s)=FRMax(s)=K PF+
sTIF
FRMax(s) Transfer function of the excitation limiter for maximum generator voltage
FRMin(s) Transfer function of the excitation limiter for minimum generator voltage
KPF Proportional gain
TIF Integration time
The upper and lower limits of the permissible generator voltage range are determined in dependence on
the frequency. The possible operative range of the generator voltage lies wuthin these limits. The
deviation of the measured voltage UGK from the permissible operative range is determined and fed to
the two PI-controllers for maximum and minimum limitation.
U=V41, V42
FGMXUG V41
V832
FGMNUG V42
V833
f=V33
FGMXFO FGMXFG FGMNFG
P95 P60 P61
The parameter FGMXF0 determines the base point of the upper limiting curve. Inclination and maximum
limit of the generator voltage are determined by the parameters FGMXFG and FGMXUG.
The lower limiting curve of the permissible voltage range is determined by the parameters FGMNFG
ans FGMNUG. The base point is always identical with the zero point.
V501 UGK Measuring value of the generator voltage (is normalized to value 1.00 with
V813 at rated voltage)
V45 FGIW Frequency of the generator voltage (is derived from V502 and normalized to
value 1.00 with V1010 at rated frequency)
In three-phase operation with triple-phase measurement the sign of V45 indicates the sense of rotation
(positive sign = clockwise rotating field, negative sign = anti-clockwise rotating field)
The limits of the permissible generator voltage range are determined by:
V832 FGMXUG Maximum voltage limit value (normalization: 1.0000 = 1.00 p. u. = 100 %)
V833 FGMNUG Minimum voltage limit value (normalization: 1.0000 = 1.00 p. u. = 100 %)
Control parameters
The gain P62 KPF is commonly fixed to 0.0. This way both PI-controllers work as integrators and limit
the action speed.
The time constant of the excitation limiter is set with the following parameters:
Frequency addition
A frequency dependent auxiliary signal is generated, which has the effect of a linear frequency influence
on the generator voltage. In certain cases with generators in isolated networks with mainly resistive load
this function is used to generate a generator voltage characteristic proportional to the frequency and is
therefore able to support the turbine speed control.
The intensity of the frequency influence can be set with the parameter KFI.
Group signal
The output variables of all three functions (upper range limit, lower range limit, frequency dependent
auxiliary signal) are added and finally added to the voltage setpoint as ZFZS (auxiliary signal frequency
addition)
This function causes a slow and steady increase of generator voltage during the start process of the
excitation facility (in automatic mode = voltage controller operation). This considerably reduces the
overshoot of generator voltage during start-up.
V8 HL Output signal of the acceleration function. This signal reduces the actual
setpoint of the voltage controller.
V921 SWHLGR Offset of the setpoint ramp start value (negative value)
Calculation of the acceleration time (until the generator voltage start setpoint is reached):
Please note that the maximum starting time (calculated up to 8 % of the rated generator voltage) is 15
seconds. When this time is exceeded, a STARTF (start time-out) is triggered.
This function enables the detection of a defective branch of a rotating diode rectifier by monitoring the
field current of an AC-exciter. An open or short-circuited branch of a three-phase bridge connection in
the output circuit of an exciter causes an increased ripple of the field current with the fundamental
frequency of the exciter This ripple is detected with a second order bandpass, which is tuned to the
frequency of the exciter. Exceeding an adjustable value causes the output of a message.
V518 BPOUT Bandpass output signal. It is equivalent to the amplitude of the field current
ripple.
This corresponds with the fundamental frequency of the exciter (normalization: 1 = 1 Hz). The resonant
frequency can be calculated on the basis of rotational speed and pole number of the exciter, as follows:
RESFBP = n*pexc/120
V1003 DIODMAX Limiting value of the permissible ripple, if it is exceeded, tripping will occur
together with the message I918 DIODF (diode fault)
This chapter describes the interfaces and status displays of the THYNE1. It is the objective to provide
an overview over the unit, in order to ease project planning and integration of the THYNE1 into the
existing plant.
The front of the THYNE1 is equipped with a number of LEDs, which are used for the visualization of the
general system status as well as to indicate activities and to report malfunctions (see chapter 6 Problem
recovery and equipment maintenance):
The terminal strips for the digital outputs A0-A15 (X20 and X21) and the
optional 4–20-mA analog modules (X30, X31, X32, not used here) are
installed on the left side of the THYNE1.
The digital outputs are floating relay contacts The assignment of outputs to
the existing signals is described in the chapter 2.6.9 Digital inputs and
outputs.
The terminal strips for the digital inputs E0-E15 (X10 and X11) and the
current and voltage transformer terminals (X40 and X41) are arranged on the
right side of the THYNE1.
You find further details to the digital inputs in the chapter 2.6.9 Digital inputs
and outputs. In wiring one must make sure that the inputs on the terminal
strips are connected ascending from bottom to top.
In actual value acquisition THYNE1 supports the single, double and triple-
phase measuring principle, which can be set by parameterization. Further
details can be found under 2.6.8 Transformer and actual value connections
and under 4.2.4 Measuring principle and 4.3.4 Transformer inputs on
THYNE1.
CAUTION
For reasons of operational safety and reliability the current transformer terminal
plug (X49) is designed with locking bolts, which must strictly be screwed into the
unit.
CAUTION
For reasons of operational safety and reliability the terminal plugs for the additional
external field discharge resistor (X50) as well as for the power section supply and the
output to the field winding (X51) are designed with locking bolts, which must strictly
be screwed into the unit.
2.6.5. Underside
- Ethernet-/LAN connections for THYNE1 (X60 Controller) and a possible present internal touchpanel
(X61) (see chapter 2.6.11 Ethernet/LAN interface as well as 2.8.3 Ethernet interface)
- RS485-/TM-Bus interface (X62 for future applications)
- RS232 interface for loading software and as Modbus interface (details: see chapter 2.6.12 RS232
Modbus interface)
- as well as 2 pushbuttons for Reset and Reboot
For the wiring of digital outputs, voltage supply and watchdog signal cables with a maximum cross-
section of 2.5 mm² must be used.
The terminal strip for voltage supply (X52) of the THYNE1 electronics is located on the underside of the
unit. The THYNE1 contains a wide-range AC/DC//DC converter, which, depending on the design,
supports the following input voltages.
X52:1 + + with DC controller power supply, phase with AC controller power supply
X52:2 - - with DC controller power supply, N with AC controller power supply
X52:3 GND Ground connection
Which of the two voltage ranges is permissible for your unit is indicated on the type key of the THYNE1.
For wiring cables with a maximum cross-section of 2.5 mm² must be used and the supply voltage must
be protected by a suitable circuit breaker (details: see chapter 7.3 Electrical data).
The THYNE1 leaves the factory with parameters already loaded and completely pre-configured, so that
commissioning is relatively simple and can be performed without major efforts. After switching on the
supply voltage for the electronics of the THYNE1 the system will start. This is indicated by the status
LED on the THYNE1 lighting up. After successful booting of the control software the LEDs "Ready" and
"Auto" are active.
There are 6 input terminals available for the power supply. These terminals can be used to connect
single-phase or a triple-phase supply voltage as well as a station battery. A combination of power
supplies (e.g. AC power supply and battery) is also possible, whereby one must take care that all input
voltages have potential connection via the internal rectifier bridge. An external matching transformer in
the AC power supply can be used for galvanic isolation of these voltage systems.
The power supply works for both a clockwise as well as an anti-clockwise rotating field, whereby the
clockwise rotating field is prioritized, because of assignment reasons.
The power section supply, the required ground connection and the output to the field are connected via
terminal strip X51 (top side THYNE1). This terminal strip is assigned as follows:
The input of the power section has been designed for a supply voltage of maximum 3 x 250 VAC resp.
350 VDC. When supplying the power section one must ensure correct rating of the supply voltage with
regard to the output voltage resulting from this and the related peak factor. Cables with a maximum
cross-section of 16 mm² must be used for wiring the power supply and an appropriate circuit breaker
must be provided to protect this supply. Please remember that the THYNE1 must always be connected
to ground via connection 3 on terminal X51! Further details concerning the rating of the supply voltage
can be found in chapter 3.1 Determining the power supply.
CAUTION
For reasons of operational safety and reliability the terminal plugs for the power
section power supply and the output to the field winding (X51) are designed with
locking bolts, which must strictly be screwed into the unit.
Please remember that the THYNE 1must always be connected to ground via
connection X51:3!
In actual value acquisition THYNE1 supports the single, double and triple-phase measuring principle,
which can be set by parameterization. The actual value measurement for the generator current per
phase has been designed for a secondary rated transformer current of 1 or 5 A / ≥ 10 VA. It is
recommended to choose class 0.5, n < 5, load approx. 1 VA when dimensioning the transformers More
inaccurate transformers are actually supported, but aggravate the accuracy of the overall system.
The current transformer terminal (X40) is located on the right side of the THYNE1, together with the
current transformer terminal (X41).
CAUTION
For reasons of operational safety and reliability the current transformer terminal
(X49) is designed with locking bolts, which must strictly be screwed into the unit.
The actual value measurement for the phase to phase generator voltage has been rated for a
secondary rated transformer voltage 100 Veff or 115 Veff ≥ 10 VA. It is recommended to choose class
1, load 3 VA when dimensioning the transformers More inaccurate transformers are actually supported,
but aggravate the accuracy of the overall system.
The cross-section of the connecting cables should not be less than 2.5 mm².
The actual value acquisition for generator voltage and generator current may be single-phase, double-
phase or even triple-phase, whereby the triple-phase acquisition should be preferably used for reasons
of quality. The type of actual value acquisition is determined in the controller by means of
parameterization (see chapter 4.3.4 Transformer inputs on THYNE1). The actual value acquisition
works for both a clockwise as well as an anti-clockwise rotating field, whereby the clockwise rotating
field is prioritized, because of assignment reasons.
For a single-phase measurement the phases can be cyclically rotated for the measurement, whereby
the phase for the current measurement always needs to be selected between the two phases for the
voltage measurement. However, the voltage transformer input U1 and the current transformer input I2
are always used to connect the transformers to the THYNE1. The configurations must therefore always
be made as follows:
Current transformer input I2, Voltage transformer input U1, Voltage transformer input U1,
terminal X40:4 (out) / X40:5 (in) terminal X41:1 terminal X41:2
Current from phase 2 Voltage from phase 1 Voltage from phase 3
Current from phase 1 Voltage from phase 3 Voltage from phase 2
Current from phase 3 Voltage from phase 2 Voltage from phase 1
The 16 digital inputs are wide range optocoupler inputs (floating), all digital inputs may thus be triggered
by a collectively fused voltage. Depending on the THYNE1 variant the operating range of the inputs
stretches either from 18 to 72 VDC (typically requires 2 mA per input), or from 100 to 250 VDC (typically
requires 2 mA per input) Cables with a maximum cross-section of 2.5 mm² must be used for wiring the
input and output signals.
The preferably used voltage supply is directly fed from the distribution of the power station battery. You
may use either a voltage with dedicated fusing (from the battery distribution or a DC/DC-converter) or a
control voltage from the control system/control post etc. as coupling voltage on the THYNE1.
However, the tripping circuit for the protection should preferably by chosen independently and
electrically isolated from the supply voltage of the THYNE1 and should operate with a dedicated fault
tripping voltage. The fault tripping voltage, rated for a max. peak withstand current of 1.5 A, needs to be
a secure voltage, which is independent from other voltage supplies and is separately fused. A dedicated
"unit fault tripping voltage" or a "fault tripping voltage excitation" directly supplied by the battery and
separately fused with 6A may be used. Since none of the inputs on the THYNE1 are non-floating,
different outgoing branch circuits may be used.
The following digital inputs are generally available for controlling the THYNE1:
E08 Supplementary controller Persistent command, this command may be e.g. the
ON information "Mains operation"
Remote activation of pre-selected supplementary controller.
Once the command drops off, the supplementary controller
becomes inactive.
The digital outputs are floating relay contacts with a loadability of max. 4 A at 30 VDC, resp. max. 0.2 A
at 220 VDC, each with purely resistive load, however, they require minimum 100 mA at 20 V. Cables
with a maximum cross-section of 2.5 mm² must be used for wiring the output signals.
A20 Power supply contactor OFF-command for power supply contactor (required for
OFF ****) electrically or mechanically latched contactor)
***)
If the THYNE1 does neither feed back Excitation ON (A00), nor Excitation OFF (A01), the
excitation is either in a start or stop sequence. Both sequences are monitored by corresponding run
times, should these be exceeded, tripping will be generated with one of the messages "901 Start-up
time > trip" or "902 Stop time > trip" and high-speed de-excitation will be performed.
****)
If the primary power supply contactor is a latched contactor, this must be configured accordingly
during initial commissioning ("Main menu > Configuration > Options Control > Option field: AC-contactor
not latched > YES"). Should this be the case, the primary power supply contactor will be triggered via
the output A19 by using the persistent command "Power supply contactor 1 ON". If the contactor is a
latched contactor, you should use the pulse command "Power supply contactor 1 ON" via output A19 to
trigger and the pulse command "Power supply contactor OFF" via output A20 to terminate.
If a separate DC-supply is used as start-up excitation or as permanent DC-supply (can also serve as
current forcing), this must be routed through a suitable separate power supply contactor.
When using the DC-supply as start-up excitation ("Main menu > Configuration > Options Control >
Option field: DC-supply in redundancy > NO", the power supply contactor is controlled by means of a
permanent signal "Power supply contactor 2 ON" via output A18 over the period of the start-up process
(Caution! No latching possible!). However, if the DC--supply is configured as permanent supply ("Main
menu > Configuration > Options Control > Option field: DC-supply in redundancy > YES"), the control
will behave just as with the primary power supply contactor: If the primary power supply contactor is a
latched contactor, you should also use a latched power supply contactor 2, whereby the contactor is
triggered by the pulse command "Power supply contactor 2 ON" via output A18 and terminated by the
pulse command "Power supply contactor OFF" via output A20. However, with a unlatched contactor a
persistent command "Power supply contactor 2 ON" is also pending via output A18, which is terminated
in case of shut-down or tripping.
The THYNE1 can be additionally equipped with up to 3 analog modules (4–20 mA) with one input and
one output each. The analog modules on the one hand serve the transfer of actual values or setpoints,
and on the hand the specification of remote setpoint. The terminal plugs X30, X31 and X32 have the
following assignment:
Cables with a maximum cross-section of 1.5 mm² must be used for wiring the analog modules.
When using analog modules the assignment of input and output signals to the internal variables can be
freely configured, find details in the chapter 4.3.2 Analog inputs on THYNE1 and 4.3.3 Analog outputs
on THYNE1 and under 4.7 Configuration of 4–20-mA inputs/outputs.
For communication with the touchpanel and for linkage to a superimposed control system via bus
connection and protocol IEC 60870-5-104 the THYNE1 is provided with an Ethernet interface (X60,
Controller). For use of an internal touchpanel the interface is also routed to the outside and designated
as X61-/TFT-display. For direct connection between THYNE1 and touchpanel/THYNEX a crossover
Ethernet cable of SFTP Cat5 design or higher must be used.
If a bus connection of the THYNE1 to a superimposed control system by using IEC60870-5-104 is also
intended, the use of a network switch is mandatory. In this case the connections from THYNE1 (X60) to
switch, from switch to control system and to the touchpanel/THYNEX must be made with standard patch
cables in SFTP Cat5 design or higher.
Both the THYNE1 unit and the touchpanel are shipped ex-factory pre-configured, so that only the purely
physical connection needs to be installed. The units are factory configured as follows:
When assigning network and host addresses you must generally pay attention to compliance with the
valid IP-address ranges. If no dedicated network is available, you should use IP-addresses from the
range of private networks, or use the default settings.
CAUTION!
THYNE1 and touchpanel do not support DHCP, the IP-addresses must
therefore always be configured manually.
Configuring the network settings on the THYNE1 unit requires a service computer with Microsoft
Windows and Microsoft Internet Explorer, a crossover Ethernet cable and the following procedure:
Once the LAN interface of the service computer has been correctly configured and connected, the
LED "LAN CON" lights permanently and the LED "LAN ACT" starts flashing
In the security settings of the Microsoft Internet Explorer set the zone "Local Intranet".
Open the address http://192.168.0.200 (or current IP-address of the THYNE1, if the IP-address
has already been changed)
In the log-in dialog choose the user "Administrator" and use the password "sat" to log in for
configuration.
Via the integrated webserver one can access and configure the communication settings of the
THYNE1
Via "Start > Parameters > System settings" you access the basic parameters of the
communication settings. Most of the settings must be left unchanged, but the following
parameters must be set in accordance with the system specific specifications:
- CASDU 1 + 2
- System data like customer, plant and station name
- Own IP-address
- Subnet mask
- Default Gateway (router)
Once all changes have been made click on the control button ACCEPT to confirm.
Advanced settings can be made via the page "Start > Parameters > Communication > Protocol >
Configuration".
- Remote station 1-4 IP-address
- Thyne 1 Mode for remote station -4: controlled (waiting for connection setup from remote
station) or controlling (active)
- possibly NTP server settings
Once all changes have been made click on the control button ACCEPT to confirm.
All default values of all other settings should remain unchanged, because changes could lead to
conflicts.
In the protocol IEC 60870-5-104 the signal types are defined as follows:
50 Setpoint
For communication with a superimposed control system via protocol IEC 60870-5-104 the following
signals are available (type: B = dig. command to THYNE1, M = message from THYNE1, AI = analog
input, AO = analog output):
B Excitation On Comm 45 1 1 0
and
THYNE1 initiates the start sequence. If the internal
logic is able to successfully conclude the start
sequence, "Excitation ON" (A00) is output.
B PSS on Comm 45 17 1 0
and
Activates the active load stabilization
M Excitation On Status 30 1 3 0
THYNE1 is in correct ON state. The generator
voltage has already been built up.
M Ready Status 30 2 3 0
THYNE1 is ready for switching on. No tripping
operations pending.
Fault at IGBT1
AO V500 Meas.- 36 0 13 0
value
Field current (per unit)
AO V574 Meas.- 36 1 13 0
value
Active generator power, unfiltered (per unit)
AO V65 Meas.- 36 2 13 0
value
Active generator power, filtered (per unit)
AO V549 Meas.- 36 3 13 0
value
Power factor – cos Phi
AO V501 Meas.- 36 4 13 0
value
Generator voltage (per unit)
AO V503 Meas.- 36 5 13 0
value
Generator current (per unit)
AO V550 Meas.- 36 6 13 0
value
Field current [A]
AO V556 Calc. 36 7 13 0
value
Active generator power, filtered [MW]
AO V557 Calc. 36 8 13 0
value
Reactive generator power, filtered [MVAr]
AO V551 Meas.- 36 9 13 0
value
Generator voltage [kV]
AO V553 Meas.- 36 10 13 0
value
Generator current [A]
AO V818 Para- 36 11 13 0
meter
Base point underexcitation limiter ***
AO V823 Para- 36 12 13 0
meter
Angle underexcitation limiter ***
AO V539 Def. 36 13 13 0
limited
Free variable 1 (mA->LAN) ****
AO V540 Def. 36 14 13 0
limited
Free variable 2 (mA->LAN) ****
AO V541 Def. 36 15 13 0
limited
Free variable 3 (mA->LAN) ****
AO V412 Meas.- 36 16 13 0
value
Heat sink temperature
** Since the transfer of analog values requires a lot of the bandwidth of an Ethernet communication,
these feedbacks are deactivated by default. Details for activating the actually required analog values
can be found in chapter 2.7.2 Analog data transfer via Ethernet
*** Details concerning the settings of limiter functions can be found in chapter 4 Commissioning
**** Details concerning the assignment of free variables see chapter 4.7 Configuration of 4–20-mA
inputs/outputs
Modbus is currently not yet implemented by software, this interface is intended for future applications.
For advanced configuration of the THYNE1 direct access to the THYNE1 core via the integrated
webserver is required. The procedure for setting up a LAN connection between service computer and
the THYNE1 is described in chapter 2.6.11 Ethernet/LAN interface. Once the connection between
service computer and THYNE1 has been set up, the internal webserver in the THYNE1 can be used for
advanced configurations and to read out error messages.
Perform the steps described in chapter 2.6.11 Ethernet/LAN interface to change the communication
settings. Please note that IP-addresses must be assigned in compliance with the valid IP-address
ranges.
Since the transfer of analog data via Ethernet requires much of the bandwidth, it is not activated by
default. However, if analog values are required by the control system for the purpose of visualization,
these can be activated by enabling this feature in the THYNE1 core.
After logging in to the integrated webserver you must perform the configuration of analog feedbacks via
Ethernet by accessing the page "Start > Parameters > Thyne1 Parameters". After selecting the required
variables (definition of variables see chapter 2.6.11 Ethernet/LAN interface) in the field "Variable" these
can be activated for data transfer by entering the cycle time in seconds. The field "Barrier" can be
disregarded. By clicking on the control button ACCEPT these change become active and the IOAs
assigned to this value are displayed.
The following message appears at the top right in the title bar: Parameters only permanently saved after
Save. Clicking on Save opens the saving procedure and all active analog values are permanently
enabled for transfer.
Once Andritz Hydro has released a new control version, this version can be simply loaded and compiled
via the integrated webserver directly on the THYNE1 core. Please note that this update can only be
executed with the machine at standstill, because loading the update stops the program and thus causes
a tripping.
Once the new control has been locally saved in the service computer, you must load the control
software via the page "Start > PLC > Configuration". Please note that the program execution of the PLC
has been enabled (under "PLC Program execution > enable"). After this you can load the new software
under "Load PLC code (PC -> Thyne1)" into the core. After starting the upload the software is
automatically compiled in the core, this may take a few minutes. Once this procedure has been
completed the THYNE1 will automatically reboot and is then fully functional again.
CAUTION!
Loading a new control software requires that the machine at standstill,
because loading the update stops the program and thus causes a tripping.
If an NTP-server is available in the system network, you must set the IP-address to the server on page
"Start > Parameters > Communication > Protocol > Settings" under the block "Time synchronization". If
no NTP-server is available, the time must be set manually. Please note that in case of a supply voltage
failure the time setting in the THYNE1 will be lost and needs to be reset again. In this case the THYNE1
would start with the default value ("01.01.2000/00:00 h").
The time can be manually set via page "Start > Diagnose > Time". When clicking on the control button
ACCEPT below the block "Local time setting" the current system time of the service computer is
transferred to the THYNE1 and saved.
For detailed diagnosis of errors that have occurred it is also possible to read out error messages via the
webserver. Currently pending status messages and errors that have occurred can be read out via the
page "Start > Diagnose > History Diagnose" as well as under "Start > Diagnose > Event list".
Commissioning as well as local visualization and operation of the THYNE1 requires a touchpanel or a
service computer with the software THYNEX. The touchpanel is available in two different versions:
either directly integrated in the THYNE1 unit, or as an external unit for installation into a cabinet door or
directly in the control post.
Both the LAN interface and the terminal for the voltage supply are located on the back of the
touchpanel. A 12 VDC source is required as touchpanel voltage supply, at a display brightness of 100 %
the touchpanel draws a continuous current of 1.2 A. When wiring the voltage supply to the touchpanel
you must make sure that the + potential of the voltage supply is connected to the lower and the
reference potential to the upper terminal.
After a reset the touchpanel/THYNEX starts in English by default, the language setting can be
configured via "Main Menu > Configuration > Language selection en/de/cs".
When using a service computer the IP-address should be chosen so that the same network is used as
for the THYNE1 network setting (see 2.7.1 Communication settings) and that the assigned host address
represents an unoccupied address. (Example default setting: Network address: 192.168.0, host address
between 1 and 254 (but not 200), because 0 and 255 are reserved and THYNE1 already occupies the
host address 200.)
When assigning network and host addresses you must generally pay attention to compliance with the
valid IP-address ranges. If no dedicated network is available, you should use IP-addresses from the
range of private networks, or use the default settings.
Within the THYNEX application only the new IP-address of the THYNE1 must be adapted (because the
IP-address is already defined via the LAN interface), whereas on the touchpanel on this side the IP-
address of the THYNE1 as well as the one for the touchpanel must be set.
CAUTION!
THYNE1 and touchpanel do not support DHCP, the IP-addresses must
therefore always be configured manually.
For direct connection between THYNE1 (-X60) and touchpanel/THYNEX a crossover Ethernet cable of
SFTP Cat5 design or higher must be used. If a bus connection of the THYNE1 to a superimposed
control system by using IEC60870-5-104 is also intended, the use of a network switch is mandatory. In
this case the connections between THYNE1 (-X60) and switch as well as between switch and control
system as well as touchpanel/THYNEX must be made with standard patch cables in SFTP Cat5 design
or higher.
The touchpanel has two RJ45 Ethernet interfaces, whereby only the interface on the back (opposite the
voltage supply interface) is used for communication. On a THYNE1 with integrated touchpanel the
Ethernet interface is routed to the outside (-X61). The interfaces -X60 and -X61 must therefore be
connected.
2.8.4. USB-port
An USB-port in the front of the touchpanel serves the purpose of loading configurations and parameters
as well as software updates (further details under: 2.7.1 Communication settings, page "Parameter
transfer").
The touchpanel/THYNEX contains an extensive coloured graphical user interface for the visualization of
analog measuring and calculated values as well as internal parameters. Furthermore, it also serves the
purpose of commissioning the THYNE1, configuration, reading out warnings and error messages as
well as editing parameters.
After starting the touchpanel/THYNEX the main page "Measuring values" is displayed, which contains
important measuring values like generator voltage, generator current, active power, reactive power, cos
φ as well as field current or the exciter, represented in both p.u. (per unit) and as real value. In addition
there is also a trend recording of generator voltage, field current and generator current in the middle
section on the right hand side.
Please note that the real values will only be displayed after successful commissioning (see chapter
4.2.5 Machine and plant data). Feedbacks in the status bar and up-to-date values are only available in
the page "Measuring values" after the LAN connection has been successfully set up.
Click on the control button MENU in the lower menu bar to access the Main Menu, which is represented
by nine control buttons. From the main menu you can access further pages of the user interface.
Statusleiste
Status bar
HMain
auptfenste
window r
SControl
chaltflächen
buttons
auptmen
HMain menu ü
MMenu bar e
enüleist
BCommand
efehlsleiste
bar
The Status bar is located in the upper section of each page and contains information about the current
system status and the designation of the page currently opened in the user interface.
Bezeichnung
Designation of der
the
active page
aktiven Seite
BOperating
etriebszustand
status
Aktivierte
Activated Betriebsar
operating mode t
AkCurrent
tuelle Bedienungsar
operating mode t
Alarm- undand
Alarm Fehleranzeige
error display
The status feedbacks are divided into four categories and are able to output the following messages:
Operating status Ready (with a yellow circle) – THYNE1 is ready for switching on.
Start (with a green flashing circle) – THYNE1 is in start sequence.
Stop (with a red flashing circle) – THYNE1 is in stop sequence.
On (with a green circle) – THYNE1 is in correct ON-state.
Off (with red circle) – THYNE1 is in correct OFF-state or an external
tripping is pending.
Activated operating mode Auto – The operating mode "Voltage controller" is activated.
Auto CFR – The supplementary controller Cos φ is pre-selected or
active. *
Auto QReg – The supplementary controller "VAr controller" is pre-
selected or active. *
Man – The operating mode "Field current controller" is activated.
Current operating mode Loc – Local operation of the THYNE1 is activated, only commands from
the touchpanel/THYNEX are accepted (except "Excitation OFF" and
"Fault tripping").
Rem – "Remote" operation of the THYNE1 is activated, no local
commands are accepted (except "Excitation OFF").
Alarm and error display No alarms – No alarms pending or present in the error log.
The Menu bar is located in on each page in the lower area and contains at least two control buttons,
namely the Back-Arrow and the control button MENU/INFO. In addition page specific or no control buttons
at all may be present.
Info/ /Menu
Info Menü Seitenspezifische Schaltflächen
Page specific control buttons
Zurück
Back Pfeil
arrow
The menu bar may contain the following control buttons with the corresponding functionality:
Back-Arrow This control button is always present and serves the purpose of
navigating back.
Info Only available on the main menu page, provides information about the
software versions of the THYNE1.
Menu On each page, except on the main menu page, serves the purpose of
changing to the main menu.
Parameter selection Serves the purpose of editing parameters, whereby the input field
"Parameter selection" is reset and the new parameter must be selected
by manual input.
Save parameter After the parameter has been selected and edited, this change must be
saved with "Save parameter".
Page X of Y In the help file the current page and the complete number of pages of the
help file is displayed to ease navigation.
◄► The arrow serves the purpose of navigation within the help file.
Besides the touch-sensitive surface the touchpanel also provides an integrated membrane keyboard,
which consists of six keys and is used for basic control of the THYNE1. These keys are also available in
the program THYNEX and are part of the Command bar.
Beenden
End
Erregung Ein/Aus
Excitation On/Off
Betriebsart Automatik
Operating mode / Manuell
Automatic / Manual
X This control button is only available in THYNEX and serves the purpose
of closing the application.
Excitation OFF Serves the purpose of switching the excitation off; this control button/key
is always accepted irrespective of the operating mode ("Local" or
"Remote"), as long as no generator current is present.
Excitation ON Serves the purpose of switching the excitation on; this control button/key
is only accepted in the operating mode "Local".
Mode AUTO Activates the generator voltage controller; this control button/key is only
accepted in operating mode "Local" and only when the current actual
value of the generator voltage is within the control range of the voltage
controller.
Mode MAN Activates the field current controller; this control button/key is only
accepted in the operating mode "Local".
For the purpose of general operational reliability all functions and parameters of relevance for operation
are password protected, so that critical parameters cannot be changed unauthorized (details can be
found under 4.2.3 Password input). If the parameter to be edited is a protected parameter, the page
"Access rights" to enter the password will be opened.
Eingabefeld
Input field
Keypad
Tastenblock
All pages for the parameterization of controller functionalities and settings are of similar design and
contain the following elements:
Titelzeile
Title bar
MMeasuring
esswerte Input field
Eingabefeld
tatusanzeige
SStatus display
rendanzeige
TTrend display
Extended
Erweiterter
Setting values
Einstellwerte keypad
Tastenblock
Title bar
Titelzeile
Auswahlkästchen
Selection box
Eingabefeld
Input field
Erweiterte
Advanced
settings
Einstellungen
Erweiterter
Extended
keypad
Tastenblock
Mode:
Modus:
Parameter
Parameter
selection
Auswahl
CAUTION!
Changing parameters has an effect on the function of the THYNE1
immediately after pressing the control button "Enter" or by using the red
control buttons (<, <<, >, >>, MIN, MAX, DEF, LAST) and should therefore be
executed with greatest care.
Title bar of the keypad The title bar of the keypad shows the currently selected parameter. The
representation covers the internal variable, the internal short designation
as well as the long designation of the parameter for better
understanding. Clicking in the title bar aborts editing of the parameter
without saving and both the title bar as well as the input field change to
the "Parameter selection" mode. In the "Parameter selection" mode
(which can also be accessed via control button PARAMETER SELECTION in
the menu bar) the keypad also changes to parameter mode. In the first
line of the keypad the keys V, P, T and I are now available, these can be
used to enter the variable directly.
Input field Besides the current value of the variables the input field also shows the
units and areas of the variables by means of "Min" and "Max".
Extended keypad Only logically correct inputs are permitted (example: A value with a value
range from 0 to 1 only cannot start with a higher number ...).
- Key DEF Resets the selected parameter to its original value (to the status saved
last).
- Key ESCAPE If a direct numerical input is made for a selected parameter, this can be
aborted with "ESCAPE".
- Key Enter Entered values will only be accepted after this key has been pressed.
Measuring values Measured actual values or calculated values resulting from these are
displayed. These values cannot be influenced and are thus neither
editable, nor selectable.
Status display The traffic lights indication is used to indicate the feedbacks from internal
functions (in this case: Limiter function in action).
Trend display The trend display provides an overview over the most important
setpoints and actual values for the corresponding function, shown over
the course of time.
Setting values Setting values are editable parameters of a function which represent the
variables of the function. These can be activated for editing in the input
field by clicking directly on the value field.
Advanced settings If the scope of variables of a function is so large that these can no longer
be sensibly displayed on one page, the main parameters appear on the
parameterization page and all others are moved to the page "Further
parameters".
A complete block diagram with all limiter functions and supplementary controllers, which can be called
up with control button BLOCK DIAGRAM in the main menu, is implemented to enhance the visualization of
the THYNE1 controller structure and to ease navigation through the parameterization pages The block
diagram contains the following elements:
Editierbarer
Editable Actual
Istwert
function
Funktionsblock value
block
SSetpoint
ollwert
Editierbarer,
Editable,
optional function
optionaler
block
Funktionsblock
Setpoints Current controller setpoints are displayed in the black shaded text fields.
Actual values Appear as grey shaded text fields; the value is a measured value or a
value directly derived from a measuring value.
Editable function block Clicking on the editable function block (three-dimensional representation)
branches out directly to the associated parameterization page.
Editable, optional function These function blocks can also be opened by clicking on the associated
block parameterization page. The options field additionally shows the current
status (options field empty – supplementary controller not pre-selected,
options field marked grey – supplementary controller pre-selected,
options field marked green – supplementary controller pre-selected and
activated).
The menu structure plan provides an overview over the structure of the touchpanel software/THYNEX
and the function of the corresponding page. To simplify the overview the main menu serves as starting
point for the explanation of the individual sub-menus. If further branching out from a sub-menu is
possible, this will be separately demonstrated in the same way.
Main menu The main menu serves as starting point for the navigation through the
program. With the control button INFO one can view the version numbers
for firmware, software and definition files. To log on to the system as
administrator clock on the control button LOGON to be able to make
changes to protected parameters. Click on the control button LOGOFF to
log off the system.
- Block diagram For better visualization of the THYNE1 controller structure the complete
block diagram for the controller can be viewed under this menu option.
The controller parameters and transfer functions as well as current
setpoints and actual values are also visualized via this block diagram. By
clicking on the individual controller blocks (shown three-dimensionally) it
is possible to change directly to the corresponding parameterization
page.
- Controller and limiter * This menu option brings you to the pages with controller and limiter
settings. These parameterization page play an important role during
commissioning.
- Alarms The page "Alarms" serves the purpose of showing pending and saved
alarms and trippings. Further details on the subject Alarms can be found
in chapter 6 Problem recovery and equipment maintenance.
Furthermore, no longer active alarms can be deleted via this page.
- Local operation Serves as control page for changeover of operating mode and
supplementary controller. Further details under 5.1 Local control.
- Parameter transfer Serves the purpose of transferring parameter sets from the THYNE1 to
an USB-Stick (when using the touchpanel) or directly to the hard disk of
the service computer (when using THYNEX).
- Measuring values This page has been defined as start page after a restart of the
touchpanel/THYNEX. It shows the most important measuring values like
generator voltage, generator current, active power, reactive power, cos φ
as well as field current or the exciter, represented in both p.u. (per unit)
and as real value. In addition there is also a trend recording of generator
voltage, field current and generator current in the middle section on the
right hand side.
From this page you can branch out to other pages! ***
* Controller and limiter This page represents a sub-menu and enables further branching out to
parameterization pages for the available controllers and limiters. Some
of these parameterization pages offer an advanced parameter set 1) or
on a separate page or a help page 2) for better understanding.
- Field current controller 1) Serves the purpose of parameterizing the field current controller. Further
2)
details for commissioning the field current controller under 2.5.2 Field
current controller – manual operation and 4 Commissioning.
- Voltage controller 1) 2) Serves the purpose of parameterizing the voltage controller. Further
details for commissioning the voltage controller under 2.5.1 Voltage
regulator – automatic operation and 4 Commissioning.
- VAr controller 1) 2) Serves the purpose of parameterizing the VAr controller. Details for
commissioning under 2.5.5 Reactive power and power factor (cos-φ)
controller and 4 Commissioning.
Cos φ controller 1) 2) Serves the purpose of parameterizing the Cos φ controller. Details for
commissioning under 2.5.5 Reactive power and power factor (cos-φ)
controller and 4 Commissioning.
- Active power and VAr From this page you can set the droop for reactive power and active
droop 2) power. This may be necessary in order to compensate/raise reactances
or to compensate ohmic voltage drops. Details for setting the droop
under 2.5.4 VAr and active power droop and 4.5 Tests with generator in
mains operation.
- Limiter overview 2) This page provides an overview over the available limiters. The limiter
can be activated by simply ticking the corresponding selection box. The
traffic light indication shows whether the limiter is currently in action or
not.
- Maximum field current Parameterization page for the maximum field current limiter. Details
limiter 1) 2) concerning settings and commissioning attempts under 2.5.6 Description
of excitation limiters and 4 Commissioning.
- Mimum field current Parameterization page for the minimum field current limiter. Details
limiter 1) 2) concerning settings and commissioning attempts under 2.5.6 Description
of excitation limiters and 4 Commissioning.
- Saturation limiter 1) 2) Parameterization page for the saturation limiter. Details concerning
settings and commissioning attempts under 2.5.6 Description of
excitation limiters and 4 Commissioning.
- Underexcitation limiter 1) Parameterization page for the underexcitation limiter. Details concerning
2)
settings and commissioning attempts under 2.5.6 Description of
excitation limiters and 4 Commissioning.
- Generator current limiter Parameterization page for the generator current limiter. Details
1) 2)
concerning settings and commissioning attempts under 2.5.6 Description
of excitation limiters and 4 Commissioning.
- Active load stabilization Parameterization page for the active load stabilization. This functionality
PSS 1) 2) is only available as an option at extra cost.
- Diode fault detection 2) Parameterization page for the diode fault detection. This functionality is
only available as an option at extra cost. Details for correct configuration
of this functionality can be found under "Diode fault detection".
- Filter time constants This page provides an overview over filter time constants of input filters
and internal functions
- Help overview This page "Help overview" provides a collection of individual help
subjects. On the basis of a graphical menu one can directly branch off
into the individual help subjects.
- Language selection Here one can set the languages for touchpanel/THYNEX.
en/de/cs
- Generator and system This page is to be used to enter the generator and system values. Since
values the THYNE1 internally works with the p.-u. (per unit) system, this
parameter is used to normalize and convert measuring, setpoints and
actual values. Furthermore, these settings serve the purpose of correctly
representing real values in the touchpanel/THYNEX. The additional page
"Further parameters" is to be used to normalize the measuring circuits.
Details concerning settings under 4.2 Commissioning wizard
- Measuring principle On this page one can set the measuring principle to be used,
supplementary controller functions can also be activated and deactivated
on this page. For correct integration of transformer circuits the supporting
measuring principles are graphically shown on the help page.
- Options control Fundamental control options can be configured on this page during
commissioning. More detailed information under 4.2.6 Control options.
- Analog inputs and Serves the configuration of analog 4–20-mA inputs and outputs. More
outputs detailed information under 4.7 Configuration of 4–20-mA inputs/outputs.
- Communication settings Serves the purpose of setting a new IP-address for the
touchpanel/THYNEX and to define the communication to the THYNE1.
More detailed information under 2.8.3 Ethernet interface.
- Measuring correction Consists of two pages and provides a functionality to correct measuring
values. The THYNE1 has already been normalized in the factory.
- Update touchpanel This page can be used to update the touchpanel software; of no
relevance for THYNEX.
- Threshold values This page displays the threshold values which are used for control
purposes inside the control. These threshold values should not be
changed.
*** Commissioning Shows the collection of required commissioning tools in a sequence and
wizard thus simplifies commissioning. Details can be found under:
4.2 Commissioning wizard.
- Start of assistance Starts the guided assistance (wizard), which consists of language
selection, configuration of the measuring principle, input of generator and
system values as well as setting the operating mode.
- Variables edit Enables direct editing of variables via the input field and the extended
keypad.
- Overview dig. inputs Visualizes the status of digital inputs, simplifies the signal test during
commissioning.
- Output simulation Visualizes the status of digital outputs, simplifies the signal test during
commissioning. Using this functionality is only permitted with the
machine at standstill and the power supply switched off
CAUTION
Should difficulties or uncertainties arise with respect to technical data or calculations,
you should consult the responsible sales office.
We will not assume responsibility for incorrect calculations and their consequences!
The power supply required for operation of the THYNE1 is determined in the following chapters.
The ceiling voltage of the excitation is the maximum field voltage, which is available for the field of the
exciter with the power section of the THYNE1 fully controlled. The peak factor is the quotient of ceiling
voltage/rated field voltage.
In order to achieve a quick but still stable control, the peak factor (cf) should be between 1.5 and 2.5,
i.e. the ceiling voltage should be 1.5 to 2.5 times the rated field voltage. With these values changes to
the factory set controller are normally not required.
Should a higher ceiling voltage be selected – e.g. due to the available battery voltage – the controller
may still achieve sufficient results, even with a peak factor of 4, after appropriate optimization.
Empfohlene Versorgungsspannung
Recommended AC dreiphasig
supply voltage AC triple-phase
280
260
240
220
[Vac]
200
[Vac]
Supply voltage 3AC3AC
180
Versorgungsspannung
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Rated field voltage [Vdc]
Nennfeldspannung
Uversmax
Uversmax 3ac
3AC Uversmin
Uversmin 3ac
3AC
Instruction: Based on the rated field voltage draw a line upwards, the intersection with the orange line
indicates the minimum and the intersection with the blue line the maximum recommended supply
voltage (right scale).
WARNING
Maximum supply voltage with triple-phase power supply, which must not be
exceeded, even short-term: 280 Vac
It must be ensured that this voltage value is not exceeded (even short-term)
Particular attention must be paid to the concurrence of several circumstances, e.g.
secondary voltage of the transformer in no-load operation and an increased supply
voltage of the transformer at the same time.
In case of shunt supply the supply voltage is tapped from the generator terminals. When assuming a
maximum voltage of the generator (e.g. with load shedding) of 130 % of the rated voltage, the above
mentioned lower limit does therefore apply.
With supply from the permanent magnet generator (PMG) the speed increase at load shedding must be
accounted for. The above mentioned value of 215 Vac applies up to 130 % of the rated speed. If the
speed increase is higher you should consult one of our sales offices.
Under due consideration of the rectification factor and a safety factor the supply current is calculated
with:
With triple-phase AC power supply the rated supply power Svn is calculated as follows, under due
consideration of a factor for harmonic load and transformer efficiency:
The following ordering data for the supply transformer are subject to possible overvoltage or
underfrequency:
Power supply In shunt circuit via External supply from Permanent field
source: field-circuit transformer auxiliary network generator
(with Uetr) (with Ueb) (with Uperm)
Primary voltage Uetr * 1.3 Ueb * 1.15 Ueb * 1.3
Secondary voltage Uvn * 1.3 Uvn * 1.15 Uvn * 1.3
Transformer power Svn * 1.3 Svn * 1.15 Svn * 1.3
Data: Shunt circuit supply, high-voltage transformer secondary voltage 400 V, triple-phase, rated
field voltage 90 V, rated field current 12 A
Empfohlene Versorgungsspannung
Recommended AC einphasig
supply voltage AC single-phase
280
260
240
220
[Vac]
200
[Vac]
Supply voltage 1AC1AC
180
Versorgungsspannung
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Nennfeldspannung
Rated [Vdc]
field voltage [Vdc]
Uversmax
Uversmax 1ac
1AC Uversmin
Uversmin 1ac
1AC
Instruction: Based on the rated field voltage draw a line upwards, the intersection with the orange line
indicates the minimum and the intersection with the blue line the maximum recommended supply
voltage (right scale).
From rated field voltages of approx. 141 V and higher the minimum peak factor is no longer ensured.
Alternatively to the graphical determination there is also the calculation of the rated supply voltage Uvn
with a peak factor of 1.8:
(the factor 2.100 accounts for rectifier and safety factor and a peak factor of 1.8)
WARNING
Maximum supply voltage with single-phase power supply, which must not be
exceeded, even short-term: 280 Vac
It must be ensured that this voltage value is not exceeded (even short-term)
Particular attention must be paid to the concurrence of several circumstances, e.g.
secondary voltage of the transformer in no-load operation and an increased supply
voltage of the transformer at the same time.
In case of shunt supply the supply voltage is tapped from the generator terminals. When assuming a
maximum voltage of the generator (e.g. with load shedding) of 130 % of the rated voltage, the above
mentioned lower limit does therefore apply.
With supply from the permanent magnet generator (PMG) the speed increase at load shedding must be
accounted for. The above mentioned value of 215 Vac applies up to 130 % of the rated speed. If the
speed increase is higher you should consult one of our sales offices.
Under due consideration of the rectification factor and a safety factor the supply current is calculated
with:
With single-phase AC power supply the rated supply power Svn is calculated as follows, under due
consideration of a factor for harmonic load and transformer efficiency:
Svn = Uvn * Ivn * 1.24 [VA]
The following ordering data for the supply transformer are subject to possible overvoltage or
underfrequency:
Power supply In shunt circuit via field- External supply from Permanent field
source: circuit transformer auxiliary network generator
(with Uetr) (with Ueb) (with Uperm)
Primary voltage Uetr * 1.3 Ueb * 1.15 Ueb * 1.3
Secondary voltage Uvn * 1.3 Uvn * 1.15 Uvn * 1.3
Transformer power Svn * 1.3 Svn * 1.15 Svn * 1.3
Data: Shunt circuit supply, high-voltage transformer secondary voltage 400 V, single-phase,
rated field voltage 90 V, rated field current 12 A
Empfohlene Versorgungsspannung
Recommended supply voltage DC DC
380
360
340
320
300
280
DC [Vdc]
260
Versorgungsspannung
220
200
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Rated field voltage [Vdc]
Nennfeldspannung [Vdc]
Uversmax
Uversmax DC dc Uversmin
Uversmin DCdc
Instruction: Based on the rated field voltage draw a line upwards, the intersection with the orange line
indicates the minimum and the intersection with the blue line the maximum recommended supply
voltage (right scale).
Alternatively to the graphical determination there is also the calculation of the rated supply voltage Uvn
with a peak factor of 1.8:
WARNING
Maximum supply voltage with DC power supply, which must not be exceeded,
even short-term: 400 Vdc
It must be ensured that this voltage value is not exceeded (even short-term)
Under due consideration of a safety factor the rated supply current is calculated using the formula
below, into which a deviating rated supply voltage Uvn can also be entered (e.g. the voltage of the power
station battery).
The short-term (10 s) maximum supply current (important for the DC power supply rating) is calculated
as follows:
Ivmax = Ifn*1.15*1.5
This formula applies for the factory setting of the maximum field current limiter. In case of deviating
settings you should enter the value from V821 (IFMAXU, IFmax limiting value (undelayed)) instead of
the value 1.5.
With a DC power supply the mean rated supply power Pvn is calculated as follows:
Pvn = Uvn * Ivn [W]
Data: Power supply from 220 V power station battery, field current limiter with factory setting
rated field voltage 90 V, rated field current 12 A
This chapter contains notes for the selection, rating and dimensioning of power components outside the
THYNE1.
Dimensioning of the matching transformer takes place in chapter 3.1.2 Supply of triple-phase AC supply
or 3.1.3 Supply of single-phase AC supply.
For ordering the transformer the following must also be taken into account:
Transformer design suitable for the existing ambient temperature (minimum ≥ 40 °C)
Primary and secondary voltage as well as rated power increaded by factor 1.3 (see chapter
3.1.2 Supply of triple-phase AC supply or 3.1.3 Supply of single-phase AC supply)
Primary side fusing of the primary side rated transformer current (applies up to peak factor 2.0 –
above that control is required, to find out whether the primary side rated current of the transformer
increased by peak factor cf can be conducted for at least 10 s without premature tripping),
characteristic K – transformer protection. It must be ensured that the fusing is designed with the
required contact interrupting rating for the short circuit incident
The power supply contactor installed between transformer and THYNE1 must be able to continuously
conduct at least the supply current Ivn increased by the peak factor (cf) (i.e. Ivn*cf), but also to switch it
off (Attention: inductive load).
Rating in compliance with valid rules for electrical engineering, strict compliance with the standards
and regulations concerning the safety of persons and system in particular is mandatory.
Dry-type transformer with resin encapsulated high-voltage winding and cast-resin soaked low-voltage
winding (may also be resin encapsulated).
The power equals at least the power Svn of the matching transformer, plus the losses of the high-
voltage transformer
The rating of the high-voltage transformer must account for possible operation at overvoltage and
underfrequency.
The rating of the high-voltage transformer can also be taken on by our sales offiices. Please note that
this will be additionally charged.
Dimensioning of the matching transformer takes place in chapter 3.1.2 Supply of triple-phase AC supply
or 3.1.3 Supply of single-phase AC supply.
For ordering the transformer the following must also be taken into account:
Transformer design suitable for the existing ambient temperature (minimum ≥ 40 °C)
Primary and secondary voltage as well as rated power increaded by factor 1.15 (see chapter 3.1.2
Supply of triple-phase AC supply or 3.1.3 Supply of single-phase AC supply)
The rated transformer frequency equals the rated frequency of the external/test supply
Primary side fusing of the primary side rated transformer current (applies up to peak factor 2.0 –
above that control is required, to find out whether the primary side rated current of the transformer
increased by peak factor cf can be conducted for at least 10 s without premature tripping),
characteristic K – transformer protection.
It must be ensured that the fusing is designed with the required contact interrupting rating for the short
circuit incident
The power supply contactor installed between transformer and THYNE1 must be able to continuously
conduct at least the supply current Ivn increased by the peak factor (cf) (i.e. Ivn*cf), but also to switch it
off (Attention: inductive load).
Dimensioning of the matching transformer takes place in chapter 3.1.2 Supply of triple-phase AC supply
or3.1.3 Supply of single-phase AC supply.
For ordering the transformer the following must also be taken into account:
Transformer design suitable for the existing ambient temperature (minimum ≥ 40 °C)
Primary and secondary voltage as well as rated power increaded by factor 1.3 (see chapter 3.1.2
Supply of triple-phase AC supply or 3.1.3 Supply of single-phase AC supply)
For new plants one must remember that the actual rated voltage of the PGM may extremely differ from
the setpoint. A matching transformer variant with primary side taps for higher voltages (e.g. +15 %,
+30 %) is therefore most suitable.
The rated power of the transformer increases in accordance with the highest tapping.
The rated transformer frequency equals the rated frequency of the external/test supply
Primary side fusing of the primary side rated transformer current (applies up to peak factor 2.0 –
above that control is required, to find out whether the primary side rated current of the transformer
increased by peak factor cf can be conducted for at least 10 s without premature tripping),
characteristic K – transformer protection. It must be ensured that the fusing is designed with the
required contact interrupting rating for the short circuit incident
The power supply contactor installed between transformer and THYNE1 must be able to continuously
conduct at least the supply current Ivn increased by the peak factor (cf) (i.e. Ivn*cf), but also to switch it
off (Attention: inductive load).
The supply power is calculated in chapter 3.1.4 Supply power with DC power supply.
With this power supply variant please note:
There is no galvanic isolation between power input (battery voltage supply) and power output (field
circuit), i.e. insulation monitoring of the power station battery is also active in the field circuit.
The source must be able to deliver the short-term, maximum supply current (see chapter 3.1.4 Supply
power with DC power supply) over a period of minimum 10 s. The output must also at least be
designed accordingly.
The capacitor bank in the power section of the THYNE1 is equipped with a charging current limitation.
However, in exceptional cases (partly discharged capacitor bank) high charging current peaks may
occur, especially in case of low impedance sources.
Fusing upstream of the power supply contactor with circuit-breaker of characteristic K or D (consumer
with very high inrush peaks), setpoint of circuit-breaker ≥ the maximum supply current Ivmax
The power supply contactor must be able to continuously conduct and switch off the setpoint of the
circuit-breaker (Attention: capacitive load)
3.2.6. Redundant supply or current forcing from the power station battery
See notes on dimensioning in chapter 3.2.5 Main supply from the power station battery.
The power supplies for the THYNE1 are decoupled by means of a diode rectification. If an alternating
current and direct current supply is used, a matching transformer for electrical isolation must in any
case be used in the alternating current supply.
The diode decoupling has the effect that the power supply feeding with the higher voltage will be
loaded. If e.g. the redundant supply is not to be loaded in normal operation, the main supply must
have a higher voltage (effective value) than the redundant supply.
In case of a shunt circuit supply and supply from the output of a DC exciter an additional power supply
is required to ensure reliable build-up of excitation.
The start-up excitation is cleared at 20 % generator voltage, i.e. it can also be used as supply during
short circuit tests of the generator protection. However, in this case it must be suitable for continuous
operation (a possible series resistor in particular).
The supply voltage of the controller electronics must at the same time not be used as voltage for the
start-up excitation (two separately fused outgoing feeders from a common supply – one serving as
controller power supply and one as start-up excitation voltage – must be provided).
The calculated rated supply voltage Uvn is the maximum voltage for the start-up excitation.
If the only available voltage for the start-up excitation is higher than the calculated rated supply
voltage Uvn, or if the fusing of the start-up excitation voltage is to be kept low, a series resistor must be
provided.
Rating of the series resistor if the power supply is solely to be used for start-up excitation:
Rv … Resistance value of the series resistor (negative value = Uanf too low)
Pvn … Rated power of series resistor
Uanf … Voltage for start-up excitation
Ifn … Rated field current
Ufn … Rated field voltage
Fusing upstream of the power supply contactor, if no series resistor is provided: Circuit breaker
characteristic K or D (consumer with very high inrush peaks), setpoint of circuit-breaker ≥ Uanf*Ifn/Ufn
Fusing upstream of the power supply contactor, if a series resistor is provided: Circuit-breaker
characteristic C or K (consumer with inrush peaks), setpoint of circuit-breaker ≥ Uanf/(Rv+(Ufn/Ifn))
The power supply contactor must – if no series resistor is provided – at least be able to continuously
conduct and switch off the setpoint of the circuit-breaker (Attention: capacitive load).
The power supply contactor must – if a series resistor is provided – at least be able to continuously
conduct and switch off the setpoint of the circuit-breaker.
The supply power is calculated in chapter 3.1.4 Supply power with DC power supply.
With this power supply variant please note:
Start-up excitation is necessary (see chapter 3.2.7 Start-up excitation (initial excitation)).
The output voltage of the DC exciter at 90 % generator voltage in no-load operation must be at least
20 Vdc (if not, a redundant supply must be provided – see chapter 3.2.6 Redundant supply or current
forcing from the power station battery).
In operation (e.g. underexcited range of the generator) the output voltage from the DC exciter must
not drop below 20 Vdc (detection of a supply fault at input volatge < 12 V). If necessary, a redundant,
additional supply must be provided.
In analogy to point 7.1.4.4. one must check whether the output voltage from the DC exciter in the
rated working point of the generator is still within the recommended range of the THYNE1 supply
voltage. Exceedance up to ceiling voltage factor 4 can commonly be mastered by adapting the
controller settings accordingly.
The maximum output voltage of the DC exciter in burst mode must not exceed the permissible limits of
the THYNE1 power input (350 Vdc).
The source must be able to deliver the short-term, maximum supply current (see chapter 3.1.4 Supply
power with DC power supply) over a period of minimum 10 s. The output must also at least be
designed accordingly.
The capacitor bank in the power section of the THYNE1 is equipped with a charging current limitation.
However, in exceptional cases (partly discharged capacitor bank) high charging current peaks may
occur, especially in case of low impedance sources.
Fusing upstream of the power supply contactor with circuit-breaker of characteristic K or D (consumer
with very high inrush peaks), setpoint of circuit-breaker ≥ the maximum supply current Ivmax
The power supply contactor must be able to continuously conduct and switch off the setpoint of the
circuit-breaker (Attention: capacitive load)
WARNING
The unit has generally be dielectric tested before delivery. Additional dielectric and
high-voltage tests must only be performed on the power circuits. Improper use can
cause damage to semi-conductors or electronic components inside the THYNE1
unit.
The installation of the THYNE1 unit, the external components as well as the
execution of external connections must be carried out with greatest care and under
due consideration of the technical data of the synchronous generator and the
measuring transformers. Even short-term operation with incorrect connections can
cause damage to the unit.
The THYNE1 must be mounted on an earthed base plate. Since the unit is passively cooled, it must
only be installed vertically, so that sufficient air circulation is ensured. Furthermore, one must make sure
that the heat sink and the perforated plates are not soiled or covered by any other components, and that
all terminals and display elements are accessible and visible. Furthermore, the THYNE1 must not be
installed in the vicinity of heat generating equipment. Installation in a control cabinet, in which the inside
temperature may exceed the maximum permissible ambient temperature for the THYNE1 during
operation, is not permitted.
In order to ensure the accessibility to terminals and their screws the distances to walls, cable ducts and
other components recommended in Fig. 30 View of installation distances must be observed during
installation.
CAUTION
When installing the THYNE1 you should strictly comply with the vertical
installation position. For reasons of unobstructed air circulation the heat sinks
and perforated plates must be kept clear of dirt or any other possible covering.
Installation in a control cabinet, in which the inside temperature may exceed
the maximum permissible ambient temperature for the THYNE1 during
operation, is not permitted.
When installing the THYNE1 it is mandatory to ensure that the unit is well
protected against the entry of fluids of any type!
For reasons of operational safety and reliability the terminal plugs for the
additional external field discharge resistor (X50), for the power section supply
and the output to the field winding (X51) as well as the current transformer
terminal (X40) are designed with locking bolts, which must strictly be screwed
into the unit. For better access to screw connections the recommended
installation distances should be maintained when installing the unit.
Please observe the following aspects when installing a loosely delivered touchpanel into a cabinet door
or in the control post:
Voltage supply: The touchpanel requires a voltage supply of 12 VDC, with maximum brightness
the touchpanel draws a current of 1.2 A.
When choosing the installation location consider the ambient temperature, the touchpanel has
been designed for an operating temperature of 0–70 °C.
The touchpanel is naturally cooled, the touchpanel housing is therefore made with slotted plates
on bottom and top sides. When choosing the installation location and during installation make
sure that unobstructed air circulation is possible and that the ventilation slots are always clear
from dirt or other coverings.
The touchpanel must be well protected against the infiltration of fluids of any kind, it may even be
necessary to protect it against external influences with a suitable transparent covering in strict
compliance with the cooling instructions
4. Commissioning
CAUTION
The following points must strictly be checked before the voltages are applied, so that
proper function of the excitation is ensured.
1.) Compliance of the THYNE1 equipment version (as specified on the rating plate) with
the system requirements, special attention must be paid to the supply voltage for the
THYNE1.
4.) Correct integration of all components into the overall system Chapter 7
5.) Connection of all components, signals and voltage according to plan (wiring inspection)
After completion of the above mentioned points the supply voltage for the THYNE1 (and the touchpanel,
if there is an external touchpanel) can be applied.
The THYNE1 requires approx. 12 s to boot, the touchpanel needs approx. 45 s. After this at least the
light emitting diodes "AUTO" or "MAN" will light up on the THYNE1. If an internal or external touchpanel
is connected, the LEDs "LAN CON." and "LAN ACT." will also light.
The next step is the configuration of the unit. This requires either a touchpanel or a computer with the
software for the THYNE1 installed.
The commissioning wizard enables simple and quick commissioning of the THYNE1 without special
previous knowledge.
After successful booting of the touchpanel the page "Language selection" will be displayed. Here one
can choose the desired language by clicking on the corresponding control button. This selection is
saved when the commissioning wizard is quit.
If the language is to be changed again later, this function can be reached under "Menu > Configuration
> Language selection".
The wizard provides a guided setting process. However, the password must be entered first.
The commissioning wizard can also be started later under "Menu > Commissioning wizard > Starting
the wizard".
Level 2 2345
Level 3 3456
Level 4 4567
Level 5 5678
Level 6 6789
Level 7 7890
Level 2 is the highest level than can be accessed by users. This means that the password 2345 is the
most universal one.
If no input has been made via the touchpanel/THYNEX, the password must be entered again. This
drop-off time is 30 min.
In the page "Measuring principle", which now appears in the display, one can specify the measuring
principle for generator current and voltage to be used by the THYNE1. Choose the control button
ACTUAL VALUE SELECTION to do so. The control buttons representing the available measuring principles
appear on the right hand side. The green dot highlights the active measuring method.
With the control button HELP you can call up an advanced graphical representation of the transformer
circuit with the corresponding terminals on the THYNE1.
After selecting the applicable measuring principle the control button NEXT will bring you to the next
page.
This page is to be used to enter the required values. The per unit variables (p. u.) used in the THYNE1
refer to these rated data.
Here one can choose general control options by simply clicking on the corresponding control button.
Local and remote Remote commands (hardware In "Remote" state ("Rem" displayed
commands enabled inputs or bus signals) are in status bar) only remote signals
accepted as well as local (hardware inputs or bus signals) are
commands (touchpanel, operating accepted.
software).
In "Local" state ("Loc" displayed in
status bar) only local signals
(touchpanel, operating software) are
accepted
Supply contactor not The supply contactor is switched The supply contactor is switched on
latched on with a continuous signal. with a pulse signal (and switched off
with a pulse signal from another
output)
Bus monitoring activated A bus (Modbus or IEC 60870-5- No signal via bus (Modbus or IEC
104) transmitted signal, which 60870-5-104) for communication
changes every second (toggle monitoring.
frequency 0.5 Hz), is generated.
This enables the remote station of
the THYNE1 to recognize
whether the bus communication is
OK.
Dual channel operation Dual channel operation of two Single channel operation
THYNE1 units (the signals
provided for this purpose must be
wired).
DC supply in redundancy The contactor for the supply 2 The contactor for the supply 2
(-X51:4,5 "Battery") is controlled (-X51:4,5 "Battery") is controlled as
together with the contactor for the excitation build-up contactor
supply 1 (-X51:6,7,8,9 "Power (contactor on as long as generator
supply"). voltage is less than 20 %).
Remanence acceleration Only for systems without auxiliary Standard; for systems with auxiliary
power supply for the voltage power supply for the voltage
controller. This requires that the controller.
THYNE1 has been ordered with
the "Remanence acceleration"
option.
Input 10 configuration The digital input 10 must have the The digital input 10 can have the
E10 actual value circuit message "Voltage transformer group signal "Circuit breaker
breaker circuit breaker" assigned. This incident" assigned (various circuit
information is used for quick breakers concerning excitation).
changeover to field current This signal causes a general alarm.
controller operation ('Man'). The
generator voltage measurement Monitoring the generator voltage
is additionally monitored by the measurement by means of the
voltage controller. voltage controller is always active
and, in case of failure, triggers a
changeover to field current
controller operation ('Man').
Input 13 configuration The digital input 13 must have the No deactivation of VAr and cos-Phi
E13 isolated operation message "Isolated operation" controller when digital input 13 is
assigned. This information is used active.
to deactivate the VAr and cos-Phi
controller.
After selecting the the desired option the control button NEXT will bring you to the next page.
This option provides the possibility to change over to local operation. This is required to
be able to operate the THYNE1 via touchpanel or operating software (this is not
necessary if the option "Local and remote commands enabled" has been chosen in the
previous step).
The green dot indicates the currently active operating mode. One can change to the other mode by
simply actuating the corresponding control button.
With the control button QUIT all previously made settings can be changed and the page "Measuring
values" is opened.
The commissioning wizard has been completed and the THYNE1 is ready for switching on. Controllers
and limiters are factory set. If the factory setting is not sufficient, you find notes on optimizing in chapter
4.4 Tests with generator in no-load operation and 4.5 Tests with generator in mains operation.
After checking the correct integration of all components into the overall system and the as planned
connection of all components, signals and voltages (wiring inspection) the signals to the THYNE1 are
checked. Here one must make sure that the signals are directly transmitted from and to the remote
station without further simulation (e.g. jumpers on intermediate terminals).
The signal list with the signal and terminal designations can be found in chapter2.6 Interfaces of the
THYNE1 unit.
The page "Menu > Commissioning wizard > Overview of digital inputs" shows the status of all 16 digital
inputs. The green "Lamp" (YES) indicates an active and the red "Lamp" (NO) an inactive input. Details
for assigning the digital inputs can be found under: 2.6.9 Digital inputs and outputs
The touchpanel/THYNEX provides a simple way for setting the digital outputs on the THYNE1
individually.
The page "Menu > Commissioning wizard > Output simulation" shows the current states of outputs 0-
10. The green "Lamp" (YES) indicates a closed and the red "Lamp" (NO) an open contact. Actuate the
control button NEXT to display the outputs 11-20.
The selection box "Activate output simulation" must be ticked off to set the outputs manually. Simulation
operation is indicated by means of an active alarm ("Output simulation active") and applies for all
outputs.
When the selection box "Activate output simulation" is reset, all outputs will be reset in accordance with
the logical state of the control. The alarm "Output simulation active" becomes inactive again.
Details for assigning the digital outputs can be found under: 2.6.9 Digital inputs and outputs
WARNING
The output simulation must only be activated with the machine at standstill.
With simulation activated the outputs are in "NO"-state, i.e. they are open. If an
output remained set in earlier simulations, this pre-selection will be maintained.
Activating the output simulation during operation can cause tripping of the machine!
Prolonged setting of an output can cause damage in the signal receiver, if it is not
designed for continuous signals!
Analog inputs can eb directly watched. The signal routed through the optionally available mA
input/output modules can – after a corresponding configuration as specified in chapter 4.7 Configuration
of 4–20-mA inputs/outputs – be edited under "Menu > Commissioning wizard > Variable query". By
actuating the control button PARAMETER SELECTION the variable identification (e.g. V514) can be entered,
the current state of the signal is displayed after actuating the control button ENTER.
Depending on the signal type analog outputs can partly be set or simulated by feeding actual values
from generator voltage transformer and current transformer. One can obviously also check with real
values during operation. As with the inputs, a correct configuration of the optionally available mA
input/output modules, as specified in chapter 4.7 Configuration of 4–20-mA inputs/outputs, is required.
The analog setpoint output signals generator voltage (V11) and reactive power (V12) can be manually
set in "Automatic" mode with the excitation switched off.
Analog actual generator values can only be tested by feeding corresponding actual generator values (to
current and voltage transformer input of THYNE1) or in real operation.
The field current measuring values can be tested at standstill by actually running a field current in
operating mode "Man" (field current control). This is also possible with the machine at standstill, e.g. 10
% of the rated field current for 1 min.
WARNING
With the machine at standstill the current must only be fed into the field winding for a
short time. Strictly follow the instructions issued by the exciter manufacturer.
Current in the field winding of the exciter over a longer period of time with the
machine at standstill can cause damage to the field winding!
For the purpose of checking the actual value of a signal, it can be edited under "Menu > Commissioning
wizard > Variable inquiry". By actuating the control button PARAMETER SELECTION the variable
identification (e.g. I291 or V500) can be entered, the current state of the signal is displayed after
actuating the control button ENTER.
WARNING
Incorrect phase assignment or an incorrect direction of current can cause severe
malfunctions in mains operation.
The current and voltage transformer inputs of the THYNE1 can be checked via a dedicated page for the
touchpanel/operating software. Under "Menu > Configuration > Measurement correction" the first page
shows the generator and mains voltage transformer inputs and – after actuation of the control button
NEXT – the inputs for generator current and field current.
A (generator) current can now be fed by phases via the secondary feed. Special care must be take to
ensure correct phase assignment and direction of current.
By operating the control button PREVIOUS you return to the page with the voltage transformer inputs,
where the phase assignment of the generator voltage can be checked by secondary feeding.
Under "Menu > Configuration > Measuring principle > Help" you find a graphical representation of the
corresponding transformer circuitry with the required polarity and phase assignment.
The signal list with the signal addresses and terminal designations can be found in chapter 2.6.11.
Ethernet/LAN interface
Since the input signals via bus are solely short-term pulses, these cannot be monitored directly. These
signals can only be tested by their effect. For example "Pre-selection VAr controller I547": After
transmitting this signal by the sender, the corresponding feedback must be returned by the THYNE1
("Q-controller pre-selected I291").
Since the output signals from the control are described cyclically, they cannot be set manually. The
signal test can therefore only be conducted by creating the corresponding condition.
The actual status of the corresponding signal can be edited under "Menu > Commissioning wizard >
Variable inquiry". By actuating the control button PARAMETER SELECTION the variable identification (e.g.
I554) can be entered, the current state of the signal is displayed after actuating the control button
ENTER.
This step requires the presence of all auxiliary and power supplies as wello as the complete execution
of all work steps mentioned in chapters 4.1 Preparation fro commissioning, 4.2 Commissioning wizard
and 4.3 Signal test.
WARNING
Since the following tests may require the deactivation of limiters and the temporary
change of limits, care should be taken during all tests in no-load operation that
is not exceeded.
The general description of the touchpanel/operating software pages that will now be used can be found
in chapter2.8 The THYNE1 touchpanel/the program THYNEX.
Changed parameters become immediately effective when pressing the ENTER key. Pressing the control
button SAVE PARAMETER on the touchpanel/in the PC-software writes the parameters into the Flash
Memory of the THYNE1, they are therefore available even after a supply voltage failure.
The field current controller can also be checked with the machine at standstill, however, in this case the
field current permissible without cooling of the field winding must not be exceeded.
The commissioning page for the field current controller can be found under "Menu > Controllers and
limiters > Field current controller". On this page and on the page that can be accessed by pressing the
control button FURTHER PARAMETERS you find the following setting parameters:
Under "Menu > Controllers and limiters > Field current controller > Help" you find further explanations
about the field current controller.
Trend display
Time scale depending on capacity utilization of the communication level: approx. 5 sec/div
Tests
- The overvoltage and overcurrent protection of the generator has been set and is active
- The machine is running with rated speed
- The THYNE1 is in "Ready", "Man", "Loc" state
- For this version the start setpoint of the field current controller must be set to the value V824 = 0.000
- Press the control button/key ON to switch on excitation
- The THYNE1 changes to "On" state
- In case of a short circuit test:
Check the current measurement at remanent generator current on page "Menu > Configuration >
Measurement correction > Next"
All phases symmetrically available, correct value under V503. If the remanent current is very low
(< 0.02), the field current and thus the generator current can be
increased with control button/key ▲.
- In case of generator no-load operation:
With power supply in shunt circuit: Check the remanent voltage of the field-circuit transformer
(secondary side)
Check the voltage measurement at remanent voltage on page "Menu > Configuration > Measurement
correction"
All phases symmetrically available, correct value under V501. If the remanent voltage is very low
(< 0.02), the field current and thus the generator voltage can be
increased with control button/key ▲.
- Tripping test of electric generator protection
- Setpoint step change
If these setpoint step changes occur while the generator is running, one must monitor the generator
current in a short circuit incident (if protection attempts are undertaken) and the generator voltage in no-
load operation. Both should not exceed the permissible range.
- Press the control button/key OFF to switch off excitation
- Press control button SAVE PARAMETERS to save changed parameters in the THYNE1
The commissioning page for the voltage controller can be found under "Menu > Controllers and limiters
> Voltage controller". On this page and on the page that can be accessed by pressing the control button
FURTHER PARAMETERS you find the following setting parameters:
Under "Menu > Controllers and limiters > Voltage controller > Help" you find further explanations about
the voltage controller.
In chapter 2.5.4 VAr and active power droop in this description or under "Menu > Controllers and
limiters > Active power/VAr droop > Help" you find further explanations about the active power and VAr
droop.
Trend display
Especially on this page you can use the control button "Magnifying glass" to change to an enlarge
representation. This allows you to examine the transient reaction of the generator voltage with a higher
resolution.
Tests
- The overvoltage protection of the generator has been set and is active
- The machine is running with rated speed
- The THYNE1 is in "Ready", "Man", "Loc" state
- For this version the start setpoint of the field current controller must be set to the value V824 = 0.000
- Press the control button/key ON to switch on excitation
- The THYNE1 changes to "On" state
- Increase the generator voltage up to rated voltage
- With power supply in shunt circuit: Check the voltage of the field-circuit transformer (secondary side)
- Press the control button/key AUTO to switch over to voltage controller operation
In the picture to the left operation was switched
over from field current controller operation (Man)
to voltage controller operation (Auto).
This test should be repeated with smaller setpoint step changes (e.g. +/-2 %) in mains operation.
- Press the control button/key OFF to switch off excitation
- Press control button SAVE PARAMETERS to save changed parameters in the THYNE1
4.4.3. Acceleration
The commissioning page for the acceleration feature can be found under "Menu > Controllers and
limiters > Acceleration". This page contains the following setting parameters:
Under "Menu > Controllers and limiters > Acceleration > Help" you find further explanations about the
acceleration facility.
Trend display
Tests
- The overvoltage protection of the generator has been set and is active
- The machine is running with rated speed
- The THYNE1 is in "Ready", "Auto", "Loc" state
- Press the control button/key ON to switch on excitation
- The generator voltage increases up to the start setpoint, at 80 % generator voltage the THYNE1
changes to "On" state
- Press the control button/key OFF to switch off excitation. The de-excitation time depends on generator
and exciter and may be 10 % of the generator voltage, typically 10 sec.
- Press control button SAVE PARAMETERS to save changed parameters in the THYNE1
The commissioning page for the saturation (U/f) limiter can be found under "Menu > Controllers and
limiters > Saturation limiters". On this page and on the page that can be accessed by pressing the
control button FURTHER PARAMETERS you find the following setting parameters:
Under "Menu > Controllers and limiters > Saturation limiters> Help" you find further explanations about
the saturation (U/f) limitation.
Trend display
Tests
- Set V833 to the value of the positive setpoint limit of the voltage controller (SWPU V828) > the limiter
activation message is active, the generator voltage rises to this value.
- For the frequency influence: Build-up of excitation to rated voltage
- Increase the machine speed > the limiter activation message is active, the generator voltage increases
proportionally to the frequency.
The graphic to the left shows the influence of
the saturation (U/f) limiter with dropping
speed.
The commissioning page for the maximum field current limiter can be found under "Menu > Controllers
and limiters > Maximum field current limiter". On this page and on the page that can be accessed by
pressing the control button FURTHER PARAMETERS you find the following setting parameters:
Under "Menu > Controllers and limiters > Maximum field current limiter > Help" you find further
explanations about the maximum field current limiter.
Trend display
V403 ALPHA Control signal of the power section, corresponds with field
voltage
Time scale depending on capacity utilization of the communication level: approx. 5 sec/div
Tests
If a real diode fault (interruption or short-circuit of a rectifier branch) is installed on the rotating rectifier
of a AC exciter, the diode fault detection can be tested in detail via the page "Menu > Controllers and
limiters > Diode fault detection". The setting can be made with the following parameters:
Under "Menu > Controllers and limiters > Diode fault detection > Help" you find further explanations
about diode fault detection.
Trend display
Tests
- Before synchronizing one must check the tripping of the generator circuit-breaker by the THYNE1
(or its power supply contactors)
- Remote operation test (control system, control post)
For synchronizing itself it is advisable to open the page with the overview of measuring values under
"Menu > Measuring values" to be able to perform the following tests as quickly as possible.
WARNING
If after synchronizing
- the sign of the displayed active and reactive power is not correct (generator: With
active and reactive power export positive sign, motor: negative sign) or
- if the displayed reactive power drops when increasing the (voltage) setpoint, or
- the reactive current increases immediately to more than 100 % of the rated
generator current (generator overexcited, field current high) and there is no
possibility to influence this by adjusting the setpoint, or
- the reactive current increases directly to 40...80 % of the rated generator current
(generator underexcited, field current zero) without any possibility of influencing
by setpoint adjustment, the generator must immediately be disconnected from the
mains supply and the transformer wiring must be checked. The direction or
assignment of the current transformer is incorrect.
The reactive current dependent generator voltage influence – "VAr droop" – is a function for stabilizing
the reactive power supply. The active current dependent generator voltage influence – "active power
droop" – is a function for compensating voltage drops on resistive loads, which is only used in special
cases (low-voltage generator on a long cable).
The commissioning page for the droop function can be found under "Menu > Controllers and limiters >
Active power/VAr droop". This page contains the following setting parameters:
Under "Menu > Controllers and limiters > Active power/VAr droop > Help" you find further explanations
about active power and VAr droop.
Trend display
Tests
Guide value for VAr droop for generator in mains operation via generator transformer: V831 = 0.000
Guide value for VAr droop for generator operation together with other generators (same size) on a
busbar, without transformers between the machines, if uniform reactive-power allocation between the
individual machines is required. V831 = -0.050 (minimum value).
With different size machines the VAr droop should be chosen with reversed ratio to the apparent
machine powers, so that the reactive-power allocation will match the machine power.
Example: Gen.1: 2 MVA, Gen.2: 4 MVA => VAr droop Gen.1: V831 = -0,100, VAr droop Gen.2: V831 =
-0.050.
With different size machines connected to generator transformers with several secondary windings (e.g.
Combined Cycle systems), the optimal VAr droop must be determined by reactive power changes (via
transformer tap changer) while monitoring the reactive power of the individual machines at the same
time.
WARNING
Since the following tests may require the deactivation of limiters and the temporary
change of limits, care should be taken during all tests in mains operation that
Tests
- Press control button SAVE PARAMETERS to save changed parameters in the THYNE1
The commissioning page for the VAr controller can be found under "Menu > Controllers and limiters >
VAr controller". On this page and on the page that can be accessed by pressing the control button
FURTHER PARAMETERS you find the following setting parameters:
Under "Menu > Controllers and limiters > VAr controller > Help" you find further explanations about the
VAr controller.
Trend display
Tests
- Press control button SAVE PARAMETERS to save changed parameters in the THYNE1
The commissioning page for the cos-Phi controller can be found under "Menu > Controllers and limiters
> Cos-φ controller". On this page and on the page that can be accessed by pressing the control button
FURTHER PARAMETERS you find the following setting parameters:
Under "Menu > Controllers and limiters > Cos-φ controller > Help" you find further explanations about
the Cos-φ controller.
Trend display
Tests
- Press control button SAVE PARAMETERS to save changed parameters in the THYNE1
If the maximum field current limiter has not been tested in no-load operation (generator not in mains
operation), it must at least be tested in mains operation. Setting parameters and values for trend display
can be found in chapter 4.4.5 - Maximum field current limiter in no-load operation.
Tests
- Perform a step change with the generator voltage setpoint V11 to the previously recorded value => the
limiter activation message is active, the field current is limited to the value of IFMAXU V821 and
reduced to the value of IFMAXV V842 after the delay time has elapsed.
The graphic to the left shows the action of the
maximum field current limiter at a setpoint
step change of 0.05 p.u. on V11 (with
reduced response thresholds of the limiter).
- Reduce the generator voltage setpoint V11, until the limiter activation message disappears
- Reset parameters temporarily set for the test to their original values.
- Press control button SAVE PARAMETERS to save changed parameters in the THYNE1
The minimum field current limiter is usually not used for excitation with exciters, because stronger
control processes during operation may require short-term regulation to a field current of 0 A.
The commissioning page for the minimum field current limiter can be found under "Menu > Controllers
and limiters > Minimum field current limiter". On this page and on the page that can be accessed by
pressing the control button FURTHER PARAMETERS you find the following setting parameters:
Under "Menu > Controllers and limiters > Minimum field current limiter > Help" you find further
explanations about the minimum field current limiter.
Trend display
Tests
- Increase the generator voltage setpoint V11, until the limiter activation message disappears
- Reset parameters temporarily set for the test to their original values.
- Press control button SAVE PARAMETERS to save changed parameters in the THYNE1
The commissioning page for the generator current limiter can be found under "Menu > Controllers and
limiters > Generator current limiter". On this page and on the page that can be accessed by pressing the
control button FURTHER PARAMETERS you find the following setting parameters:
Under "Menu > Controllers and limiters > Generator current limiter > Help" you find further explanations
about the generator current limiter.
Trend display
Tests
- Reduce the generator voltage setpoint V11, until the limiter activation message disappears
- Reset parameters temporarily set for the test to their original values.
- Press control button SAVE PARAMETERS to save changed parameters in the THYNE1
The commissioning page for the underexcitation limiter can be found under "Menu > Controllers and
limiters > Underexcitation limiter". On this page and on the page that can be accessed by pressing the
control button FURTHER PARAMETERS you find the following setting parameters:
Under "Menu > Controllers and limiters > Underexcitation limiter > Help" you find further explanations
about the underexcitation limiter.
Trend display
Tests
=> the limiter activation message is active, the angular displacement is limited to the value of DESW
V823
=> the limiter activation message is active, after correction of the step change the angular displacement
is limited to the value of DESW V823
- Increase the generator voltage setpoint V11, until the limiter activation message disappears
- Reset parameters temporarily set for the test to their original values.
- Press control button SAVE PARAMETERS to save changed parameters in the THYNE1
Under "Menu > Controllers and limiters > Overview of limiters" you find a list of all available limiters. The
red or green display areas indicate whether the corresponding limiter is in action (green "YES") or not in
action (red "NO").
The boxes are control buttons to enable or disable the corresponding limiter. The boxes additionally
serve the purpose of informing about the current status.
…the limiter is not switched on
;…the limiter is switched on
The analog inputs/outputs for 4–20 mA signals are optional. These must be specially ordered via the
order code when ordering a THYNE1.
Under "Menu > Configuration > Analog inputs and outputs" you find the setting page for the 4–20-mA
inputs/outputs with the following parameters:
P300 X31E Input X31: Variable assignment -1 = not used -1 = not used
P301 X31EUG Input X31: Value for 4 mA 0.000 0.000/0.200
P302 X31EOG Input X31: Value for 20 mA 0.000 0.000/1.000
P309 X31A Output X31: Variable -1 = not used *) or -1
assignment
P310 X31AUG Output X31: Value for 4 mA 0.000 -1.000…0.000
P311 X31AOG Output X31: Value for 20 mA 0.000 0.000…1.000
- "Input X3x: Variable assignment" means: This internal variable is assigned to this 4–20-mA input.
- "Output X3x: Variable assignment" means: This internal variable is assigned to the 4–20-mA output.
- "Value for 4 (20) mA" means for the inputs: At 4 (20) mA at the input, the internal variable is set to this
value.
- "Value for 4 (20) mA" means for the outputs: The output is set to 4 (20) mA, if the internal variable has
this value.
- If a 4–20-mA input is used for analog setpoint input, the input must be assigned to the variable V514
(input: "514").
- For the analog setpoint input the limits must be set to 0.2 or 1.0 (otherwise the analog setpoint will be
misinterpreted or not accepted).
- For the outputs the limits are freely selectable, available output signals are listed in the bus signal list
(analog outputs), chapter 2.6.11 Ethernet/LAN interface.
- Press control button SAVE PARAMETERS to save changed parameters in the THYNE1
Under "Menu > Configuration > Measuring correction" you find the general normalization and calibration
page. The zero offset of the mains voltage is carried out using the parameter UNOFFS V865, procedure
see chapter 4.9 Calibration of a THYNE1.
The easiest possibility for normalizing the mains voltage arises during the synchronizing tests, when the
generator voltage is switched to the voltage transformers on the mains side by closing the generator
circuit-breaker. In this condition both voltage transformers measure the same voltage. Now the
parameter UNKORR P506 is changed, until the displayed value of the mains voltage UNIW V73
matches the value of the generator voltage UGK V501.
Thereafter press the control button SAVE PARAMETERS to save changed parameters in the THYNE1.
If the mains voltage could not be normalized during the synchronizing tests, the synchronization must
first be performed without mains voltage pre-adjustment In order to be able to rule out any influence of
the mains voltage input the voltage transformer signal should be disconnected for this synchronization
(if the mains voltage V73 is less than the negative setpoint limit of the voltage controller, it will be
ignored by the voltage controller and not used for the pre-adjustment).
In synchronized condition normalization of the mains voltage at a reactive power of 0 MVAr can now
take place - as described above. This is possible without any risk, because the mains voltage pre-
adjustment is only performed in the start sequence of the excitation facility.
THYNE1 units are factory calibrated, i.e. generator current, generator voltage and field current
measurements are performed with the specified accuracy. Recalibration is only required in the following
cases:
- If the calibration parameters have been exceeded, e.g. when loading a parameter file from a different
THYNE1 unit.
Under "Menu > Configuration > Measuring correction" you find the general normalization and calibration
page. On this page and on the page that can be accessed by pressing the control button NEXT you find
the following setting parameters:
Calibration procedure
- Temporarily changed parameters (on the page "Menu > Configuration > Generator and analog
values") must be reset to their original values
For field current normalization one must apply a current to the field winding of the exciter (see also the
warning under 4.3.3 Analog outputs on THYNE1 the following is therefore fulfilled:
- The machine is at standstill
- The rated field current on page "Menu > Configuration > Generator and analog values" hjas been
correctly set
- The THYNE1 is in "Ready", "Man", "Loc" state
- On page "Menu > Controllers and limiters > Field current controller" set the current controller integral
action time temporarily to V900 = 2.000
- Press the control button/key ON to switch on excitation
- The THYNE1 changes to "On" state
- Increase the field current setpoint, until a field current of 0.3 p. u. is applied (the current should not
oscillate, if necessary reduce the current controller P-gain V870
- Measure the actual field current
- Keep changing P214, until an actual current of 0.3 x the rated field current is flowing
- If there is no risk of the field winding overheating, repeat this calibration with a field current of 0.7 p. u.,
or even better, 1.0 p. u.
- Press the control button/key OFF to switch off excitation
- Temporarily changed parameters (on the page "Menu > Controllers and limiters > Field current
controller") must be reset to their original values
- Press control button SAVE PARAMETERS to save changed parameters in the THYNE1
The following chapters on excitation operation, which describe the control, function and danger
messages, are primarily dealt with from the view of the THYNE1 and require correct rating and
integration into the excitation system THYNE1 and the system structure of the power station.
Generally there is a differentiation between "local control" (Local) and "remote control" (Remote),
whereby remote control (Remote) usually is the regular control state. In this case the THYNE1 is
controlled via a control system or the control post.
For tests, commissioning or similar the control mode can be switched over to "Local". This includes
controlling of the THYNE1 directly from an optional touchpanel or from a service computer with the
software THYNEX.
If the THYNE1 is equipped with a touchpanel or a service computer with the THYNEX software, the
excitation system can be controlled locally.
After switching on the supply voltage for the electronics of the THYNE1 the system will start. This is
indicated by the status LED on the THYNE1 lighting up. After successful booting of the control software
the LEDs "Ready" and "Auto" are active.
Once the LAN interface of the service computer has been correctly configured and connected by means
of a LAN-cable, the LED "LAN CON" lights permanently and the LED "LAN ACT" starts flashing. This
enables local commissioning, visualization, configuration and control.
WARNING
The input or change of parameters must only be made with greatest care and after
thorough examination. Incorrectly entered parameters or inappropriately performed
changes to parameters can cause fundamental malfunction of the THYNE1.
We will not assume responsibility for such incorrect entries and their consequences!
If remote control of the THYNE1 has been pre-selected, this conditions will be indicated by REM
(Remote) in the status bar of the touchpanel or by the digital output A15 dropping off and the LAN-signal
"Local excitation". In this control mode commands will only be accepted from REMOTE (control
system), except "Excitation OFF" Furthermore, alarms can be acknowledged from the touchpanel in any
control mode. Besides the control via hard-wired signals on the digital inputs there is also the possibility
to operate the THYNE1 by means of Ethernet IEC 60870-5-104 via bus connection (see 2.6.9 Digital
inputs and outputs and 2.6.11 Ethernet/LAN interface).
The touchpanel and the membrane keyboard or THYNEX can be used for fundamental local control of
the THYNE1; remote control uses the digital inputs or an optional data bus link. Changing the control
modes from "Remote" to "Local" or vice versa is accomplished via touchpanel/THYNEX on page "Local
operation" in the group field "Operating mode" The control mode can be selected by pressing the
corresponding options field "Remote" or "Local".
Gruppierungsfeld
Group field
Optionsfeld
Option s field
ddeactivated
eaktiviert
Optionsfeld
Option s field
aactivated
ktiviert
If the THYNE1 has been set to Local control, the status bar of the touchpanel will show LOC (Local) and
the output A15 and the LAN-signal "Local excitation" will be set. In this control mode all commands will
solely be accepted from the touchpanel, with two exceptions. Input E01 (Excitation Off) and E15 (Fault
tripping) will always be accepted, for safety reasons. Contrary to this, the control mode "Remote" will
only accept commands from the control system, except "Excitation Off".
The following commands are available for the fundamental control of the THYNE1.
Excitation Function
This command will always be accepted for safety reasons, irrespective of the
pre-selection "Local"/"Remote".
An external command "Excitation OFF" will trigger the same control sequence.
Excitation Function
The "ON command" is accepted when the following requirements are fulfilled:
ON
• No fault tripping and no internal tripping is pending.
This command is only accepted via the membrane keyboard in control mode
"Local".
An external command "Excitation ON" will trigger the same control sequence.
Mode Function
Pressing this key changes the operating mode of excitation from Manual
AUTO (field current control) to Automatic (voltage control).
This changeover may take place both in "Excitation OFF" state and during
operation. During operation this changeover will be bumpless. In operation
this command is only accepted when the generator voltage resulting from the
field current controller is within the control range of the voltage controller.
Details about the voltage controller can be found in chapter 2.5.1 Voltage
regulator – automatic operation.
The message "AUTO" in the status bar of the touchpanel informs about the
active operating mode "Voltage control".
This command is only accepted via the membrane keyboard in control mode
"Local" and only in operating state "OFF" or "ON".
Mode Function
Pressing this key changes the operating mode of excitation from Automatic
MAN (voltage control) to Manual (field current control). The supplementary
controller is in any case also switched off.
This command can be transmitted both in "Excitation OFF" state and during
operation. During operation this changeover will be bumpless. Constraints and
supplements for this changeover, see chapter2.5.2 Field current controller –
manual operation.
The message "MAN" in the status bar of the touchpanel informs about the
active operating mode "Field current controller".
This command is only accepted via the membrane keyboard in control mode
"Local" and only in operating state "OFF" or "ON".
Operation Function
The keys for excitation setpoint "HIGH" ▲ and excitation setpoint "LOW" ▼
▲ have an effect on the setpoint, in dependence on the chosen operating mode.
▼ When operating the keys only one pulse will be transmitted to the control,
which causes an increase or reduction of the setpoint and thus the excitation
(i.e. also generator voltage, field current, reactive power). Once the setpoint
limit is reached, no further commands in direction of this limit will be accepted.
The commands are only effective in "Excitation ON" state.
This command is only accepted via the membrane keyboard in control mode
"Local".
The digital inputs E02 (Excitation HIGHER) and (E03 (Excitation LOWER)
provide the same function for remote controlling.
The supplementary cos φ and VAr controllers can only be used in operating mode "Voltage
control" and do not work in mains operation:
Mode Function
+ With local control: On the page "Local control" the required supplementary
controller can be selected in the group field "supplementary controllers" by
pressing the corresponding options field. The supplementary controller is
Supple- activated immediately after the local input.
mentary
controller With remote control: With activated voltage controller the corresponding
supplementary controller can be pre-selected via the digital inputs (E06, E07)
Cos φ or the corresponding LAN-signal. The pre-selected controller is now activated
by setting the digital input "Supplementary controller ON" (E08) or the
corresponding LAN-signal (see 2.6.9 Digital inputs and outputs and 2.6.11
Reactive Ethernet/LAN interface). Please note that the activation signal must be a
power continuous signal; the supplementary controller remains activated as long as
the signal is pending.
When activating the supplementary controller the changeover will in any case
be bumpless and the controller will remain at the same operating point, until a
new setpoint is specified.
This command is only accepted via the membrane keyboard in control mode
"Local".
In addition it is also possible to specify a setpoint locally via the parameterization page or the
corresponding controller, or remotely via remote setpoints (either via an analog I/O-module, or via the
bus link). When entering setpoints one must always ensure strict compliance with the operating limits of
the machine!
The micro-processor controlled digital voltage regulator is the heart of the excitation facility. Besides the
voltage regulation it also contains the necessary limiting and supplementary controllers. The output of
the voltage regulator controls the IGBTs through pulse width modulation.
The voltage regulators work with two closed loops. The first closed loop (for voltage regulation) with
PID-structure and internal integrator feedback guides the underlying second closed loop (for field
current control) with PI-action. This two-stage design results in high regulating dynamics and high
stability in all operating modes and all load levels.
In "Voltage controller" mode the generator voltage is controlled by means of an adjustable generator
voltage setpoint. The setpoint setting range must be adapted to the permissible limits of the generator
(see chapter 4 Commissioning).
In "Voltage controller" mode the generator voltage is controlled by means of an adjustable generator
voltage setpoint. The setpoint setting range must be adapted to the permissible maximum value of the
generator and the power supply variant (see chapter 4 Commissioning). The parameters "UG controller
start setpoint", "UG controller max. setpoint" or "UG controller min. setpoint", which can be found on the
page "Main menu > Controllers and limiters > Voltage controllers > Further parameters" serve the
purpose of setting these values.
Depending on the operating location automatic operation can either be activated by pressing the button
AUTO on the membrane keyboard of the touchpanel (Local) or by setting the pulse signal "Excitation
AUTO" (digital input E04) or transmitting the corresponding command via the bus link (in case of
REMOTE control). The activated operating mode (Automatic/Manual/Supplementary controller) is
signalized through the digital outputs A02 (Automatic), A03 (Manual), A07 /Supplementary controller
On) and on the touchpanel
The starting command triggers an internal automatic. After successful completion of the start sequence
the feedback "Excitation ON" is applied and signalized via the digital output A00 or the touchpanel.
When starting in automatic mode the generator voltage of the THYNE1 is controlled to the value "UG
controller start setpoint" (factory pre-set to 1.0 p. u. generator voltage).
After the feedback ON has been received, the generator voltage can be adjusted externally via the
digital inputs E02 (higher)/E03 (lower) or by using the corresponding command via the bus link or even
locally with the keys ▲▼. In the mains this not only changes the voltage but also the reactive power.
Furthermore, the generator voltage setpoint can also be specified directly locally on the page
"Controllers and limiters/voltage controller" by editing the UG setpoint variables V11 and in the control
mode "Remote" by specifying a remote setpoint via an analog input module or a bus link (details can be
found under 4.7 Configuration of 4–20-mA inputs/outputs and 2.6.11 Ethernet/LAN interface).
For manual operation the field current is controlled via the (internal) closed loop in accordance with the
specified setpoint. The potentiometer for the current controller is also a software component and
therefore maintenance free. In order to increase the availability this operating mode is free of limitations,
only the field current setpoint is set to an adjustable maximum value ("IF controller max. setpoint").
In this operating mode the field current of the exciter (output of the compact excitation THYNE1) is
controlled by means of the adjustable field current setpoint. The setpoint setting range must be adapted
to the permissible maximum value of the generator and the power supply variant (see chapter 4
Commissioning). The parameters "IF controller start setpoint", "IF controller max. setpoint" or "IF
controller min. setpoint", which can be found on the page "Main menu > Controllers and limiters > Field
current controller > Further parameters" serve the purpose of setting these values. With shunt excitation
the value "IF controller start setpoint" must be set to 0.1 p. u. IFn, for external excitation we recommend
the setting 0.05 p. u. IFn. The value of "IF controller min. setpoint"should always remain at 0 when using
the THYNE1 with an exciter.
Touchpanel:
Manual operation is activated by pressing the button MANUAL on the membrane keyboard of the
touchpanel. This command is only accepted when the THYNE1 is in operating mode "Local".
Digital input:
Manual operation is activated by setting the pulse signal "Excitation MANUAL" (digital input E05),
or by using the corresponding command of a databus connection. This command is only
accepted when the THYNE1 is in operating mode "Remote".
Also in this case the starting command triggers an internal automatic. This sequence is, depending on
the power supply variant (shunt circuit(externally excited) via the setting of the "IF controller start
setpoint", slightly different:
Shunt excitation:
With shunt excitation the start process is finished after the supply voltage has reached a certain
minimum value, which indirectly depends on the field current (factory set to 0.1 p. u. rated field
current).
External excitation:
With external excitation the start process is finished by the presence of the supply voltage and the
field current is controlled to the start value (factory set to 0.05 p. u. rated field current).
When starting in manual operation the generator voltage increases to the value that corresponds with
the field current of "IF controller start setpoint". After successful completion of the start sequence the
feedback "Excitation ON" is applied and signalized via the digital output A00, the signal applied to the
bus link or via the touchpanel.
After the feedback ON has been received, the field current of the exciter can be adjusted externally
via the inputs E02 (higher)/E03 (lower) or (if available) by using the corresponding command via the bus
link or even locally with the keys ▲▼ (depending on control mode). In no-load operation this, due to the
machine characteristic curves, changes (indirectly) the output of the exciter (rotor current and rotor
voltage of the main generator) as well as the generator voltage of the main generator. In the mains this
also changes the reactive power.
This operating mode is intended for testing and a possible actual value loss of the voltage controller. In
mains operation the generator values must be permanently monitored and, if necessary, corrected
when using this operating mode, because the generator voltage or the reactive power will change with
any load changes of the generator or mains fluctuations. Moreover, no limitations are active and the
supplementary controller can neither be selected, nor activated.
Furthermore, the field current setpoint can also be specified directly locally on the page "Controllers and
limiters > field current controller" by editing the IF setpoint variables V10 and in the control mode
"Remote" by specifying a remote setpoint via an analog input module or a bus link (details can be found
under 4.7 Configuration of 4–20-mA inputs/outputs and 2.6.11 Ethernet/LAN interface).
In automatic operation two superimposed controllers are available in addition to the voltage controller
(optionally Cos-φ or VAr controller), which effect the setpoint of the voltage controller. This ensures that
the control range of the voltage controller can never be exceeded or fallen short of.
Cos-φ or VAr controller can only be activated from the active operating mode "Automatic" as follows:
With control mode "Local": On the touchpanel on page "Local control" press the corresponding
options field in the group field "Supplementary controller".
With control mode "Remote": By setting the signal "Pre-selection VAr controller" (digital input E06)
or "Pre-selection Cos-φ controller" (digital input E07) or (if available) by using the corresponding
command of the data bus link. This supplementary controller only becomes active by activating
the signal "Supplementary controller ON" or E08. Activation is not possible if both supplementary
controllers have been deselected.
Switching on and off in this case is bumpless. Switching on the pre-selected supplementary controller is
only enabled in mains operation at a generator current 5 % higher than the rated generator current.
After activating the supplementary controller the feedback "Supplementary controller ON" is applied and
signalized via the digital output A07, the signal applied to the bus link or via the touchpanel.
With Cos-φ control the control range for the setpoint can be checked and also changed via the page
"Controllers and limiters > Cos φ controller > Further parameters" using the parameters "Cos φ max.
setpoint (tan)", "Cos φ controller min. setpoint (tan)" as well as "Cos φ controller start setpoint". This
means, that the values must be entered as tan-φ values. This means e.g.: The value 1 (tanφ = 1)
represents a load angle φ of 45°, this corresponds with a cos-Phi of 0.71.
With VAr control the control range for the setpoint can be checked and also changed via the page
"Controllers and limiters > VAr controller > Further parameters" using the parameters "Q-controller max.
setpoint", "Q-controller min. setpoint" as well as "Q-controller start setpoint".
After the feedback supplementary controller ON has been received, the Cos φ or the reactive power
can be adjusted externally via the inputs E02 (higher)/E03 (lower) or (if available) by using the
corresponding command via the bus link or even locally with the keys ▲▼.
Furthermore, the Cos φ or reactive power setpoint can also be specified directly locally on the page
"Controllers and limiters > VAr controller" or on the page "Controllers and limiters > Cos-φ controller" by
editing the Q setpoint variables V12 and in the control mode "Remote" by specifying a remote setpoint
via an analog input module or a bus link (details can be found under 4.7 Configuration of 4–20-mA
inputs/outputs and 2.6.11 Ethernet/LAN interface). Please make sure that both controllers use the same
setpoint variable, but that this variable is internally switched over accordingly.
When clearing the supplementary controller (transition to voltage controller) the setpoint of the voltage
controller remains unchanged at its currently set value.
In isolated operation the supplementary controller must be switched off in any case. Removing the
signal from input E08 "Supplementary controller ON" deactivates the controller.
NOTE
This supplementary controller can and must only work sensibly in mains
operation. For this reason the voltage controller remains active at generator
currents < 5 % Ign. The supplementary controller only starts to work from a
generator current > 5 % Ign.
In case of disturbance in automatic operation the system will automatically switch over to field
current controller and the last valid setpoint is maintained, irrespective of the control mode. This
changeover takes place if the actual generator voltage value is lost. In addition to this changeover
the missing generator voltage measurement is indicated via Excitation ALARM (indicated via
touch panel, bus link and A08) as well as by means of the error message "I903 generator voltage
failure" on the touchpanel. Changeover from manual to automatic operation can be made
manually (locally) or by remote signal (digital inputs or bus link).
If the operating mode "AUTO" has been pre-selected, the supplementary controller can be
chosen locally by selecting the corresponding options field "Cos-φ/VAr controller", the
supplementary controller will immediately become active. With remote controlling the desired
supplementary controller must be pre-selected first and activated after transmitting the command
"Supplementary controller ON".
If the Cos-φ or VAr controller has been pre-selected and the system is switched over to
"MANUAL", the pre-selection remains saved. This means that the previously used supplementary
controller is still pre-selected when choosing "AUTO". Setting the signal "Supplementary
controller ON" reactivates the controller again.
Even after switching off the excitation, the controller that had been active last (fieä, voltage
controller) will remain active.
Bumpless changeover from voltage controller (automatic operation) to field current controller (manual
operation) is possible during operation and can take place manually or automatically. Automatic
switchover takes place in case of faults in the voltage controller component (e.g. failure of the actual
generator voltage value).
The changeover from field to voltage controller operation can only be made manually. A servo controller
permanently compensates the other operating mode, ensuring a balanced state at any time. If the
generator voltage in manual operation is outside the control range of automatic operation, the
changeover is blocked.
NOTE
If the changeover from manual to automatic operation is blocked, this may
possibly be caused by a generator voltage outside the automatic control
range.
5.8. De-excitation
De-excitation can take place operational or as protective de-excitation. The command "OFF" can be
transmitted from an external source or entered locally.
In case of an operational shut-down (only possible while the generator is not in mains supply) the
setpoint for the active controller is controlled down to zero, i.e. the IGBT in the power circuit is not
triggered, whereas the IGBT in the free-wheeling circuit remains triggered; once the actual field current
value has been controlled down to a minimum, the IGBT in the free-wheeling circuit will also be
reduced, whereby the current path is applied to the field discharge resistor, which is parallel to the free-
wheeling circuit. The optionally usable power supply contactor and de-excitation contactor then opens
with a delay, so that the contacts open with zero current. Now the "Excitation OFF" state is reached.
In case of a protective de-excitation (E15) triggering of both IGBTs is blocked immediately. The current
path thereby changes over to the internal field discharge resistor and the energy stored in the field is
discharged. The optionally usable power supply contactor and de-excitation contactor then opens, so
that the contacts open with zero current.
6.1. General
WARNING
Opening of the THYNE1 by inadequately trained personnel can cause
damage inside the unit and thus result in malfunction of the equipment, which
will endanger personnel and overall system. For this reason opening the
THYNE1 remains strictly prohibited. If an existing fault can be traced to an
internal problem, the replacement of the THYNE1 or a repair at the
manufacturing plant may be necessary.
The system components of relevance for operation and safety are partly monitored by contacts and
partly by software.
Any fault is detected, saved and visually displayed by the THYNE1. Depending on the hazard potential
of the fault the system will emit either a warning, a tripping or a changeover to another operating mode.
A common alarm for warnings is emitted to the outside through output A08 and a tripping through output
A09 (dual design). For correct tripping, which, for reasons of operational safety and reliability has been
inverted (A09 = HIGH >>> Excitation no tripping), the output "Watch Dog" on the THYNE1 must be
integrated in the tripping circuit, parallel to the output A09.
The front of the THYNE1 is equipped with a number of LEDs, which are used for the visualization of the
general system status as well as to indicate activities and to report malfunctions:
In case of correct operation of the THYNE1 (generator at rated speed, excitation switched on, generator
in mains operation ir in no-load operation) the following LEDs are permanently active:
If the THYNE1 is switched off (generator unexcited), the LED "Ready" is active, instead of the LED
"ON".
For large-scale operation and visualization locally on the THYNE1 there is the possibility to use a
touchpanel or a service notebook with the program THYNEX. In case of faults this enables correct
display of "Messages and alarms".
Alarms are globally displayed in the status bar (top right) A grey circle with the message "No alarms"
informs about an empty error log, whereas a red flashing circle with the message "X / Y alarms"
indicates not yet reset alarms, whereby "X" represents an active (still pending) and "Y" stands for an
inactive (already dropped off) alarm. Pressing the status message of the softkey "Menu" and "Alarm"
directly opens the page "Messages and alarms", where you find further details about the error and
where you can reset the error log.
Each error message is represented by a text line, however, an error can also cause several error
messages and thus provide additional information about the error that has occurred (e.g. "Generator
voltage failure" and "Circuit breaker incident"). Danger messages always g´have the following structure:
The sequence in the display is identical with the sequence of the occurrence of the error, irrespective of
whether an alarm is pending or not. The top line represents the latest alarm.
A red alarm message with status "Active" indicates a still pending alarm , whereas a violet alarm
message with status "Inactive" points to an alarm that has already dropped off. Only alarms indicated in
violet can be reset (deleted). This means that after the reset the message will only disappear if the error
has been rectified beforehand (the alarm is no longer pending). The softkey "Alarm reset" (bottom
middle of screen) must be pressed to reset the alarm
However, it may also happen that the error disappears by tripping, but reoccurs after the restart (e.g. a
missing actual value, a time-out, etc.).
NOTE
Please note that the activation of the digital output simulation is only to be
used for testing the wiring to the control system or the control post. This
strictly requires shutting down of the machine and deactivation of external
power supplies.
I920 Field current fault Effect Excitation tripping caused by start time monitoring
[trip]
Detector Control software
I954 Heat sink too hot Effect Excitation tripping caused by raised heat sink
[trip] temperature
6.3. Troubleshooting
NOTE
Check whether the THYNE1 is in voltage controller operation (AUTO) or in manual
operation, because manual operation only controls field current, but not the
generator voltage.
Generator voltage does Voltage for start-up Connect voltage for start-up excitation to
not build up excitation not connected terminals X51:4 and X51:5
Machine set not at rated Set the machine speed to its setpoint
speed
Generator voltage only Exciter or rotating diode Stop the machine set and measure the diodes
2...3 % Ugn wheel of the exciter of the exciter, otherwise contact the machine
defective, interruption in manufacturer,
rotor
Terminal voltage does No voltage supply Check the voltage supply for the power
not build up section and the THYNE1
Terminal voltage does Parameter for start Set the parameter for start setpoint "UG
not build up exactly to setpoint incorrectly set controller start setpoint" to 1.0 and/or check
rated voltage the parameters for rated generator voltage
(V851) and normalization factor generator
voltage (V813) in the "Commissioning wizard/
generator and system values" screen.
Actual value circuit breaker Close the actual value circuit breaker
not closed
Terminal voltage too Actual value circuit Check transformer data and wiring
high or too low, but can connected to incorrect
be influenced voltage
Terminal voltage too Machine set not at rated Set the machine speed to its setpoint
low, but can be speed
influenced
Switch the controller to Switch the controller over to "AUTO" mode
"MANUAL" mode
Inaccurate or slow The exciter voltage Check the rating or contact ANDRITZ
control required acc. to machine HYDRO, department EXC
data under full load is
higher than the max.
output voltage of the
THYNE1;
Fields connected in series
Fault in generator, in Stop the machine set and measure the diodes
exciter or in the rotating of the exciter, replace if necessary
diode wheel, increased
field current
Machine set not at nominal Set the machine speed to its setpoint
speed
Excessive overshoot of Acceleration facility Correct the parameters for the acceleration
terminal voltage during (software) incorrectly set facility
start
Individual control Individual inputs and Replace the THYNE1 or contact ANDRITZ
functions cannot be outputs defective HYDRO, Automation, Department EXC
performed
Touchpanel defective Replace the touchpanel
Terminal voltage Frequency unstable Optimize the turbine controller, the fault is not
oscillates in the area of excitation
Intermittent fault in Stop the machine set and measure the diodes
generator, in the exciter or of the exciter, otherwise contact the machine
in the revolving diode manufacturer,
wheel.
In operation parallel to VAr droop (BSTAT V831) Increase the VAr droop away from 0 in
the mains supply no set to a too low value or to negative direction (BSTAT V831)
reactive power stability 0
can be achieved
(reactive current hurries Droop current transformer Check the wiring and correct as necessary. In
away) or actual voltage value case of single-phase measurement the
connected to wrong phase current transformer must be in the phase
- or - or with incorrect polarity which is not used for the voltage
measurement.
The voltage controller
responds to intensely to Droop current transformer Check wiring and terminal strips with current
minor mains connected with incorrect transformer terminals
fluctuations polarity or still short-
circuited Inspection and setting of active and reactive
- or - power with respect to height and signs
With machines in Incorrect ratio of current Check the ration of the current transformers.
parallel mode the transformers (at rated In case of a fault replace the transformer.
reactive-power machine current approx. 1
allocation is oscillating A or 5 A should flow into
the terminals X40:1/4/7 or
out of the terminals
X40:2/5/8)
Reactive-power VAr droop (BSTAT V831) Check the setting and adjust the VAr droop
allocation uneven, but unevenly set for machines (BSTAT V831) to an even level
stable running in parallel mode
THYNE1 cannot be The unit is switched to Switch the unit over to "LOCAL"
operated "REMOTE"
Diode fault monitoring Fault in the revolving diode Stop the machine set and measure the diodes
responds in normal wheel of the exciter, otherwise contact the machine
operation manufacturer,
Only a complete THYNE1 or the touchpanel will generally be delivered as spare parts. Individual
components inside the THYNE1 are normally not available.
In case of a malfunction of the THYNE1, which allows the assumption that there is a fault in the unit,
you should contact the manufacturer. If necessary, the THYNE1 should be replaced as a complete unit.
Should the THYNE1 be dismantled or opened by the customer, all warranty claims will become null and
void.
WARNING
Opening of the THYNE1 by inadequately trained personnel can cause damage
inside the unit and thus result in malfunction of the equipment, which will endanger
personnel and overall system. For this reason opening the THYNE1 remains strictly
prohibited. If an existing fault can be traced to an internal problem, the replacement
of the THYNE1 or a repair at the manufacturing plant may be necessary.
The THYNE1 or the external touchpanel is delivered loosely as a spare part. Individual components
inside the THYNE1 are normally not available.
Due to pluggable screw terminals the THYNE1 can be easily and quickly replaced. The touchpanel can
also be easily disassembled by just disconnecting the LAN connection and the voltage supply. Before
the replacement the voltage supply must be switched off in any case.
WARNING
Clearing the voltage supply in any case causes tripping of the THYNE1.
After replacing the THYNE1 or the touchpanel and when re-establishing operating condition ( plug
plugged in, fastening screws fixed, etc.) the voltage supply can be switched on again.
After reconnecting the supply voltage the LED "LOCKED" on teh THYNE1 must go out after a short
while. The THYNE1 is thus ready for operation again. Now the settings must be transferred from the old
to the new unit ("Menu > Parameter transfer"). If the parameter sets had not been saved after
completion of initial commissioning, the THYNE1 must be parameterized again as specified in chapter
"Commissioning".
After parameterization it is recommended to perform a monitored excitation start/stop process until rated
generator voltage is reached, while checking the excitation function.
Since the system is solely based on semi-conductors, the excitation is free of any moveable parts. It is
therefore almost maintenance free. You should only periodically clean the unit and check the cooling
channels. The terminals should also be re-tightened at regular intervals. Externally arranged mechanical
components like contactors or de-excitation switches require further measures such as mechanical
function control, cleaning of contacts, probably readjustment.
Regular inspection for possibly existing external components like power supply contactors, power
supply transformers, auxiliary relays, de-excitation contactors etc. should be carried out approx. 1 x per
year.
The mechanical and electrical function of the THYNE1 can be performed with the machine at standstill
(the power supply and the field connection must be disconnected from the THYNE1 by pulling out the
plug -X51) by pressing the button ON on the membrane keyboard of the touchpanel (THYNE1 in
LOCAL mode, no external Off-command pending). Tripping caused by internal monitoring occurs
approx. 2 seconds later.
Tripping tests to and from the THYNE1 must be performed periodically (in compliance with system
specific maintenance cycles , but every two years at the latest) to check the safety relevant functions
and the correct performance of all protective features.
7. Technical Data
Contains a collection of technical data and additional information, which may be useful for the life cycle
of the product.
THYNE1 - I T A - D P B - U E R
Maximaleroutput
Maximum Ausgangsstro
current m
(dauernd / Stoß)
(continuous / surge)
6... 8A / 13A
7... 15A / 24A
8... 25A / 40A
Integrated touchpanel
Integriertes Touchpanel
0... no
nein
ja
1... yes
Analoge
Analog Ein- // Ausgänge
inputs outputs
0... keine
none
1... 1AE + 1AA
2... 2AE + 2AA
3... 3AE + 3AA
Diodenfehlererfassun
Diode fault detection g
0... no
nein
1... yes
ja
Power System
Power SystemStbilizer
Stabilizer
(PSS2B)
(PSS2b)
nein
0... no
ja
1... yes
Busanbin
Bus link dung
0... none
keine
1... IEC 60870-5-104
2... Modbus
Modbus
Note:
Anm.:The
Das touchpanel
Touchpanel is also available
ist auch on its own
lose erhältlich
(e.g.
(z.B.forfür
cabinet installation)
Schrankmontage) Spannungsversorgung
Voltage supply for electronics:
Elektronik
1... 24 - 60 VAC or
oder
18 - 72 VDC
Beispiel: THYNE1-
Example: THYNE1-710-100-221
710-100-221 2... 110 - 230VAC oroder
90 - 270 VDC
- 15A dauernd
- 15A continuous
- mit integriertem Touchpanel
- with integrated touchpanel
- ohne analoge Ein-/Ausgänge
- without analog inputs/outputs Spannungsniveau
- mit Diodenfehlererfassung Voltage level for digital inputs
- with diode fault detection Digitaleingänge
- ohne PSS2B
- without PSS2B
- - without
ohne Busanbind
bus link ung 1... 18 - 72 VDC
- - Voltage
Spannungsversorgung Elektronik:
supply for electronics: 110-230
110-230 VACVAC oder VDC
or 90-270 2... 100 - 250 VDC
90-270
- Digital VDC for a range from 100-250 VDC
inputs
- - Acceleration
Digitaleingänge für einen
by means Bereich vonpossible
of remanence 100-250 VDC
- Hochlauf mittels Remanenz möglich Remanenzhochlauf
Remanence acceleration
0... no
nein
1... yes
ja
(Outlines)
(Profile)
Dimensions of touchpanel
Cut-out in mounting
area (e.g.: door)
The THYNE1 is enclosed in a compact aluminium housing, safe from touching. All terminals (signal and
power circuits) are arranged on the housing in form of detachable screw terminals. The current
transformer plug X40 and the power plugs X50 and X51 are tightly bolted to the housing for safety
reasons. Depending on the variant, the THYNE1 is delivered with or without touchpanel (see
7.1 Configuration key). Please not that operation of the external touchpanel requires a 12 VDC
supply voltage.
Voltage measurement Rated transformer voltage 100…125 Veff , recommended transformer class
*)
0.5 , load approx. 1 VA, triple or single-phase measuring principle, adjustable
via parameterization, conductor cross-section max. 2.5 mm²
*)
Current measurement Rated transformer current 1…5 A , recommended transformer class 0.5 , load
approx. 1 VA, triple or single-phase measuring principle, adjustable via
parameterization, conductor cross-section max. 2.5 mm²
Voltage control range adjustable, usually 0.9 ... 1.1 UGN
Control accuracy < ±0.2 % UGN
Generator – nominal frequency 16.7 ... 60 Hz
Digital inputs (2 variants, to be determined 18…72 VDC floating via optocoupler (typically 2 mA per input)
via type key)
100…250 VDC floating via optocoupler (typically 2 mA per input)
Assignment see chapter 2.6.9 Digital inputs and outputs
Digital outputs Floating relay contacts
Loadability max. 4 A at 30 VDC or max. 0.2 A at 220 VDC each under purely
resistive load,minimum 100 mA, 20 V
Assignment see 2.6.9 Digital inputs and outputs
Temperature range THYNE1 Storage: 0…+70 °C
Operation: 5…+50 °C
Temperature range touchpanel Storage: 0…+70 °C
Operation: 5…+50 °C
Degree of protection IP20 acc. to IEC 60529
Dimensions (without terminals) 334 mm x 300 mm x 192 mm
Weight THYNE1 10 kg (without touchpanel)
Weight touchpanel 0.7 kg
Test voltage Power circuits, transformer circuits, digital inputs/outputs: 2 kVeff , 50 Hz, 1
min.
Analog inputs and outputs: 500 Veff , 50 Hz, 1 min.
acc. to EN50178/1997
*)
more inaccurate transformers are possible, but aggravate the absolute accuracy of the overall system
EU Declaration of Conformity
ANDRITZ HYDRO GmbH declares that the exciter system THYNE1 has been
developed, designed and manufactured in conformity with the
• CE -Identification Directive (93/68/EEC), under due consideration of the
• EU Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) as well as the
• EU Directive on Electromagnetic Compatibility (89/336/EEC).
Product Declaration
The following standards and directives were accounted for and the following signal categories were
applied aor are met.
A. Reader´s Reactions
We designed and compiled this manual with great care and a high degree of responsibility. It was - and still is - our
goal to design it in a way that it will be of greatest possible use at your work.
In order to reach this goal, we also rely on your cooperation - especially where maintenance and care of the
manual are concerned.
To make this cooperation easier for you, we added a form to this section. Please make use of it.
We will try to consider your comments already in the next update of the manual.
Please fill in this questionnaire and return it to us; we will send you the next update of this manual free of
charge as soon as it is available.
What is your impression of this manual? Do you think it is complete, correct and accurate, well-structured, written in
a comprehensible language, etc.?
........................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................
Does this manual meet the requirements that may reasonably be demanded? Does it come up to your
expectations?
........................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................
Did you find any mistakes in this manual? If so, please use form on the backside.
Please send a copy of this sheet (front and back) to the below address.
Correction Sheet
Sender: ..............................................................................................
..............................................................................................
..............................................................................................
Date: ..............................................................................................
LISTA DE APARATOS
SCALA – 15”
VCU 20 PANTALLA TACTIL ANDRITZ
ADVANTECH
Página 2 de 10
LISTADO DE APARATOS
EQUIPAMIENTO: PEDIDO M-5301612 ESQUEMA Nº:
SWITCH 5
SWITCH 20 MODULO COMUNICACIÓN ETHERNET WEIDMULLER PUERTOS
RJ4510/100 Mbps
CP-M-SNT-500W-
CONVERTIDOR DC/DC- POTENCIA 500 W 24V-20A
9G4-9G6 09 125 VDC/24 VDC
ANDRITZ
WEIDMULLER
Página 3 de 10
LISTADO DE APARATOS
EQUIPAMIENTO: PEDIDO M-5301612 ESQUEMA Nº:
Página 4 de 10
LISTADO DE APARATOS
EQUIPAMIENTO: PEDIDO M-5301612 ESQUEMA Nº:
20K3 20
22K5 22
50K5 50
RELE AUXILIAR, DOS CONTACTOS INVERSORES,
TENSION NOMINAL DE BOBINA 24 Vcc
60K1 a 60K8 60 RELECO C7-A20DX/24VCC
BASE S7-M
61K1 a 61K8 61
62K1 a 62K8 62
63K5 y 63K6 63
X9-X12-X20-
X22-X23-X24-
X25-X26- X35-
X36-X37-X38-
REGLETEROS DE BORNAS SECCIONABLES DE
X42-X43-X44-
INTERCONEXIÓN; ALIMENTACIÓN – SEÑALES DE
X45-X50-X51- CONTROL
X52-X53-X54-
X55-X56-X57-
X58-X60-X61-
X62-X63
Página 5 de 10
LISTADO DE APARATOS
EQUIPAMIENTO: PEDIDO M-5301612 ESQUEMA Nº:
Transformador trifásico
Potencia 2500 VA
Frecuencia 60 Hz
Uprimario - 480 V
T80 80
Usecundario – 130 V POLILUX
Página 6 de 10
LISTADO DE APARATOS
EQUIPAMIENTO: PEDIDO M-5301612 ESQUEMA Nº:
RELECO C7-A20X/125VCC
Página 7 de 10
LISTADO DE APARATOS
EQUIPAMIENTO: PEDIDO M-5301612 ESQUEMA Nº:
Página 8 de 10
LISTADO DE APARATOS
EQUIPAMIENTO: PEDIDO M-5301612 ESQUEMA Nº:
Página 9 de 10
LISTADO DE APARATOS
EQUIPAMIENTO: PEDIDO M-5301612 ESQUEMA Nº:
V92B DIODO
V96A…V96G DIODO
Página 10 de 10
Hojas de datos
Datos de trabajo
Caudal bombeado requerido 120,00 m³/h Corriente volumétrica 120,00 m³/h
Altura de bombeo requerida 50,00 m Altura de bombeo 50,00 m
Medio bombeado agua, agua sucia Eficiencia 60,1 %
agua ligeramente sucia Absorción de potencia 27,15 kW
No contiene sustancias Velocidad de rotación de la 1782 rpm
químicas o mecánicas que bomba
afecten a los materiales Mín.caudal masa permitido 11,97 kg/s
Temperatura del medio a 20,0 °C para funcionamiento estable
bombear continuo.
Densidad del fluido 998 kg/m³ Altura de bombeo en el punto 55,83 m
Viscosidad del medio a 1,00 mm²/s de caudal cero
bombear Diseño Bomba individual 1 x 100%
Ejecución
Diseño Sumergible de acoplamiento Código de material SIC/SIC/NBR
directo
Tipo de rodete Rodete de flujo radial multi-
Orientación Vertical
álabes (K)
Brida de succión conforme a sin mecanizar Anillo rozante Anillo partido
(DN1) Diámetro del rodete 317,0 mm
Brida de descarga conforme a EN 1092-2 / DN 100 / PN 16 Tamaño paso libre 50,0 mm
(DN2) /21/B Dirección de rotación del Sentido agujas del reloj
arrastre
Cierre del eje 2 cierres mecánicos en
tándem con depósito de Color Azul ultramarino (RAL 5002)
aceite. Azul KSB
Fabricante KSB
Type MG
Hojas de datos
Accionamiento, accesorios
Tipo de accionamiento Motor eléctrico Bobinado del motor 460 V
Modelo (marca) KSB Nº de polos 4
Formato constructivo del Motor sum. KSB Modo de arranque Conexión directa
motor Clase de conexión triángulo
Letra de código NEMA H Método de refrigeración del Enfriamiento de la superficie
Clase de rendimiento no clasificado. motor
Frecuencia 60 Hz Versión del motor U
Tensión de servicio 460 V Diseño cable Manguera de caucho
Potencia dimensionada P2 37,28 kW Entrada cable Sellado a lo largo de toda la
Corriente de régimen 62,4 A longitud
Relación de la corriente de 6,4 Cable de transmisión AWG 9-4
arranque Nº de cables de fuerza 2
Clase de aislamiento F según IEC 34-1 Cable de control AWG 15-12
Clase de protección del motor IP68 Número de cables de control 1
Coseno phi a plena carga 0,82 Sensor de humedad con
(4/4)
Longitud cable 10,00 m
Rendimiento del motor a 91,5 %
plena carga (4/4)
Factor de servicio del motor 1,15
Órgano sensorio de Interruptor bimetálico 2x
temperatura
Materiales GH
Indicaciones Rodete (230) Fundición blanca alta en
general criteria for a water analysis: pH-value >= 7; chloride cromo A 532 IIC 15% CrMo-
content (Cl) <=250 mg/kg. chlorine (Cl2) <=0.6 mg/kg. Hc
Carcasa de bomba (101) Hierro fundido A48 clase 35B Junta tórica (412) Caucho nitrílico NBR
Carcasa intermedia (113) Fundición blanca alta en Anillo partido (502.1) Acero inoxidable duplex
cromo A 532 IIC 15% CrMo- resistente al desgaste
Hc Estator del motor (811) Hierro fundido A48 clase 35B
Tapa de presión (163) Fundición blanca alta en Cable del motor (824) Caucho cloropreno
cromo A 532 IIC 15% CrMo- Tornillo cilíndrico con Acero inoxidable
Hc hexágono interior (914)
Eje (210) Acero al cromo A 276 tipo
420
Embalaje
Embalaje para transporte Barco Categoría de embalaje B1 caja de madera o de
Embalaje para interior contrachapado, tapa con
almacenamiento chapa celular de
polipropileno,
almacenamiento a la
intemperie hasta 3 meses
Placas de características
Idioma de las placas de internacional Duplicado de placa de con
características características
Hojas de datos
Partes de instalación
Alcance de suministro Bomba con partes de Type Cadena
instalación Material ST TZN
Tipo de instalación Fijo con alambre guía Longitud 5,00 m
Profundidad de la instalación 4,50 m Carga máxima 800 kg
Concepto de material GH
Codo transversal
Tamaño DN 100
Diseño de brida ASME
Diámetro codo transversal DN 100 Taladrado de
acuerdo con ASME
Material Hierro fundido A48 clase 35B
Tipo de montaje Pernos anclaje compuestos
Carril de cimentación Sin
Dispositivo de fijación
Diseño liso
Tamaño DN 100
cadena/cuerda de elevación
Hoja de curvas
100
Qmin
80
Altura de bombeo
404.0
60 Qmin
Qmin
[m]
40
317.0
310.0
20
0 50 [m³/h] 100 150 200 250 300 350
10
NPSH requerido
[m]
50
Eficiencia
[%]
0
0 50 [m³/h] 100 150 200 250 300 350
40
Consumo de potencia
[kW]
20
Datos de curvas
Velocidad de giro 1782 rpm Eficiencia 60,1 %
Densidad del fluido 998 kg/m³ Absorción de potencia 27,15 kW
Viscosidad 1,00 mm²/s NPSH requerido 3,88 m
Corriente volumétrica 120,00 m³/h Número de curva K42591s
Caudal bombeado 120,00 m³/h Diámetro efectivo del 317,0 mm
requerido rodete
Altura de bombeo 50,00 m Estándar de aceptación Ninguno;tolerancias s/ISO
Altura de bombeo 50,00 m 9906 Clase 2A / 3B; por
requerida debajo de 10 kW de
acuerdo con párrafo 4.4.2
Plano de instalación
60
ø 10
985
ø5
855
165
630
1353 163
DN3 (Gancho de elevación opcional)
1) 1060
430
min 550
240
DN1
125
75
ø 18
140
1115 1) Mínimo nivel de agua
220
325
590
min 700 150
Acceso apertura
min 950
Motor Conexiones
Fabricante del motor KSB Brida de succión conforme a sin mecanizar
Tamaño del motor 35 (DN1)
Potencia del motor 37,28 kW Diámetro codo transversal DN 100 Taladrado de
Nº de polos 4 acuerdo con ASME
Velocidad de giro 1775 rpm
Peso neto
Bomba, Motor, Cable 530 kg
Dispositivo de fijación/pie 15 kg
Total 545 kg
Conectar tuberías sin tensión o resistencia Ver plano extra para las conexiones
Tolerancias dimensionales para altura de eje : DIN 747 auxiliares
Dimensiones sin tolerancias, tolerancias medias según : ISO 2768-m
Dimensiones de conexión para bombas : EN735
Dimensiones sin tolerancias - partes soldadas: ISO 13920-B
Dimensiones sin tolerancias - partes de hierro fundido gris: ISO 8062-CT9
Hojas de datos
Datos de trabajo
Caudal bombeado requerido 120,00 m³/h Corriente volumétrica 120,00 m³/h
Altura de bombeo requerida 50,00 m Altura de bombeo 50,00 m
Medio bombeado agua, agua sucia Eficiencia 60,1 %
agua ligeramente sucia Absorción de potencia 27,15 kW
No contiene sustancias Velocidad de rotación de la 1782 rpm
químicas o mecánicas que bomba
afecten a los materiales Mín.caudal masa permitido 11,97 kg/s
Temperatura del medio a 20,0 °C para funcionamiento estable
bombear continuo.
Densidad del fluido 998 kg/m³ Altura de bombeo en el punto 55,83 m
Viscosidad del medio a 1,00 mm²/s de caudal cero
bombear Diseño Bomba individual 1 x 100%
Ejecución
Diseño Sumergible de acoplamiento Código de material SIC/SIC/NBR
directo
Tipo de rodete Rodete de flujo radial multi-
Orientación Vertical
álabes (K)
Brida de succión conforme a sin mecanizar Anillo rozante Anillo partido
(DN1) Diámetro del rodete 317,0 mm
Brida de descarga conforme a EN 1092-2 / DN 100 / PN 16 Tamaño paso libre 50,0 mm
(DN2) Dirección de rotación del Sentido agujas del reloj
arrastre
Cierre del eje 2 cierres mecánicos en
tándem con depósito de Color Azul ultramarino (RAL 5002)
aceite. Azul KSB
Fabricante KSB
Type MG
Hojas de datos
Accionamiento, accesorios
Tipo de accionamiento Motor eléctrico Bobinado del motor 460 V
Modelo (marca) KSB Nº de polos 4
Formato constructivo del Motor sum. KSB Modo de arranque Conexión directa
motor Clase de conexión triángulo
Letra de código NEMA H Método de refrigeración del Enfriamiento de la superficie
Clase de rendimiento no clasificado. motor
Frecuencia 60 Hz Versión del motor U
Tensión de servicio 460 V Diseño cable Manguera de caucho
Potencia dimensionada P2 37,28 kW Entrada cable Sellado a lo largo de toda la
Corriente de régimen 62,4 A longitud
Relación de la corriente de 6,4 Cable de transmisión AWG 9-4
arranque Nº de cables de fuerza 2
Clase de aislamiento F según IEC 34-1 Cable de control AWG 15-12
Clase de protección del motor IP68 Número de cables de control 1
Coseno phi a plena carga 0,82 Sensor de humedad con
(4/4)
Longitud cable 10,00 m
Rendimiento del motor a 91,5 %
plena carga (4/4)
Factor de servicio del motor 1,15
Órgano sensorio de Interruptor bimetálico 2x
temperatura
Materiales GH
Indicaciones Rodete (230) Fundición blanca alta en
general criteria for a water analysis: pH-value >= 7; chloride cromo A 532 IIC 15% CrMo-
content (Cl) <=250 mg/kg. chlorine (Cl2) <=0.6 mg/kg. Hc
Carcasa de bomba (101) Hierro fundido A48 clase 35B Junta tórica (412) Caucho nitrílico NBR
Carcasa intermedia (113) Fundición blanca alta en Anillo partido (502.1) Acero inoxidable duplex
cromo A 532 IIC 15% CrMo- resistente al desgaste
Hc Estator del motor (811) Hierro fundido A48 clase 35B
Tapa de presión (163) Fundición blanca alta en Cable del motor (824) Caucho cloropreno
cromo A 532 IIC 15% CrMo- Tornillo cilíndrico con Acero inoxidable
Hc hexágono interior (914)
Eje (210) Acero al cromo A 276 tipo
420
Embalaje
Embalaje para transporte Barco Categoría de embalaje B1 caja de madera o de
Embalaje para interior contrachapado, tapa con
almacenamiento chapa celular de
polipropileno,
almacenamiento a la
intemperie hasta 3 meses
Placas de características
Idioma de las placas de internacional Duplicado de placa de con
características características
Hojas de datos
Partes de instalación
Alcance de suministro Bomba con partes de Type Cadena
instalación Material ST TZN
Tipo de instalación Fijo con alambre guía Longitud 5,00 m
Profundidad de la instalación 4,50 m Carga máxima 800 kg
Concepto de material GH
Codo transversal
Tamaño DN 100
Diseño de brida ASME
Diámetro codo transversal DN 100 Taladrado de
acuerdo con ASME
Material Hierro fundido A48 clase 35B
Tipo de montaje Pernos anclaje compuestos
Carril de cimentación Sin
Dispositivo de fijación
Diseño liso
Tamaño DN 100
cadena/cuerda de elevación
Hoja de curvas
100
Qmin
80
Altura de bombeo
404.0
60 Qmin
Qmin
[m]
40
317.0
310.0
20
0 50 [m³/h] 100 150 200 250 300 350
10
NPSH requerido
[m]
50
Eficiencia
[%]
0
0 50 [m³/h] 100 150 200 250 300 350
40
Consumo de potencia
[kW]
20
Datos de curvas
Velocidad de giro 1782 rpm Eficiencia 60,1 %
Densidad del fluido 998 kg/m³ Absorción de potencia 27,15 kW
Viscosidad 1,00 mm²/s NPSH requerido 3,88 m
Corriente volumétrica 120,00 m³/h Número de curva K42591s
Caudal bombeado 120,00 m³/h Diámetro efectivo del 317,0 mm
requerido rodete
Altura de bombeo 50,00 m Estándar de aceptación Ninguno;tolerancias s/ISO
Altura de bombeo 50,00 m 9906 Clase 2A / 3B; por
requerida debajo de 10 kW de
acuerdo con párrafo 4.4.2
Plano de instalación
60
ø 10
985
ø5
855
165
630
1353 163
DN3 (Gancho de elevación opcional)
1) 1060
430
min 550
240
DN1
125
75
ø 18
140
1115 1) Mínimo nivel de agua
220
325
590
min 700 150
Acceso apertura
min 950
Motor Conexiones
Fabricante del motor KSB Brida de succión conforme a sin mecanizar
Tamaño del motor 35 (DN1)
Potencia del motor 37,28 kW Diámetro codo transversal DN 100 Taladrado de
Nº de polos 4 acuerdo con ASME
Velocidad de giro 1775 rpm
Peso neto
Bomba, Motor, Cable 530 kg
Dispositivo de fijación/pie 15 kg
Total 545 kg
Conectar tuberías sin tensión o resistencia Ver plano extra para las conexiones
Tolerancias dimensionales para altura de eje : DIN 747 auxiliares
Dimensiones sin tolerancias, tolerancias medias según : ISO 2768-m
Dimensiones de conexión para bombas : EN735
Dimensiones sin tolerancias - partes soldadas: ISO 13920-B
Dimensiones sin tolerancias - partes de hierro fundido gris: ISO 8062-CT9
Motor data sheet
Motor data
Motor material Grey cast iron JL 1040 Number of power cables 2
Voltage 460 V Power cable Ø min. 14.3 mm
Frequency 60 Hz Power cable Ø max. 15.3 mm
Motor power 37.28 kW Control cable AWG 15-12
Rated current 62.4 A Number of control cables 1
Rated speed 1775 rpm Ctrl. cable diameter, min. 16.6 mm
Starting current ratio 6.4 Ctrl. cable diameter, max. 17.6 mm
Starting mode Direct-on-line starting Cable standard NEC
Power cable AWG 9-4 Switching frequency 10.00 1/h
Curve data
The no-load point is not a guarantee point within the meaning
of IEC 60034
Load 0.0 % 25.0 % 50.0 % 75.0 % 100.0 %
P2 0.00 kW 9.32 kW 18.64 kW 27.96 kW 37.28 kW
n 1800 rpm 1794 rpm 1788 rpm 1781 rpm 1775 rpm
P1 1.90 kW 11.03 kW 20.67 kW 30.66 kW 40.75 kW
I 16.0 A 28.3 A 35.5 A 48.1 A 62.4 A
Eta 0.0 % 84.5 % 90.2 % 91.2 % 91.5 %
cos phi 0.15 0.49 0.73 0.80 0.82
1800
[rpm]
n
1770
0 5 [kW] 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
200 100 1.0 100
eta
180
160 80 0.8 80
cos phi
140
120 60 0.6 60
100
80 40 P1 0.4 40
40 20 I 0.2 20
[A]
20
0 0 0.0 0
0 5 [kW] 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
mechanical pow er P2
Motor data sheet
Amarex KRT
Tamaño de la unidad DN 40 hasta DN 300
Dimensiones del motor:
2 polos: 5 2 a 55 2
4 polos: 4 4 a 65 4
6 polos: 4 6 a 50 6
8 polos: 10 8 a 35 8
Manual de instrucciones de
servicio/montaje
Quedan reservados todos los derechos. Queday prohibida la difusión, reproducción, modificación o
transmisión a terceros del contenido sin el consentimiento por escrito de KSB.
Índice
Glosario ................................................................................................ 5
1 Generalidades ...................................................................................... 6
1.1 Cuestiones básicas ........................................................................................... 6
1.2 Montaje de máquinas desmontadas .............................................................. 6
1.3 Destinatarios .................................................................................................... 6
1.4 Documentos vigentes adicionales .................................................................. 7
1.5 Símbolos ........................................................................................................... 7
2 Seguridad ............................................................................................. 8
2.1 Señalización de las indicaciones de advertencia ........................................... 8
2.2 Generalidades .................................................................................................. 8
2.3 Uso pertinente ................................................................................................. 8
2.4 Cualificación y formación del personal ........................................................ 10
2.5 Consecuencias y riegos provocados por el incumplimiento de las
instrucciones .................................................................................................. 10
2.6 Seguridad en el trabajo ................................................................................ 10
2.7 Indicaciones de seguridad para el titular/operario ..................................... 11
2.8 Indicaciones de seguridad para las tareas de mantenimiento, inspección y
montaje .......................................................................................................... 11
2.9 Uso no autorizado ......................................................................................... 11
2.10 Indicaciones sobre la protección contra explosiones .................................. 11
5 Instalación/Montaje .......................................................................... 20
5.1 Medidas de seguridad ................................................................................... 20
5.2 Comprobación previa a la instalación .......................................................... 20
5.3 Instalación del grupo de bomba .................................................................. 22
Amarex KRT 3 de 80
Índice
4 de 80 Amarex KRT
Glosario
Glosario
Construcción en bloque
Motor fijado directamente en la bomba
mediante brida o linterna
Amarex KRT 5 de 80
1 Generalidades
1 Generalidades
1.3 Destinatarios
Estas instrucciones de uso están dirigidas al personal con formación técnica
especializada. (⇨ Capitúlo 2.4 Página 10)
6 de 80 Amarex KRT
1 Generalidades
1.5 Símbolos
Tabla 3: Símbolos utilizados
Símbolo Significado
✓ Condición previa para la instrucción
⊳ Requisito para las indicaciones de seguridad
⇨ Resultado de la actuación
⇨ Referencia cruzada
1. Instrucción con varios pasos a seguir
2.
Indicación
facilita recomendaciones e indicaciones importantes para manejar
el producto
Amarex KRT 7 de 80
2 Seguridad
2 Seguridad
Todas las indicaciones contenidas en el presente capítulo hacen referencia a un riesgo
! PELIGRO elevado de daños.
2.2 Generalidades
Estas instrucciones de uso contienen indicaciones básicas de instalación, servicio y
mantenimiento cuyo seguimiento garantiza el manejo seguro de la bomba y ayuda a
evitar daños personales o materiales.
Se deben observar las indicaciones de seguridad de todos los capítulos.
El personal técnico y los operadores deberán leer y comprender las instrucciones de
uso antes del montaje y de la puesta en servicio.
El contenido de las instrucciones de uso debe estar disponible in situ y en todo
momento para el personal técnico.
Se deben observar y conservar en estado legible las indicaciones incluidas junto a la
bomba. Esto se aplica, por ejemplo, a:
▪ Flecha de sentido de giro
▪ Identificadores de conexiones
▪ Placa de características
El operador será el responsable en caso de que no se cumplan las disposiciones de
carácter local indicadas en las instrucciones de uso.
8 de 80 Amarex KRT
2 Seguridad
Amarex KRT 9 de 80
2 Seguridad
10 de 80 Amarex KRT
2 Seguridad
Amarex KRT 11 de 80
2 Seguridad
Los párrafos de las presentes instrucciones de uso marcados con un símbolo a su lado,
son válidos para grupos de bomba protegidos contra explosiones, así como para un
funcionamiento temporal fuera de zonas con riesgo de explosión.
En zonas con riesgo de explosión tan sólo se podrán utilizar aquellas bombas o
grupos de bomba que tengan la identificación correspondiente y que sean aptos
según la hoja de características.
Para la puesta en servicio de un grupo de bomba con protección contra explosiones
según la directiva 94/9/CE (ATEX) se aplican condiciones especiales.
A este respecto, se debe prestar especial atención a las secciones identificadas con el
presente símbolo de estas instrucciones de uso.
La protección contra explosiones sólo se garantiza con un uso adecuado del
dispositivo.
No apartarse nunca de los límites indicados en la hoja de características y en la placa
de características.
Evítese cualquier tipo de servicio no autorizado.
2.10.1 Reparación
La reparación de las bombas protegidas contra explosiones está sujeta a normas
específicas. Las modificaciones o cambios en el grupo de bomba pueden perjudicar a
la protección contra explosiones, por ello sólo se podrán realizar tras ser acordados
con el fabricante.
La reparación en los espacios protegidos contra la inflamación sólo podrá realizarse
de acuerdo con las premisas constructivas del fabricante. No está permitida la
reparación sujeta a los valores de las tablas 1 y 2 de la norma EN 60079-1.
12 de 80 Amarex KRT
3 Transporte, almacenamiento intermedio y eliminación
ADVERTENCIA
Montaje sobre bases no portantes y superficies no niveladas
¡Daños personales y materiales!
▷ Montar el grupo de bomba en vertical con el motor en la parte superior sobre
una base fija y nivelada.
▷ El grupo de bomba sólo debe montarse sobre una base con suficiente capacidad
de carga.
▷ Asegurar el grupo de bomba con medios adecuados para que no se vuelque ni
se caiga.
▷ Observar las indicaciones de peso de la hoja/placa de características.
ADVERTENCIA
Elevación o bajada inadecuadas del grupo de bomba
¡Daños personales y materiales!
▷ Asegurar el grupo de bomba con medios adecuados para que no se vuelque ni
se caiga.
▷ Si es posible, en caso de grupos de bomba grandes trabajar con dos elevadores
(apoyar sobre el punto de apoyo (motor) y la tubuladura de impulsión).
▷ Asegurar los cables de conexión contra posibles caídas.
▷ Asegurar la base de transporte por medio de soportes adicionales para que no
se vuelque.
▷ Se debe mantener una distancia de seguridad suficiente durante la elevación.
Amarex KRT 13 de 80
3 Transporte, almacenamiento intermedio y eliminación
ADVERTENCIA
Elevación o movimiento inadecuados de grupos constructivos o piezas pesadas
¡Daños personales y materiales!
▷ Al mover grupos constructivos o piezas pesadas, utilizar medios de transporte,
aparatos de elevación y medios de suspensión adecuados.
3.2 Almacenamiento/Conservación
Si la puesta en marcha se va a realizar mucho tiempo después de la entrega, se
recomienda tomar las siguientes medidas:
ATENCIÓN
Almacenamiento inadecuado
¡Daños en los cables eléctricos!
▷ Proteger los cables eléctricos durante el tendido del cableado para evitar
deformaciones permanentes.
▷ No retirar las capas de protección de los cables eléctricos hasta que comience el
montaje.
ATENCIÓN
Daño por humedad, suciedad o malas condiciones de almacenamiento.
¡Corrosión/suciedad de la bomba/grupo de bomba!
▷ Si el lugar de almacenamiento es exterior, se deberá cubrir con materiales
impermeables la bomba/grupo de bomba (con o sin embalaje) y los accesorios.
ATENCIÓN
Aperturas y puntos de unión húmedos, sucios o dañados.
¡Inestanqueidad o daños en el grupo de bomba!
▷ Las aperturas selladas del grupo de bomba sólo se deben liberar durante el
montaje.
INDICACIÓN
Los conservantes deberán aplicarse y eliminarse siguiendo las instrucciones del
fabricante.
3.3 Devolución
1. Vaciar la bomba siguiendo el procedimiento adecuado. (⇨ Capitúlo 7.3 Página
47)
2. Enjuagar y limpiar la bomba cuidadosamente, especialmente si se han utilizado
líquidos de bombeo dañinos, explosivos, calientes o de riesgo potencial.
14 de 80 Amarex KRT
3 Transporte, almacenamiento intermedio y eliminación
INDICACIÓN
En caso necesario, puede descargar un certificado de conformidad en la siguiente
dirección de Internet: www.ksb.com/certificate_of_decontamination
3.4 Eliminación
ADVERTENCIA
Líquidos de bombeo calientes o peligrosos para la salud
¡Peligro de daños personales o al medioambiente!
▷ Se deben recoger y eliminar el líquido de enjuague y los posibles restos de
líquido.
▷ En caso necesario, utilice ropa y máscara de protección.
▷ Se deben cumplir las disposiciones legales relativas a la eliminación de líquidos
peligrosos para la salud.
Amarex KRT 15 de 80
4 Descripción de la bomba/grupo de bomba
4.2 Denominación
Ejemplo: KRTK 150-315/164XG-S
Tabla 6: Explicación de la denominación
Abreviatura Significado
KRT Serie
K Forma del rodete, p. ej. K = rodete de canal
150 Diámetro nominal de las tubuladuras de impulsión (DN)
[mm]
315 Diámetro nominal máx. del rodete [mm]
16 Tamaño de motor
4 Número de polos
X Versión del motor, p. ej. X = modelo con protección contra
explosiones ATEX II 2GT3
G Tipo de material/Variante, p. ej. G = bomba de fundición
gris completa
S Montaje, p.ej. S = instalación estacionaria en zona húmeda
sin sistema de refrigeración
2
TYPE Amarex KRTK 150-315 /164 UG-S 12 TYPE Amarex KRTK 150-315 /164 XG-S
3 No. 9971235943/000100 13 No. 9971235943/000100 II2G Ex dc IIB T3
Q 300 m3 / h H 14 m 2010 Q 300 m3 / h H 14 m 2010 22
4 14
TEMP.MAX. 40 ° C 0150 kg 15 TEMP. MAX. 40 ° C 0150 kg
5 Motor IP 68 SUBM. MAX. 30 m CLASS F Motor IP 68 SUBM. MAX. 30 m CLASS F
6 DKN 160.4-12 3 ~ M.-No. 123456 DKN 160.4-12 3 ~ M.-No. 123456
7 P2 16 kW 400/690 V 50 Hz cos φ 0.81 16 P 2 16 kW 400/690 V 50 Hz cos φ 0.81
8 IA/IN 4,9 17 IA/IN 4,9
1480 min-1 14,3/8,3 A S1 -1
1480 min 14,3/8,3 A S1
9 18 0035 II2G Ex d IIB T3 PTB 10 Atex 1027X
10 WARNUNG - NICHT UNTER SPANNUNG öFFNEN
19 21 WARNUNG - NICHT UNTER SPANNUNG öFFNEN
WARNING - DO NOT OPEN WHEN EN ERGIZED 20 WARNING - DO NOT OPEN WHEN EN ERGIZED
11 AVERTISSEMENT - NE PAS OUVRIR SOUS TENSION AVERTISSEMENT - NE PAS OUVRIR SOUS TENSION
Mat. No. 01232061 ZN 3826 – M 34 Mat. No. 01231886 ZN 3826 – M 29
Ilustración 2: Placa de características a) Grupo de bomba estándar, b) Grupo de bomba con protección contra
explosiones
16 de 80 Amarex KRT
4 Descripción de la bomba/grupo de bomba
4.4 Diseño
Tipo
▪ Bomba de motor totalmente sumergible
▪ sin autosucción
▪ Construcción en bloque
Tipo de rodete
▪ Distintas formas del rodete según el uso previsto (⇨ Capitúlo 2.3 Página 8)
Cojinetes estándar
▪ Cojinetes engrasados de por vida
▪ No necesitan mantenimiento
Cojinetes reforzados
Accionamiento
▪ Motor trifásico asíncrono con rotor en cortocircuito
En un grupo de bomba con protección contra explosiones, el tipo de motor integrado
es del tipo de protección antideflagrante Ex d IIB.
4.5 Montaje
Podemos distinguir entre dos versiones de montaje distintas:
▪ Instalación estacionaria en zona húmeda (tipo de montaje S)
▪ Instalación transportable en zona húmeda (tipo de montaje P)
El grupo de bomba se ha concebido para un funcionamiento sumergido constante. La
refrigeración del motor tiene lugar mediante el líquido de bombeo en la superficie
del motor. También es posible el funcionamiento no sumergido del motor durante
un breve periodo de tiempo.
Amarex KRT 17 de 80
4 Descripción de la bomba/grupo de bomba
10
4
3
2
1
6
Ilustración 3: Vista de sección
18 de 80 Amarex KRT
4 Descripción de la bomba/grupo de bomba
▪ Cuerda o cadena
▪ Consola con material de sujeción
▪ Codo de base con material de sujeción
▪ Accesorios de guiado
(biela de guiado no contenida en el equipo de suministro de KSB)
Instalación transportable en zona húmeda (tipo de montaje P)
▪ Grupo de bomba completo con cables eléctricos
▪ Placa base o soporte de la bomba con material de sujeción
▪ Cuerda o cadena
INDICACIÓN
El equipo de suministro incluye una placa de características separada.
Esta placa debe colocarse bien visible fuera del lugar del montaje, p. ej. en el armario de
conexión, en las tuberías o en la consola.
Amarex KRT 19 de 80
5 Instalación/Montaje
5 Instalación/Montaje
PELIGRO
Montaje inadecuado en zonas con peligro de explosión
¡Peligro de explosión!
¡Daño del grupo de bomba!
▷ Se debe tener en cuenta la normativa vigente de protección contra explosiones.
▷ Observar las indicaciones de la hoja de características y de la placa de
características del grupo de bomba.
PELIGRO
Presencia de personas en el depósito durante el funcionamiento del grupo de bomba
¡Electrocución!
▷ No arrancar nunca el grupo de bomba mientras se encuentre alguna persona
presente en el depósito.
ADVERTENCIA
Sólidos no autorizados (herramientas, tornillos o similares) en la caja de la bomba o el
depósito de entrada durante la activación del grupo de la bomba
¡Daños personales y materiales!
▷ Antes del llenado de la caja de la bomba o el depósito de entrada, comprobar
que no hay sólidos no autorizados y, en caso necesario, eliminarlos.
ADVERTENCIA
Montaje sobre bases no portantes y no fijadas
¡Daños personales y materiales!
▷ La base de hormigón ha de tener una resistencia suficiente (mín. clase C25/30)
según DIN 1045.
▷ La base de hormigón tiene que haber fraguado antes de colocar el codo de base
sobre ella.
▷ El codo de base sólo se puede colocar sobre una base horizontal y nivelada.
▷ Observar las indicaciones de peso de la hoja/placa de características.
Resonancias Deben evitarse las resonancias con las habituales frecuencias de excitación
(frecuencia de giro simple o doble, ruido rotacional de los álabes) en la base y en el
sistema de tuberías, puesto que dichas frecuencias pueden provocar fuertes
vibraciones.
1. Supervisar el diseño de construcción.
La estructuración de la construcción se debe realizar según las medidas del
esquema de dimensiones y del esquema de instalación.
20 de 80 Amarex KRT
5 Instalación/Montaje
ADVERTENCIA
Montaje sobre bases no portantes y superficies no niveladas
¡Daños personales y materiales!
▷ Montar el grupo de bomba en vertical con el motor en la parte superior sobre
una base fija y nivelada.
▷ El grupo de bomba sólo debe montarse sobre una base con suficiente capacidad
de carga.
▷ Asegurar el grupo de bomba con medios adecuados para que no se vuelque ni
se caiga.
▷ Observar las indicaciones de peso de la hoja/placa de características.
Resonancias Deben evitarse las resonancias con las habituales frecuencias de excitación
(frecuencia de giro simple o doble, ruido rotacional de los álabes) en la base y en
sistema de tuberías, puesto que dichas frecuencias pueden provocar fuertes
vibraciones.
1. Supervisar el diseño de construcción.
La estructuración de la construcción se debe realizar según las medidas del
esquema de dimensiones y del esquema de instalación.
903.03
903.03 411.03
411.03
PELIGRO
Marcha en seco del grupo de bomba
¡Peligro de explosión!
▷ La comprobación del sentido de giro del grupo de bomba con protección contra
explosiones debe llevarse a cabo fuera de las zonas con peligro de explosión.
Amarex KRT 21 de 80
5 Instalación/Montaje
ADVERTENCIA
Manos o cuerpos extraños en la carcasa de la bomba
¡Lesiones, daño de la bomba!
▷ No se deben introducir las manos u otros objetos en la bomba.
▷ Buscar cuerpos extraños en el interior de la bomba.
▷ Tomar medidas de protección adecuadas (p. ej. gafas de protección, etc.)
ADVERTENCIA
Colocación inadecuada del grupo de bomba durante la comprobación del sentido de giro
¡Daños personales y materiales!
▷ Asegurar el grupo de bomba con medios adecuados para que no se vuelque ni
se caiga.
ATENCIÓN
Marcha en seco del grupo de bomba
¡Fuertes vibraciones!
¡Daño de los cierres mecánicos y los cojinetes!
▷ El grupo de bomba no debe dejarse encendido fuera del líquido de bombeo
durante más de 60 segundos.
22 de 80 Amarex KRT
5 Instalación/Montaje
M 12x160 14 110 25 19 12 8 40
M 16x190 18 125 35 24 16 12 60
l
PELIGRO
Sobrepaso de la carga permitida en la brida del codo de base
¡Peligro de muerte por fuga de líquido de bombeo caliente, tóxico, corrosivo o inflamable
en los puntos sin estanqueidad!
▷ No utilizar la bomba como punto de anclaje para las tuberías.
▷ Las tuberías han de estar fijadas justo antes de la bomba, acoplándose a ésta sin
tensión alguna.
▷ Se deben respetar las cargas de brida autorizadas.
▷ Las dilataciones térmicas de las tuberías se han de compensar con las medidas
adecuadas.
INDICACIÓN
Durante el desagüe de objetos sumergidos, deberá instalarse una válvula de retención
en el conducto de impulsión para evitar un reflujo procedente del canal.
Amarex KRT 23 de 80
5 Instalación/Montaje
ATENCIÓN
Número de revoluciones crítico
¡Fuertes vibraciones!
¡Daño de los cierres mecánicos y los cojinetes!
▷ Con conductos de ascensión prolongados deberá colocarse una válvula de
retención para evitar un mayor giro hacia atrás tras la desconexión.
Durante la colocación de la válvula de retención ha de prestarse atención a la
purga.
INDICACIÓN
Si las características constructivas/tuberías, etc. hacen necesaria una inclinación del
cable de guiado, no superar una curva de 5° para asegurar una fijación segura.
Fijación de la consola
1. Fijar la consola 894 por medio de espigas de acero 90-3.37 en el marco de
abertura de la caja y apretar a un par de 10 Nm.
2. Pasar la abrazadera 571 a través de los orificios de los tensores 572 y apretar con
tuercas 920.37.
3. Colocar los pernos roscados 904 en la consola con el dispositivo de fijación
previamente montado por medio de la tuerca 920.36.
No atornillar demasiado la tuerca 920.36, para que quede una distancia de
tensión suficiente para el posterior tensionado del cable de guiado.
Ilustración 9: Montaje de
la consola
24 de 80 Amarex KRT
5 Instalación/Montaje
INDICACIÓN
Los tubos de guiado no se incluyen en el equipo de suministro.
Seleccionar el tipo de material de los tubos de guiado dependiendo del líquido de
bombeo o según las indicaciones del titular.
Los tubos de guiado deberán presentar las dimensiones siguientes:
Tabla 12: Dimensiones de los tubos de guiado
Dimensiones del Diámetro externo Espesor de las paredes [mm]6)
sistema hidráulico [mm] mínima máxima
DN 40 ... DN 150 60 2 5
DN 200 ... DN 700 89 3 6
Fijación de la consola
894 1. Fijar la consola 894 por medio de espigas de acero 90-3.37 en el marco de
90-3.37 abertura de la caja y apretar a un par de 10 Nm.
Véase la figura del patrón de orificios de las espigas. (véase el plano de medidas)
Amarex KRT 25 de 80
5 Instalación/Montaje
ATENCIÓN
Instalación inadecuada de los tubos de guiado
¡Daños en la guía de bielas!
▷ Disponer siempre los tubos de guiado en sentido vertical.
920.37 1. Colocar los tubos 710 sobre la leva cónica del codo de base 72-1 e instalarlos de
894 forma vertical.
520.37 2. Marcar la longitud de los tubos 710 (hasta el borde inferior de las consolas),
81-51.37
901.37 teniendo en cuenta el área de ajuste de los orificios longitudinales de la consola
894.
710
3. Cortar los tubos 710 en ángulo recto con respecto al eje del tubo y desbarbar por
dentro y por fuera.
4. Insertar la consola 894 mediante manguitos elásticos 520.37 en los tubos de
guiado 710 hasta que la consola se apoye sobre los extremos de los tubos.
5. Fijar las tuercas 920.37.
De esta forma se desplazan hacia arriba las piezas de fijación 81-51.37 y los
manguitos 520.37 quedan sometidos a la tensión del diámetro interior del tubo.
Ilustración 12: Montaje de 6. Reforzar la tuerca 920,37 con una segunda tuerca.
los tubos de guiado
INDICACIÓN
Para profundidades de montaje de más de 6 m, el equipo de suministro puede contener
consolas como apoyo intermedio de los tubos de guiado. Las consolas adoptan a su vez
la función de separadores entre ambos tubos de guiado.
Montaje del apoyo intermedio
1. Medir el diámetro interior de los tubos de guiado.
2. Apretar las tuercas 920.39 para introducir los manguitos elásticos 520.39 con las
piezas de fijación 81-51.39 en el diámetro interior del tubo.
3. Comprobar si los tubos de guiado pueden fijarse tensos sobre los manguitos
elásticos.
4. Apretar las contratuercas para fijar los tornillos.
5. Continuar con el montaje de los tubos de guiado.
550.35
920.35
26 de 80 Amarex KRT
5 Instalación/Montaje
Colocación de la cadena/
cuerda de izado -
Instalación estacionaria
en zona húmeda
Instalación transportable en zona húmeda
1. Colgar la cadena o la cuerda de izado en el anillo/la armella/el estribo del lado de
las tubuladuras de impulsión del grupo de bomba.
Colocación de la cadena/
cuerda de izado -
Instalación transportable
en zona húmeda
Tabla 13: Tipos de fijación
Figura Tipo de fijación
914.26 Fijación directa de la cadena a la carcasa del motor
920.26
914.26 Tornillo hexagonal interior
920.26 Tuerca
Amarex KRT 27 de 80
5 Instalación/Montaje
INDICACIÓN
Durante el tendido de un cable entre el equipo de control y el punto de conexión del
grupo de bomba, deberá preverse un número suficiente de hilos conductores para los
sensores. La sección debe medir al menos 1,5 mm².
28 de 80 Amarex KRT
5 Instalación/Montaje
Los motores pueden conectarse a redes de baja tensión que tengan una tensión
nominal y una tolerancia conforme a IEC 38, o a otras redes o equipos de
alimentación con tolerancias de tensión nominal de máx. ±10%.
PELIGRO
Marcha en seco del grupo de bomba
¡Peligro de explosión!
▷ No dejar nunca funcionar en seco un grupo de bomba con protección contra
explosiones.
ATENCIÓN
Líquido de bombeo por debajo del nivel de líquido mínimo
¡Daño del grupo de bomba por cavitación!
▷ No permitir nunca que el líquido de bombeo quede por debajo del nivel
mínimo.
PELIGRO
Servicio fuera del dominio de frecuencia admitido
¡Peligro de explosión!
▷ No poner nunca en servicio un grupo de bomba con protección contra
explosiones fuera del dominio indicado.
PELIGRO
Límite de corriente del convertidor de frecuencia mal ajustado
¡Peligro de explosión!
▷ Ajustar el límite de corriente como mucho a 1,2 veces la corriente nominal
indicada en la placa de características.
Selección Para la selección del convertidor de frecuencia deberán tenerse en cuenta los datos
siguientes:
▪ Datos del fabricante
▪ Datos eléctricos del grupo de bomba, especialmente la intensidad nominal
Puesta en marcha ▪ Tener en cuenta las cortas rampas de puesta en marcha (máximo 5 s)
▪ Tras al menos 2 min liberar las revoluciones para la regulación.
La puesta en marcha con grandes rampas y escasa frecuencia puede provocar
obstrucciones.
Amarex KRT 29 de 80
5 Instalación/Montaje
Resistencia a interferencias El grupo de bomba cumple los requisitos básicos de resistencia a interferencias
conforme a EN 50082. Para supervisar los sensores instalados, el titular debe
proporcionar personalmente una resistencia a las interferencias suficiente a través de
una selección y disposición adecuada de los cables en la instalación. Los cables
eléctricos y de control del grupo de bomba en sí no deben modificarse. Se deben
elegir dispositivos de evaluación adecuados. Para la supervisión del sensor de fugas
en el interior del motor, se recomienda en este caso el uso de un relé especial
suministrado por KSB.
5.4.1.4 Sensores
PELIGRO
Servicio de un grupo de bomba con conexión incompleta
¡Peligro de explosión!
¡Daño del grupo de bomba!
▷ No arrancar nunca un grupo de bomba con cables eléctricos cuya conexión se
encuentre incompleta ni con dispositivos de control que no estén dispuestos
para su funcionamiento.
ATENCIÓN
Conexión errónea
¡Daños en los sensores!
▷ Ténganse en cuenta durante la conexión de los sensores los límites que se
indican en los siguientes capítulos.
El grupo de bomba está equipado con sensores. Estos sensores evitan peligros y
daños en el grupo de bomba.
Para la valoración de las señales del sensor son necesarios transductores de medición.
KSB puede suministrar dispositivos adecuados de 230 V~.
INDICACIÓN
El servicio de la bomba en condiciones de seguridad y el mantenimiento de nuestra
garantía sólo serán posibles si las señales de los sensores se valoran según las
presentes instrucciones de uso.
30 de 80 Amarex KRT
5 Instalación/Montaje
PELIGRO
Refrigeración insuficiente
¡Peligro de explosión!
¡Daños en el bobinado!
▷ No poner nunca en servicio un grupo de bomba sin una supervisión de
temperatura que funcione correctamente.
▷ Utilizar en los grupos de bomba con protección contra explosiones un
disparador de termistor con barrera de reconexión y homologación ATEX para
la supervisión de la temperatura en los motores con protección contra
explosiones con el tipo de protección antideflagrante "Envolvente
antideflagrante".
K1
B2
Posición de los electrodos en la carcasa del motor
Conexión de los relés de
electrodos
Amarex KRT 31 de 80
5 Instalación/Montaje
5.4.1.4.3 Fugas del cierre mecánico (sólo en grupos de bomba con cojinetes
reforzados)
En la cámara de fugas de los cierres mecánicos se encuentra un interruptor flotador
(identificación de hilos conductores 3 y 4). El contacto (máximo 250 V~/2 A) se abre
cuando la cámara de fugas está llena. En este caso deberá dispararse una señal de
alarma. (⇨ Capitúlo 9.2 Página 72)
PELIGRO
Trabajo en el grupo de bomba a cargo de personal no cualificado
¡Peligro de muerte por electrocución!
▷ La conexión eléctrica debe realizarse por personal especializado.
▷ Se debe seguir las norma IEC 30364 (DIN VDE 0100) y para la protección contra
explosiones, la norma IEC 60079 (DIN VDE 0165)
ADVERTENCIA
Conexión errónea a la red
¡Daño de la red eléctrica, cortocircuito!
▷ Seguir las indicaciones técnicas de conexión de las empresas de suministro
eléctrico locales.
ATENCIÓN
Tendido inadecuado
¡Daños en los cables eléctricos!
▷ No mover nunca los cables eléctricos a temperaturas por debajo de los -25 °C.
▷ No doblar ni aplastar nunca los cables eléctricos.
▷ No elevar nunca el grupo de bomba tirando de los cables eléctricos.
ATENCIÓN
Sobrecarga del motor
¡Daño del motor!
▷ El motor debe protegerse a través de un dispositivo de protección contra
sobrecargas con retardo térmico según la norma IEC 947 y las normas regionales
en vigor.
32 de 80 Amarex KRT
5 Instalación/Montaje
Para la conexión eléctrica del grupo de bomba deberán tenerse en cuenta los planos
de conexión eléctrica (⇨ Capitúlo 9.2 Página 72) incluidos en el anexo y las
indicaciones para la planificación del equipo de control (⇨ Capitúlo 5.4.1 Página 28).
PELIGRO
Conexión errónea
¡Peligro de explosión!
▷ El punto de conexión de los extremos de los cables debe encontrarse fuera del
área con peligro de explosión o en un componente eléctrico autorizado para la
categoría de dispositivos II2G.
PELIGRO
Servicio de un grupo de bomba con conexión incompleta
¡Peligro de explosión!
¡Daño del grupo de bomba!
▷ No arrancar nunca un grupo de bomba con cables eléctricos cuya conexión se
encuentre incompleta ni con dispositivos de control que no estén dispuestos
para su funcionamiento.
PELIGRO
Conexión eléctrica de conexiones dañadas
¡Peligro de muerte por electrocución!
▷ Antes de realizar la conexión, comprobar que las conexiones no estén dañadas.
▷ No conectar nunca conexiones dañadas.
ATENCIÓN
Succión de bombeo
¡Daños en el cable eléctrico!
▷ Colocar los cables eléctricos estirados hacia arriba.
1. Colocar y fijar los cables eléctricos estirados hacia arriba.
2. No retirar las capas de protección de los cables eléctricos hasta justo antes del
montaje.
3. Si fuese necesario, adaptar la longitud de los cables eléctricos a las características
del emplazamiento.
4. Tras acortar los cables, volver a colocar correctamente las identificaciones en cada
uno de los hilos conductores de los extremos de los cables.
Conexión equipotencial El grupo de bomba no dispone de conexión equipotencial externa alguna (peligro de
corrosión).
PELIGRO
Conexión errónea
¡Peligro de explosión!
▷ No disponer nunca a posteriori una conexión equipotencial externa en un grupo
de bomba con protección contra explosiones durante el montaje en un
depósito.
Amarex KRT 33 de 80
5 Instalación/Montaje
PELIGRO
Contacto con el grupo de bomba durante el servicio
¡Electrocución!
▷ Asegurarse de que el grupo de bomba no se puede tocar desde fuera durante el
servicio.
34 de 80 Amarex KRT
6 Puesta en marcha/ Puesta fuera de servicio
PELIGRO
Presencia de personas en el depósito durante el funcionamiento del grupo de bomba
¡Electrocución!
▷ No arrancar nunca el grupo de bomba mientras se encuentre alguna persona
presente en el depósito.
6.1.2 Encendido
ATENCIÓN
Encendido con el motor en proceso de parada
¡Daño del grupo de bomba!
▷ Volver a encender el grupo de bomba cuando se haya parado por completo.
▷ No proceder nunca al encendido si el grupo de bomba gira marcha atrás.
ATENCIÓN
Puesta en marcha contra sistema de bloqueo cerrado
¡Fuertes vibraciones!
¡Daño de los cierres mecánicos y los cojinetes!
▷ No poner nunca en marcha el grupo de bomba contra un sistema de bloqueo
cerrado.
1. Si existe, abrir completamente el sistema de bloqueo del conducto de impulsión.
2. Encendido del grupo de bomba.
Amarex KRT 35 de 80
6 Puesta en marcha/ Puesta fuera de servicio
PELIGRO
Superación de los límites de servicio
¡Daño del grupo de bomba!
▷ Se deben observar las características de servicio contenidas en la hoja de
características.
▷ Evitar el servicio contra sistema de bloqueo cerrado.
▷ No poner nunca en servicio un grupo de bomba con protección contra
explosiones con temperatura del líquido de bombeo o temperatura ambiente
más alta de las especificadas en la hoja o en la placa de características.
▷ No poner nunca en servicio el grupo de bomba con protección contra
explosiones fuera de los límites siguientes.
ATENCIÓN
Peligro de congelación
¡Daño del grupo de bomba!
▷ Vaciar el grupo de bomba o proteger contra la congelación.
La temperatura máx. del líquido de bombeo y ambiente se indica en la placa de
características o en la hoja de características.
ATENCIÓN
Frecuencia de arranque demasiado elevada
¡Daño del motor!
▷ No superar nunca la frecuencia de arranque indicada.
Para evitar fuertes subidas de temperatura en el motor y una sobrecarga del motor,
las juntas y los cojinetes, no se pueden superar el número de encendidos por hora
que se indica a continuación y los 5.000 encendidos al año.
Tabla 14: Frecuencia de arranque
Potencia del motor [kW] Frecuencia de arranque máxima
[arranques/hora]
≤ 7,5 30
> 7,5 10
Estos valores son válidos para la conexión a la red (directa o con protección estrella
triángulo, transformador de arranque, dispositivo de arranque suave). En el servicio
con un convertidor de frecuencia no existe esta limitación.
ATENCIÓN
Encendido con el motor en proceso de parada
¡Daño del grupo de bomba!
▷ Volver a encender el grupo de bomba cuando se haya parado por completo.
▷ No proceder nunca al encendido si el grupo de bomba gira marcha atrás.
36 de 80 Amarex KRT
6 Puesta en marcha/ Puesta fuera de servicio
PELIGRO
Marcha en seco del grupo de bomba
¡Peligro de explosión!
▷ No dejar nunca funcionar en seco un grupo de bomba con protección contra
explosiones.
ATENCIÓN
Líquido de bombeo por debajo del nivel de líquido mínimo
¡Daño del grupo de bomba por cavitación!
▷ No permitir nunca que el líquido de bombeo quede por debajo del nivel
mínimo.
a punto El grupo de bomba está listo para el servicio cuando el motor está completamente
cubierto por el líquido de bombeo (medida A). Para la medida exacta, véase el
esquema de instalación/de medidas.
A B A B
INDICACIÓN
El cumplimiento de la medida B no garantiza automáticamente el funcionamiento sin
fallos del grupo de bomba.
Dependiendo del punto de servicio, pueden ser necesarios niveles más altos. Ténganse
en cuenta al respecto los valores para NPSH de la curva característica (véanse las
curvas características hidráulicas).
ATENCIÓN
Sobrepaso de la densidad del líquido de bombeo permitida
¡Sobrecarga del motor!
▷ Seguir los datos relativos a la densidad de la hoja de datos.
▷ Asegurar una reserva suficiente de potencia del motor.
Amarex KRT 37 de 80
6 Puesta en marcha/ Puesta fuera de servicio
6.2.5 Tensión
PELIGRO
Superación de las tolerancias de tensión permitidas
Peligro de explosión
▷ No poner nunca en servicio una bomba/grupo de bomba con protección contra
explosiones fuera del dominio indicado.
PELIGRO
Servicio fuera del dominio de frecuencia admitido
¡Peligro de explosión!
▷ No poner nunca en servicio un grupo de bomba con protección contra
explosiones fuera del dominio indicado.
Se admite el servicio del grupo de bomba con convertidor de frecuencia en un
dominio de frecuencia de 25 a 50 Hz.
ATENCIÓN
Bombeo de líquidos con sustancias sólidas a revoluciones reducidas
¡Mayor riesgo de desgaste y obstrucción!
▷ No permitir que la velocidad de flujo quede por debajo de los 0,7 m/s en
conductos horizontales y 1,2 m/s en conductos verticales.
ADVERTENCIA
Encendido accidental del grupo de bomba
¡Peligro de lesiones por piezas móviles!
▷ Proteger el grupo de bombas contra encendidos accidentales.
▷ Sólo se pueden realizar trabajos en el grupo de bomba si las conexiones
eléctricas están desconectadas.
ADVERTENCIA
Líquidos de bombeo calientes o peligrosos para la salud
¡Riesgo de lesiones!
▷ Seguir las normas legales.
▷ Al evacuar el líquido de bombeo hay que respetar las medidas de protección
para las personas y el medio ambiente.
▷ Las bombas que hayan funcionado con líquidos peligrosos para la salud han de
ser descontaminadas.
38 de 80 Amarex KRT
6 Puesta en marcha/ Puesta fuera de servicio
ATENCIÓN
Peligro de congelación
¡Daño del grupo de bomba!
▷ En caso de peligro de congelación, retirar el grupo de bomba del líquido de
bombeo, limpiarlo, conservarlo y almacenarlo.
ADVERTENCIA
No hay dispositivos de protección
¡Riesgo de lesiones por piezas móviles o vertido del líquido de bombeo!
▷ Inmediatamente después de concluir el trabajo se han de reinstalar y activar
todos los dispositivos de seguridad y protección.
INDICACIÓN
En el caso de bombas/grupos de bomba de más de 5 años, recomendamos sustituir los
elastómeros.
Amarex KRT 39 de 80
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
PELIGRO
Formación de chispas durante las labores de mantenimiento
¡Peligro de explosión!
▷ Las labores de mantenimiento de los grupos de bomba con protección contra
explosiones deben llevarse a cabo fuera de las zonas con peligro de explosión.
ADVERTENCIA
Encendido accidental del grupo de bomba
¡Peligro de lesiones por piezas móviles!
▷ Proteger el grupo de bombas contra encendidos accidentales.
▷ Sólo se pueden realizar trabajos en el grupo de bomba si las conexiones
eléctricas están desconectadas.
ADVERTENCIA
Líquidos de bombeo calientes o peligrosos para la salud
¡Riesgo de lesiones!
▷ Seguir las normas legales.
▷ Al evacuar el líquido de bombeo hay que respetar las medidas de protección
para las personas y el medio ambiente.
▷ Las bombas que hayan funcionado con líquidos peligrosos para la salud han de
ser descontaminadas.
ADVERTENCIA
Superficie caliente
¡Riesgo de lesiones!
▷ Dejar enfriar el grupo de bomba hasta que alcance la temperatura ambiente.
ADVERTENCIA
Elevación o movimiento inadecuados de grupos constructivos o piezas pesadas
¡Daños personales y materiales!
▷ Al mover grupos constructivos o piezas pesadas, utilizar medios de transporte,
aparatos de elevación y medios de suspensión adecuados.
INDICACIÓN
La reparación de las bombas protegidas contra explosiones está sujeta a normas
específicas. Las modificaciones o cambios en los grupos de bomba pueden perjudicar a
la protección contra explosiones, por ello sólo se podrán realizar tras ser acordados con
el fabricante.
Un plan de mantenimiento evita el elevado gasto en mantenimiento y las caras
tareas de reparación. Al mismo tiempo se consigue un funcionamiento fiable de la
bomba o del grupo de bomba.
40 de 80 Amarex KRT
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
INDICACIÓN
El servicio técnico de KSB está a disposición del cliente para todas las labores de
mantenimiento, puesta a punto y montaje. Para obtener las direcciones de contacto,
consulte la sección: "Direcciones" o la dirección de Internet "www.ksb.com/contact".
Evitar cualquier empleo de fuerza al montar o desmontar el grupo de bomba.
7.2 Mantenimiento/Inspección
KSB recomienda el mantenimiento regular del grupo de bomba según el plan
siguiente:
Tabla 15: Vista general de las medidas de mantenimiento
Intervalo de mantenimiento Medidas de mantenimiento véase además ...
tras 4.000 horas de servicio7) Medición de la resistencia de aislamiento (⇨ Capitúlo 7.2.1.3 Página
42)
Comprobación de los cables eléctricos (⇨ Capitúlo 7.2.1.2 Página
41)
Comprobación visual de la cadena/cuerda de (⇨ Capitúlo 7.2.1.1 Página
izado 41)
tras 10.000 horas de servicio8) Comprobación de los sensores (⇨ Capitúlo 7.2.1.4 Página
42)
Comprobación de fugas del cierre mecánico (⇨ Capitúlo 7.2.1.5 Página
43)
Cambio de líquido lubricante (⇨ Capitúlo 7.2.2.1.4 Página
45)
Lubricación de los cojinetes (⇨ Capitúlo 7.2.2.2.3 Página
46)
cada cinco años Repaso general
Amarex KRT 41 de 80
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
PELIGRO
Conductor de protección defectuoso
¡Electrocución!
▷ No poner nunca en servicio el grupo de bomba con un conductor de protección
defectuoso.
INDICACIÓN
Si el estado de aislamiento de uno de los cables eléctricos no alcanza 1 MΩ, significará
que este está dañado y debe renovarse.
INDICACIÓN
Unos valores de aislamiento de motor demasiado bajos indican un defecto en el
aislamiento del bobinado. En este caso, no volver a poner en servicio el grupo de
bomba.
42 de 80 Amarex KRT
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
Sensor de fugas del motor Tabla 17: Medición de estado del sensor de fugas del motor
Medición entre las conexiones ... Valor de estado
9 y conductor de protección (PE) > 60 kΩ
7.2.1.5 Comprobación de fugas del cierre mecánico (sólo en grupos de bomba con
cojinetes reforzados)
ADVERTENCIA
Líquidos de bombeo calientes o peligrosos para la salud
¡Peligro de daños personales o al medioambiente!
▷ Se deben recoger y eliminar el líquido de enjuague y los posibles restos de
líquido.
▷ En caso necesario, utilice ropa y máscara de protección.
▷ Se deben cumplir las disposiciones legales relativas a la eliminación de líquidos
peligrosos para la salud.
INDICACIÓN
Es inevitable un pequeño desgaste del cierre mecánico, desgaste que generan los
componentes abrasivos del líquido de bombeo.
INDICACIÓN
Si se obtienen más de 0,25 litros de líquido de fuga es recomendable sustituir los cierres
mecánicos.
7.2.2.1.1 Intervalos
El líquido lubricante deberá sustituirse tras 10.000 horas de servicio o como mínimo
cada 3 años. (⇨ Capitúlo 7.2 Página 41)
Amarex KRT 43 de 80
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
La cámara del colector se llena en fábrica con un líquido lubricante respetuoso con el
medio ambiente, no tóxico, de calidad médica (siempre que el cliente no lo solicite de
otro modo).
Para la lubricación de los cierres mecánicos pueden utilizarse los siguientes líquidos
lubricantes:
Calidad recomendada del ▪ Aceite de parafina fluido; Fabricante: Merck, Nº: 7174
líquido lubricante ▪ Aceite blanco Merkur Pharma 40; Fabricante: DEA
Alternativa ▪ Compuesto similar de calidad médica, no tóxico
▪ Mezcla de agua y glicol
▪ Todos los aceites de motor aleados y no aleados de las clases SAE 10W a SAE 20W
ADVERTENCIA
Suciedad del líquido de bombeo causada por el líquido lubricante
¡Peligro de daños personales y medioambientales!
▷ Sólo está permitido el llenado con aceite de máquinas si se ha previsto un
achique.
44 de 80 Amarex KRT
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
ADVERTENCIA
Líquidos lubricantes calientes o peligrosos para la salud
¡Peligro de daños personales o al medioambiente!
▷ Para la evacuación del líquido lubricante deben respetarse las medidas de
protección para las personas y el medio ambiente.
▷ Se deben cumplir las disposiciones legales relativas a la eliminación de líquidos
peligrosos para la salud.
ADVERTENCIA
Sobrepresión en el depósito de líquido lubricante
¡Al abrir el depósito de líquido lubricante puede salpicar líquido a la temperatura de
servicio!
▷ Abrir con cuidado el tornillo de apriete del depósito de líquido lubricante.
Vaciado del líquido 1. Situar el grupo de bomba tal y como se muestra en la figura.
lubricante
903
411.03
903.03
903.03 411.03
411.03
En el caso de un grupo de bomba con cojinetes reforzados (⇨ Capitúlo 4.4 Página 17)
los rodamientos del lado de la bomba pueden engrasarse de nuevo y se deben
engrasar en los intervalos de mantenimiento correspondientes.
Amarex KRT 45 de 80
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
7.2.2.2.3 Reengrase
Grupos de bomba con Una boquilla de engrase encapsulada hermética posibilita un reengrase del
cojinetes reforzados (⇨ rodamiento de bolas de contacto angular desde el exterior.
Capitúlo 4.4 Página 17)
PELIGRO
Marcha en seco
¡Peligro de explosión!
▷ El reengrase de un grupo de bomba con protección contra explosiones debe
llevarse a cabo fuera de las zonas con peligro de explosión.
ADVERTENCIA
Manos o cuerpos extraños en la carcasa de la bomba
¡Lesiones, daño de la bomba!
▷ No se deben introducir las manos u otros objetos en la bomba.
▷ Buscar cuerpos extraños en el interior de la bomba.
ATENCIÓN
Reengrase incompleto
¡Daño en los cojinetes!
▷ Realizar el reengrase únicamente con el grupo de bomba en marcha.
ATENCIÓN
Marcha en seco del grupo de bomba
¡Fuertes vibraciones!
¡Daño de los cierres mecánicos y los cojinetes!
▷ El grupo de bomba no debe dejarse encendido fuera del líquido de bombeo
durante más de 60 segundos.
3. Encender el grupo de bomba.
4. Llenar de grasa a través de la boquilla de engrase 636.02.
5. Desembornar la conexión eléctrica del grupo de bomba y protegerla contra un
encendido accidental.
6. Atornillar de nuevo el tornillo de cierre 903.46 con junta anular 411.46.
46 de 80 Amarex KRT
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
7.3 Vaciado/Evacuación
ADVERTENCIA
Líquidos de bombeo calientes o peligrosos para la salud
¡Peligro de daños personales o al medioambiente!
▷ Se deben recoger y eliminar el líquido de enjuague y los posibles restos de
líquido.
▷ En caso necesario, utilice ropa y máscara de protección.
▷ Se deben cumplir las disposiciones legales relativas a la eliminación de líquidos
peligrosos para la salud.
ADVERTENCIA
Trabajos en la bomba o en el grupo de bomba ejecutados por personal no cualificado
¡Riesgo de lesiones!
▷ Las labores de reparación y mantenimiento sólo pueden ser realizadas por
personal especializado.
ADVERTENCIA
Superficie caliente
¡Riesgo de lesiones!
▷ Dejar enfriar el grupo de bomba hasta que alcance la temperatura ambiente.
PELIGRO
Trabajos en la bomba o en el grupo de bomba sin suficiente preparación previa
¡Riesgo de lesiones!
▷ Apagar el grupo de bomba según las indicaciones.
▷ Cerrar los sistemas de bloqueo de los conductos de aspiración e impulsión.
▷ Vaciar y despresurizar la bomba.
▷ Cerrar cualquier conexión auxiliar existente.
▷ Dejar enfriar el grupo de bomba hasta que alcance la temperatura ambiente.
ADVERTENCIA
Piezas cortantes
Peligro de lesión por corte.
▷ Las tareas de montaje y desmontaje se deben realizar siempre con el cuidado
necesario.
▷ Llevar guantes de trabajo.
Amarex KRT 47 de 80
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
230 914.10
550.23
Ilustración 22:
Desmontaje del rodete
INDICACIÓN
El tornillo de desmontaje no se incluye en el equipo de suministro. KSB lo pone a su
disposición por separado.
48 de 80 Amarex KRT
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
7.4.3.2.2 Extracción del rodete con asiento fijo cilíndrico con chaveta
940.01 1. Destornillar el tornillo cilíndrico 914.10 y la cubierta del rodete 260.
914.10 2. Retirar el rodete con un dispositivo especial de montaje y desmontaje. (⇨
Capitúlo 7.4.3.2.2.1 Página 49)
260
3. Retirar la chaveta 940.01.
Ilustración 23: Asiento fijo
cilíndrico
Amarex KRT 49 de 80
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
INDICACIÓN
Los motores de los grupos de bomba con protección contra explosiones son del tipo de
protección antideflagrante "Envolvente antideflagrante". Todas las labores que puedan
influir en la protección contra explosiones, como el rebobinado y las puestas a punto con
mecanizado, requieren la aceptación de un experto autorizado o deben ser llevadas a
cabo por el fabricante. El diseño interno del motor debe permanecer sin modificación
alguna. La reparación en los espacios protegidos contra la inflamación sólo podrá
realizarse de acuerdo con las premisas constructivas del fabricante. No está permitida la
reparación sujeta a los valores de las tablas 1 y 2 de la norma EN 60079-1.
Durante el desmontaje de la pieza del motor, así como de los cables eléctricos,
deberá asegurarse de que se marcan correctamente las identificaciones de los hilos
conductores y los bornes para su posterior montaje.
INDICACIÓN
Antes del nuevo montaje de la pieza del motor deberá controlarse que ninguno de los
espacios relevantes para la protección contra explosiones está dañado. Deberán
sustituirse las piezas con espacios dañados. Consultar la ubicación de los espacios de
protección contra explosiones en el anexo "Espacios de protección contra explosiones".
50 de 80 Amarex KRT
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
Amarex KRT 51 de 80
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
230 914.10
550.23
Ilustración 28: Montaje
del rodete
52 de 80 Amarex KRT
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
1. Presionar el anillo partido 502 con un martillo de goma hasta que haga tope en
la carcasa de la bomba 101.
2. Introducir la unidad modular completa en la carcasa de la bomba.
Amarex KRT 53 de 80
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
ATENCIÓN
Desplazamiento axial del rotor
¡Daño en el cierre del eje y los cojinetes!
▷ Colocar y comprobar la holgura axial únicamente en posición vertical.
4. Presionar el anillo partido 502 con un martillo de goma hasta que quede junto al
rodete 230.
5. Suspender el grupo de bomba en sentido vertical como muestra la figura.
502
904.01 101
914.12
0,4
+0
,2
m
412.34
m
914.24
101
135 412.33 230
Ilustración 33: Montaje de la placa de desgaste
1. Colocar en la placa de desgaste 135 dos nuevas juntas tóricas 412.33 y 412.34.
2. Introducir la placa de desgaste 135 en la carcasa de la bomba 101.
54 de 80 Amarex KRT
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
INDICACIÓN
Antes del nuevo montaje de la pieza del motor deberá controlarse que ninguno de los
espacios relevantes para la protección contra explosiones está dañado. Deberán
sustituirse las piezas con espacios dañados. Para las bombas con protección contra
explosiones sólo podrán utilizarse piezas originales de KSB. Consultar la ubicación de
los espacios de protección contra explosiones en el anexo "Espacios de protección
contra explosiones". Todas las uniones atornilladas que cierran el espacio con
envolvente antideflagrante, deben dotarse además de un bloqueo de tornillos (Loctite
tipo 243).
PELIGRO
Uso de tornillos incorrectos
¡Peligro de explosión!
▷ Para el montaje de un grupo de bomba con protección contra explosiones
solamente se deben utilizar tornillos originales.
▷ No utilizar nunca tornillos con dimensiones diferentes o con una clase de
resistencia inferior.
P
0,5 bar
Amarex KRT 55 de 80
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
56 de 80 Amarex KRT
7 Mantenimiento/Puesta a punto
7.7.2 Repuestos recomendados para dos años de servicio según DIN 24296
Tabla 26: Cantidad de piezas de repuesto recomendada9)
Número de Denominación de la Cantidad de grupos de bomba (incluidos los de reserva)
pieza pieza 2 3 4 5 6y7 8y9 10 y más
80-1 Pieza del motor - - - 1 1 2 30 %
834 Tendido del cableado 1 1 2 2 2 3 40 %
818 Rotor - - - 1 1 2 30 %
230 Rodete 1 1 1 2 2 3 30 %
502 Anillo partido 2 2 2 3 3 4 50 %
433.01 Cierre mecánico lado del 2 3 4 5 6 7 90 %
motor
433.02 Cierre mecánico lado de 2 3 4 5 6 7 90 %
la bomba
321.01 / 322 Rodamiento lado del 1 1 2 2 3 4 50 %
motor
320 / 321.02 Rodamiento lado de la 1 1 2 2 3 4 50 %
bomba
99-9 Conjunto de juntas del 4 6 8 8 9 10 100 %
motor
99-9 Conjunto de juntas del 4 6 8 8 9 10 100 %
sistema hidráulico
Amarex KRT 57 de 80
8 Fallos: Causas y formas de subsanarlos
58 de 80 Amarex KRT
9 Documentación adicional
9 Documentación adicional
* si existe
*1) Esquemas de montaje del cierre mecánico
*2) para el tipo de material C1/C2
Dimensiones del sistema
hidráulico
40-250
80-250/251
80-315/316
100-240/250
100-251
100-315/316
150-251
150-315
200-315/316
Tamaños de motor
5 2, 6 2, 8 2, 12 2, 17 2,
22 2, 25 2, 23 2,
4 4, 5 4, 7 4, 11 4, 16 4,
19 4, 21 4, 23 4, 29 4,
4 6, 6 6, 9 6, 12 6, 15 6,
19 6
Amarex KRT 59 de 80
9 Documentación adicional
Tabla 28: Detalles de la representación de conjunto con el tipo de motor DKN 132/160/161/181 con asiento cónico
Asignación Detalles
Tendido del
cableado
834 V
81-54
914.04
412.07
cojinetes
superiores
Tamaños de motor
5 2, 6 2, 8 2,
4 4, 5 4, 7 4,
4 6, 6 6
cojinetes
superiores
Tamaños de motor
22 2, 25 2,
19 4, 21 4,
15 6, 19 6
cojinetes
superiores
Tamaños de motor
12 2, 17 2, 23 2,
11 4, 16 4, 23 4,
29 4,
9 6, 12 6
Forma del rodete
D 550.23 163
914.10 230
135 101
412.34 412.33
914.12 914.24
60 de 80 Amarex KRT
9 Documentación adicional
Asignación Detalles
Forma del rodete E
Amarex KRT 61 de 80
9 Documentación adicional
62 de 80 Amarex KRT
9 Documentación adicional
Representación de conjunto con el tipo de motor DKN 226, 2 polos (forma del rodete D)
Amarex KRT 63 de 80
9 Documentación adicional
Tabla 29: Detalles de la representación de conjunto con el tipo de motor DKN 226, 2 polos
Asignación Detalles
Depósito de lubricante/
Cámara de fugas
Sensor de temperatura de
los cojinetes
* opcional
64 de 80 Amarex KRT
9 Documentación adicional
* si existe
*1) Esquemas de montaje del cierre mecánico
*2) para el tipo de material C1/C2
Dimensiones del sistema
hidráulico
100-400/401
150/151-400/401
200-330
200-400/401
250-400/401
300-400/401
Tamaños de motor
23 4, 29 4
20 6, 26 6
10 8, 17 8, 21 8
Representación de conjunto del grupo de bomba con tipo de motor DKN 161/181 con
asiento fijo cilíndrico (forma del rodete K/E)
Amarex KRT 65 de 80
9 Documentación adicional
Tabla 30: Detalles de la representación de conjunto del grupo de bomba con tipo de motor DKN 161/181 con
asiento fijo cilíndrico
Asignación Detalles
Forma del rodete F
834 V
81-54
914.04
412.07
66 de 80 Amarex KRT
9 Documentación adicional
* si existe
*1) Esquemas de montaje del cierre mecánico
*2) para el tipo de material C1/C2
Dimensiones del sistema
hidráulico
100-400/401
150/151-400/401
200-330
200-400/401
250-400/401
300-400/401
Tamaños de motor
35 4, 50 4, 65 4
32 6, 40 6, 50 6
26 8, 35 8
Representación de conjunto del grupo de bomba con tipo de motor DKN 226 (forma del
rodete K/E)
Amarex KRT 67 de 80
9 Documentación adicional
Tabla 31: Detalles de la representación de conjunto del grupo de bomba con tipo de motor DKN 226
Asignación Detalles
Tendidos del cableado
68 de 80 Amarex KRT
9 Documentación adicional
Representación de conjunto del grupo de bomba con el tipo de motor DKN 226, 4, 6, 8
polos (forma del rodete D)
Amarex KRT 69 de 80
9 Documentación adicional
Tabla 32: Detalles de la representación de conjunto del grupo de bomba con el tipo de motor DKN 226, 4, 6, 8
polos
Asignación Detalles
Tendido del cableado
Depósito de lubricante/Cámara
de fugas
70 de 80 Amarex KRT
9 Documentación adicional
Amarex KRT 71 de 80
9 Documentación adicional
Y-
Y-
(21)
(22)
(10)
(11)
W1
W2
U1
U2
V1
V2
(3)
(4)
(9)
PE
PE
W1
W2
U1
U2
V1
V2
Y Y
L1 L2 L3
W1
W2
U1
U2
V1
V2
(11)
PE
(21)
(22)
(10)
W1
W2
U1
U2
V1
V2
(3)
PE
(4)
PE
(9)
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 PE
21
22
10
11
9
W2
W1
U1
U2
V1
V2
(21)
(22)
(10)
(11)
W2
W1
U1
U2
V1
V2
(3)
(4)
(9)
PE
PE
12 x ... mm2
7 x ... +5 x 1,5 mm2
W1
W2
U1
U2
V1
V2
PE
21
22
PE
PE
10
U1 V1 W1 W2 U2 V2 21 22 11 9 PE
11
3
4
9
(1) (1)
(2) (2)
(3) (3)
(6) (6)
(4) (4)
(5) (5)
(7) (1)
(8) (2)
(9) (3)
(10) (4)
(11) (5)
(10)
(11)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1)
12
4 12 4
21 22 3 4 11 10 9
F4 * R1
U1 V1 W1 21 22 10 11 9 B3
F5 R2 B2
F4 R1 R3
B2
U2 V2 W2 R2
U1 V1 W1
F5
R3
U2 V2 W2
3~ 3~
0W366474-00
0W380161-00
* sólo con cojinetes reforzados (⇨ Capitúlo 4.4 Página
17)
72 de 80 Amarex KRT
9 Documentación adicional
2
3
1
3
4 2
Amarex KRT 73 de 80
9 Documentación adicional
433.02
A
OW 309130-05
OW 309131-05
74 de 80 Amarex KRT
9 Documentación adicional
550.44
433.02 Cierre mecánico (cierre
mecánico con suspensión
cubierta - HJ)
433.02
Amarex KRT 75 de 80
10 Declaración de conformidad CE
10 Declaración de conformidad CE
Amarex KRT
▪ cumple las disposiciones de las siguientes normativas en la versión aplicable en cada caso:
– Bomba/grupo de bomba: Directiva 2006/42/CE "Máquinas"
...........................................................
Nombre
Función
KSB Aktiengesellschaft
Johann-Klein-Straße 9
67227 Frankenthal (Alemania)
76 de 80 Amarex KRT
11 Certificado de descontaminatión
11 Certificado de descontaminatión
Tipo ................................................................................................................................
Número de pedido/
Número de pedido10) ................................................................................................................................
⃞ ⃞ ⃞ ⃞
radioactivo explosivo cáustico venenoso
⃞ ⃞ ⃞ ⃞
perjudicial para la salud peligro biológico fácilmente inflamable inocuo
Indicaciones: ................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
La bomba y los componentes han sido vaciados antes del envío y se ha limpiado su interior y exterior.
En el caso de las bombas sin cierre del eje, se ha retirado el rotor de la bomba para efectuar la limpieza.
...............................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................
Garantizamos por la presente que los datos indicados son correctos e íntegros y que el envío cumple con la normativa legal
vigente.
Amarex KRT 77 de 80
Índice de referencias
Índice de referencias
A M
Almacenamiento 14, 39 Máquinas incompletas 6
Medición de la resistencia de aislamiento 41
Medidas de mantenimiento 41
C Mínimo nivel de líquido 37
Cargas de bridas autorizadas 24 Modos operativos 18
Certificado de conformidad 77 Montaje 47
Cierre mecánico 41, 74
Compatibilidad electromagnética 30
Condiciones de uso 8 N
Conexión eléctrica 33 Nueva puesta en marcha 39
Conservación 14 Número de pedido 6
Control de nivel 29
P
D Pares de apriete de los tornillos 56
Denominación 16 Planos de conexión 72
Descripción del producto 16 Protección contra explosiones 12, 20, 21, 29, 30, 31, 33,
Desmontaje 47 36, 37, 38, 40, 46, 55
Devolución 14 Puesta en marcha 35
Dispositivo de protección contra sobrecargas 29 Puesta fuera de servicio 39
Documentos correspondientes 7
R
E Representación de conjunto 59
Eliminación 15 Repuestos 57
Encendido 35 Resistencia a interferencias 30
Engrase
Calidad de la grasa 45
Cantidad de grasa 46 S
Intervalos 41 Seguridad 8
Equipo suministrado 18 Seguridad en el trabajo 10
Espacios de protección contra explosiones 73 Sensores 30
Sentido de giro 22
Servicio con convertidor de frecuencia 30, 38
F Supervisión de fugas 31
Fallos 58 Supervisión de la temperatura 31
Fugas del cierre mecánico 32 Supervisión de la temperatura de los cojinetes 32
H T
Holguras 54 Tensión de servicio 38
Tuberías 24
I
Instalación U
Instalación transportable 28 Uso pertinente 8
Usos incorrectos 10
L
Líquido lubricante
Calidad 44
Cantidad 44
Intervalos 41
Lugar de instalación 20
78 de 80 Amarex KRT
2553.86/4-30
KSB Aktiengesellschaft
P.O. Box 200743 • 06008 Halle (Saale) • Turmstraße 92 • 06110 Halle (Germany)
Tel. +49 345 4826-0 • Fax +49 345 4826-4699
www.ksb.com
POS.S1081/1/2/9
Bulletin HY11-3293/UK
POS.1000 y 1010
Gear Pumps/Motors
Series PGP/PGM 500
Express Delivery Program
Bulletin HY11-3293/UK
Note
This document and other information from Parker Hannifin
GmbH, its subsidiaries, sales offices and authorized
distributors provide product or system options for further
investigation by users having technical expertise. Before you
select or use any product or system it is important that you
analyse all aspects of your application and review the
information concerning the product or system in the current
product catalogue. Due to the variety of operating conditions
and applications for these products or systems, the user,
through his own analysis and testing, is solely responsible
for making the final selection of the products and systems
and assuring that all performance and safety requirements
of the application are met. The products are subject to
change by Parker Hannifin GmbH at any time without notice.
1)
PG 503 B 1 B 1
Gear Type Unit Dis- Rotation Shaft Flange Shaft Inlet Outlet No Rear Ports
Design place- Seal Side Ports (rear ports on request)
ment Option
Code Shaft
Dimensions
1)
PG 505 B 1 B 1
Gear Type Unit Dis- Rotation Shaft Flange Shaft Inlet Outlet No Rear Ports
Design place- Seal Side Ports (rear ports on request)
ment Option
Code Shaft
2) 9T, 16/32DP, 32L, SAE "A"
A1
spline
2) Ø12.7, 3.2key, no thread, 38L,
J1
parallel
Ø15.88, 4.0key, no thread,
K1 3)
32L, SAE "A", parallel
Bold letters =
Ø14.25, 5.5L, 3.0key, M10x1,
Express delivery
within 5 work days
Q2 4)
taper 1:8
2) 1) Code of drain line for PGM505 only.
Only used with flange H1, H2.
3) Only used with flange H2. 2 Options:
4) Only used with flange D2. G4 = 1/4-19 BSP rear drain
B1 = no drain, product type must be “B“ or “C“.
Dimensions
0040 4.0 37.2 43.8 76.4 J7 20.0 40.0 M6 J5 15.0 35.0 M6 500 4000 275 331 9111 039 331 9112 061
0060 6.0 39.8 49.1 81.7 J7 20.0 40.0 M6 J5 15.0 35.0 M6 500 3600 275 331 9111 040 331 9112 077
0080 8.0 42.5 54.5 87.1 J7 20.0 40.0 M6 J5 15.0 35.0 M6 500 3000 275 331 9111 041 331 9112 078
0100 10.0 45.2 59.8 92.4 J7 20.0 40.0 M6 J5 15.0 35.0 M6 500 2800 250 331 9111 087 331 9112 033
0120 12.0 47.9 65.2 97.8 J7 20.0 40.0 M6 J5 15.0 35.0 M6 500 2400 220 331 9111 246 331 9112 135
Dimensions
1)
PG 511 B 1 B 1
Gear Type Unit Dis- Rotation Shaft Flange Shaft Inlet Outlet No Rear Ports
Design place- Seal Side Ports (rear ports on request)
ment Option
Code Type
P Pump Code Port Options (Pumps)
M Motor E5E3 3/4 - 14 BSP thread/
1/2 - 14 BSP thread
only from 4ccm to 11ccm
Unit Code Shaft Seal
Code E6E5 1-11 BSP thread/
Pump Motor X No seal 3/4-14 BSP thread
Standard motor N NBR only from 14ccm to 23ccm
A Single unit
w/o checks E7E5 1 1/4-11 BSP thread/
Single 3/4-14 BSP thread
M distributor — only from 27ccm to 33ccm
unit
J7J5 20mm-Ø40mm-M6 square flange
B Multiple unit Standard motor 15mm-Ø35mm-M6 square flange
w. two checks only from 4ccm to 11ccm
Standard motor J9J8 26mm-Ø55mm-M8 square flange
C — w. one anti- 18mm-Ø55mm-M8 square flange
cavitation check only from 14ccm to 33ccm
(ACC) L1L1 13mm-Ø30mm-M6 diamond flange
13mm-Ø30mm-M6 diamond flange
Displacement only from 4ccm to 8ccm
Code ccm L2L1 19mm-Ø40mm-M8 diamond flange
0040 4.0 13mm-Ø30mm-M6 diamond flange
0060 6.0 only from 10ccm to 16ccm
0080 8.0 L2L2 19mm-Ø40mm-M8 diamond flange
0100 10.0 19mm-Ø40mm-M8 diamond flange
0110 11.0 only from 19ccm to 33ccm
0140 14.0
Code Port Options (Motors)
0160 16.0
0190 19.0 E3E3 1/2 - 14 BSP thread/
0230 23.0 1/2 - 14 BSP thread
0270 27.0 only from 4ccm to 11ccm
0310 31.0 E5E5 3/4 - 14 BSP thread/
0330 33.0 3/4 - 14 BSP thread
only from 14ccm to 33ccm
Code Rotation J5J5 15mm-Ø35mm-M6 square flange
C Clockwise 15mm-Ø35mm-M6 square flange
Counter- only from 4ccm to 16ccm
A clockwise J7J7 20mm-Ø40mm-M6 square flange
B Bi-directional 20mm-Ø40mm-M6 square flange
only from 19ccm to 33ccm
Code Shaft Example: L2 = inlet port
2)
L1 = outlet port
A1 9T, 16/32DP, 32L, SAE "A" spline
C1 3) 11T, 16/32DP, 38.2L, SAE 19-4 spline Code Flange
F1 4) 9T, B17x14, 23L, DIN 5482 spline 6)
D3 71.4x96.0 - Ø36.47 rectangular
2)
Ø15.88, 4.0key, no thread, 32L,
K1 D4 7) 72.0x100.0 - Ø80 rectangular
SAE "A", parallel
H2 6) 106.4 - Ø82.55 SAE "A"
2)
Ø19.05, 4.8key, no thread, 32L,
L6 2bolt flange
SAE 19-1, parallel Bold letters =
S1 4)
Ø17.0, 7.7L, 3.0key, M12x1.5, taper 1:5 H3 146.1 - Ø101.06 SAE "B"
Express delivery 2bolt flange
Ø16.65, 12.0L, 3.2key, M12x1.5,
S2 5)
taper 1:8
within 5 work days Q2 60.0x60.0 - Ø50.0 w. seal O',
thrubolt flange
5)
Ø16.65, 12.0L, 4.0key, M12x1.5,
S4 Q4 60.0x60.0 - Ø50.0 w. seal O',
taper 1:8
2) 1)
thrubolt flange
Only used with flange H2. Code of drain line for PGM511 only.
3) Only used with flange H2, H3. 2 Options: 6) Only used with ports L*L*.
4) Only used with flange D4, Q2, Q4. G4 = 1/4-19 BSP rear drain 7) Only used with ports J*J*.
5) Only used with flange D3. B1 = no drain, product type must be
Bulletin HY11-3293/ UK.PM7.0 CM
“B“ or “C“.
Dimensions
Dimensions
Dimensions
1)
PG 517 B 1 B 1
Gear Type Unit Dis- Rotation Shaft Flange Shaft Inlet Outlet No Rear Ports
Design place- Seal Side Ports (rear ports on request)
ment Option
Dimensions
Dimensions
511 A 0110 X L2 L1 B1 B1
1)
further B possible for triple units
This coding system can be used for all pumps series 500.
Hydraulics Group
Sales Offices
Europe International
Austria Italy Australia
Wiener Neustadt Corsico (MI) Castle Hill
Tel: +43 (0)2622 23501 Tel: +39 02 45 19 21 Tel: +61 (0)2-9634 7777
Fax: +43 (0)2622 66212 Fax: +39 02 4 47 93 40 Fax: +61 (0)2-9899 6184
Parker Hannifin is the world’s premier supplier of motion and control systems
and solutions, with sales and manufacturing facilities throughout the world. For
product information and details of your nearest Parker sales office, visit us at
www.parker.com or call free on 00800 2727 5374.
Capacity:
Pilot operated, balanced piston relief valve 50 gpm (200 L/min.)
Product Description
Pilot-operated, balanced-piston relief cartridges are normally closed pressure regulating valves. When the pressure at the
inlet (port 1) reaches the valve setting, the valve starts to open to tank (port 2), throttling flow to regulate the pressure.
These valves are accurate, have low pressure rise vs. flow, they are smooth and quiet, and are moderately fast.
Download
Technical Features
All 2-port relief cartridges (except pilot reliefs) are physically and Back pressure on the tank port (port 2) is directly additive to the valve
functionally interchangeable (same flow path, same cavity for a given setting at a 1:1 ratio.
frame size).
Will accept maximum pressure at port 2; suitable for use in cross port Corrosion resistant cartridge valves are intended for use in corrosive
relief circuits. If used in cross port relief circuits, consider spool leakage. environments and are identified by the model code suffix /AP (see
Option Selection below). External parts are made from stainless steel
with titanium or brass components, where applicable. Internal parts are
made from carbon steel leaded alloy, the same as standard valves. For
further details, please see the Materials of Construction page.
Main stage orifice is protected by a 150 micron stainless steel screen. Incorporates the Sun floating style construction to minimize the
possibility of internal parts binding due to excessive installation torque
and/or cavity/cartridge machining variations.
Not suitable for use in load holding applications due to spool leakage.
Technical Data
U.S. Units Metric Units
Cavity T-3A
Capacity 50 gpm 200 L/min.
Factory Pressure Settings Established at 4 gpm 15 L/min.
Maximum Operating Pressure 5000 psi 350 bar
Maximum Valve Leakage at 110 SUS (24 cSt) 3 in³/min.@1000 psi 50 cc/min.@70 bar
Response Time - Typical 10 ms
Series (from Cavity) Series 2
Adjustment - Number of Clockwise Turns to Increase Setting 5
Valve Hex Size 1 1/8 in. 28,6 mm
Valve Installation Torque 45 - 50 lbf ft 60 - 70 Nm
Adjustment Screw Internal Hex Size 5/32 in. 4 mm
Adjustment Locknut/Cap Hex Size 9/16 in. 15 mm
Adjustment Nut Torque 80 - 90 lbf in. 9 - 10 Nm
Seal Kits - Cartridge Buna: 990-203-007
Seal Kits - Cartridge Viton: 990-203-006
Model Weight 0.57 lb. 0.26 kg.
RPGC-LAN
Material/Coating
Control Adjustment Range Seal Material
Modifier
L Standard Screw Adjustment A 100 - 3000 psi (7 - 210 bar), N Buna-N /AP Stainless Steel,
1000 psi (70 bar) Standard Passivated
Setting
Control:L
Related Models
RPGC8
Related Documents (opens in new window):
Explanation of Sun cartridge control options - US units.
Explanation of Sun cartridge control options - metric units.
Two-piece, floating cartridge construction.
BK3/SK3-Standardkugelhähne sind an der abgesperrten Seite nur dann dicht, wenn der Druck auf der abgesperrten Seite
gleich null ist oder wenn der Druck in den miteinander verbundenen Leitungen größer ist als in der abgesperrten Seite.
Der mittlere Anschluß ist nicht absperrbar!
Auf Wunsch ist eine allseits Druckbeaufschlagung (PN1=PN2) möglich. Hierfür bei Bestellung A angeben.
The sealing function of BK3/SK3-standard valves is only given when the pressure standing on the closed port is zero or if the
pressure between the connected ports is higher than the pressure on the closed port.
No shut-off position for third port possible!
To apply pressure from all ports (PN1=PN2), a special variant is required. Add A to the order code.
L-Bohrung 0°-90° L-Bohrung, pos. Überdeckung 0°-90°-180° T-Bohrung 0°-90° T-Bohrung 0°-90°-180°
L-bore L-bore, positive overlap T-bore T-bore
Best-Nr./order-code: L Best-Nr./order-code: P Best-Nr./order-code: T Best-Nr./order-code: T180°
DN G** L NPT L X
mm Zoll für/for für/for für/for
Zoll NPT NPT
DN Ermeto L X Ermeto L X
mm L für/for für/for S für/for für/for
Ermeto L Ermeto L Ermeto S Ermeto S
02 NPT-Innengewinde 4 5 1
/8-27NPT – BK3 1/8 NPT 04 4423 BK3 1/8 NPT 04 4445
ANSI B 2.1 6 6 1/ -18NPT – BK3 1/4 NPT 06 4423 BK3 1/4 NPT 06 4445
4
NPT female thread 10 9 3/ -18NPT – BK3 3/8 NPT 10 4423 BK3 3/8 NPT 10 4445
8
ANSI B 2.1 13 11,5 1/ -14NPT – BK3 1/2 NPT 13 4423 BK3 1/2 NPT 13 4445
2
3
20 18 /4-14NPT – BK3 3/4 NPT 20 4423 BK3 3/4 NPT 20 4445
25 22 1 -11,5 NPT – BK3 1 NPT 25 4423 BK3 1 NPT 25 4445
32 22 11/4-11,5 NPT – BK3 11/4 NPT 25 4423 BK3 11/4 NPT 25 4445
40 22 11/2-11,5 NPT – BK3 11/2 NPT 25 4423 BK3 11/2 NPT 25 4445
32 30 11/4-11,5 NPT – BK3 11/4 NPT 32 4423 BK3 11/4 NPT 32 4445
40 35 11/2-11,5 NPT – BK3 11/2 NPT 32 4423 BK3 11/2 NPT 40 4445
50 44 2 -11,5 NPT – BK3 2 NPT 50 4423 BK3 2 NPT 50 4445
MPF MPF series filters are designed for return lines, and
are installed semi-immersed in a reservoir.
Continued Research & Development on both the fil-
ter bodies and the filter elements has resulted in a
MPF filters within this range are suitable for flow
rates up to 750 l/min.
INDICATOR ELECTRICAL
OPTIONS
VISUAL
COMBINED
SCREW-WASHER
New
COVER
absolute filter elements
independently tested REMOVAL HANDLE
in the following Institutes:
FULLY RESPONSIVE
BYPASS VALVE
PRESSURE ALUMINIUM
DIE CAST
È
FILTER ELEMENT
LENGTH OPTIONS
TANK FLANGE
O-RING
HIGH EFFICIENCY
ELEMENT WITH HIGH
DIRT HOLDING CAPACITY
NYLON BOWL
È
CAPTIVE
OPTIONAL O-RING SEAL
EXTENSION
UNI EN ISO 9001
N° 037/98
TUBE
Filter element:
A Series
Inorganic microfibre MP Filter elements - Conform to the following
ISO standards
External support media ISO 2941 - Verification of collapse/burst resistance.
ISO 2942 - Verification of fabrication integrity and determination
of the first bubble point.
ISO 2943 - Verification of material compatibility with fluids.
ISO 3723 - Method for end load test.
ISO 3724 - Verification of flow fatigue characteristics.
Inner support
External wire mesh tube
ISO 3968 - Evaluation of pressure drop versus flow characteristics.
Internal wire mesh ISO 4572 - Multi-pass method for evaluating filtration performance.
Microfibre filtration media
Internal support media
Element material
Absolute filtration
A Series Contamination retention
Inorganic microfibre with acrilic support as per ISO 4572: Multi-pass test.
Filtering area Type MF 030-1 100-1 100-2 100-3 180-1 180-2 400-1 400-2 400-3 750-1
Filter elements A03/A06 335 630 1000 1730 4300 7500 4740 6930 8760 11400
H - ∆P 10 bar A10/A25 335 630 1000 1730 4300 7500 4740 6930 8760 11400
Values in cm2
Element material
Nominal filtration P Series M Series
Resin - impregnated paper Square wire mesh (filtration degree is defined
in microns by the maximum diameter of a
sphere corresponding to the mesh size)
Type MF 030-1 100-1 100-2 100-3 180-1 180-2 400-1 400-2 400-3 750-1
Filtering area P10/P25 410 1020 1660 1900 4000 8000 4480 6550 8280 13450
Filter elements M25 290 460 730 1250 2000 4500 2410 3520 4450 7250
N - ∆P 3 bar M60 290 460 730 1250 2000 4500 2000 3000 3840 6250
M90 290 460 730 1250 2000 4500 2000 3000 3840 5500
Values in cm2
3
MP Filtri - Specification
Filter body:
Materials
Head Seals
Pressure die cast aluminium A Series: Nitrile (Buna-N)
V Series: Viton
Cover
MPF 030-100 Nylon Bypass valve
MPF 180-750 Aluminium Nylon
Bowl Indicator
Nylon - Steel (MPF 180-2/184-2 only) Brass
Working
temperature From -25 to +110°C
For temperatures outside this range, please
consult our Sales Network Organization
Pressure filter
body Maximum working pressure up to 3 bar Fatigue test: a filter body subjected to
Test pressure: 5 bar pressure impulses from 0 to 3 bar will
Minimum burst pressure: 10 bar withstand 1.000.000 cycles
Collapse pressure
filter elements N Series 3 bar
H Series 10 bar
Bypass valve
Calibration pressure Bypass valve, differential opening pressure: B: 1.75 bar ± 10%
Compatibility
with fluids Filter head and bowls Filter elements
compatible for use with: As per ISO 2943; suitable for mineral oils
• mineral oils (types HH-HL-HM-HR-HV-HG as per ISO 6743/4)
(types HH-HL-HM-HR-HV-HG as per ISO 6743/4) synthetic fluids (A and M series only)
• water-based emulsions (types HS-HFDR-HFDS-HFDU as per ISO 6743/4)
(types HFAE-HFAS as per ISO 6743/4)
• synthetic fluids For water-based emulsions (types HFAE-HFAS
(types HS-HFDR-HFDS-HFDU as per ISO 6743/4) as per ISO 6743/4) and fluids other than
• water-glycol those mentioned, please consult our Sales
(types HFC as per ISO 6743/4) Network Organization.
Ask for anodized version
Seals
A Series water - glycol
Nitrile (Buna-N) compatible with mineral oils (types HFC as per ISO 6743/4)
(types HH-HL-HM-HR-HV-HG as per ISO 6743/4)
water - based emulsions V Series
Viton compatible with synthetic fluids
(types HFAE-HFAS as per ISO 6743/4) (types HS-HFDR-HFDS-HFDU as per ISO 6743/4)
Types of indicators
Description:
MPF series filters are fitted with
indicators switching at a pressure of 1.3 bar ± 10%
Visual indicator
V1 Series (botton connection) Colour coded pressure gauge
VR Series (rear connection) (MPF 184, only) scale 0÷6 bar
Electrical indicator
ER Series: Operational information:
Pressure switch with N.O. contacts Max voltage: 48 Vac 50÷60 Hz
EC Series: Max current: 0.5 A resistive, 0.2 A inductive.
Pressure switch with N.C. contacts
4
Selection
& installation information
51
V1 ER - EC MPF SERIES 030 SIZE
31
56
ø 40
Pg7 MPF 030 Filter Flow rate Bowl Port size
Weight
8
l/min
22
assembly length kg
A/F.24 BSP/NPT/SAE
*
56
**
43
ø66
26
90
ø25 A25 35
7
Ø 60 0,40 ø6
P10 33
INDICATOR PORT
0,30 1/2” No. 2 Holes M6 ** Flow rates with 30 mm /s fluid viscosity
2
ø7
** Weight including filter element
∆p bar
0,20
Thread Type A
connections
ø90
G4 1/2” NPT
0,00
R10 G7 SAE 8 - 3/4” - 16 UNF
0 25 50 75 100 125
Flow rate l/min
67.5 ø 40 l/min
Pg7 assembly length kg
BSP/NPT/SAE
A/F.24 * **
56
43
A03 28
75
26
A/F.14
28
A25 75
3/4”
H
9 P10 55
ø8
A03 35
24
A25 170 1”
A
5
Selection
& installation information
Please refer to individual pressure drop cur ves to obtain filter assembly pressure drop information
The following filter sizing recommendations are based using a mineral oil fluid at 30 mm 2/s (cSt) with a maximum total filter assembly
(housing and filter element) pressure drop of 30% of the filter condition indicator (0.4 bar)
96
31
ø 40
Pg7
MPF 180 Filter Flow rate Bowl
l/min Port size Length Weight
kg
89
H
35
A/F.24 * **
56
43
26
A03 100
A/F.14
ø129 1/8” BSP 1/8” BSP A06 120
ø 30
A10 150 1 1 1/4” 231 2,2
H
A25 300
P10 190
32
A03 210
ø40.5
Holes on the tank A06 270
ø110
No. 3 Holes M10 A10 320 2 1 1/4” 450 3,6
120° A25 360
30
°
120
15 °
R9.5
120°
ø10.7
Thread Type A
INDICATOR PORT connections G1 1 1/4” BSP
G4 1 1/4” NPT
G7 SAE 20 - 1 5/8” - 12 UN
INDICATOR
PORT 86 86 ER - EC MPF SERIES 184 SIZE
250
56
43
A/F.24
Pg 7
MPF 184 Filter Flow rate Bowl
l/min Port size Length Weight
kg
103
1/8” BSP
**
11
43
ø 30
A/F.14 27
H
P10 190
IN IN
1/8” BSP
A03 210
A06 270
32
59
ø 40 34 ø1
ø 40.5 No. 4 Holes M10
A10 320 2 1 1/4” 449 3,9
ø110 A25 360
P10 345
90°
C Dual port option availables - See ordering information
45° Flange port option availables - See ordering information
Port “1” Port “2”
** Flow rates with 30 mm2/s fluid viscosity
** Weight including filter element
B
A
A
D
ø159
connections G1 1 1/4” BSP 1/8” BSP
G2 2 Ports 1 1/4” BSP 1/8” BSP
MPF 180 & 184 G4 1 1/4” NPT 1/8” NPT
Housing pressure drop curve G5 2 Ports 1 1/4” NPT 1/8” NPT
0,40 G7 SAE 20 - 1 5/8” - 12 UN 1/8” NPT
G8 2 Ports SAE 20 - 1 5/8” - 12 UN 1/8” NPT
0,30
Flange connections
∆p bar
1 1/4”
0,20 Type A B C D E
F1 1 1/2” SAE 3000 PSI/M 69,85 35,71 M12 1/8” BSP
0,10 F2 1 1/2” SAE 3000 PSI/UNC 69,85 35,71 1/2” UNC 1/8” NPT
* F3 2 Ports 1 1/2” SAE 3000 PSI/M 69,85 35,71 M12 1/8” BSP
0,00 F4 2 Ports 1 1/2” SAE 3000 PSI/UNC 69,85 35,71 1/2” UNC 1/8” NPT
0 75 150 225 300 375
Flow rate l/min
6
Selection
& installation information
Please refer to individual pressure drop cur ves to obtain filter assembly pressure drop information
The following filter sizing recommendations are based using a mineral oil fluid at 30 mm 2/s (cSt) with a maximum total filter assembly
(housing and filter element) pressure drop of 30% of the filter condition indicator (0.4 bar)
ø 40
Filter Flow rate Bowl Weight
Pg7
l/min Port size kg
assembly length BSP/NPT/SAE
A/F.24 *
56
**
98.5
43
26
30°
A IN 1 1/2”
P10 280
44
0
ø 22 A03 170
C
øB
A06 200 1 1/2”
D
146 B
No. 4 Holes M10
A10 260 2 3,5
ø220
4 holes ø11.5 Housing pressure drop curves A25 450
2”
R10 1 1/4” 1 1/2” P10 320
0,40
30°
A03 220
0,30 2” A06 270
A
90°
0,20
A25 500
**
43
26
14
A
IN
P10 440
0
ø 22
430
B
No. 4 Holes M10
connections G1 2” BSP
ø64 0,40
G4 2” NPT
INDICATOR PORT ø220 0,30 2” G7 SAE 32 - 2 1/2” - 12 UN
4 holes ø11.5
∆p bar
General
Pressure drop versus flow rate curve information for both housing and filter elements is in accordance with ISO 3968
Housing pressure drop - The housing pressure drop is proportional to the fluid density
Filter element pressure drop - Filter element pressure drop is proportional to kinematic viscosity therefore always check the
fluid operating temperature and fluid type to obtain the working viscosity according to the following formula:
Selection :
•Housing pressure drop - MPF 180 - 184 with 160 l/min ∆p = 0.06 bar (see curve on page 6)
•Filter element pressure drop (brochure viscosity) - MF 180.1.A25HB with 160 l/min ∆p = 0.13 bar (see curve on page 9)
•Filter element pressure drop (working viscosity) - With 68 mm /s (cSt) ∆p1 = 0.13 x ( 68/30 ) = 0.30 bar
2
•Filter assembly pressure drop ∆p Total = ∆p Housing + ∆p1 Filter element = 0.06 + 0,30 = 0,36 bar* { Acceptable pressure drop value,
as per our recommendations
∆p bar
2,0 2,0
1,0 1,0
0,0 0,0
0 15 30 45 60 75 90 0 25 50 75 100 125 150
Flow rate l/min Flow rate l/min
3,0 3,0
∆p bar
∆p bar
2,0 2,0
1,0 1,0
0,0 0,0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Flow rate l/min Flow rate l/min
8
MF 030 - 1 P...N
1,00
Filter elements - N - ∆P 3bar 0,75
P10
∆p bar
The curves were obtained using a mineral oil with a kinematic viscosity of 30 mm2/s (cSt). 0,50
The ∆p varies proportionally to the fluid kinematic viscosity. For the metal mesh filter elements
0,25 P25
curves (M series), please consult our
Sales and Network Organization 0,00
0 15 30 45 60 75 90
Flow rate l/min
MF 100 - 1 P...N MF 100 - 2 P...N MF 100 - 3 P...N
1,00 1,00 1,00
P10
0,75 0,75 0,75
P10
∆p bar
∆p bar
∆p bar
∆p bar
∆p bar
P10
0,50 0,50 0,50
P10
0,25 P25 0,25 0,25 P25
P25
0,00 0,00 0,00
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 0 75 150 225 300 375 450 0 75 150 225 300 375 450
Flow rate l/min Flow rate l/min Flow rate l/min
MF 400 - 2 P...N MF 400 - 3 P...N MF 750 - 1 P...N
1,00 1,00 1,00
∆p bar
∆p bar
P10
0,50 0,50 0,50
MF 030 - 1 A...H
Filter elements - H - ∆P 10bar 1,00
A03 A06 A10 A25
0,75
The curves were obtained using a mineral oil with a kinematic viscosity of 30 mm2 /s (cSt).
The ∆p varies proportionally to the fluid kinematic viscosity. 0,50
0,25
0,00
0 15 30 45 60 75 90
Flow rate l/min
MF 100 - 1 A...H MF 100 - 2 A...H MF 100 - 3 A...H
1,00 1,00 1,00
A03 A06 A10 A03 A06 A10 A03 A06
A25 A10
0,75 0,75 0,75
∆p bar
∆p bar
∆p bar
∆p bar
∆p bar
0,00
* 0,00
A25
0,00
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 0 75 150 225 300 375 450 0 75 150 225 300 375 450
Flow rate l/min Flow rate l/min Flow rate l/min
∆p bar
∆p bar
Extension tube:
Ordering code and length
CODE LENGTH
XX “H” in mm.
NOTES:
10 100
– When extension tube is ordered, indicator must
11 110 be ordered separately
12 120 – Extension tube lengths have variable sizes
… … multiple of 10 mm.
99 990
Example: length H = 300 mm. Visual indicator.
Filter code: MPF 100 1 - AG1 A10HB/30 – Indicator code: V1
Ordering code:
(See page 11) T5
Example: MPF 030 1 A H1 A10 HB/T5
MPF 750 1 A K1 A10 HB/T5
Applications
Example of application
10
Or dering infor mation
MPF
Bowl lengths
MPF 030 = 1
MPF 100 = 1,2,3
MPF 180-184 = 1,2
MPF 400 = 1,2,3 Bypass valve
MPF 750 = 1
B Bypass 1.75 bar
Seals
A Nitrile (Buna-N)
V Viton
G1 1/2” BSP 1/2” BSP 1 1/4” BSP 1 1/4” BSP 1 1/4” BSP 2” BSP
2 Ports
G2 – 3/4” BSP – 1 1/2” BSP –
1 1/4” BSP
G3 – 1” BSP – – 2” BSP –
Collapse pressure series
G4 1/2” NPT 1/2” NPT 1 1/4” NPT 1 1/4” NPT 1 1/4” NPT 2” NPT
N 3 bar (P/M series)
2 Ports H 10 bar (A series, only)
G5 – 3/4” NPT – 1 1/2” NPT –
1 1/4” NPT
G6 – 1” NPT – – 2” NPT –
2 Ports
G8 – SAE 12 –
SAE 20
SAE 24 – Filter elements N series
P10
P25 Resin-impregnated paper Bx ≥ 2
G9 – SAE 16 – – SAE 32 –
MF
Replacement element
11
Head Quarter :
MP FILTRI S.p.A. Italy
Via Matteotti, 2
20060 Pessano con Bornago (Milano) Italy
Tel. ++39.02/95703.1
Fax ++39.02/95741497-95740188
email: sales@mpfiltri.com
http://www.mpfiltri.com
GREAT BRITAIN
MP FILTRI U.K. Ltd.
Bour ton Industrial Park
Bour ton on the Water
Gloucestershire GL54 2HQ UK
Phone: 01451-822522
Fax: 01451-822282
email: sales@mpfiltri.co.uk
http://www.mpfiltri.co.uk
GERMANY
MP FILTRI D GmbH
Am Wasser turm 5
D-66265 Heusweiler/Holz
Phone: 06806/85022-0
Fax: 06806/85022-18
email: mpfiltrink@aol.com
FRANCE
MP FILTRI FRANCE
B.P. 325
01603 Trevoux Cedex
Tel: 04.74.08.84.78
Telefax: 04.74.08.80.45
email: mpfiltrifrance@wanadoo.fr
USA
MP FILTRI USA Inc.
2055 Quaker Pointe Drive
Quaker town, PA 18951
Phone: 215-529-1300
Fax: 215-529-1902
email: mpusasales@aol.com
http://www.mpfiltriusa.com
CANADA
MP FILTRI CANADA Inc.
210 Jacob Keffer Parkway Concord,
Ontario Canada L4K 4W3
Phone: 905-303-1369
Fax: 905-303-7256
email: mail@mpfiltricanada.com
http://www.mpfiltricanada.com
POS.1085/1/2
High Pressure Filters
18/28/38P Series
MAX 700 I/min - 414 bar
18/28/38P Series
Features & Benefits
Typical Applications
Injection moulding
Die casting
Servo controls
Machine tools
Mobile equipment
Model
A B C D E F G H J K L M N P
(A/F)
198 M8 x 1.25
18P-1 (7.79) 32 26 75 24 98 40 20 80 40 55 110 x12
293 (1.26) (1.02) (2.95) (0.94) (3.86) (1.57) (0.79) (3.15) (1.57) (2.16) (4.33) deep
18P-2 (11.53)
228 M10 x 1.5
28P-1 (8.97) 40 29 93 24 100 120 55 27.5 90 45 62 124 x11
337 (1.57) (1.14) (3.66) (0.94) (3.94) (4.72) (2.16) (1.07) (3.54) (1.77) (2.44) (4.88) deep
28P-2 (13.26)
329 M10 x 1.5
38P-1 (12.95) 44 35 128 36 160 50 25 120 60 81 162 x12
448 (1.73) (1.38) (5.04) (1.42) (6.30) (1.97) (0.98) (4.72) (2.36) (3.19) (6.38) deep
38P-2 (17.64)
A Length 1 A Length 1
Torque
Torque 80-95 Nm
A Length 1 A Length 2 A Length 2
Torque 35-40 Nm (60-70 ft/lbs)
22-27Nm (25-30 ft/lbs)
(15-20 ft/lbs)
A Length 2
D
D
D Hex. E
Hex. E
Hex. E Bowl removal
Bowl removal F Bowl removal
F F
G mm
G H G (inches)
H H
J
J J
5
8
0
R3
R3
R3
18/28/38P Series
Flange Face Details
ØG
Thread E metric
F SAE
B
A
C
D
Model A B C D E F G
mm (inches)
11.9 23.8 25.4 50.8 19.0
18P (3/4”) M10 x 1.5-6H x 18 Deep 3
/8-16 UNC-2B x 18 deep
(0.47) (0.94) (1.00) (2.0) (0.75)
14 27.8 28.0 57.1 25.4
28P (1”) M12 x 1.75-6H x 20 Deep 7
/16-14 UNC-2B x 20 deep
(0.55) (1.09) (1.10) (2.25) (1.0)
15.7 31.7 33.0 66.7 31.8
38P (11/4”) M14 x 2-6H x 20 Deep 1 2 / -13 UNC-2B x 20 deep
(0.62) (1.25) (1.30) (2.62) (1.25)
With 3.5 bar bypass the recommended initial pressure drop is max 1.2 bar.
With 7.0 bar bypass the recommended initial pressure drop is max 2.3 bar.
If the medium used has a viscosity different from 30 cSt, pressure drop over the filter can be estimated as follows:
The total p = housing ph + (element pe x working viscosity/30).
0 5 11 16 21 26 32 37 42 0 5 11 16 21 26 32 37 42
3.5 3.5
3.0 43.5 3.0 43.5
02Q
2.5 2.5
02Q
∆p (PSID)
∆p (PSID)
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
2.0 29.0 2.0 29.0
05Q
1.5 1.5
10Q 05Q
1.0 14.5 1.0 14.5
20Q 10Q
0.5 0.5
20Q
0.0 0 0.0 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Flow (l/min) Flow (l/min)
18P-1 Empty Housing and High Collapse 18P-2 High Collapse Elements
Flow (US GPM) Flow (US GPM)
0 5 11 16 21 26 32 37 42 0 5 11 16 21 26 32 37 42
3.5 3.5
∆p (PSID)
10Q
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
0 13 26 39 53 66 79 0 13 26 39 53 66 79
2.5 2.5
05Q
∆p (PSID)
∆p (PSID)
02Q
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
0.0 0 0.0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 0 50 100 150 200 250 300
Flow (l/min) Flow (l/min)
28P-1 Empty Housing and High Collapse 28P-2 High Collapse Elements
Flow (US GPM) Flow (US GPM)
0 13 26 39 53 66 79 0 13 26 39 53 66 79
∆p (PSID)
20QH
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
1.5 1.5
0.0 0 0.0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 0 50 100 150 200 250 300
Flow (l/min) Flow (l/min)
18/28/38P Series
Pressure Drop Curves (cont.)
∆p (PSID)
∆p (PSID)
02Q
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
2.0 29.0 2.0 29.0
1.5 1.5
10Q 05Q
1.0 14.5 1.0 14.5
20Q 10Q
0.5 0.5
20Q
0.0 0 0.0 0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Flow (l/min) Flow (l/min)
38P-1 Empty Housing and High Collapse 38P-2 High Collapse Elements
Flow (US GPM) Flow (US GPM)
∆p (PSID)
∆p (bar)
∆p (bar)
1.5 1.5
0.0 0 0.0 0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Flow (l/min) Flow (l/min)
Element Service
Ordering Information
18/28/38P Series
Ordering Information (cont.)
Product configurator
Box 1 Box 2 Box 3 Box 4 Box 5 Box 6 Box 7 Box 8
38P 1 10Q B M3 M G20 1
Box 2 Box 3
Filter type Degree of filtration
Length Code Element media Glass fibre
Length 1 1 Media code
Length 2 2 Microglass III element 02Q 05Q 10Q 20Q
High collapse element 02QH 05QH 10QH 20QH
Box 7 Box 8
Filter connection Options
Ports Code Options Code
18P: Thread G 3/4 G12 Standard 1
Thread SAE 12 S12 No bypass 2
Thread M27, ISO 6149 M27
SAE flange 3/4" 6000-M H12
SAE flange 3/4" 6000 F12
28P: Thread G 1 G16
Thread SAE 16 S16
Thread M33, ISO 6149 M33
SAE flange 1" 6000-M H16
SAE flange 1" 6000 F16
38P: Thread G 1 1/4 G20 Nominal flow (I/min) at viscosity 30 cSt
Thread G 1 1/2 G24 Filter model 02Q 05Q 10Q 20Q
Thread SAE 20 S20 18P-1 35 60 80 100
Thread SAE 24 S24 18P-2 70 110 130 150
Thread M42, ISO 6149 M42 28P-1 80 100 120 150
Thread M48, ISO 6149 M48 28P-2 140 200 250 300
SAE flange 1 1/4" 6000-M H20 38P-1 140 220 340 420
SAE flange 1 1/4" 6000 F20 38P-2 320 440 560 700
Degree of filtration
Average filtration beta ratio ß (ISO 16889) / particle size µm [c] Code
ßx(c)=2 ßx(c)=10 ßx(c)=75 ßx(c)=100 ßx(c)=200 ßx(c)=1000
% efficiency, based on the above beta ratio (ßx) Disposable High collapse
50.0% 90.0% 98.7% 99.0% 99.5% 99.9% Microglass III element
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 4.5 02Q 02QH
N/A N/A 4.5 5 6 7 05Q 05QH
N/A 6 8.5 9 10 12 10Q 10QH
6 11 17 18 20 22 20Q 20QH
Note 1: Part numbers featured with bold highlighted codes will ensure a ‘standard’ product selection.
Note 2: Alternate displayed part number selection will require you to contact Parker Filtration for availability.
POS.1089 Y 1091
Gehäusemaße, gültig für alle Kombinationen/Body dimensions valid for all combinations
DN PN L1 B H H1 H2 H4 M SW
mm bar mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
4 500 36 26 43,5 32 8 13 M5 9
6 500 36 26 43,5 32 8 13 M5 9
8 500 36 26 43,5 32 8 13 M5 9
10 500 43 32 49 38 8 16 M5 9
13 500 48 35 51 40 12 17,5 M5 9
16 500 48 38 62 46 12 19 M6 12
20 400 62 49 73 57 12 24,5 M6 14
25 350 66 60 76 60 12 26,5 M6 14
* Die max. zul. PN bitte den Angaben der Rohrverschraubungshersteller entnehmen. / For PN max. see data from the compression fitting manufacturer.
Andere Anschlußarten auf Anfrage. / Other connections on request.
Alle Kugelhähne in DIN-Baulänge lieferbar. / All ball valves also available in DIN-size.
Maßänderungen vorbehalten. / Measurements subject to alteration.
Bestellnummern - Werkstoffkombinationen / Identification numbers - combination of material
02 NPT-Innengewinde 4 5 1/ -27
8 NPT – BKH 1/8 NPT 04 1113 BKH 1/8 NPT 04 1145
ANSI B 2.1 6 6 1/ -18NPT – BKH 1/4 NPT 06 1113 BKH 1/4 NPT 06 1145
4
NPT female thread 10 10 3/ -18NPT – BKH 3/8 NPT 10 1113 BKH 3/8 NPT 10 1145
8
1
ANSI B 2.1 13 13 /2-14NPT – BKH 1/2 NPT 13 1113 BKH 1/2 NPT 13 1145
20 20 3/ -14NPT – BKH 3/4 NPT 20 1113 BKH 3/4 NPT 20 1145
4
25 24 1 -11,5 NPT – BKH 1 NPT 25 1113 BKH 1 NPT 25 1145
32 24 11/4-11,5 NPT – BKH 11/4 NPT 25 1113 BKH 11/4 NPT 25 1145
40 24 11/2-11,5 NPT – BKH 11/2 NPT 25 1113 BKH 11/2 NPT 25 1145
31 UN/UNF-Einschraubgewinde 6 6 7/ -20
16 UNF-2B – BKH 1/4 SAE-port 06 1113 BKH 1/4 SAE-port 06 1145
9
SAE J514Gewinde 10 10 /16-18 UNF-2B – BKH 3/8 SAE-port 10 1113 BKH 3/8 SAE-port 10 1145
ANSI B 1.1 13 13 3/ -16 UNF-2B – BKH 1/2 SAE-port 13 1113 BKH 1/2 SAE-port 13 1145
4
UN/UNF female thread 16 15 7/ -14 UNF-2B – BKH 5/8 SAE-port 16 1113 BKH 5/8 SAE-port 16 1145
8
SAE J514 20 20 1 1/ -12 UN-2B – BKH 3/4 SAE-port 20 1113 BKH 3/4 SAE-port 20 1145
16
Thread ANSI B 1.1 25 24 1 5/ -12 UN-2B – BKH 1 SAE-port 25 1113 BKH 1 SAE-port 25 1145
16
32 24 1 5/ -12 UN-2B – BKH 11/4 SAE-port 25 1113 BKH 11/4 SAE-port 25 1145
8
40 24 1 7/ -12 UN-2B – BKH 11/2 SAE-port 25 1113 BKH 11/2 SAE-port 25 1145
8
VISUAL LEVEL
INDICATORS
LV... LC...
The level indicators series is available for LC... series sight plugs allow visibility of the fluid
both static and mobile applications; the construction contained in the reservoirs, showing the level and also
materials used make it possible to guarantee service with any changes in transparency and emulsion. These indicators
wide temperature variations and compatibility with all are available in three configurations, with transparent
hydraulic fluids. Series LV... level indicators are available with plastic body and with black body, and an aluminum body
fixing centre distance from 76 to 1000 mm. version.
Fixing to reservoirs with unthreaded holes or reduced
thickness can be achieved using series LCC/T equipped with
expansion kit.
3c
3b
Dimensions
7
Reservoir LVA......S LVA......T
holes
5
19
B
4
A
H
A
LVA (Materials)
1 - Cover: Anodised aluminium
19
Ø0
2 - Screws: Phosphated steel Ch. 6
38 (mm) 23.5
3 - Seals: NBR
FPM
4 - Lens: Amorphous transparent Weight
polyamide Size A H (kg)
5 - Nameplate: Painted aluminium
6 - Terminal cap: Nylon LVA10 76 114 0.13
LVA20 127 165 0.18
7 - Nuts: Galvanised steel LVA30 254 292 0.23
B C C
Type
(Pxx - Sxx version) (Rxx version)
Quantity per pack
Number of Parts LVA......M10 M10 10.5 M10
LVA 10 LVA......M12 M12 12.5 M12
LVA......U38 3/8” UNC 10 3/8” UNC
LVA......U12 1/2” UNC 13.5 1/2” UNC
LVA 20
TAM10P01
Ordering information
1 2 3 4 5
LVA
Example: LVA 20 T A M10 S01
1 - Size 4 - Connection
P10 550
SCS 050 A03 515
A10 530
P10 550
SCS 070 A03 515
A10 530
SCS XXX C SCS XXX F
P10 1415
SCS 100 A03 1300
A10 1330
Dimensions
Ø D2 Ø D2
Gasket Ø 42x32x2 Gasket Ø 42x32x2
Ø D3 (60Sh) (60Sh)
(for SCS 100) (for SCS 100)
Riser with
Filter 2 3 4 5 6 7
element
SCS
Example: SCS 050 F G1 A10 A P01
Riser 2 3 4 6 7
only
SCS
Example: SCS 050 F G1 A P01
1 2 5 6 7
Filter
element
Example: CS 050 A10 A P01
F Flange riser
4 - Threaded connection
G 3/4” for SCS 050/070
G1 G 1 1/4” for SCS 100/150
38
POS.1093
POS.1094/1/2
THERMAL
TRANSFER
POS.1160
Öl/Wasser-Wärmetauscher
Für den industriellen Einsatz
Serie
Oil/water heat exchangers EKM
For industrial use
Echangeur thermique huile/eau
A usage industriel
Die Schnittperspektive zeigt Mantel mit dicken La perspective de coupe montre un manteau
Stahlwänden und Hochleistungs-Kühlungskam- aux parois d’acier épaisses, et une chambre à
mer mit Kupfernickelrohr und Aluminiumrippen. refroidissement haute performance avec tuyau
de cuivre et nervures aluminium.
Produktbeschreibung / Product description / Discription du produit
Die EKM-Serie ist eine konsequente Wei- The EKM series is a logical further develop- La série EKM est la poursuite logique du
terentwicklung eines Rohrbündel-Wärme- ment of a tube-bank heat exchanger for a développement d’un échangeur thermique
tauschers für weite Anwendungsgebiete in wide range of industrial applications. à faisceau tubulaire pour des domaines
der Industrie. Durch die zusätzliche Kühl- This range is particularly effective due to d’application multiples dans l’industrie.
fläche ist diese Baureihe äußerst effektiv, the additional cooling area, and offers a Grâce à une surface de refroidissement
mit einer Wärmeleistung bis zu 230 kW. heat exchange performance of 230 kW. supplémentaire, cette série est extrême-
Dies wird durch Aluminiumlamellen, die This is produced by aluminium fins, which ment efficace, avec une puissance calorifi-
über das Rohrbündel geschoben werden are pushed over the bank of tubes with que de jusqu’à 230 kW. Ceci peut être réa-
und metallisch verbunden sind, realisiert. metal-to-metal contact. The EKM range of lisé par l’intermédiaire de lamelles d’alumi-
Die EKM-Wärmetauscher haben eine Kühl- heat exchangers has a cooling surface of nium glissées sur le faisceau tubulaire et
fläche von 0,43 m2 bis 18,41 m2. from 0.43 m2 to 18.41 m2. reliées de manière métallique. Les échan-
Die Serie EKM setzt sich aus 20 Grund- The EKM series is constructed of 20 basic geurs thermiques EKM ont une surface de
einheiten zusammen, die jeweils in eine units, and is available as single, double and refroidissement de 0,43 m 2 à 18,41 m 2.
Einfach-, Zweifach- und Vierfach-Ausführ- four pass versions. La série EKM se compose de 20 unités de
ung unterteilt sind. base, subdivisées, respectivement, en ver-
sion simple, double et 4 voies.
Aluminiumrippen und Kupfernickelroh- Aluminium fins and copper tubes Les nervures aluminium et le tube de
re (Standard) sorgen für maximalen ensure maximum levels of heat cuivre assurent un échange thermique
Wärmeaustausch exchange maximal
Große Ölanschlüsse für minimalen Large-bore oil connections for mini- Raccordements huile de grande
Strömungswiderstand mum flow resistance dimension, pour une résistance mini-
Wärmeabfuhr bis 230 kW Heat dissipation up to 230 kW male au courant
Öl-Durchflußmengen bis zu 330 l/min Oil flow rates of up to 330 l/min Dissipation de chaleur jusqu’à 230 kW
Abnehmbare Endkappen für einfache Removable end caps for easy clea- Débit d’huile jusqu’à 330 l/mn.
Reinigung der Rohre ning of the tubes Caches d’extrémité amovibles, pour
Flansche ermöglichen Drehung des Flanges allow the heat exchanger to un nettoyage aisé des tuyaux
Wärmetauschers um 90° be turned through 90° Des brides permettent une rotation à
Wahlweise mit internem Umgehungs- Optionally available with internal 90° de l’échangeur thermique
rückschlagventil (Patentiert) bypass check valve (patented) Au choix avec clapet antiretour de
Hochwertige Materialien High-quality materials dérivation (breveté)
Max. Druck: Öl 35 bar / Wasser 16 bar Max. pressure: oil 35 bar / water 10 bar Matériaux haute qualité
Vollständiges Zubehörprogramm lie- Full range of accessories available Pression max: huile 35 bar / eau 10 bar
ferbar Delivery ex-stock Programme d’accessoires complet
Lieferung ab Lager disponible
Livraison à partir du magasin de stocks
Option Option
Seewasserfähige Ausführung Sea water version Option
Version de l’eau de mer
Endplatten / End plates / Plaques finales: Stahl / Steel / Acier Stahl* / Steel* / Acier*
Endkappen / End caps / Caches: Grauguß / Cast iron / Fonte grise Grauguß* / Cast iron* / Fonte grise*
Dichtungen / Gaskets / Garnitures d’étanchéité Nitrilkautschuk, Zellulosefasern / Nitril rubber, cellulose fibre / Caoutchouc nitré, fibres de cellulose
* Mit einem speziellen chem. Nickel-Beschichtungsverfahren / Nickel coating treatment / Traité avec un procédure de nickel
Berechnungsbeispiel / Example calculation / Example de calcul
Bei abweichenden Ölaus-, bzw. Wasser- For different oil outlet temperatures, water En cas de divergence au niveau de la tem-
eintrittstemperaturen und Viskositäten, ist inlet temperatures and viscosities, the fol- pérature de sortie de l’huile ou de la tempé-
nach den folgenden Berechnungsbeispie- lowing calculation must be made: rature d’entrée de l’eau et de divergence au
len zu verfahren: niveau de la viscosité, procéder comme le
montrent les exemples de calcul suivants:
1. Der Viskositätskorrekturfaktor errechnet 1. The viscosity correction factor is calcula- 1. Le facteur de viscosité est calculé
sich wie folgt: ted as follows: comme suit:
Temperaturdifferenz ∆T (°C) = Temperature difference ∆T (°C) = Différence de température ∆T (°C) =
AW (kW) x 34,1 AW (kW) x 34,1 AW (kW) x 34,1
= 7,2 = 7,2 = 7,2
Q (l/mn) Q (l/mn) Q (l/mn)
daraus folgt: mittl. Öltemp. (°C) = Average oil temp. therefore (°C) = Il en résulte: temp. moy. huile =
t Öl aus + ∆t + t Öl aus t oil out + ∆t + t oil out t huile sor. + ∆t + t huile sor.
= 49°C = 49°C = 49°C
2 2 2
2. Aus Öl-Herstellerdiagramm ISO 68: 2. From oil manufacturer’s data for ISO 68: 2. D’après le diagramme du fabricant de
Viskosität bei 49°C = 38 cSt Viscosity at 49°C = 38 cSt l’huile ISO 68: Viscosité à 49°C = 38 cSt
3. Aus Viskositätskorrekturtabelle „A“: 3. From viscosity correction table „A“: 3. D’après le tableau de correction de la
38 cSt = 1,11 38 cSt = 1,11 viscosité „A“: 38 cSt = 1,11
Aus Leistungsdiagramm Öl/Wasser 2:1 From oil/water 2:1 performance diagram at Il résulte du diagramme de performance
bei einem Ölstrom von 80 l/min und an oil flow of 80 l/min and 23.6 kW, we huile/eau 2:1, à un débit d’huile de 80 l/mn
23,6 kW ergibt sich: thus arrive at: et 23,6 kW:
Kühler Nr. 31 = EKM - 714 - T - CN Cooler n° 31 = EKM - 714 - T - CN Refroidisseur n° 31 = EKM - 714- T - CN
Viskositäts Korrekturkurve Faktor A Die dargestellten Leistungskurven basie- Les courbes de performance représentées
Viscosity correction factor A
Courbe de correction de la viscosité Facteur A ren auf einer Wassereintrittstemperatur sont basées sur une température d’entrée
von 25°C und einer Ölaustrittstemperatur de l’eau de 25°C et sur une température
Korrekturfaktor / Correction factor / Facteur de correction
2,0
1,9 2
1,8
von 50°C, sowie einer Ölviskosität von de sortie de l’huile de 50°C, ainsi que sur
1,7
1,6
20,6 cSt. une viscosité de l’huile de 20,6 cSt.
1,5 Für abweichende Viskositäten kann aus En cas de viscosité divergente, le facteu
1,4 1
1,3
untenstehender Kurve der Korrekturfaktor de correction „A“ peut être déterminé à
1,2
1,1
„A“ abgelesen werden. l’aide de la courbe ci-dessous.
1,0
0,9
0,8
The performance data shown is based on
0,7
0,6
a water inlet temperature of 25°C and an
0,5 oil outlet temperature of 50°C, together
0,4
0,3
with an oil viscosity of 20.6 cSt.
0,2
0,1
For different viscosities, the correction
1 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
factor „A“ can be read off from the perfor-
2 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
cSt
mance curve below.
Kennlinien / Performance Data / Courbes caractéristiques
200
150 40
39
Kühlleistung kW / Cooling performance kW / Puissance de refroidissement en kW
100
90 38
80
37
70
36
60
50 35
40
30
25
siehe Rechenbeispiel 34 30
20 see example calculation
voie example de calcul
33 29
15
32
10 31
9
8
6 28
5 27
4
26
25
3
2,5 24
23
2
22
1,5
21
Die Kennlinien in diesem Diagramm sind vom Durchfluß begrenzt und können in Abstimmung mit dem Hersteller überschritten werden.
The performance Data shown in the diagram are limited by the flow rate, and may be exceeded after consultation with the manufacturer.
Les courbes caractéristiques de ce diagramme sont limitées par le débit et peuvent être dépassées après accord avec le fabricant.
2 EKM-508-O 12 EKM-718-O
Kühlleistung kW / Cooling performance kW / Puissance de refroidissement en kW
19
150
3 EKM-510-O 13 EKM-724-O
18
4 EKM-512-O 14 EKM-736-O
100 17
90
14
16 5 EKM-514-O 15 EKM-1012-O
80
70
6 EKM-518-O 16 EKM-1014-O
60 15
50
13 7 EKM-524-O 17 EKM-1018-O
12
40 8 EKM-536-O 18 EKM-1024-O
11
9 EKM-708-O 19 EKM-1036-O
30
25 10 10 EKM-712-O 20 EKM-1048-O
20 9
15
8
7
10
9
8
6
7
41 47 EKM-1012-F
200 EKM-708-F
Kühlleistung kW / Cooling performance kW / Puissance de refroidissement en kW
42 48 EKM-1014-F
EKM-712-F
150
43 49 EKM-1018-F
52 EKM-714-F
51 50
100 44 EKM-718-F EKM-1024-F
90
50 45 51 EKM-1036-F
80 EKM-724-F
70 49
46 52 EKM-1048-F
60 EKM-736-F
48
50
40 47
30
25
20
46
42
15
45
44
10 43
9
8
B - Gekühltes Medium
EKM-700&1000 EKM-500 G D E - Cooled Medium
S G - Médium refroidi
R
Q C - Kühlwasser „Ein“
C F D - Cooling water inlet
A - Eau de refroidissement On
T T M T
D - Kühlwasser „Aus“
- Cooling water outlet
L C
L - Eau de refroidissement Off
I I B H B
mm / BSPP C E Q R U G L I mm / BSPP C E Q R U G L I
EKM-505-O 187 66 - G 3/4“ - 83 63,5 89 EKM-714-O 435 103 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ - 103 76 127
EKM-508-O 263 82 - G 3/4“ - 83 63,5 89 EKM-718-O 537 103 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ - 103 76 127
EKM-510-O 314 82 - G 3/4“ - 83 63,5 89 EKM-724-O 689 103 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ - 103 76 127
EKM-512-O 365 82 - G 3/4“ - 83 63,5 89 EKM-736-O 994 103 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ - 103 76 127
EKM-514-O 416 82 - G 3/4“ - 83 63,5 89 EKM-1012-O 389 116 G 1/4“ G 1 1/2“ - 116 102 165
EKM-518-O 517 82 - G 3/4“ - 83 63,5 89 EKM-1014-O 440 116 G 1/4“ G 1 1/2“ - 116 102 165
EKM-524-O 670 82 - G 3/4“ - 83 63,5 89 EKM-1018-O 541 116 G 1/4“ G 1 1/2“ - 116 102 165
EKM-536-O 975 82 - G 3/4“ - 83 63,5 89 EKM-1024-O 694 116 G 1/4“ G 1 1/2“ - 116 102 165
EKM-708-O 283 103 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ - 103 76 127 EKM-1036-O 999 116 G 1/4“ G 1 1/2“ - 116 102 165
EKM-712-O 385 103 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ - 103 76 127 EKM-1048-O 1303 116 G 1/4“ G 1 1/2“ - 116 102 165
mm / BSPP C E Q R U G L I mm / BSPP C E Q R U G L I
EKM-505-T 187 66 - G 3/8“ 28 85 63,5 89 EKM-714-T 411 91 - G 1“ 41 95 76 127
EKM-508-T 265 83 - G 3/8“ 28 85 63,5 89 EKM-718-T 513 91 - G 1“ 41 95 76 127
EKM-510-T 314 83 - G 3/8“ 28 85 63,5 89 EKM-724-T 665 91 - G 1“ 41 95 76 127
EKM-512-T 365 83 - G 3/8“ 28 85 63,5 89 EKM-736-T 995 91 - G 1“ 41 95 76 127
EKM-514-T 416 83 - G 3/8“ 28 85 63,5 89 EKM-1012-T 369 113 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ 60 110 102 165
EKM-518-T 517 83 - G 3/8“ 28 85 63,5 89 EKM-1014-T 420 113 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ 60 110 102 165
EKM-524-T 672 83 - G 3/8“ 28 85 63,5 89 EKM-1018-T 522 113 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ 60 110 102 165
EKM-536-T 976 83 - G 3/8“ 28 85 63,5 89 EKM-1024-T 674 113 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ 60 110 102 165
EKM-708-T 258 91 - G 1“ 41 95 76 127 EKM-1036-T 979 113 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ 60 110 102 165
EKM-712-T 360 91 - G 1“ 41 95 76 127 EKM-1048-T 1284 113 G 1/4“ G 1 1/4“ 60 110 102 165
4 Weg Typ: „F“ / 4 pass type „F“ / 4 voies type „F“
A - Zu kühlendes Medium
Y - Medium to be cooled
B A
- Médium à refroidir
X
B - Gekühltes Medium
R G - Cooled Medium
U D E - Médium refroidi
C - Kühlwasser „Ein“
W - Cooling water inlet
Q A M
- Eau de refroidissement On
T D - Kühlwasser „Aus“
C - Cooling water outlet
- Eau de refroidissement Off
L C
I
mm / BSPP C E Q R U G L I W mm / BSPP C E Q R U G L I W
EKM-708-F 262 107 G 1/4“ G 1/2“ 44 95 75 127 18 EKM-1012-F 363 112 G 1/4“ G 3/4“ 64 110 101 165 18
EKM-712-F 364 107 G 1/4“ G 1/2“ 44 95 75 127 18 EKM-1014-F 413 112 G 1/4“ G 3/4“ 64 110 101 165 18
EKM-714-F 415 107 G 1/4“ G 1/2“ 44 95 75 127 18 EKM-1018-F 515 112 G 1/4“ G 3/4“ 64 110 101 165 18
EKM-718-F 516 107 G 1/4“ G 1/2“ 44 95 75 127 18 EKM-1024-F 667 112 G 1/4“ G 3/4“ 64 110 101 165 18
EKM-724-F 669 107 G 1/4“ G 1/2“ 44 95 75 127 18 EKM-1036-F 972 112 G 1/4“ G 3/4“ 64 110 101 165 18
EKM-736-F 974 107 G 1/4“ G 1/2“ 44 95 75 127 18 EKM-1048-F 1277 112 G 1/4“ G 3/4“ 64 110 101 165 18
EKM-1012 128 20 157 92 392 ∅ 11 x 25 G 11/2“ 102 42,9 77,7 4,38 15,40
EKM-1014 128 20 207 92 443 ∅ 11 x 25 G 11/2“ 102 42,9 77,7 5,17 16,90
EKM-1018 128 20 309 92 544 ∅ 11 x 25 G 11/2“ 102 42,9 77,7 6,73 19,80
EKM-1024 128 20 461 92 697 ∅ 11 x 25 G 11/2“ 102 42,9 77,7 9,06 21,80
EKM-1036 128 20 766 92 1002 ∅ 11 x 25 G 11/2“ 102 42,9 77,7 13,74 30,50
EKM-1048 128 20 1071 92 1306 ∅ 11 x 25 G 11/2“ 102 42,9 77,7 18,41 39,80
EKM - 1014 - O - R - CN - 01
Anschlußtyp Serie
Connection type
CN = Kupfer/Nickel / Copper/nickel / Cuivre/nickel
Type de raccordement
SW = Seewasser / Seawater / eau de mer
NPT = -
SAE = S
BSPF = M Bypass-Ventil / Bypass valve / Soupape by-pass
SAE Flansch / SAE flange = FM
Kühlwasserführung
Cooling water connection system
Raccordement eau de refroidissement
Baugröße O = 1- Weg / 1-pass / 1-voie
Unit size T = 2- Weg / 2-pass / 2-voies
Taille F = 4- Weg, nur Serie 700 und 1000
4-pass, 700 and 1000 series only
4-voies, seulement serié 700 et 1000
Achtung: Unsachgemäßer Einbau kann Caution: Incorrect installation can lead to Attention: Un montage erroné peut en-
zur Beschädigung des Kühlers führen. damage to the cooler. traîner un endommagement du refroidis-
seur.
EKM - 500 75 45 22 -
* Schweiz, Italien, Frankreich * Werden von Deutschland bearbeitet / Treated from Germany / Traités par l’Allemagne
POS.1165
Especificaciones técnicas
Modelo AVTA
Indice Página
Introducción ................................................................................................................................. 3
Datos técnicos ............................................................................................................................. 3
Instalación .................................................................................................................................. 12
Instalación del sensor ................................................................................................................ 12
Repuestos y accesorios ............................................................................................................ 13
Tamaño ...................................................................................................................................... 14
Diagramas ................................................................................................................................. 15
Modelo AVTA
Cuerpo de la válvula con orificio, cono de cierre y Elemento termostático sellado herméticamente
elementos sellantes. con sensor, fuelle y carga.
Modelo AVTA
Aplicación AVTA
para fluido neutros
Las válvulas para agua refrigerante AVTA con
funcionamiento independiente se utilizan
asiduamente para regular la temperatura de
un gran número de diferentes máquinas e
instalaciones donde se requiera refrigeración.
AVTA siempre se abre para admitir caudal a la
temperatura ascendente del sensor. La válvula
se puede instalar bien en la línea del caudal
del agua de refrigeración o en la de retorno.
Aplicaciones comunes:
• Máquinas de moldeo por inyección
• Compresores
• Bombas de vacío
• Máquinas de limpieza en seco
• Planta de destilación
• Máquinas de impresión
• Sistemas hidráulicos
• Rodillos/molinos
AVTA con conexión NPT, póngase en
contacto con Danfoss para la hoja de datos
norteamericana.
A: Carga de adsorción
B: Carga de masa
C: Carga universal
Modelo AVTA
Pedidos: La carga está constituida de carbón activo y • Se puede instalar en cualquier posición en
AVTA con carga de CO2 que se adsorbe a la temperatura lo que se refiere a orientación y temperatura
adsorción descendente del sensor y produce cambios • Soporta hasta una temperatura de sensor
de presión en el elemento. de +130°C
• Dimensiones reducidas del sensor - ∅ 9,5
Características especiales × 160 mm
• Amplio rango de regulación • Máx. presión del sensor 25 bar
Rango de Longitud
Conexión regulación Valor kv tubo capilar Modelo Código 1)
(m3/h a ∆p = 1 bar)
[m]
G 3/8 1,4 AVTA 10 003N1144
G 1/2 1,9 AVTA 15 003N0107
+10 → +80°C 2,3
G 3/4 3,4 AVTA 20 003N0108
G1 5,5 AVTA 25 003N0109
1)
El código incluye la válvula completa junto con la empaquetadura del tubo capilar.
Sensores de inmersión, véase “Repuestos y accesorios”, en la página 13.
Modelo AVTA
Características especiales
• Dimensiones reducidas del sensor - ∅ 9,5
× 190 mm
• Constante de tiempo corta
• El sensor debe estar más caliente que la
válvula durante su instalación
• Máx. presión del sensor 25 bar
Rango de regulación 0 → +30°C
Máx. temperatura del sensor +57°C
Valor kv Longitud del tubo capilar 1)
Conexión Modelo Código
(m3/h a ∆p = 1 bar) [m]
G 1/2 1,9 AVTA 15 003N0042
2
G 3/4 3,4 AVTA 20 003N0043
1)
El código incluye la válvula completa junto con la empaquetadura del tubo capilar.
Dimensiones y pesos
AVTA
Modelo H1 H2 L L1 a b Peso
Modelo AVTA
Modelo AVTA
Modelo AVTA
Dimensiones
AVTA DZR
Modelo H1 H2 L1 L2 L3 b
(estándar) Con. roscada Con. soldadura ISO 228/1
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
AVTA 15 217 133 75 141 149 G 3/4 A
AVTA 20 217 133 80 152 164 G1A
AVTA 25 227 138 83 167 167 G 11/4 A
Modelo AVTA
Aplicación AVTA SS
para fluidos agresivos
Un cuerpo de la válvula de acero inoxidable
significa que la válvula se puede utilizar con
fluidos agresivos en aplicaciones del sector
naval y de industria química.
Estadio de presión PN 16; máx. +130°C
Para fluidos extremadamente agresivos, se
puede suministrar una válvula de titanio
(póngase en contacto con Danfoss).
Las válvulas AVTA SS disponen de una carga
de adsorción como estándar.
AVTA SS también está disponible con carga
de masa o carga universal (póngase en
contacto con Danfoss).
Modelo AVTA
Dimensiones
AVTA SS
Modelo H1 H2 L a
[mm] [mm] [mm] ISO 228/1
AVTA 15 240 133 72 G½
AVTA 20 240 133 90 G 3/4
AVTA 25 250 138 95 G1
Modelo AVTA
Tubo capilar
Instale el tubo capilar sin que aparezcan
ángulos agudos. Alivie el tubo capilar en la
parte final. Es importante realizar el alivio
donde pueda darse vibración.
Nota
Cuando se utiliza AVTA, el sensor debe poder
reaccionar a las variaciones de temperatura
del agua refrigerante al comienzo del sistema.
Conviene utilizar una línea de desvío con una
válvula de cierre para asegurar que el caudal
llegue al sensor durante el arranque.
Instalación del sensor Si se instala un sensor de inmersión, se Instale siempre una válvula AVTA con un
recomienda el uso de compuestos sensor pequeño (∅ 9.5 × 190 mm) en la línea
termoconductivos. Esto reducirá el tiempo de del caudal donde el líquido regulado es más
reacción. Ver “Repuestos y accesorios”, frio (“sensor más caliente”).
página 13.
Carga de adsorción Carga de masa Carga universal
Modelo AVTA
Accesorios
Descripción Descripción Código
Latón para sensor ∅ 18 G 3/4 003N0050
Sensor de inmersión
máx. presión 25 bar Latón para sensor 003N0051
∅ 18 mm 3/4 - 14 NPT
L = 220 mm
18/8 acero1) para sensor ∅ 18 G 3/4 003N0192
Sensor de inmersión Latón para sensor ∅ 9,5 G /2 1 017-4367
máx. presión 25 bar
L = 182 mm 18/8 acero1) para sensor ∅ 9,5 G 1/2 003N0196
Modelo AVTA
Ejemplo
Seleccionar una válvula de agua de
refrigeración para regular la temperatura de
una bomba de vacío.
Datos proporcionados:
- Refrigeración necesaria con carga
completa 10 kW.
- Temperatura del aceite para ser mantenida Fig. 4
constante a +45°C
- p1 agua de refrigeración = 3 bar
- p3 de salida = 0 bar can que una válvula con carga de adsorción
- t1 temperatura de agua de refrigeración = es la elección correcta.
+20°C El rango de tempertura +10 → +80°C está en
- t2 temperatura de salida = +30°C orden.
Modelo AVTA
Tamaño
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Calentamiento o refrigeración con agua. Relación entre la cantidad de agua y la caída de presión en la válvula.
Ejemplo: Salida de refrigeración necesaria 10 Ejemplo: Caudal de 0,85 m³/h con una caída de presión de 1,5 bar.
kW, con ∆t = 10 °C. El valor kv se convierte en 0,7 m³/h.
Caudal necesario 0,85 m³/h.
bar
Caída de presión en la
válvula
Fig. 3
El nomograma muestra los
rangos kv de la válvula. Los
valores kv siempre se indi-
can en m³/h para el caudal
de agua con una caída de
presión Dp de 1 bar. La
válvula se debe seleccionar m3/h
Capacidad con la válvula completamente
de manera que el valor kv
abierta
esté en medio del rango de
regulación.
Ejemplo: AVTA 10 y 15 son Fig. 4
las más adecuadas para un Cantidad de caudal de la válvula en posición
valor kv de 0,7. completamente abierta, como función de la caída
de presión Dp.
Modelo AVTA
POS.2106/1../6 Y 2107/1../6
Features
• Three types of metering needle design can be selected
when ordering FM2 and FM3 valves to achieve the
throttle characteristics required to suit the applica-
tion.
• Large bypass check valves allow high flow at low pres- 7
sure drop.
• Sizes:
NG06 / CETOP 3 FM2
NG10 / CETOP 5 FM3
NG16 / CETOP 7 FM4
NG25 / CETOP 8 FM6
Technical data
Series FM2 FM3 FM4 FM6
Size NG06 NG10 NG16 NG25
Mounting pattern NFPA D03 NFPA D05 NFPA D07 NFPA D08
CETOP 03 CETOP 05 CETOP07 CETOP 08
Max. operating pressure [bar] 350 350 350 210
Max. flow 53 LPM 76 LPM 200 LPM 341 LPM
Opening pressure [bar] 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Meter-in throttle • • • —
Meter-out throttle • • • •
Mounting position unrestricted unrestricted unrestricted unrestricted
Ambient temperature [°C] max. +50 max. +50 max. +50 max. +50
Fluid temperature [°C] max. +70 max. +70 max. +70 max. +70
Weight [kg] 1.3 2.4 5.4 7.9
FM_UK.INDD RH_21.11.07
FM DD V
Code Needle
Standard
omit
conical
Fine,
cylindrical
D
Hollow bored
with V notch
A two-stage needle provides fine adjustment in the lower flow range with 3 adjustment rotations. After 3 more rotations,
the valve is completely open.
7 Design "D"
A cylindrical needle with a V notch allows the fine adjustment over the entire setting range.
FM 4 DD V HT
FM 6 DD K V
FM_UK.INDD RH_21.11.07
7
FM3 standard needle FM3D needle with V notch
FM_UK.INDD RH_21.11.07
FM_UK.INDD RH_21.11.07
FM2
Meter-in
Valve side
Manifold side
Meter-in or meter-out
A functional change is achieved by ro-
tating the mounting position of the valve
180° about the longitudinal axis (A-B).
Meter-out
FM_UK.INDD RH_21.11.07
FM3
Meter-in
Meter-in or meter-out
Meter-out
FM_UK.INDD RH_21.11.07
FM4
Meter-in Meter-out
FM_UK.INDD RH_21.11.07
FM6
Meter-out
Adjustment: knob
FM_UK.INDD RH_21.11.07
POS.2124 Y 2125/1../6
Features
• The valve bodies of the Parker Manapak valve series
CM are made of steel.
• Eight options for the arrangement of the check valve
in the body offer a multitude of uses for hydraulic
switching.
• The function can be changed by turning the valve.
• CM2 - NG06 (CETOP3)
CM3 - NG10 (CETOP5)
Technical data
Series CM2 CM3
7
Mounting pattern ISO 4401-03-02-0-94 ISO 4401-05-04-0-94
Max. operating pressure [bar] 350 350
Max. flow [l/min] 53 76
Opening pressure [bar] 0.3 0.3
Mounting position unrestricted unrestricted
Ambient temperature [°C] max. +50 max. +50
Fluid temperature [°C] max. +70 max. +70
Weight [kg] 0.9 1.7
CM_UK.INDD RH_10.03.08
CM V
Schematics
The valve side is shown at the top of the symbols, the manifold side with channel designation is shown on the bottom.
CM_UK.INDD RH_10.03.08
CM2
Bottom view* (manifold side)
*O-Ring plate is
not shown!
This view shows
the TT model.
Front side
Top view 7
CM_UK.INDD RH_10.03.08
CM_UK.INDD RH_10.03.08
CM3
Bottom view* (manifold side)
*O-Ring plate is
not shown!
This view shows
the AA model.
Front side
Top view
CM_UK.INDD RH_10.03.08
CM_UK.INDD RH_10.03.08
POS.3902
Funtion
These valves are "normally open" devices that allow fluid
to flow trough the controlled port during their non-actu- Example PP
ated or "at rest" condition. When downstream pressure
exceeds the value set by the spring force, the control
piston moves off its seat, closing off the flow path and thus
reducing the fluid passing through from the main system.
The cushioned piston modulates to maintain the preset
pressure in this branch of the hydraulic circuit. If, due to ex-
ternal forces, the pressure continues to rise in this branch
circuit, the piston will keep moving against the spring force
allowing fluid to be drained to the tank, thereby limiting
maximum pressure to the valve's setting.
Features Schematics
• PRDM Manapak sandwich valves may be selected to PRDM*AA
reduce pressure in the 'P', 'A' or 'B' port.
• The direct operated, cushioned piston design results in
fast response, low leakage and minimal hysteresis. 7
• Up to 5 pressure adjustment ranges are available with
max. pressure settings of:
bar 25, 70, 160, 210, 350 for PRDM2,
PRDM*BB
bar 19, 50, 100, 150, 210 for PRDM3.
• Adjustment modes:
- Slotted head with lock nut
- Key lock
- Turning knob
• PRDM2 - NG06 (CETOP 3)
PRDM*PP
PRDM3 - NG10 (CETOP 5)
Technical data
Gauge port option C
Series PRDM2 PRDM3
Port size NG06 NG10
Mounting pattern ISO 4401
Max. operating pressure
P, A, B [bar] 350 315
T [bar] 50 50
Weight [kg] 1.3 2.6
Viscosity range [cSt][mm²/s] 12...230
Filtration ISO 4406 (1999) 18/16/13
Max. leakage P - A: 5ml/min
PRDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
PRD M V
Code Connection
PP P Code Adjustment
Slotted head
AA A
S screw with
BB B lock nut
L Key lock
Pressure range 1) K Turning knob2)
2)
NG06 only
Code PRDM2 Code PRDM3
02 1.5 to 25 bar 01 1.5 to 19 bar
06 up to 64 bar 05 up to 50 bar
16 up to 160 bar 10 up to 100 bar
21 up to 210 bar 15 up to 150 bar
35 up to 350 bar 21 up to 210 bar
1)
For optimum performance it is recommended to
use the appropriate pressure stage, e.g. for 150
PRDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
PRDM2 02
PRDM2 06
PRDM2 16/21
PRDM2 35
PRDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
PRDM3 01
PRDM3 05
PRDM3 10
PRDM3 15
PRDM3 21
PRDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
PRDM2
PRDM3
PRDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
PRDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
Function
PT... pressure is relieved from P to T at the adjusted
value.
TT... pressure is relieved from T' to T at the adjusted
pressure. RDM2 Example PT
POS.3902/3912
Features
• The direct operated, cushioned piston design results in
fast response, low leakage and minimal hysteresis.
• Up to 5 pressure adjustment ranges are available with
max. pressure settings of: RDM2
bar 25, 64, 160, 210, 350 for RDM2,
bar 19, 50, 100, 150, 210 for RDM3. Schematics
• Adjustment modes: RDM*PT
- Slotted head with lock nut
- Key lock 7
- Turning knob
• RDM2 - NG06 (CETOP3)
RDM3 - NG10 (CETOP5)
RDM*TT
RDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
Ordering code
RD M V
7
Performance curves
RDM2 02 RDM2 06
RDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
RDM3 01 RDM3 05
RDM3 10 RDM3 15
7
RDM3 21
RDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
RDM2
7 RDM3
RDM_UK.INDD RH_20.11.07
Delivery address:Mackenrodtstraße 14, JUMO House 885 Fox Chase, Suite 103
36039 Fulda, Germany Temple Bank, Riverway Coatesville PA 19320, USA
Postal address: 36035 Fulda, Germany Harlow, Essex CM 20 2TT, UK Phone: 610-380-8002
Phone: +49 661 6003-0 Phone: +44 1279 635533 1-800-554-JUMO
Fax: +49 661 6003-607 Fax: +44 1279 635262 Fax: 610-380-8009
e-mail: mail@jumo.net e-mail: sales@jumo.co.uk e-mail: info@JumoUSA.com
Internet: www.jumo.net Internet: www.jumo.co.uk Internet: www.JumoUSA.com
Technical data
Terminal head Form B DIN 43 729, aluminium die-casting, M 20x1.5; IP54,
ambient temperature -40 to +100°C
Form BUZ, aluminium die-casting, M 20x1.5; IP65, ambient temperature -40 to +100°C
Form BUZH, aluminium die-casting, M 20x1.5; IP65, ambient temperature -40 to +100°C
Form BBK, plastic, M 20x1.5; IP54, ambient temperature -30 to +130°C
Caution: reduced ambient temperature when using transmitters,
Data Sheets 70.7030 (95.6530) and 70.7010 (95.6550)
Extension tube stainless steel 1.4571, length 130mm (150mm for Type 902002/50.../51...)
Process connection thread, stainless steel 1.4571
pocket, stainless steel 1.4571 or steel 1.7335
Protection tube stainless steel 1.4571, 9mm, 11mm and 12mm dia.
Measuring insert replaceable, Pt100 temperature sensor EN 60 751, Cl. B, 2-wire circuit
(not replaceable on Type 902002/25)
Response times t0.9 approx. 50sec, in water 0.2 m/sec, 9mm dia.
Transmitter analog transmitter, output 4 - 20mA, Data Sheet 70.7030 (95.6530)
analog transmitter, output 0 - 10V, Data Sheet 70.7030 (95.6530)
programmable transmitter, output 4 - 20mA/20 - 4mA, Data Sheet 70.7010 (95.6550)
Accessories pocket, Data Sheet 90.9721
01.05/00311468
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG JUMO Instrument Co. Ltd. JUMO PROCESS CONTROL INC.
Delivery address:Mackenrodtstraße 14, JUMO House 885 Fox Chase, Suite 103
36039 Fulda, Germany Temple Bank, Riverway Coatesville PA 19320, USA
Postal address: 36035 Fulda, Germany Harlow, Essex CM 20 2TT, UK Phone: 610-380-8002
Phone: +49 661 6003-0 Phone: +44 1279 635533 1-800-554-JUMO
Fax: +49 661 6003-607 Fax: +44 1279 635262 Fax: 610-380-8009
e-mail: mail@jumo.net e-mail: sales@jumo.co.uk e-mail: info@JumoUSA.com
Internet: www.jumo.net Internet: www.jumo.co.uk Internet: www.JumoUSA.com
Dimensions
01.05/00311468
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG JUMO Instrument Co. Ltd. JUMO PROCESS CONTROL INC.
Delivery address:Mackenrodtstraße 14, JUMO House 885 Fox Chase, Suite 103
36039 Fulda, Germany Temple Bank, Riverway Coatesville PA 19320, USA
Postal address: 36035 Fulda, Germany Harlow, Essex CM 20 2TT, UK Phone: 610-380-8002
Phone: +49 661 6003-0 Phone: +44 1279 635533 1-800-554-JUMO
Fax: +49 661 6003-607 Fax: +44 1279 635262 Fax: 610-380-8009
e-mail: mail@jumo.net e-mail: sales@jumo.co.uk e-mail: info@JumoUSA.com
Internet: www.jumo.net Internet: www.jumo.co.uk Internet: www.JumoUSA.com
Dimensions
Terminal head Form BUZ Terminal head Form BUZH Terminal head Form BBK
extra code 320 extra code 321 extra code 322
01.05/00311468
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG JUMO Instrument Co. Ltd. JUMO PROCESS CONTROL INC.
Delivery address:Mackenrodtstraße 14, JUMO House 885 Fox Chase, Suite 103
36039 Fulda, Germany Temple Bank, Riverway Coatesville PA 19320, USA
Postal address: 36035 Fulda, Germany Harlow, Essex CM 20 2TT, UK Phone: 610-380-8002
Phone: +49 661 6003-0 Phone: +44 1279 635533 1-800-554-JUMO
Fax: +49 661 6003-607 Fax: +44 1279 635262 Fax: 610-380-8009
e-mail: mail@jumo.net e-mail: sales@jumo.co.uk e-mail: info@JumoUSA.com
Internet: www.jumo.net Internet: www.jumo.co.uk Internet: www.JumoUSA.com
01.05/00311468
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG JUMO Instrument Co. Ltd. JUMO PROCESS CONTROL INC.
Delivery address:Mackenrodtstraße 14, JUMO House 885 Fox Chase, Suite 103
36039 Fulda, Germany Temple Bank, Riverway Coatesville PA 19320, USA
Postal address: 36035 Fulda, Germany Harlow, Essex CM 20 2TT, UK Phone: 610-380-8002
Phone: +49 661 6003-0 Phone: +44 1279 635533 1-800-554-JUMO
Fax: +49 661 6003-607 Fax: +44 1279 635262 Fax: 610-380-8009
e-mail: mail@jumo.net e-mail: sales@jumo.co.uk e-mail: info@JumoUSA.com
Internet: www.jumo.net Internet: www.jumo.co.uk Internet: www.JumoUSA.com
01.05/00311468
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG JUMO Instrument Co. Ltd. JUMO PROCESS CONTROL INC.
Delivery address:Mackenrodtstraße 14, JUMO House 885 Fox Chase, Suite 103
36039 Fulda, Germany Temple Bank, Riverway Coatesville PA 19320, USA
Postal address: 36035 Fulda, Germany Harlow, Essex CM 20 2TT, UK Phone: 610-380-8002
Phone: +49 661 6003-0 Phone: +44 1279 635533 1-800-554-JUMO
Fax: +49 661 6003-607 Fax: +44 1279 635262 Fax: 610-380-8009
e-mail: mail@jumo.net e-mail: sales@jumo.co.uk e-mail: info@JumoUSA.com
Internet: www.jumo.net Internet: www.jumo.co.uk Internet: www.JumoUSA.com
01.05/00311468
JUMO GmbH & Co. KG JUMO Instrument Co. Ltd. JUMO PROCESS CONTROL INC.
Delivery address:Mackenrodtstraße 14, JUMO House 885 Fox Chase, Suite 103
36039 Fulda, Germany Temple Bank, Riverway Coatesville PA 19320, USA
Postal address: 36035 Fulda, Germany Harlow, Essex CM 20 2TT, UK Phone: 610-380-8002
Phone: +49 661 6003-0 Phone: +44 1279 635533 1-800-554-JUMO
Fax: +49 661 6003-607 Fax: +44 1279 635262 Fax: 610-380-8009
e-mail: mail@jumo.net e-mail: sales@jumo.co.uk e-mail: info@JumoUSA.com
Internet: www.jumo.net Internet: www.jumo.co.uk Internet: www.JumoUSA.com
Stock versions
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Sales No.
- - - - - - /
902002/10 - 402 - 1003 - 1 - 9 - 160 - 104 / 000 90/00055562
902002/10 - 402 - 1003 - 1 - 9 - 250 - 104 / 000 90/00055563
902002/10 - 402 - 1003 - 1 - 9 - 400 - 104 / 000 90/00055564
902002/10 - 402 - 2003 - 1 - 9 - 160 - 104 / 000 90/00055565
902002/10 - 402 - 2003 - 1 - 9 - 250 - 104 / 000 90/00055566
902002/10 - 402 - 2003 - 1 - 9 - 400 - 104 / 000 90/00055567
902002/10 - 402 - 1001 - 1 - 9 - 160 - 104 / 330 (0 to 100°C) 90/00054616
902002/10 - 402 - 1001 - 1 - 9 - 160 - 104 / 330 (0 to 200°C) 90/00087522
902002/10 - 402 - 1001 - 1 - 9 - 250 - 104 / 330 (0 to 100°C) 90/00054617
902002/10 - 402 - 1001 - 1 - 9 - 250 - 104 / 330 (0 to 200°C) 90/00087527
902002/10 - 402 - 1001 - 1 - 9 - 400 - 104 / 331 (0 to 100°C) 90/00335111
902002/25 - 402 - 1003 - 1 - 7 - 100 - 104 / 330 (0 to 100°C) 90/00081832
902002/25 - 402 - 1003 - 1 - 7 - 100 - 104 / 331 (0 to 100°C) 90/00342414
01.05/00311468
POS.F1126/1/2
1.1 SCP Mini pressure sensors Technical data
SCP Mini 004 006 010 016 025 040 060 100 160 250 400 600
pressure range *
0...4 0...6 0...10 0...16 0...25 0...40 0...60 0...100 0...160 0...250 0...400 0...600
PN (bar)
overload pressure
2 times
Pmax (bar)
burst pressure
3- times 2,5-times
PBurst (bar)
Accuracy
characteristic curve deviation ± 0,5 % FS
start point setting
General
response time 1 ms
long-term stability < 0,1 % FS/a
weight ca. 80 g
load reversals ! 20 Mio.
9 Catalogue 4083-2/UK
1.1 SCP Mini pressure sensors Dimensional drawings and Order codes
M12x1
SW34
hex.34
90 max.
49 max.
Ø22 Ø22
SW22 SW22
hex.22 hex.22
12
12
ED-seal ED-seal
G1/4A G1/4A
Ø19 Ø19
10 Catalogue 4083-2/UK
POS.F3914/1/9
Catalogue HY11-3500/UK Electronic Pressure Switch
Characteristics Series SCPSD
• Compact
• Rugged
• Reliable
• Easy operation
• Long-term stability
• Excellent interference resistance
• Metal housing
• High protection class
• Many variants
• Rotatable
• Analogue output
• Password
• MPa, bar, psi
12
Intelligent settings which are not possible with a mechani- conditions.
cal switch can be achieved with these convenient switch
With its directionally settable housing, the display can
functions. Several switches can be replaced by a single
always be read very easily.
controller.
Universal
The analogue output is individually settable
Many versions are available to suit a wide variety of
• 0/4…20 mA switchable
applications.
• Settable initial pressure
• Settable final pressure
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
Easy to operate
• 3 large keys
• Display of units
Rugged
• Metal housing
Programming module
• Watertight
• Can be set with
• High interference resistance
ControllerWIN
• Vibration resistant software
• Shockproof
12
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
12
1)
other sealing materials (FPM, EPDM etc.) on request
overload protection yes 2)
Does not apply to DIN EN 175301-803 form A (formerly DIN43650)
current consumption < 100 mA version
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
SCPSD-xxx-04-x7 SCPSD-xxx-14-x5
2 switching outputs; 2 switching outputs;
M12x1; 4-pole 1 analogue output;
M12x1; 5-pole
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
High and low pressure High pressure (from 60 bar) Low pressure (up to 16 bar)
DMS/ceramic DMS Ceramic
12
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
SCPSD-100-04-27
Pressure range
004; 010; 016; 060; 100; 160, 400; 600 bar
Pressure range 100 bar
2 switching outputs
G1/4 BSPP internal thread
1 switching output; without analogue output M12 plug-in connector
DIN EN 175301-803 form A
SCPSD - xxx - 04 - x 6
(formerly DIN 43650) plug-in connector
SCPSD-60-14-27
2 switching outputs; without analogue output SCPSD - xxx - 04 - x 7 Pressure range 60 bar
M12x1 plug-in connector; 4-pole
1 switching output
1 analogue output
1 switching output; with analogue output SCPSD - xxx - 14 - x 7 G1/4 BSPP internal thread
M12x1 plug-in connector; 4-pole M12 plug-in connector
Accessories
PC programming kit SCSD-PRG-KIT
Fixing clamp SCSD-S27
Reducing adaptor M22x1,5 SCA-1/4-M22x1.5-ED
Reducing adaptor G1/2 BSPP SCA-1/4-ED-1/2-ED
Damping adaptor SCA-1/X-EDX-1/X-D
Flange adaptor for mechanical pressure switch SCAF-1/4-40
Cable length in m
02 2 m
05 5 m
10 10 m
12 Plug-in connector
45 M12 cable socket; straight
55 M12 cable socket; 90° angled
56 DIN EN 175301-803 form A plug connector
(formerly DIN 43650)
Separate plugs
M12 cable socket; straight SCK-145
M12 cable socket; 90° angled SCK-155
DIN EN 175301-803 Form A plug connector
SCK-006
(formerly DIN 43650)
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
• Compact
• Rugged
• Reliable
• Easy operation
• Long-term stability
• Excellent interference resistance
• Metal housing
• High protection class
• Many variants
• Rotatable
• Analogue output
• Password
• MPa, bar, psi
12
Intelligent settings which are not possible with a mechani- conditions.
cal switch can be achieved with these convenient switch
With its directionally settable housing, the display can
functions. Several switches can be replaced by a single
always be read very easily.
controller.
Universal
The analogue output is individually settable
Many versions are available to suit a wide variety of
• 0/4…20 mA switchable
applications.
• Settable initial pressure
• Settable final pressure
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
Easy to operate
• 3 large keys
• Display of units
Rugged
• Metal housing
Programming module
• Watertight
• Can be set with
• High interference resistance
ControllerWIN
• Vibration resistant software
• Shockproof
12
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
12
1)
other sealing materials (FPM, EPDM etc.) on request
overload protection yes 2)
Does not apply to DIN EN 175301-803 form A (formerly DIN43650)
current consumption < 100 mA version
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
SCPSD-xxx-04-x7 SCPSD-xxx-14-x5
2 switching outputs; 2 switching outputs;
M12x1; 4-pole 1 analogue output;
M12x1; 5-pole
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
High and low pressure High pressure (from 60 bar) Low pressure (up to 16 bar)
DMS/ceramic DMS Ceramic
12
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
SCPSD-100-04-27
Pressure range
004; 010; 016; 060; 100; 160, 400; 600 bar
Pressure range 100 bar
2 switching outputs
G1/4 BSPP internal thread
1 switching output; without analogue output M12 plug-in connector
DIN EN 175301-803 form A
SCPSD - xxx - 04 - x 6
(formerly DIN 43650) plug-in connector
SCPSD-60-14-27
2 switching outputs; without analogue output SCPSD - xxx - 04 - x 7 Pressure range 60 bar
M12x1 plug-in connector; 4-pole
1 switching output
1 analogue output
1 switching output; with analogue output SCPSD - xxx - 14 - x 7 G1/4 BSPP internal thread
M12x1 plug-in connector; 4-pole M12 plug-in connector
Accessories
PC programming kit SCSD-PRG-KIT
Fixing clamp SCSD-S27
Reducing adaptor M22x1,5 SCA-1/4-M22x1.5-ED
Reducing adaptor G1/2 BSPP SCA-1/4-ED-1/2-ED
Damping adaptor SCA-1/X-EDX-1/X-D
Flange adaptor for mechanical pressure switch SCAF-1/4-40
Cable length in m
02 2 m
05 5 m
10 10 m
12 Plug-in connector
45 M12 cable socket; straight
55 M12 cable socket; 90° angled
56 DIN EN 175301-803 form A plug connector
(formerly DIN 43650)
Separate plugs
M12 cable socket; straight SCK-145
M12 cable socket; 90° angled SCK-155
DIN EN 175301-803 Form A plug connector
SCK-006
(formerly DIN 43650)
SCPSD_UK.INDD RH_17.12.07
A£›A
P£›P T F
DH
F
DH S
G
45
G
D
EA D
EA
HD
P
M
A
HD
AC
DA
AC
DA
N
P
P
E
H
A
HA
K
C B CA AA E
A
BB
AB
L
LA
LC
LC
B35 LD
AD
P£›P
F
T DH
G S
45
D
EA
M
P
HD
AC
DA
P
H
HA
E
K
B CA AA
LA
BB
A
C
AB
L
LC
B14
LD
A£›A
F
DH
G
T
D S
45
M
EA
HD
A
P
AC
DA
N
LC 2004
Dimensions - Dimensiones B14
AC AD D DH E F G KK L M N P S T M N P S T
DH 63 130 111 11 M4x12 23 4 8.5 1xM20x1.5 217 75 60 90 M5 2.5 100 80 120 M6 2.5
DH 71 145 118 14 M5x12 30 5 11 1xM20x1.5 245 85 70 105 M6 2.5 115 95 140 M8 3
DH 80 175 134 19 M6x16 40 6 15.5 1xM25x1.5 287 100 80 120 M6 3 130 110 160 M8 3.5
DH 90S 195 140 24 M8x19 50 8 20 1xM25x1.5 315 115 95 140 M8 3 130 110 160 M8 3.5
DH 90L 195 140 24 M8x19 50 8 20 1xM25x1.5 340 115 95 140 M8 3 130 110 160 M8 3.5
DH 100L 215 160 28 M10x22 60 8 24 1xM32x1.5 385 130 110 160 M8 3.5 165 130 200 M10 3.5
DH 112M 240 178 28 M10x22 60 8 24 2xM32x1.5 400 130 110 160 M8 3.5 165 130 200 M10 3.5
DH 32S 275 206 38 M12x28 80 10 33 2xM32x1.5 483 165 130 200 M10 3.5 215 180 250 M12 4
Italiana di Comunicazione
DH 132M 275 206 38 M12x28 80 10 33 2xM32x1.5 510 165 130 200 M10 3.5 215 180 250 M12 4
AC Three-Phase Induction Motors 230/400 V - 50 Hz 400/690 V - 50 Hz
Type Rated output Rated speed IN Efficiency Power factor Direct-on-line Moment Noise Weight B3 Type Rated output Rated speed IN Efficiency Power factor Direct-on-line Moment Noise Weight B3
AC Three-Phase Induction Motors. Tipo Potencia Velocidad Rendimiento Factor Conexión directa of inertia level Peso B3 Tipo Potencia Velocidad Rendimiento Factor Conexión directa of inertia level Peso B3
Low Voltage Squirrel Cage Motors IP55 with aluminium frame. asignada asignada de potencia Par Nivel asignada asignada de potencia Par Nivel
de inercia de ruido de inercia de ruido
Nominal electrical supply according to IEC 60038 - 400V +/-10% - 50 Hz. 230 V 400 V 400 V 690 V
kW min-1 (AMPS) (AMPS) Class 100% 75% 50% 100% 75% 50% lS/lN TS/TN TU/TN TB/TN (J)kgm2 Lw dB(A) kg kW min-1 (AMPS) (AMPS) Class 100% 75% 50% 100% 75% 50% lS/lN TS/TN TU/TN TB/TN (J)kgm2 Lw dB(A) kg
Class F insulation to EN 60034-1. Thermal class B. FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL FL
Metric cable entry. 3000 min-1 (2 poles - 2 polos) Aluminum frame - Carcasa de aluminio 3000 min-1 (2 poles - 2 polos) Aluminum frame - Carcasa de aluminio
TEFC construction; surface cooling. DH 63 A2 0.18 2720 0.87 0.5 - 65 64 60 0.8 0.73 0.66 5.5 0.61 2.2 2.2 0.0003 61 4.8 DH 63 A2 0.18 2720 0.5 0.29 - 65 64 60 0.8 0.73 0.66 0.61 5.5 2.2 2.2 0.0003 61 4.8
DH 63 B2 0.25 2720 1.14 0.66 - 68 68.5 66 0.81 0.74 0.67 5.5 0.96 2.2 2.2 0.0004 61 5.1 DH 63 B2 0.25 2720 0.66 0.38 - 68 68.5 66 0.81 0.74 0.67 0.96 5.5 2.2 2.2 0.0004 61 5.1
The motors conform to degree of protection IP55 to IEC 60034-5. DH 71 A2 0.37 2740 1.63 0.94 - 70 71 68.5 0.81 0.75 0.66 6.1 1.26 2.2 2.2 0.0005 64 6 DH 71 A2 0.37 2740 0.94 0.54 - 70 71 68.5 0.81 0.75 0.66 1.26 6.1 2.2 2.2 0.0005 64 6
DH 71 B2 0.55 2740 2.3 1.33 - 73 73 69.5 0.82 0.76 0.69 6.1 1.88 2.2 2.3 0.0006 64 6.5 DH 71 B2 0.55 2740 1.33 0.77 - 73 73 69.5 0.82 0.76 0.69 1.88 6.1 2.2 2.3 0.0006 64 6.5
DH 80 A2 0.75 2840 2.99 1.73 - 75 75.7 72.3 0.83 0.78 0.67 6.1 2.54 2.2 2.3 0.0008 67 8.7 DH 80 A2 0.75 2840 1.73 1 - 75 75.7 72.3 0.83 0.78 0.67 2.54 6.1 2.2 2.3 0.0008 67 8.7
The standard design is suitable for indoor and protected outdoor DH 80 B2 1.1 2840 4.21 2.42 Eff 2 78 80 78.2 0.84 0.82 0.72 7,0 3.72 2.2 2.3 0.0009 67 9.5 DH 80 B2 1.1 2840 2.42 1.4 Eff 2 78 80 78.2 0.84 0.82 0.72 3.72 7,0 2.2 2.3 0.0009 67 9.5
installation. DH 90S A2 1.5 2840 5.57 3.2 Eff 2 80.4 80.2 77.3 0.84 0.8 0.7 7,0 5.04 2.2 2.3 0.0012 72 11.8 DH 90S A2 1.5 2840 3.2 1.85 Eff 2 80.4 80.2 77.3 0.84 0.8 0.7 5.04 7,0 2.2 2.3 0.0012 72 11.8
DH 90L B2 2.2 2840 7.92 4.55 Eff 2 82 82.7 81.6 0.85 0.84 0.74 7,0 7.4 2.2 2.3 0.0014 72 13.5 DH 90L B2 2.2 2840 4.55 2.67 Eff 2 82 82.7 81.6 0.85 0.84 0.74 7.4 7,0 2.2 2.3 0.0014 72 13.5
Climate Group MODERATE (-20° to +40° C). DH 100L A2 3 2860 10.2 5.89 Eff 2 83.5 83.4 81.3 0.88 0.85 0.76 7.5 9.95 2.2 2.3 0.0029 76 21 DH 100L A2 3 2860 5.89 3.41 Eff 2 83.5 83.4 81.3 0.88 0.85 0.76 9.95 7.5 2.2 2.3 0.0029 76 21
DH 112M A2 4 2880 13.3 7.65 Eff 2 85.7 85.5 83.5 0.88 0.85 0.76 7.5 13.22 2.2 2.3 0.0055 77 28 DH 112M A2 4 2880 7.65 4.43 Eff 2 85.7 85.5 83.5 0.88 0.85 0.76 13.227.5 2.2 2.3 0.0055 77 28
DH 132S A2 5.5 2900 18.3 10.4 Eff 2 86.9 84.5 81.5 0.88 0.88 0.82 7.5 18.11 2.2 2.3 0.0109 80 39 DH 132S A2 5.5 2900 10.4 6.01 Eff 2 86.9 84.5 81.5 0.88 0.88 0.82 18.117.5 2.2 2.3 0.0109 80 39
Multi-mount up to 132 frame. The location of the terminal box in DH 132S B2 7.5 2900 24.3 14 Eff 2 88 86.9 85.3 0.88 0.89 0.84 7.5 24.7 2.2 2.3 0.0126 80 44.5 DH 132S B2 7.5 2900 14 8.1 Eff 2 88 86.9 85.3 0.88 0.89 0.84 24.7 7.5 2.2 2.3 0.0126 80 44.5
standard design is on top.
1500 min-1 (4 poles - 4 polos) Aluminum frame - Carcasa de aluminio 1500 min-1 (4 poles - 4 polos) Aluminum frame - Carcasa de aluminio
Motores Trifásicos de Inducción DH 63 A4 0.12 1310 0.73 0.42 - 57 58.2 54 0.72 0.63 0.57 4.4 0.84 2.1 2.2 0.0005 52 4.8 DH 63 A4 0.12 1310 0.42 0.24 - 57 58.2 54 0.72 0.63 0.57 0.84 4.4 2.1 2.2 0.0005 52 4.8
DH 63 B4 0.18 1310 1.02 0.59 - 60 60.9 55.5 0.73 0.65 0.57 4.4 1.26 2.1 2.2 0.0006 52 5.1 DH 63 B4 0.18 1310 0.59 0.34 - 60 60.9 55.5 0.73 0.65 0.57 1.26 4.4 2.1 2.2 0.0006 52 5.1
DH 71 A4 0.25 1330 1.3 0.75 - 65 65.4 60 0.74 0.65 0.58 5.2 1.73 2.1 2.2 0.0008 55 6 DH 71 A4 0.25 1330 0.75 0.43 - 65 65.4 60 0.74 0.65 0.58 1.73 5.2 2.1 2.2 0.0008 55 6
Motores trifásicos de inducción. DH 71 B4 0.37 1330 1.84 1.06 - 67 71 68.4 0.75 0.65 0.52 5.2 2.54 2.1 2.2 0.0013 55 6.3 DH 71 B4 0.37 1330 1.06 0.61 - 67 71 68.4 0.75 0.65 0.52 2.54 5.2 2.1 2.2 0.0013 55 6.3
Motores de baja tension con rotor de jaula IP55, carcasa de aluminio. DH 80 A4 0.55 1390 2.58 1.49 - 71 72.6 69 0.75 0.66 0.55 5.2 3.78 2.4 2.3 0.0018 58 9.4 DH 80 A4 0.55 1390 1.49 0.86 - 71 72.6 69 0.75 0.66 0.55 3.78 5.2 2.4 2.3 0.0018 58 9.4
DH 80 B4 0.75 1390 3.32 1.92 - 73 74.2 70 0.76 0.65 0.54 6,0 5.15 2.4 2.3 0.0021 58 10.8 DH 80 B4 0.75 1390 1.92 1.11 - 73 74.2 70 0.76 0.65 0.54 5.15 6,0 2.4 2.3 0.0021 58 10.8
Tensión de Red según IEC 60038 para 400V +/-10% 50 Hz. DH 90S A4 1.1 1390 4.65 2.67 Eff 2 77 77.8 75 0.77 0.7 0.57 6,0 7.5 2.3 2.3 0.0023 61 12 DH 90S A4 1.1 1390 2.67 1.55 Eff 2 77 77.8 75 0.77 0.7 0.57 7.5 6,0 2.3 2.3 0.0023 61 12
DH 90L B4 1.5 1390 5.93 3.41 Eff 2 80.3 78.1 76.7 0.79 0.75 0.64 6,0 10.23 2.3 2.3 0.0027 61 13.8 DH 90L B4 1.5 1390 3.41 1.97 Eff 2 80.3 78.1 76.7 0.79 0.75 0.64 10.23 6,0 2.3 2.3 0.0027 61 13.8
DH 100L A4 2.2 1410 8.33 4.79 Eff 2 81.8 83 81.1 0.81 0.76 0.65 7,0 14.8 2.3 2.3 0.0054 64 20.8 DH 100L A4 2.2 1410 4.79 2.77 Eff 2 81.8 83 81.1 0.81 0.76 0.65 14.8 7,0 2.3 2.3 0.0054 64 20.8
Aislamiento Clase F según IEC 60034-1, Calentamiento B. DH 100L B4 3 1410 11 6.33 Eff 2 83.4 83.2 81.6 0.82 0.78 0.66 7,0 20.18 2.3 2.3 0.0067 64 23.5 DH 100L B4 3 1410 6.33 3.67 Eff 2 83.4 83.2 81.6 0.82 0.78 0.66 20.18 7,0 2.3 2.3 0.0067 64 23.5
DH 112M A4 4 1435 14.4 8.29 Eff 2 84.9 84.8 82.7 0.82 0.76 0.64 7,0 26.53 2.3 2.3 0.0095 65 29.5 DH 112M A4 4 1435 8.29 4.8 Eff 2 84.9 84.8 82.7 0.82 0.76 0.64 26.53 7,0 2.3 2.3 0.0095 65 29.5
Entrada de cables métrica. DH 132S A4 5.5 1440 19.2 11 Eff 2 86.5 86.8 85.6 0.83 0.81 0.71 7,0 36.48 2.3 2.3 0.0214 71 41 DH 132S A4 5.5 1440 11 6.41 Eff 2 86.5 86.8 85.6 0.83 0.81 0.71 36.48 7,0 2.3 2.3 0.0214 71 41
DH 132M B4 7.5 1440 25.5 14.7 Eff2 87.8 88.2 87.2 0.84 0.83 0.74 7,0 49.74 2.3 2.3 0.0296 71 47.5 DH 132M B4 7.5 1440 14.7 8.5 Eff2 87.8 88.2 87.2 0.84 0.83 0.74 49.74 7,0 2.3 2.3 0.0296 71 47.5
Construcción cerrada con ventilación propia; ventilación superficial.
750 min-1 (8 poles - 8 polos) Aluminum frame - Carcasa de aluminio 750 min-1 (8 poles - 8 polos) Aluminum frame - Carcasa de aluminio
DH 80 A8 0.18 645 1.45 0.84 51 51 45 0.61 0.52 0.42 2.49 3.3 1.8 1.9 0.0025 52 8.9 DH 80 A8 0.18 645 0.84 0.48 51 51 43 0.61 0.52 0.42 2.49 3.3 1.8 1.9 0.0025 52 8.9
DH 80 B8 0.25 645 1.89 1.09 54 54 49 0.61 0.52 0.41 3.46 3.3 1.8 1.9 0.003 52 10.4 DH 80 B8 0.25 645 1.09 0.63 54 54 44 0.61 0.53 0.42 3.46 3.3 1.8 1.9 0.003 52 10.4
DH 90S A8 0.37 670 2.46 1.42 62 62 57 0.61 0.52 0.41 5.12 4 1.8 1.9 0.0051 56 12.1 DH 90S A8 0.37 670 1.42 0.82 62 62 57 0.61 0.52 0.41 5.12 4 1.8 1.9 0.0051 56 12.1
DH 90L B8 0.55 670 3.57 2.06 63 64 60 0.61 0.53 0.42 7.61 4 1.8 2 0.0065 56 13.7 DH 90L B8 0.55 670 2.06 1.19 63 63 58 0.61 0.53 0.41 7.61 4 1.8 2 0.0065 56 13.7
DH 100L A8 0.75 680 3.93 2.27 71 71 66 0.67 0.57 0.44 10.23 4 1.8 2 0.009 59 23 DH 100L A8 0.75 680 2.27 1.31 71 70 65 0.67 0.58 0.45 10.23 4 1.8 2 0.009 59 23
DH 100L B8 1.1 680 5.56 3.21 73 73 71 0.69 0.62 0.48 15 5 1.8 2 0.011 59 25.1 DH 100L B8 1.1 680 3.21 1.85 73 73 70 0.69 0.61 0.47 15 5 1.8 2 0.011 59 25.1
DH 112M B8 1.5 690 7.41 4.28 75 76 74 0.69 0.61 0.48 20.46 5 1.8 2 0.0245 61 28.2 DH 112M B8 1.5 690 4.28 2.47 75 76 73 0.69 0.59 0.46 20.46 5 1.8 2 0.0245 61 28.2
DH 132S A8 2.2 705 9.9 5.7 78 78 75 0.71 0.63 0.5 29.59 6 1.8 2 0.0314 64 40.3 DH 132S A8 2.2 705 5.7 3.3 78 78 73 0.71 0.62 0.48 29.59 6 1.8 2 0.0314 64 40.3
DH 132M B8 3 705 13.04 7.53 79 80 78 0.73 0.65 0.52 40.35 6 1.8 2 0.0395 64 45 DH 132M B8 3 705 7.53 4.35 79 80 78 0.73 0.66 0.53 40.35 6 1.8 2 0.0395 64 45
POS.P1126
POS.P1180
POS.R1181
Catalogue HY11-3500/UK Directional Control Valve
Characteristics Series D3W (Parker), 4D02 (Denison)
POS.Y1002
Technical data
General
Design Directional spool valve
Actuation Solenoid
Size DIN NG10 / CETOP 05 / NFPA D05
Mounting interface DIN 24340 A10 / ISO 4401 / CETOP RP 121-H / NFPA D05
Mounting position unrestricted, preferably horizontal
Ambient temperature [°C] -25...+50
Weight [kg] 4.8 (1 solenoid), 6.3 (2 solenoids)
Hydraulic
Max. operating pressure [bar] P, A B: 350; T: 210 (DC), 105 (AC), 210 (AC Code “H“)
Fluid Hydraulic oil in accordance with DIN 51524 / 51525
Fluid temperature [°C] -25 ... +70
Viscosity permitted [cSt] / [mm²/s] 2.8...400
Viscosity recommended [cSt] / [mm²/s] 30...80
Filtration ISO 4406 (1999); 18/16/13 (meet NAS 1638: 7)
Flow max. [l/min] 150 (DC); 115 (AC)
Leakage at 50 bar [ml/min] Up to 20 per flow path, depending on spool
Static / Dynamic
Step response see table response time
Electrical characteristics
Duty ratio 100% ED; CAUTION: coil temperature up to 150 °C possible
Max. switching frequency [1/h] 10000
Protection class IP 65 in accordance with EN 60529 (plugged and mounted)
Code K J U G Y T
110V at 50Hz/ 230V at 50Hz/
Supply voltage / ripple [V] 12 V = 24 V = 98 V = 205 V =
120V at 60Hz 240V at 60Hz
Tolerance supply voltage [%] ±10 ±10 ±10 ±10 ±5 ±5
Current consumption hold [A] 3 1.5 0.37 0.18 0.8 / 0.72 0.4 / 0.36
Current consumption in rush [A] 3 1.5 0.37 0.18 3.41 / 3.31 1.75 / 1.7
Power consumption hold [W] 36 36 36 36 88 / 86 88 / 86
Power consumption in rush [W] 36 36 36 36 375 / 397 385 / 408
Solenoid connection Connector as per EN 175301-803, solenoid identification as per ISO 9461.
Wiring min. [mm²] 3 x 1.5 recommended
Wiring length max. [m] 50 recommended
With electrical connections the protective conductor (PE W) must be connected according to the relevant regulations.
D3W stand_UK.INDD CM_21.01.2008.1
D 3 W
Directional Size Wet pin Spool Spool Seals
control DIN NG10 solenoid type position
valve CETOP 05
2
NFPA D05
3 3 position spools
Code all 3 position spools
4 3 positions.
5 C Spring offset in position “0“.
Operated in position “a“ or “b“.
6 Standard Spool type 8 and 9
7
2 positions.
8 1) E
Operated in Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
9 1) position “a“. position “b“.
10 2)
2 positions.
11 F
Spring offset in Spring offset in Operated in position “0“.
12 position “b“. position “a“.
14
2 positions.
K
15 Operated in Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
21 2)
2 positions.
M
22 2) Spring offset in Spring offset in Operated in position “0“.
position “a“. position “b“.
31 2)
32 2)
2 position spools
81 2) Code Spool position
A B 2 positions.
82 2)
B a b Spring offset in position “b“.
102 2) P T Operated in position “a“.
2 positions.
D Operated in position “a“ or “b“.
2 position spools No centre or offset position.
Code Spool type
a b 2 positions.
H Spring offset in position “a“.
20 Operated in position “b“.
26
30
101 2)
1)
Consider specific spool
position.
2)
Only available for DC voltage.
W
Solenoid Connector Solenoid Shift Design
voltage as per option response series
EN 175301-803, (not required
for ordering)
2
without plug
(Please order plug
separately)
4D02 – – – C
Directional Body Control Spool Spool End cap Design
control type position series
valve size
2
DIN NG10
CETOP 05
NFPA D05
46
55
56
2 position spools
Code Spool type
a b
11
12
51
–
Seals Solenoid Options
voltage
2
Code Seals
1 NBR
5 FPM
Code Options
Solenoid connector as per
omit EN 175301-803 without plug.
With manual override
Soft shift with orifice in body
G3
(for DC and body D only)
32 Without manual override
The flow curve diagram shows the flow versus pressure operating position and flow direction the relevant curve
drop curves for all spool types. For each spool type, number is given in the table below.
2
1 03 4 3 4 3 – – – – – –
2 01 4 1 4 1 3 3 1 1 5 1
3 10 4 3 5 2 – – 4 – – –
4 08 4 2 4 2 – – 3 3 – 5
5 – 4 3 5 3 5 – – – – –
6 46 4 3 4 3 6 6 – – – 6
7 – 5 1 4 3 – 4 – 2 6 –
10 – 4 – 4 – – – – – – –
11 02 4 3 4 3 – – 8 8 – –
12 – 4 3 4 3 7 7 7 7 8 8
14 – 4 3 5 1 4 – 2 – 6 –
15 09 5 2 4 3 – – – 4 – –
16 – 5 3 4 3 – 5 – – – –
20 51 4 3 4 3 – – – – – –
26 12 4 – 4 – – – – – – –
30 11 4 2 4 2 – – – – – –
P->B A->T P->A B->T P->A P->B A->T B->T P->T A->B
8 – 4 3 4 3 – – – – 6 –
9 07 4 4 4 4 – – – – 6 –
Position „b“ Position „a“
P->A P->B A->B P->B A->T
21 55 5 4 6 3 3
P->A B->T P->A P->B A->B
22 56 3 3 4 5 6
The diagram below specifies the shift limits for valves anced flow conditions. The shift limits can be considerably
with DC and AC solenoids. Valves with spool position lower at unbalanced flow conditions. To avoid flow rates
“F” or “M” can only be operated up to 70% of the limits. beyond the shift limits, a plug-in orifice can be inserted
The specifications apply to a viscosity 35mm2/s and bal- in the P-port.
Shift limits, DC voltage *
2
Acceleration for different orifice sizes (archived against a valve without soft shift)
Orifice in anchor *
* Note: For 4D02 the orifice is located in the Z-channel of the valve body.
For even softer shifting, the proportional spools 81, 82, 101 and 102 can be used.
C, D -style
C, D -style
Surface finish
The space necessary to remove the plug per EN 175301-803, design type AF is at least 15 mm.
The torque for the screw M3 of the plug has to be 0.5 to 0.6 Nm.
D3W stand_UK.INDD CM_21.01.2008.1
POS.Y2011-Y3915-Y3921
A B
Technical data
General
Design Directional spool valve
Actuation Solenoid
Nominal size DIN NG06 / CETOP 03 / NFPA D03
Mounting interface DIN 24340 A6 / ISO 4401 / CETOP RP 121-H / NFPA D03
Mounting position unrestricted, preferably horizontal
Ambient temperature [°C] -25...+50
Weight [kg] 1.5 (1 solenoid), 2.1 (2 solenoids)
Hydraulic
Max. operating pressure [bar] P, A B: 350; T: 210 (DC), T: 140 (AC)
Fluid Hydraulic oil in accordance with DIN 51524 / 51525
Fluid temperature [°C] -25 ... +70
Viscosity permitted [cSt] / [mm²/s] 2.8...400
Viscosity recommended [cSt] / [mm²/s] 30...80
Filtration ISO 4406 (1999); 18/16/13 (meet NAS 1638: 7)
Flow max. [l/min] 80
Leakage at 50 bar [ml/min] Up to 10 per flow path, depending on spool
Static / Dynamic
Step response see table response time
Electrical characteristics
Duty ratio 100% ED; CAUTION: coil temperature up to 150 °C possible
Max. switching frequency [1/h] 15000
Protection class IP 65 in accordance with EN 60529 (plugged and mounted)
Code K J U G Y T
Supply voltage [V] 110V at 50Hz/ 230V at 50Hz/
12 V = 24 V = 98 V = 205 V =
120V at 60Hz 240V at 60Hz
Tolerance supply voltage [%] ±10 ±10 ±10 ±10 ±5 ±5
Current consumption hold [A] 2.58 1.29 0.32 0.15 0.6 / 0.55 0.3 / 0.27
Current consumption in rush [A] 2.58 1.29 0.32 0.15 2.5 / 2.4 1.25 / 1.2
Power consumption hold 31 W 31 W 31 W 31 W 70 / 70 VA 70 / 70 VA
Power consumption in rush 31 W 31 W 31 W 31 W 280 / 290 VA 280 / 290 VA
Solenoid connection Connector as per EN 175301-803, solenoid identification as per ISO 9461 (code W).
Wiring min. [mm²] 3 x 1.5 recommended
Wiring length max. [m] 50 recommended
With electrical connections the protective conductor (PE W) must be connected according to the relevant regulations.
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1
D 1 V W
Directional Size 3-chamber Wet pin Spool Spool Seals
control DIN NG06 valve armature type position
valve CETOP 03 solenoid,
2
NFPA D03 threaded
in tube
3 position spools
Code Spool type
a 0 b Code Seals
001 N NBR
002 V FPM
003
3 position spools
004
Code Spool position
005 3 positions.
006 C Spring offset in position “0“.
Operated in position “a“ or “b“.
007 Spool type 008,009,
Standard
008 1) 204, 205
009 1)
2 positions.
010 E
Operated in Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
011 position “a“. position “b“.
014
2 positions.
015 F
Spring offset in Spring offset in Operated in position “0“.
016 position “b“. position “a“.
021
2 positions.
022 K
Operated in Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
031 position “b“. position “a“.
032
034 2 positions.
M
Spring offset in Spring offset in Operated in position “0“.
035
position “a“. position “b“.
061
081 2 position spools
082 Code Spool position
Standard Spool type 083
102
A B 2 positions.
204 1) B a b Spring offset in position “b“.
P T Operated in position “a“.
205 1)
2 positions.
D Operated in position “a“ or “b“.
2 position spools No centre or offset position.
Code Spool type A B 2 positions.
a b
H a b Spring offset in position “a“.
020 P T Operated in position “b“.
026
030
083 1)
101
208
1)
Consider specific spool
position.
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1
W
Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Design
voltage connector as per option series
EN 175301-803, (not required
2
without plug for ordering)
(other connectors
are available for
D1MW Series)
Code Voltage
K 12V =
J 24V =
U 2)
98V =
G 2) 205V =
110V 50Hz /
Y 120V 60Hz
230V 50Hz /
T 240V 60Hz
2)
Rectifier needed for DC solenoid
when used with AC input.
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1
4D01 – 3 – – C –
Directional Body Control Spool Spool End cap Design Seals Solenoid Options
control valve 3-chamber type position series voltage
size DIN NG06 design
2
CETOP 03
09 Code Seals
10 1 NBR
13 5 FPM
14
Code End cap
46
01 for control 1
55
02 for controls 2 and 7
56
64 3 position spools
65 Code Spool position
AR 3 positions.
03
Spring centered to “0“.
OT
2 positions.
OX 05 Spring centered to “0“.
Energized to “b“.
2 positions.
2 position spools 06 Spring centered to “0“.
Code Spool type
Energized to “a“.
a b
11
2 position spools
12
Code Spool position
51 A B 2 positions.
01 a b Spring offset to “b“.
52 P T Energized to “a“.
71 2 positions.
02 Spring offset to “a“.
81 1) The Denison model code is avail- Energized to “b“.
able for existing applications. For
81 2) 2 positions detent.
new applications we advise to
09 Operated in “a“ or “b“.
1)
Spool position code 01 refer to Parker model code.
No centre or spring offset position.
2)
Spool position code 02
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1 Further spool types and voltages on request.
Flow curve
14 13 10 9 8
24
Pressure drop [bar]
7
20 6
16
5
4
2
11 3
12 2
1
12
8
0
0 20 40 60 80
Flow [l/min]
Viscosity 40 cSt at 50°C.
The diagram below specifies the shift limits for valves with conditions. The shift limits can be considerably lower at
DC solenoids. Valves with spool position “F” or “M” can unbalanced flow conditions. To avoid flow rates beyond
only be operated up to 70% of the limits. The specifica- the shift limits, a plug-in orifice can be inserted in the
tions apply to a viscosity of 40mm2/s and balanced flow P-port.
011
Parker Denison
300
081 020, 030
003, 004, 015
250 001 03
082
021, 022
200
002 01
150
007, 008,
100 003 10
009, 014
50
004 08
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
005 13
Flow [l/min]
350 006 46
Pressure [bar]
001,002, 006
300
005, 016 007 –
250
010
200 008 –
026
150
009 07
100
50 010 BN
0 011 02
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Flow [l/min]
014 –
Valve with standard AC solenoid
350 015 09
Pressure [bar]
011
300 016 14
081 020, 030
003, 004, 015
250
082
021, 022 020 51
200
150 021 55
007, 008,
100
009, 014 022 56
50
0 026 12
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Flow [l/min] 030 11
350
Pressure [bar]
100 204 64
50 205 65
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
208 52
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1 Flow [l/min]
003, 015
005, 016
300 009
2
021, 022 006
250
001
200
008, 081, 020
011
002, 007, 010, 082
150 014, 026
004
100
50
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Flow [l/min]
Step response times were obtained under the following conditions: υ = 40 mm2/s at 50°C with the valve operating at nominal pressure and flow.
Published response times are nominal and may vary with spool, flow, pressure and temperature.
Acceleration for orifice size 0.75, code “S3” (archived against a valve without soft shift)
A B
For even softer shifting, the proportional spools 081, 082, 101 and 102
can be used.
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1
Ø9.5 Ø9.5
93
93
2
69
69
22
22
Ø5.5 Ø5.5
91.4 134.6
162 46 162 46
C, D / 03, 09 -style
Ø9.5
93
69
22
Ø5.5
91.4
226 46
Ø9.5 Ø9.5
93.5
93.5
69.5
69.5
22
22
Ø5.5 Ø5.5
127 127
152 46 152 46
C, D / 03, 09 -style
Ø9.5
93.5
69.5
22
Ø5.5
84
211 46
Surface finish
The space necessary to remove the plug per EN 175301-803, design type AF is at least 15 mm.
The torque for the screw M3 of the plug has to be 0.5 to 0.6 Nm.
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1
POS. Y2011,Y3921,Y3915
A B
Technical data
General
Design Directional spool valve
Actuation Solenoid
Nominal size DIN NG06 / CETOP 03 / NFPA D03
Mounting interface DIN 24340 A6 / ISO 4401 / CETOP RP 121-H / NFPA D03
Mounting position unrestricted, preferably horizontal
Ambient temperature [°C] -25...+50
Weight [kg] 1.5 (1 solenoid), 2.1 (2 solenoids)
Hydraulic
Max. operating pressure [bar] P, A B: 350; T: 210 (DC), T: 140 (AC)
Fluid Hydraulic oil in accordance with DIN 51524 / 51525
Fluid temperature [°C] -25 ... +70
Viscosity permitted [cSt] / [mm²/s] 2.8...400
Viscosity recommended [cSt] / [mm²/s] 30...80
Filtration ISO 4406 (1999); 18/16/13 (meet NAS 1638: 7)
Flow max. [l/min] 80
Leakage at 50 bar [ml/min] Up to 10 per flow path, depending on spool
Static / Dynamic
Step response see table response time
Electrical characteristics
Duty ratio 100% ED; CAUTION: coil temperature up to 150 °C possible
Max. switching frequency [1/h] 15000
Protection class IP 65 in accordance with EN 60529 (plugged and mounted)
Code K J U G Y T
Supply voltage [V] 110V at 50Hz/ 230V at 50Hz/
12 V = 24 V = 98 V = 205 V =
120V at 60Hz 240V at 60Hz
Tolerance supply voltage [%] ±10 ±10 ±10 ±10 ±5 ±5
Current consumption hold [A] 2.58 1.29 0.32 0.15 0.6 / 0.55 0.3 / 0.27
Current consumption in rush [A] 2.58 1.29 0.32 0.15 2.5 / 2.4 1.25 / 1.2
Power consumption hold 31 W 31 W 31 W 31 W 70 / 70 VA 70 / 70 VA
Power consumption in rush 31 W 31 W 31 W 31 W 280 / 290 VA 280 / 290 VA
Solenoid connection Connector as per EN 175301-803, solenoid identification as per ISO 9461 (code W).
Wiring min. [mm²] 3 x 1.5 recommended
Wiring length max. [m] 50 recommended
With electrical connections the protective conductor (PE W) must be connected according to the relevant regulations.
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1
D 1 V W
Directional Size 3-chamber Wet pin Spool Spool Seals
control DIN NG06 valve armature type position
valve CETOP 03 solenoid,
2
NFPA D03 threaded
in tube
3 position spools
Code Spool type
a 0 b Code Seals
001 N NBR
002 V FPM
003
3 position spools
004
Code Spool position
005 3 positions.
006 C Spring offset in position “0“.
Operated in position “a“ or “b“.
007 Spool type 008,009,
Standard
008 1) 204, 205
009 1)
2 positions.
010 E
Operated in Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
011 position “a“. position “b“.
014
2 positions.
015 F
Spring offset in Spring offset in Operated in position “0“.
016 position “b“. position “a“.
021
2 positions.
022 K
Operated in Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
031 position “b“. position “a“.
032
034 2 positions.
M
Spring offset in Spring offset in Operated in position “0“.
035
position “a“. position “b“.
061
081 2 position spools
082 Code Spool position
Standard Spool type 083
102
A B 2 positions.
204 1) B a b Spring offset in position “b“.
P T Operated in position “a“.
205 1)
2 positions.
D Operated in position “a“ or “b“.
2 position spools No centre or offset position.
Code Spool type A B 2 positions.
a b
H a b Spring offset in position “a“.
020 P T Operated in position “b“.
026
030
083 1)
101
208
1)
Consider specific spool
position.
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1
W
Solenoid Solenoid Solenoid Design
voltage connector as per option series
EN 175301-803, (not required
2
without plug for ordering)
(other connectors
are available for
D1MW Series)
Code Voltage
K 12V =
J 24V =
U 2)
98V =
G 2) 205V =
110V 50Hz /
Y 120V 60Hz
230V 50Hz /
T 240V 60Hz
2)
Rectifier needed for DC solenoid
when used with AC input.
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1
4D01 – 3 – – C –
Directional Body Control Spool Spool End cap Design Seals Solenoid Options
control valve 3-chamber type position series voltage
size DIN NG06 design
2
CETOP 03
09 Code Seals
10 1 NBR
13 5 FPM
14
Code End cap
46
01 for control 1
55
02 for controls 2 and 7
56
64 3 position spools
65 Code Spool position
AR 3 positions.
03
Spring centered to “0“.
OT
2 positions.
OX 05 Spring centered to “0“.
Energized to “b“.
2 positions.
2 position spools 06 Spring centered to “0“.
Code Spool type
Energized to “a“.
a b
11
2 position spools
12
Code Spool position
51 A B 2 positions.
01 a b Spring offset to “b“.
52 P T Energized to “a“.
71 2 positions.
02 Spring offset to “a“.
81 1) The Denison model code is avail- Energized to “b“.
able for existing applications. For
81 2) 2 positions detent.
new applications we advise to
09 Operated in “a“ or “b“.
1)
Spool position code 01 refer to Parker model code.
No centre or spring offset position.
2)
Spool position code 02
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1 Further spool types and voltages on request.
Flow curve
14 13 10 9 8
24
Pressure drop [bar]
7
20 6
16
5
4
2
11 3
12 2
1
12
8
0
0 20 40 60 80
Flow [l/min]
Viscosity 40 cSt at 50°C.
The diagram below specifies the shift limits for valves with conditions. The shift limits can be considerably lower at
DC solenoids. Valves with spool position “F” or “M” can unbalanced flow conditions. To avoid flow rates beyond
only be operated up to 70% of the limits. The specifica- the shift limits, a plug-in orifice can be inserted in the
tions apply to a viscosity of 40mm2/s and balanced flow P-port.
011
Parker Denison
300
081 020, 030
003, 004, 015
250 001 03
082
021, 022
200
002 01
150
007, 008,
100 003 10
009, 014
50
004 08
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
005 13
Flow [l/min]
350 006 46
Pressure [bar]
001,002, 006
300
005, 016 007 –
250
010
200 008 –
026
150
009 07
100
50 010 BN
0 011 02
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Flow [l/min]
014 –
Valve with standard AC solenoid
350 015 09
Pressure [bar]
011
300 016 14
081 020, 030
003, 004, 015
250
082
021, 022 020 51
200
150 021 55
007, 008,
100
009, 014 022 56
50
0 026 12
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Flow [l/min] 030 11
350
Pressure [bar]
100 204 64
50 205 65
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
208 52
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1 Flow [l/min]
003, 015
005, 016
300 009
2
021, 022 006
250
001
200
008, 081, 020
011
002, 007, 010, 082
150 014, 026
004
100
50
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Flow [l/min]
Step response times were obtained under the following conditions: υ = 40 mm2/s at 50°C with the valve operating at nominal pressure and flow.
Published response times are nominal and may vary with spool, flow, pressure and temperature.
Acceleration for orifice size 0.75, code “S3” (archived against a valve without soft shift)
A B
For even softer shifting, the proportional spools 081, 082, 101 and 102
can be used.
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1
Ø9.5 Ø9.5
93
93
2
69
69
22
22
Ø5.5 Ø5.5
91.4 134.6
162 46 162 46
C, D / 03, 09 -style
Ø9.5
93
69
22
Ø5.5
91.4
226 46
Ø9.5 Ø9.5
93.5
93.5
69.5
69.5
22
22
Ø5.5 Ø5.5
127 127
152 46 152 46
C, D / 03, 09 -style
Ø9.5
93.5
69.5
22
Ø5.5
84
211 46
Surface finish
The space necessary to remove the plug per EN 175301-803, design type AF is at least 15 mm.
The torque for the screw M3 of the plug has to be 0.5 to 0.6 Nm.
D1VW-4D01_UK.INDD CM_10.03.2008.1
POS.Y2030
Technical data
General
Design Directional spool valve
Actuation Solenoid
Size DIN NG10 / CETOP 05 / NFPA D05
Mounting interface DIN 24340 A10 / ISO 4401 / CETOP RP 121-H / NFPA D05
Mounting position unrestricted, preferably horizontal
Ambient temperature [°C] -25...+50
Weight [kg] 4.8 (1 solenoid), 6.3 (2 solenoids)
Hydraulic
Max. operating pressure [bar] P, A B: 350; T: 210 (DC), 105 (AC), 210 (AC Code “H“)
Fluid Hydraulic oil in accordance with DIN 51524 / 51525
Fluid temperature [°C] -25 ... +70
Viscosity permitted [cSt] / [mm²/s] 2.8...400
Viscosity recommended [cSt] / [mm²/s] 30...80
Filtration ISO 4406 (1999); 18/16/13 (meet NAS 1638: 7)
Flow max. [l/min] 150 (DC); 115 (AC)
Leakage at 50 bar [ml/min] Up to 20 per flow path, depending on spool
Static / Dynamic
Step response see table response time
Electrical characteristics
Duty ratio 100% ED; CAUTION: coil temperature up to 150 °C possible
Max. switching frequency [1/h] 10000
Protection class IP 65 in accordance with EN 60529 (plugged and mounted)
Code K J U G Y T
110V at 50Hz/ 230V at 50Hz/
Supply voltage / ripple [V] 12 V = 24 V = 98 V = 205 V =
120V at 60Hz 240V at 60Hz
Tolerance supply voltage [%] ±10 ±10 ±10 ±10 ±5 ±5
Current consumption hold [A] 3 1.5 0.37 0.18 0.8 / 0.72 0.4 / 0.36
Current consumption in rush [A] 3 1.5 0.37 0.18 3.41 / 3.31 1.75 / 1.7
Power consumption hold [W] 36 36 36 36 88 / 86 88 / 86
Power consumption in rush [W] 36 36 36 36 375 / 397 385 / 408
Solenoid connection Connector as per EN 175301-803, solenoid identification as per ISO 9461.
Wiring min. [mm²] 3 x 1.5 recommended
Wiring length max. [m] 50 recommended
With electrical connections the protective conductor (PE W) must be connected according to the relevant regulations.
D3W stand_UK.INDD CM_21.01.2008.1
D 3 W
Directional Size Wet pin Spool Spool Seals
control DIN NG10 solenoid type position
valve CETOP 05
2
NFPA D05
3 3 position spools
Code all 3 position spools
4 3 positions.
5 C Spring offset in position “0“.
Operated in position “a“ or “b“.
6 Standard Spool type 8 and 9
7
2 positions.
8 1) E
Operated in Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
9 1) position “a“. position “b“.
10 2)
2 positions.
11 F
Spring offset in Spring offset in Operated in position “0“.
12 position “b“. position “a“.
14
2 positions.
K
15 Operated in Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
21 2)
2 positions.
M
22 2) Spring offset in Spring offset in Operated in position “0“.
position “a“. position “b“.
31 2)
32 2)
2 position spools
81 2) Code Spool position
A B 2 positions.
82 2)
B a b Spring offset in position “b“.
102 2) P T Operated in position “a“.
2 positions.
D Operated in position “a“ or “b“.
2 position spools No centre or offset position.
Code Spool type
a b 2 positions.
H Spring offset in position “a“.
20 Operated in position “b“.
26
30
101 2)
1)
Consider specific spool
position.
2)
Only available for DC voltage.
W
Solenoid Connector Solenoid Shift Design
voltage as per option response series
EN 175301-803, (not required
for ordering)
2
without plug
(Please order plug
separately)
4D02 – – – C
Directional Body Control Spool Spool End cap Design
control type position series
valve size
2
DIN NG10
CETOP 05
NFPA D05
46
55
56
2 position spools
Code Spool type
a b
11
12
51
–
Seals Solenoid Options
voltage
2
Code Seals
1 NBR
5 FPM
Code Options
Solenoid connector as per
omit EN 175301-803 without plug.
With manual override
Soft shift with orifice in body
G3
(for DC and body D only)
32 Without manual override
The flow curve diagram shows the flow versus pressure operating position and flow direction the relevant curve
drop curves for all spool types. For each spool type, number is given in the table below.
2
1 03 4 3 4 3 – – – – – –
2 01 4 1 4 1 3 3 1 1 5 1
3 10 4 3 5 2 – – 4 – – –
4 08 4 2 4 2 – – 3 3 – 5
5 – 4 3 5 3 5 – – – – –
6 46 4 3 4 3 6 6 – – – 6
7 – 5 1 4 3 – 4 – 2 6 –
10 – 4 – 4 – – – – – – –
11 02 4 3 4 3 – – 8 8 – –
12 – 4 3 4 3 7 7 7 7 8 8
14 – 4 3 5 1 4 – 2 – 6 –
15 09 5 2 4 3 – – – 4 – –
16 – 5 3 4 3 – 5 – – – –
20 51 4 3 4 3 – – – – – –
26 12 4 – 4 – – – – – – –
30 11 4 2 4 2 – – – – – –
P->B A->T P->A B->T P->A P->B A->T B->T P->T A->B
8 – 4 3 4 3 – – – – 6 –
9 07 4 4 4 4 – – – – 6 –
Position „b“ Position „a“
P->A P->B A->B P->B A->T
21 55 5 4 6 3 3
P->A B->T P->A P->B A->B
22 56 3 3 4 5 6
The diagram below specifies the shift limits for valves anced flow conditions. The shift limits can be considerably
with DC and AC solenoids. Valves with spool position lower at unbalanced flow conditions. To avoid flow rates
“F” or “M” can only be operated up to 70% of the limits. beyond the shift limits, a plug-in orifice can be inserted
The specifications apply to a viscosity 35mm2/s and bal- in the P-port.
Shift limits, DC voltage *
2
Acceleration for different orifice sizes (archived against a valve without soft shift)
Orifice in anchor *
* Note: For 4D02 the orifice is located in the Z-channel of the valve body.
For even softer shifting, the proportional spools 81, 82, 101 and 102 can be used.
C, D -style
C, D -style
Surface finish
The space necessary to remove the plug per EN 175301-803, design type AF is at least 15 mm.
The torque for the screw M3 of the plug has to be 0.5 to 0.6 Nm.
D3W stand_UK.INDD CM_21.01.2008.1
4D02V D41VW
D81VW D111VW
D81VW
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
D 1 W
Directional Series Pilot Style Electrically Spool Spool
control NG 06 operated type position
valve
2 positions.
3 position spools E 2)
Spring offset in position “0“.
Code Spool type Operated in Operated in
a 0 b position “a“. position “b“.
001 2)
2 positions.
002 2) F 2)
Operated in position “0“.
Spring offset in Spring offset in
003 3) position “b“. position “a“.
004 3)
2 positions.
005 3) K 2)
Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
Operated in
006 3) position “b“. position “a“.
007 3)
2 positions.
0091)2) M 2)
Operated in position “0“.
Spring offset in Spring offset in
011 3) position “a“. position “b“.
014 3)
2 positions, detent.
R 3)
015 3) No centre in No centre in Operated in position “0“ or “b“.
offset position. offset position.
016 3)
2 positions, detent.
021 3) S 3) No centre in Operated in position “0“ or “a“.
No centre in
offset position. No centre in offset position.
022 3) offset position.
W
Pilot oil Seals Solenoid Connector Solenoid Acces- Design
supply and voltage as per options sories series
drain options EN 175301-803, (not required
2
without plug for ordering)
(Please order plug
separately.
Code Voltage
K 12V =
J 24V =
U 8) 98V =
G 8) 205V =
110V 50Hz /
Y 120V 60Hz
230V 50Hz /
T 240V 60Hz
8)
For AC voltage use plug with
rectifier.
Please order rectifier plug
separately.
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
4D – –
Directional Size Body Control Spool Spool End cap
control valve type position
3 position spools
Code Body Code Spool position
V for 4D02 3 positions.
03
Spring centered to “0“.
3 for 4D03/06
2 positions.
05 Spring centered to “0“.
Code Control Energized to “b“.
A 1 solenoid 2 positions.
06 Spring centered to “0“.
B 2 solenoids Energized to “a“.
2 solenoids
C and 2 pos. detent
2 position spools
pilot valve
Code Spool position
A B 2 positions.
3 position spools 01 a b Spring offset to “b“.
Code Spool type P T Energized to “a“.
a 0 b
2 positions.
01 02 Spring offset to “a“.
Energized to “b“.
02
2 positions detent.
03 04 Operated in “a“ or “b“.
No centre or spring offset position.
07
08
09
10
13
14
46
55
56
2 position spools
Code Spool type
a b
11
51
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
2
Code Inlet Outlet Code Pilot accessories
1 Internal Internal 1.0 mm orifice
10 *
(Standard for 4D02V)
2 Internal External
1.5 mm orifice
3 External Internal 15 *
(Standard for 4D03/06)
4 External External * in P port of pilot valve
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
D 1 W
Directional Series Pilot Style Electrically Spool Spool
2 control
valve
NG 06 operated type position
004 3) 2 positions.
K
Operated in Spring offset in position “0“.
Operated in
007 5) position “b“. position “a“.
0091)4)
011 5) 2 positions.
M
Operated in position “0“.
Spring offset in Spring offset in
014 5) position “a“. position “b“.
015 3)
2 position spools
2 position spools Code Spool position
Code Spool type Spring offset in position “b“.
a b B
Operated in position “a“.
020 2)
Spring offset in position “a“.
030 5) H
Operated in position “b“.
1)
Consider specific spool
position.
2)
All sizes (D31, D41, D81,
D91, D111) available
3)
Only D31, D41, D81, D91
available
4)
Only D41, D81, D91, D111
available
5)
Only D41, D81, D91
available
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
W
Pilot oil Seals Solenoid Connector Solenoid Acces- Design
supply and
drain options
voltage as per
EN 175301-803,
options sories series
(not required
for ordering)
2
without plug
(Please order plug
separately.
Code Voltage
K 12V =
J 24V =
U 8)
98V =
G 8)
205V =
8)
For AC voltage use plug with
rectifier.
Please order rectifier plug
separately.
Attention
The adjustment of the position control is factory set and sealed. Replacement and repairs can only be un-
dertaken by the manufacturer.
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
General
Design Directional spool valve
Actuation Solenoid
Series Parker /Denison D31 / (4D02V) D41 / 4D03 D81/91 / 4D06 D111 / –
Size NG10 NG16 NG25 NG32
2
Weight (1/ 2 solenoids) [kg] 6.0 / 6.6 (7.6 / 8.1) 9.7 / 10.3 17.9 / 18.6 67.4 / 68.0
Mounting interface DIN 24340 A10 DIN 24340 A16 DIN 24340 A25 DIN 24340 A32
ISO 4401 ISO 4401 ISO 4401 ISO 4401
NFPA D05 NFPA D07 NFPA D08 NFPA D10
CETOP RP 121-H
Mounting position unrestricted, preferably horizontal
Ambient temperature [°C] -25...+50 (without inductive position control)
[°C] 0...+50 (with inductive position control)
Hydraulic
Max. operating pressure [bar] Pilot drain internal: P, A B, X: 350; T, Y: 105 (4D02V: P, A, B, X: 315; T, Y: 140)
Pilot drain external: P, A B, T, X: 350; Y: 105 (4D02V: P, A, B, T, X: 315; Y:140)
Fluid Hydraulic oil in accordance with DIN 51524 / 51525
Fluid temperature [°C] -25 ... +70
Viscosity permitted [cSt] / [mm²/s] 2.8...400
Viscosity recommended [cSt] / [mm²/s] 30...80
Filtration ISO 4406 (1999); 18/16/13 (meet NAS 1638: 7)
Flow max. [l/min] 150 / (170) 300 700 2000
Leakage at 350 bar (per flow path) [ml/min] up to 100* / (72...422*) up to 200* up to 800* up to 5000*
*depending on spool
Opening pressure integral check valve [bar] n.a. see p/Q diagram see p/Q diagram n.a.
Minimum pilot supply pressure [bar] 5 / (7) 5
Static / Dynamic
Step response at 95% [ms] Energized / De-energized
DC solenoids Pilot pressure 50 bar 60 / 40 (50/60) 95 / 65 150 / 170 470 / 390
100 bar 55 / 40 (50/60) 75 / 65 110 / 170 320 / 390
250 bar 55 / 40 (50/50) 60 / 65 90 / 170 210 / 390
350 bar 55 / 40 (50/50) 60 / 65 85 / 170 200 / 390
AC solenoids Pilot pressure 50 bar 40 / 30 (30/50) 75 / 55 130 / 155 450 / 375
100 bar 35 / 30 (30/50) 65 / 55 90 / 155 300 / 375
250 bar 35 / 30 (30/50) 40 / 55 70 / 155 190 / 375
350 bar 35 / 30 (30/50) 40 / 55 65 / 155 180 / 375
Electrical characteristics
Duty ratio 100% ED; CAUTION: coil temperature up to 150 °C possible
Protection class IP 65 in accordance with EN 60529 (plugged and mounted)
Code K J U G Y T
Supply voltage / ripple [V] 12 V = 24 V = 98 V = 205 V = 110V at 50Hz/ 230V at 50Hz/
120V at 60Hz 240V at 60Hz
Tolerance supply voltage [%] ±10 ±10 ±10 ±10 ±5 ±5
Current consumption hold [A] 2.5 1.25 0.31 0.15 0.58 / 0.49 0.31 / 0.26
Current consumption in rush [A] 2.5 1.25 0.31 0.15 2.1 / 2.0 1.05 / 1.0
Power consumption hold [W] 30 30 30 30 64 / 59 VA 68 / 62 VA
Power consumption in rush [W] 30 30 30 30 231 / 240 VA 231 / 240 VA
Solenoid connection Connector as per EN 175301-803, solenoid identification as per ISO 9461.
Wiring min. [mm²] 3 x 1.5 recommended
Wiring length max. [m] 50 recommended
With electrical connections the protective conductor (PE W) must be connected according to the relevant regulations.
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
Definitions
Start position monitored: End position monitored:
The valve is de-energized. The inductive switch gives a The inductive switch gives a signal before the end position
signal at the moment (below 15% spool stroke) when the is reached. (above 85% spool stroke).
spool leaves the spring offset position.
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
The flow curve diagram shows the flow versus pressure for each spool type, operating position and flow direction
drop curves for all spool types. The relevant curve number is given in the table below.
4D02V
Spool Curve number
Code P-A P-B P-T A-T B-T
01 3 3 7 4 3
02 3 3 – 2 4
03 3 3 – 2 5
07 4 6 6 4 10
08 2 3 – 4 4
09 2 2 – 1 4
10 2 3 – 4 4
11 5 3 – 2 5
13 2 4 – 1 4
14 4 3 – 2 4
46 8 9 – 7 9
51 6 4 – 3 6
55 – 7 – 8 –
56 4 – – 9 –
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
Series
4D02V PV TV 3 Slip-in orifice
in pilot p-port open, closed
A B
1 M6 DIN906 Pilot oil
Inlet Outlet 1 2 3 a 0 b
Y
(drawn offset)
Series
D41VW
Series
D81/91VW
Series
D111VW
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
D31DW
226
Monitor
switch
195
175
B A
Ø11
83
1cm
mc1
01M
M10
30 A B Stroke
12 Ø6.8 adjustment
70 33.5 87.5 110
72 93 138.5
186
Surface finish
4D02V
Surface finish
The space necessary to remove the plug per EN 175301-803, design type AF is at least 15 mm.
The torque for the screw M3 of the plug has to be 0.5 to 0.6 Nm.
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
D41VW/4D03
2 B A
Monitor switch
Stroke
220 adjustment
136
1cm
mc1
01M
M10
A B
11 Ø11
92 63 165
94 101 275
Surface finish
4x M10x60
63 Nm ±15% NBR: SK-D41DW-N-91
BK320 2x M6x55
13.2 Nm ±15% FPM: SK-D41DW-V-91
DIN 912 12.9
D81VW/4D06, D91VW
B A
Monitor switch
Stroke
adjustment
223
57
A B
12 Ø13.5
116 76 230
118 117 340
Surface finish
The space necessary to remove the plug per EN 175301-803, design type AF is at least 15 mm.
The torque for the screw M3 of the plug has to be 0.5 to 0.6 Nm.
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
D111VW
B A
2
Monitor switch
347
59
A B
20 Ø22
198 90 319
200 429
Surface finish
The space necessary to remove the plug as per EN 175301-803, design type AF is at least 15 mm.
The torque for the screw M3 of the plug has to be 0.5 to 0.6 Nm.
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1
D3-D11_UK.INDD CM_22.01.2008.1